The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit D16-0011 - BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY - TENANT IMPROVEMENTBURLINGTON COAT FACTORY 17500 SOUTHCENTER PKWY D16-0011 City of Tukwila • Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-438-9350 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No: 2623049110 Permit Number: D16-0011 Address: 17500 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Issue Date: 3/25/2016 Permit Expires On: 9/21/2016 Project Name: BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY Owner: Name: KIR TUKWILA 050 LLC Address: 3333 NEW HYDE PARK RD #100 C/O DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Phone: (206) 420-2242 Phone: (S03) 970-8312 Expiration Date: 2/19/2017 TENANT IMPROVEMENT OF EXISTING 38,500 SQ FT RETAIL SPACE FOR NEW TENANT. EXTERIOR WORK TO INCLUDE (2) NEW EGRESS DOORS CUT INTO EXTERIOR WALL, ADA RAMP AND NEW ROOFTOP UNITS. INTERIOR WORK TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS BACK OF HOUSE ROOM PARTITIONS, ADDITIONAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FINISHES Project Valuation: $495,000.00 Fees Collected: $8,281.98 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: VB Occupancy per IBC: M Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA FIRE SERVICE Water District: HIGHLINE,TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA SEWER SERVICE Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: KIMCO REALTY CORP, PO BOX 5020 NEW HYDE PK, WA, 11042 Contact Person: Name: JAMES WASSERMAN Address: 5628 AIRPORT WAYS #112, SEATTLE, WA, 98108 Contractor: Name: ALEGIS CONSTRUCTION INC Address: 6900 SW ATLANTA ST #300, PORTLAND, OR, 97223 License No: ALEGICI894CN Lender: Name: KIMCO REALTY Address: 4065 FACTORIA MALL SE #F4, BELLEVUE, WA, 98006 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Phone: (206) 420-2242 Phone: (S03) 970-8312 Expiration Date: 2/19/2017 TENANT IMPROVEMENT OF EXISTING 38,500 SQ FT RETAIL SPACE FOR NEW TENANT. EXTERIOR WORK TO INCLUDE (2) NEW EGRESS DOORS CUT INTO EXTERIOR WALL, ADA RAMP AND NEW ROOFTOP UNITS. INTERIOR WORK TO INCLUDE MISCELLANEOUS BACK OF HOUSE ROOM PARTITIONS, ADDITIONAL PLUMBING FIXTURES AND FINISHES Project Valuation: $495,000.00 Fees Collected: $8,281.98 Type of Fire Protection: Sprinklers: YES Fire Alarm: YES Type of Construction: VB Occupancy per IBC: M Electrical Service Provided by: TUKWILA FIRE SERVICE Water District: HIGHLINE,TUKWILA Sewer District: TUKWILA SEWER SERVICE Current Codes adopted by the City of Tukwila: International Building Code Edition: 2012 National Electrical Code: 2014 International Residential Code Edition: 2012 WA Cities Electrical Code: 2014 International Mechanical Code Edition: 2012 WAC 296-4613: 2014 Uniform Plumbing Code Edition: 2012 WA State Energy Code: 2012 International Fuel Gas Code: 2012 Public Works Activities: Channelization/Striping: Curb Cut/Access/Sidewalk: Fire Loop Hydrant: Flood Control Zone: Hauling/Oversize Load: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut: 0 Fill: 0 Landscape Irrigation: Sanitary Side Sewer: Number: 0 Sewer Main Extension: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Water Main Extension: Water Meter: No Permit Center Authorized Signature: Date: '/^ 1(0 I hearby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performance of work. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development perm.t and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Date: Print Name: This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days for the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: The total number of fire extinguishers required for a light hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 3,000 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "all purpose" (2A, 10 B:C) dry chemical type. The travel distance to any extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (3A, 40B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 5.4) 1: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand- held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 2: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 3: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 7.2, 7.3) 6: Maintain fire extinguisher coverage throughout. 7: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 8: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 9: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 10: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.9.1) 11: Exits and exit access doors shall be marked by an approved exit sign readily visible from any direction of egress travel. Access to exits shall be marked by readily visible exit signs in cases where the exit or the path of egress travel is not immediately visible to the occupants. Exit sign placement shall be such that no point in an exit access corridor is more than 100 feet (30,480 mm) or the listed viewing distance for the sign, whichever is less, from the nearest visible exit sign. (IFC 1011.1) 12: Every exit sign and directional exit sign shall have plainly legible letters not less than 6 inches (152 mm) high with the principal strokes of the letters not less than 0.75 inch (19.1 mm) wide. The word "EXIT" shall have letters having a width not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide except the letter "I", and the minimum spacing between letters shall not be less than 0.375 inch (9.5 mm). Signs larger than the minimum established in section 1011.5.1 of the International Fire Code shall have letter widths, strokes and spacing in proportion to their height. The word "EXIT" shall be in high contrast with the background and shall be clearly discernible when the exit sign illumination means is or is not energized. If an arrow is provided as part of the exit sign, the construction shall be such that the arrow direction cannot be readily changed. (IFC 1011.6) 13: Aisles and aisle access ways serving as a portion of the exit access in the means of egress system shall comply with the requirements of this section. Aisles or aisle access ways shall be provided from all occupied portions of the exit access which contain seats, tables, furnishings, displays and similar fixtures or equipment. The required width of aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1017.1) 14: Exit signs shall be illuminated at all times. To ensure continued illumination for a duration of not less than 90 minutes in case of primary power loss, the sign illumination means shall be connected to an emergency power system provided from storage batteries, unit equipment or on-site generator. (IFC 1011.6.3) 15: Emergency lighting facilities shall be arranged to provide initial illumination that is at least an average of 1 foot-candle (11 lux) and a minimum at any point of 0.1 foot-candle (1 lux) measured along the path of egress at floor level. Illumination levels shall be permitted to decline to 0.6 foot-candle (6 lux) average and a minimum at any point of 0.06 foot-candle (0.6 lux) at the end of the emergency lighting time duration. A maximum -to -minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded. (IFC 1006.3.1) 19: Fire protection systems shall be maintained in accordance with the original installation standards for that system. Required systems shall be extended, altered or augmented as necessary to maintain and continue protection whenever the building is altered, remodeled or added to. Alterations to fire protection systems shall be done in accordance with applicable standards. (IFC 901.4) 17: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 16: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2436). 21: An approved manual fire alarm system including audible/visual devices and manual pull stations is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of Americans With Disabilities' Act (I.B.C.), N.F.P.A. 72 and the City of Tukwila Ordinance #2437. 22: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2437) 20: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2437) (IFC 901.2) 23: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 24: All electrical work and equipment shall conform strictly to the standards of the National Electrical Code. (NFPA 70) 25: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.9 of the International Building Code. 26: New and existing buildings shall have approved address numbers, building numbers or approved building identification placed in a position that is plainly legible and visible from the street or road fronting the property. These numbers shall contrast with their background. Address numbers shall be Arabic numbers or alphabet letters. Numbers shall be a minimum of 4 inches (102mm) high with a minimum stroke width of 0.5 inch (12.7mm). (IFC 505.1) 18: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2436 and #2437) 27: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 28: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. 29: ***BUILDING PERMIT CONDITIONS*** 30: Work shall be installed in accordance with the approved construction documents, and any changes made during construction that are not in accordance with the approved construction documents shall be resubmitted for approval. 31: All permits, inspection record card and approved construction documents shall be kept at the site of work and shall be open to inspection by the Building Inspector until final inspection approval is granted. 32: The special inspections and verifications for concrete construction shall be as required by IBC Chapter 17, Table 1705.3. 33: The special inspections for steel elements of buildings and structures shall be required. All welding shall be done by a Washington Association of Building Official Certified welder. 34: When special inspection is required, either the owner or the registered design professional in responsible charge, shall employ a special inspection agency and notify the Building Official of the appointment prior to the first building inspection. The special inspector shall furnish inspection reports to the Building Official in a timely manner. 35: A final report documenting required special inspections and correction of any discrepancies noted in the inspections shall be submitted to the Building Official. The final inspection report shall be prepared by the approved special inspection agency and shall be submitted to the Building Official prior to and as a condition of final inspection approval. 36: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the seismic design requirements for nonstructural components. ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 37: Partition walls shall not be tied to a suspended ceiling grid. All partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterially braced to the building structure. Such bracing shall be independent of any ceiling splay bracing. 38: All construction shall be done in conformance with the Washington State Building Code and the Washington State Energy Code. 39: Notify the City of Tukwila Building Division prior to placing any concrete. This procedure is in addition to any requirements for special inspection. 40: Masonry construction shall be special inspected. 41: All rack storage requires a separate permit issued through the City of Tukwila Permit Center. Rack storage over 8 -feet in height shall be anchored or braced to prevent overturning or displacement during seismic events. The design and calculations for the anchorage or bracing shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of Washington. Periodic special inspection is required during anchorage of storage racks 8 feet or greater in height. 42: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 43: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 44: Every occupied space other than enclosed parking garages and buildings used for repair of automobiles shall be ventilated in accordance with the applicable provisions of the International Mechanical Code. 45: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 46: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center. 47: Preparation before concrete placement: Water shall be removed from place of deposit before concrete is placed unless a tremie is to be used or unless otherwise permitted by the building official. All debris and ice shall be removed from spaces to be occupied by concrete. 48: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 49: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). PERMIT INSPECTIONS REQUIRED Permit Inspection Line: (206) 438-9350 1700 BUILDING FINAL" 0301 CONCRETE SLAB 0611 EMERGENCY LIGHTING 1400 FIRE FINAL 0201 FOOTING 0409 FRAMING 0606 GLAZING 0502 LATH & GYPSUM 0603 ROOF/CEILING INSUL 4027 SI -COLD -FORM WELD 4000 SI -CONCRETE CONST 4046 SI-EPDXY/EXP CONC 4022 SI -MASONRY 4028 SI-REINF STEEL -WELD 4039 SI -SEISMIC RESTIST 4025 SI -STEEL CONST 4026 SI-STRUCT STEEL 4004 SI -WELDING 4032 SI -WOOD CONST 0406 SUSPENDED CEILING 0601 WALL INSULATION CITY OF TUKWILA r Community Development Department ' Public Works Department • Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 " Tukwila, WA 98188 hLtp://www.Tukwi]aWA.gov Building Permit No. 1)1 to Project No. Date Application Accepted: Date Application Expires: 77'.- 1 3 ! %n For office use only)�— CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. "Please Print" SITE LOCATION King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Z(D 2-3 0+ 110 Site Address: 174150 501THCrNEW FAMCW AY Suite Number: Floor: I Tenant Name: NRUNCITON OX -r FACTORY New Tenant: .....Yes []..No PROPERTY OWNER Name: NMCO MkL ATW: T1M HAMANN Address: IV _S FACTORIA W IA/ 5V 414 City: M F-Vuv State: W A zip 101000 CONTACT PERSON - person receiving all project communication ,� d D Name: tlAMEFS WA%EON ?A Address: 4& Al"cR`[' WAY J5•tta? City: ct Tr � State: WA zip119100 Phone: 7V(/�• � g0.ZZ4ZFax: Email: %SPrytAN (9 4M i Wa . Gv1/1 GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: •-rD17 Address: City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: H:Wpplications\Fo;n Applications On1ite12011ApplicationsTermitApplication Revised-8-9-1I.docx Revised: August 2011 bb ARCHITECT OF RECORD Company Name: J jW >RCC14 rMCV5 4 nAN Nt RS Architect Name: ONES WA5 ,A A bA Address: 40 A AY S. 112. City: %LF State: wA Zip. oe Phone: �t1 d,+?.h20. 2242 Fax: Email: MA O @ TJJw WH . COM ENGINEER OF RECORD Company Name: WQV MiAt11 Engineer Name: Q*1 F t% SON / fV Address: 1201 19 t AVF- I. or 310 City: evMle State: WA Zip: Phone:� 0c2,,,1�11 jo Fax: u Email: MVNSOO@ WNROPSAN L. COM LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: � 1 MC O F47AUN Address: 065' cio s 1 qKai k 5V-- 4 Fy State: w Zip: Page 1 of 4 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION —206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ 29 � 000 Existing Building Valuation: $ 0W, 341 r goo Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): 17NAWT IMPROVEMENT of 6XI9nmEt Mi500 SF W AIS 5PAcV- FoR Nft 1SNA r. I: gVPVR WORK 10 iNcLUDS C2) t" 50P -F, SS VWJtS GUT INTO f_=%1FM0R WAW.. ADA DAMP * NFW Roorlor K ko UNITS. IWMRtcp wojM 'to pJ CI,U bE MI5G - IaAc� or HvusR ftoiA pi4R nllow 8 , APPMOIA, ?WM01W& i:1 UR1;5 4 1:1415Nr5. Will there be new rack storage? ❑..... Yes A.. No if yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: NO C eJF Compact: EF Handicap: NO Will there be a change in use? El ....... Yes .0....... No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: J4 ....... Sprinklers JX....... Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ .......None ❑ .......Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ ....... Yes N .......No If "yes, attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-112 " x II " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ .......On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Form-Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsWermit Application Revised - 8-9-1 Ldoex Revised: August 2011 Page 2 of 4 bh Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC 1' Floor 2 Floor , P Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: NO C eJF Compact: EF Handicap: NO Will there be a change in use? El ....... Yes .0....... No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: J4 ....... Sprinklers JX....... Automatic Fire Alarm ❑ .......None ❑ .......Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? ❑ ....... Yes N .......No If "yes, attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-112 " x II " paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM ❑ .......On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applications\Form-Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsWermit Application Revised - 8-9-1 Ldoex Revised: August 2011 Page 2 of 4 bh PUBLIC WORKS PERMIT INFOk-rWATION — 206-433-0179 Scope of Work (please provide detailed information): 19/A Call before you Dig: 811 Please refer to Public Works Bulletin #1 for fees and estimate sheet. Water District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ... Water District # 125 El.. Highline ❑ .. Renton ❑ ...Water Availability Provided Sewer District ❑ ...Tukwila ❑ ... Valley View ❑ .. Renton ❑ .. Seattle ❑ ...Sewer Use Certificate ❑ ...Sewer Availability Provided Septic System: ❑ On-site Septic System —For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. Submitted with ADnlication (mark boxes which am ❑ ...Civil Plans (Maximum Paper Size — 22" x 34") ❑ ...Technical Information Report (Storm Drainage) ❑ .. Geotechnical Report ❑ ...Traffic Impact Analysis ❑ ...Bond ❑ .. Insurance ❑ .. Easement(s) ❑ .. Maintenance Agreement(s) ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (SAO) ❑ ...Hold Harmless — (ROW) Proposed Activities (mark boxes that apply): ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - Nonprofit for less than 72 hours ❑ .. Right-of-way Use - Profit for less than 72 hours ❑ ...Right-of-way Use - No Disturbance ❑ .. Right-of-way Use — Potential Disturbance ❑ ...Construction/Excavation/Fill - Right-of-way ❑ Non Right-of-way ❑ ❑ ...Total Cut cubic yards ❑ .. Work in Flood Zone ❑ ...Total Fill cubic yards ❑ .. Storm Drainage ❑ ...Sanitary Side Sewer ❑ .. Abandon Septic Tank ❑ ...Cap or Remove Utilities ❑ .. Curb Cut ❑ ...Frontage Improvements ❑ .. Pavement Cut ❑ ...Traffic Control ❑ .. Looped Fire Line ❑ ...Backflow Prevention - Fire Protection " Irrigation " Domestic Water " ❑ ...Permanent Water Meter Size... WO # ❑ ...Temporary Water Meter Size.. WO # ❑ ...Water Only Meter Size............ WO # ❑ ...Sewer Main Extension.............Public ❑ Private ❑ ❑ ...Water Main Extension.............Public ❑ Private ❑ ❑ .. Grease Interceptor ❑ .. Channelization ❑ .. Trench Excavation ❑ .. Utility Undergrounding ❑... Deduct Water Meter Size FINANCE INFORMATION Fire Line Size at Property Line Number of Public Fire Hydrant(s) ❑ ... Water ❑ ...Sewer ❑ ...Sewage Treatment Monthly Service Billing to: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: City State Zip Water Meter Refund/Billing: Name: Day Telephone: Mailing Address: City State Zip H:\Applications\Forrtts-Applications On Line\201 1 ApplicationsWennit Application Revised - 8-9-I l.d= Revised: August 2011 Page 3 of 4 bh PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. AGENT: Print N Mailing H:\Applications\Fornr;-Applications On Line\2011 ApplicationsTertnit Application Revised - 8-9-11.docx Revised: August 2011 bb Date: Ol / 11 /2014 Day Telephone: W( w - 4W - u4z City state zip Page 4 of 4 DESCRIPTIONS PermitTRAK ` • QUANTITY PAID $5,117.06 D16-0011 Address: 17500 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Apn: 2623049110 $5,117.06 DEVELOPMENT $4,873.60 PERMIT FEE R000.322.100.00.00 0.00 $4,869.10 WASHINGTON STATE SURCHARGE 8640.237.114 0.00 $4.50 TECHNOLOGY FEE $243.46 TECHNOLOGY FEE TOTAL FEES PAID: 1 1 R000.322.900.04.00 0.00 $243.46 1 . Date Paid: Wednesday, March 23, 2016 Paid By: KIMCO Pay Method: CHECK 1002052 Printed: Saturday,March 26, 2016 8:04 PM 1 of 1 CIT SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS • QUANTITY PermitTRAK $3,936.44 D16-0011 Address: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Apn: 2623049110 $3,164.92 DEVELOPMENT $3,164.92 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.830.00.00 0.00 $3,164.92 EL16-0037 Address: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Apn: 2623049110 $402.81 ELECTRICAL $402.81 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.345.832.00.00 0.00 $402.81 M16-0005 Address: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Apn: 2623049110 $270.83 MECHANICAL $270.83 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.102.00.00 0.00 $270.83 PG16-0001 Address: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Apn: 2623049110 $97.88 PLUMBING $97.88 PLAN CHECK FEE R000.322.103.00.00 0.00 • , FEES , $97.88 $3,936.44 Date Paid: Wednesday, January 13, 2016 Paid By: KIR TUKWILA 050 LLC Pay Method: CHECK 1002001 Printed: Wednesday, January 13, 2016 11:01 AM 1 of 1 (ff (SYSTEMS INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Ali �Q®! f INSPEC N0. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Approved per applicable codes. 1 Corrections required prior to approval. F] REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit v � 1bj6 1: I 45PE N0. PERMIT N0. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pr�iect: t�jl(/ ) A) M- T A) 60, �AG� Type of/ nspection: &LA ZJIJ& Address: ) 7S2o aJ W Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wade a p.m. Requester: Phone No: KiApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. El REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit ! INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 5outhcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 oject:Type 150 �C.>ubrznj CVA-T— of Inspection: n TT)- & -T aAfd ''' Address: Date Called: dao: _<tcc'urm w' Special Instructions: Date Wante 9 p.m. lRequester: C-C)N Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. a Corrections required prior to approval. REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD' I Tioiv NO. Retain a copy with permit ��` E Ud o CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 91 Approved per applicable codes. F. - Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Date: , 16 4 I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD 012- Retain a copy with permit P6 001 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 jPj ct: Type of Inspection: e,�j c�JG Af Address: Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: 2aj /G p.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: Date:. ❑ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit F -D/6 -0c)// INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Approved per applicable codes. L� Corrections required prior to approval. tJ paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 -a P oject: 1 A/ Al— T Type of Inspection: 5QKPWbSD �11,1AiG Address: 7S' C -m Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted* a. Z7 /G p.m. Requester Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. OCorrections required prior to approval. I paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO, CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: 9c i4,1zX( Type of Inspection: Address: noo Date Called: Special Instructions: nIr xsI &)If `he7` e Wante mm . �R—, ue Phone No: 1-1 Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: JL. u REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORID li� Retain a co with ermit 'Oal �� I NSUCHON NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request tine (206) 438-9350 . Project: T-�UIN a ACi Type of inspection: LL .tNS�lc. l Address: Date Called: /7500 Special Instructions: Date Want+ An, /6 /V LJ C��M �� Requester: Phone No: 2r-- Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. nspector ate: 2/ REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD 7 Retain a copy with permit JbI4 - INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pt: 'ecL,lA Type oeX4M)A)(r ectiion::r 6"^( Address: Date Called: 17 7zV w Special Instructions: Date Wante a.m AJ U-)�� Lx z/ 1 G p.rn. Requester: 1- oP/ s eei7i' rL �- �a Phone No: 112 Sr ❑ Approved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. IInspector: ASM IDate: -7/,7/ 11K I REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Calt to schedule reinspection. r - _ ' INSPECTION RECORD�7) Retain a; copy withp ermit INSP ION N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: ► -hsI Co' Type of Inspection: LL l Address: Date Called: 17.50'-0 t�2 Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a.m. p.m. Requester: I–6AI Phone No: Q /� 'q?, '-s—, nApproved per applicable codes. I`.1 Corrections required prior to approval. paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD I A) I Retain a copy with permit 1-IN6-6011 INSPECTION N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWIhA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: ' r9Q A/ &^-r,4CT' Typeof I spection: 1Z4; /SSG' Address: 17SVO Ryu) Date Called: Special Instructions: _ Date Wanted a.m 7 p.m. Requester. Phone No: F] Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. 0 IInspector: / IDate: ,7//S A REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD_()0" 1 Retain a copy with permit[ �� 0 i INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: ! et 1W& -r0 J C Type of Inspection: S I - S6612 Address: 175-00 j2 P Date Called: Special Instructions: .m. Date Want d: =a -m- % // 1G p.m. 771111 lRequesfer: -6 Phone No: FApproved per applicable codes. ro Corrections required prior to approval. REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit PIC -001 f INSPINCION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pr 'ect: No Type of Inspection: r5lJ-r1j'kt1 6 )( Address: 175-0 4 fb C f v ?irku D to Calle . Special Instruction : I�ADate Wgnte �� a.m. p.m. Re_Uester: 141 �S Phone No: ZF 73 6 32 � Approved per applicable codes. L: Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: Dater REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit m_ O o l, INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Prgject: e Type of Inspection;, Address: ilro0 ftifftch nr ate Called: Special Instructions: r 0 ' 401"V -` cf� CAS( D'(.f �Q0 Date Van e : a.m. (y -� p.m. Requester: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspector: V Date: REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. a INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit "o CTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Pr ject: gyp. Type of Inspections Address: o r0 o %^ Date Called: Special Istructiops: 4/ti ate Wanted: a.m. 16 Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. LJ Corrections required prior to approval. Inspector: /y �� (uate: �` � _/ /- REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD 10) 1 Retain a copy with permit W6 —00 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 P oject: P d Type of Inspection: , ak"—1 Kd Address: ®.0 fou:: pate ailed: Special Instructions: IA - Date anted: a.m. Requester: Phone No: Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: WA IP6'Mom p Inspector: Date: S F REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Df6-r�bl QSPECTION N0. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd.., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 438-9350 Project: vtU' (( a1n C<>C(f Type of Inspection: F��'C-td — Address: a 7500Ltttt,Cty Date Called: Special Instructions: /voV (f-Gi t J C t 7V ( Date Wanted: a.m. _ ,G P.M. Requester: Requester: Phone No: FlApproved per applicable codes. L9 Corrections required prior to approval. M ENTS: Date:_ l 3 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD _ o h Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NUMBER fERMTT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA. FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Proje Type of inspection: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire:' Address: Contact Person: Suite #: Z,, Special Instructions: Phone No,: XApproved per applicable codes. F Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: All c- Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire:' Permits: Occupancy Type: xnspect6r. Date; �'G His.; $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 E; INSPECTION RECORD 61� - Ud 0 2 Retain a copy with permit /001 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: Tyy of Inspection: Address: % S C) (� S . C . ►�� 2 r Suite #: Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: 1-1 Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: #40 6 Se rtS,`C N-c-Pc)S ► o S�4 f `(4�7 G?f1 �s A Pq <-`t r U�7� otcl SW ;� %� S — ,t L) \ SMS L L � )U R E �� o ,N. 1-1�A //� � � V-1 P. ,j {vUi(1 �.e-,Pj � A C�� ? �C tai JYI� ,o1Ai�J,.,� ��.+Ctnil �'�r- :fie 1N r«1��,✓ aob Sys`- Kyu-7 i ► `�� S 1 c �� o Q �L i? / S f -1 i �� ,,,,� ( (� I l-1 CIO Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: I I Date: g//u//4 Hrs.: ❑ $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Bming Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD I)f 6 - o v I ) 1 Retain a copy with permit / 6 - S:-- cc( I INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: y �� +&V cod Type of Inspection: Address: % 5-0 d S, C . �, -� Contact Person: Suite #: Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. COMMENTS: i Corrections required prior to approval. Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: _ Date: -2 f 71 1 Hrs.: ❑ $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 INSPECTION RECORD L Ac- CCD I 1 Retain a copy with permit 16 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 1 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: ✓ Suite #: ? C--sC �Kw ut Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. ❑ Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: of -� �o_S _ �i A S Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector: f�y� CT � Date: 717 , Hrs.: $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. tsming Aaaress Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 J INSPECTION RECORD D14 - 1 1 Retain a copy with permit , - s - /© 7 INSPECTION NUMBER PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 206-575-4407 Project: Type of Inspection: Address:f �� S.C. Contact Person: Suite #: Pre -Fire: Special Instructions: Phone No.: Approved per applicable codes. [A -Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: 1. 6C. r 1 Needs Shift Inspection: Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector:1 �� C^ <--�_ I Date: <--I j c/1/ �, I H rs.: ❑ $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 3/14/14 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing 6747 M. L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118-3216 USA Tel: (206) 725-4600 • Toll Free: (888) OTTO-4-US • Fax: (206) 723-2221 WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • Website: www.ottorosenau.com August 3, 2016 City of Tukwila Building Department 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila FINAL REPORT Permit Numbers: D16 -0011/D16-0183 Job Number: 16-0404 We state that the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of our knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provision of the building code. Our knowledge is limited to our reports. All typewritten reports have been mailed to your office or are enclosed. All reports appear to be complete. This report should not be considered as a warranty for conditions and/or details of the building. Items inspected are: 1. Welding (fabrication shop) 2. Epoxy grouting (rebar dowels and anchor bolts) 3. Reinforcing steel 4. Brick veneer 5. Structural masonry 6. Grout under column base plates 7. Lateral framing Sincerely, OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. I�.a� ` Kate Rubin Report Manager Email c: Report Distribution List OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing Job Number: 16-0404 PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 319944 — Revised Permit Numbers: D16 -00111D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc., 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector. Kevin Byrne Date: 7/8/2016 Description/Location: Inspected the epoxy grouted installation of (12) #5 bar vertical reinforcing steel dowels for CMU wall at new vestibule. It is unclear if the reinforcing steel installed meets ASTM A-615, grade 60 requirements as specified, since the reinforcing steel had no standard mill or grade markings to indicate that it meets specifications. The contractor also did not have mill certification information on site to prove that the reinforcing steel is grade 60 as specified. Intended Use: Vertical reinforcing steel for CMU block wall at Building Code & Year. IBC 2012 new vestibule ® Reinforcing Steel All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: #5 (12) Anchor Size & Quantity: Rebar Manufacturer: ? Japan Type of Steel (ASTM): ❑ A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ❑ Other. Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Anchor Length: 40" Hole Depth: 8 1/8" Required Embedment: 8" Hole Diameter: 9/a" Concrete Thickness: 10"+ Concrete Strength: Unknown Hole Orientation: ® Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up ❑ Horizontal Base Material: Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 100 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 8212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑' Yes ❑ No Adhesive Type: Hilti HIT HY 200A Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather. Partly Cloudy Ambient Temperature: 70°F Substrate Temperature: 68'F comments Note from Office: Received copy of correspondence from Peter Opsahl, PE, SE, DBIA, of Lund Opsahl, LLC, stating, "We have reviewed the loading on the CMU wall shown in C /A6 and have determined that even if the reinforcement was Grade 40, there would still be sufficient capacity in the wall system to resist the lateral loads in the Design Criteria. The as bunt condition of the wall is acceptable." This report now conforms. Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: (r1, Architect Building Dept. *Wfieir . Hansen, Project Managr - This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 0 k XX N 0 0 � o N CD N a, O _. v m N v N Q O CL 0 0 N v O tD X a ID fD n m � N c� m' w rn 3 m a N N O 0 3 O Ei 01 v m C M CL R CD _w w N O_ m z CA m r O G) VI m 0 D r z -o m -i O z 90 m M r N --I m -i ^z^ Q c3 OD F3 O 3 W X co co z :� 0,00 �p 3 N N fD I O ro N d _ 70 m N 0 r m v rin 7 N N D c GS O � O m O A C 3' e� c a f G m CD -0 N v o<a z� wam CD CL 01 v m C M CL R CD _w w N O_ m z CA m r O G) VI m 0 D r z -o m -i O z 90 m M r N --I m -i ^z^ Q OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 313576 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number. 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address: cto Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspections Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Brick Veneer X Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection Inspector and Date Remarks Mike Preciado 1.4" CMU infill at storefront south of entrance between the 2nd CMU column and 3rd CMU column. 7/09/2016 2. Inspected the seismic clips, seismic hooks, and seismic system ties for correct type, spacing, and location. 9 wire used for ties. 3 3/4" air gap between veneer and wall per plans. Clips were at 16" on center vertically and horizontally. 3. Elevation 0' feet (street level) up to 14' feet. 4. Vertical bars from slab to tie into CMU were in-place. Reinforcing steel completed per plans. Conforms Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTr0-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -63-05 (Rev 10/90) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 298495 Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. Anchor Length: 36"-48" Hole Depth: 8" 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector: David Kay Date: 6/22/2016 Description/Location: Onsite for inspection of epoxy grouting of reinforcing steel to existing slab for new loading dock per detail 4 on Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air A2.1. Compressed Air PSI: 110 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Intended Use: Slab dowel Building Code & Year: IBC 2012 ❑ Reinforcing Steel': All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: #4 Anchor Size & Quantity: Rebar Manufacturer: Cascade Type of Steel (ASTM): ❑ A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ❑ Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ® 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ® A-615 .❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ® No Anchor Length: 36"-48" Hole Depth: 8" Required Embedment: 6"-8" Hole Diameter: 5/8" Concrete Thickness: Existing Concrete Strength: Existing Hole Orientation: ❑ Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up ® Horizontal Base Material: ® Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 110 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 8212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ❑ No Adhesive Type: Hilti HY 20OR Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather: Sunny Ambient Temperature: 67'F Substrate Temperature: Comments Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others , ■ Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Foam No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) . 6 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 314296 Permit Number: D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Aiegis Construction, Inc. Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 8212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ® No 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector. Dwayne Helgeson Date: 7/13/2016 Description/Location: Inspected the epoxy grouting of 5/8" all thread rods at base of column plates at D -K/26 and 27 (14) total columns as per SK -01. Intended Use: Anchor Bolts Building Code & Year: IBC 2012 Reinforcing.Steel ®All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: Anchor Size & Quantity: 5/8" (56) Rebar Manufacturer: Type of Steel (ASTM): [I A-36 ❑ A-325 [j A-449 ® Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: EIA -615 ❑A-706 EIA -775 ❑ Other. Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Comments Work inspected was completed using and in accordance with all approved project documents. Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others 4n W iJvt- {I�OJ►�wo-" Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: ko� Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTT0-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/93) Anchor Length: 12" Hole Depth: 9" Required Embedment: 6" Hole Diameter: 3/" Concrete Thickness: - Concrete Strength: - Hole Orientation: ® Vertical Down Vertical Up ❑ Horizontal Base Material: ® Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick 0 Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 120 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 8212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ® No Adhesive Type: Hilti HIT HY 200A Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather: Indoors Ambient Temperature: 68°F Substrate Temperature: 68"F Comments Work inspected was completed using and in accordance with all approved project documents. Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others 4n W iJvt- {I�OJ►�wo-" Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: ko� Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTT0-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/93) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testina CITY OF TUK�IL,� e 3 14 CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT20Ro p rt Number: e 345 AUG a � Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011 OERATeENTER Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number: 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St.. Se9ttle - -, , InSpectton� performed - Steel Decking Other (specify): X Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication X Structural Steel Erection rnspeoior and=Date Remarf4s George Naill Arrived on site at McFabco Fabrication shop as requested by the contractor to perform visual welding 6/21/2016 inspection, in conformance to project plans and specifications. 1) Met with the fabricator to verify inspection and review plans. 2) Verified welder certification for welder: Rodney T. Travis Expires 1-01-2017 for FCAW/SMAW structural plate and FCAW reinforcing steel. 3) Performed visual inspection of the following piece marks: beams 1 F(x5) and columns 1c, 1 D, 2A, 2B, 3A, 313, 3C, 3D, 3F and 3G. 4) Visual inspection revealed welding to be complete per approved shop drawings with the exception of 3/16" partial penetration groove welds 2 sides on the column top to column cap connection which was inaccessible due to being covered by the side plate. I spoke with the engineer of record and he confirmed that this weld could be excluded and was acceptable as is. The fabricator will obtain written confirmation by email or RFI and forward to ORA. Conforms Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: Architect Building Dept. alter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 0 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -63-05 (Rev 10/10) K OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 320266 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number: 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address; c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspections Performed .. ....... .... Steel Decking Other (specify): Fillet Welding X Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication X Structural Steel Erection Inspector; and Date .;. Remarks Mike Sorantino Visually inspected, prior to shipment from fabrication shop, the following column and beam built up 6/16/2016 structural members: 1 B (2), 1 F, 2C, 2F, and 2G. Work appeared satisfactory and adequate as per AWS D1.1 and revised shop drawings provided. Welder: F. Bingo, #W18577, expires 1/1/2017 Conforms Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: Architect Building Dept. WN pf& Ha en, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Fotm No.: ADMIN -63-05 (Rev 10/10) t OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing REINFORCING STEEL INSPECTION REPORT Conforms Copies to: Owner X Contractor Architect Building Dept. Technical Responsibility: X Engineer Iter Hdrgen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -76-02 (Rev 03/10) V ( T August 3, 2016 OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing 6747 M. L. King Way South, Seattle, Washington 98118-3216 USA Tel: (206) 725-4600 • Toll Free: (888) OTTO-4-US • Fax: (206) 723-2221 WBE W2F5913684 • WABO Registered Agency • Website: www.ottorosenau.com FINAL REPORT City of Tukwila Building Department RECEIVE® 6300 Southcenter Blvd, Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188-2544 AUG 08 2416 Project: Burlington Coat Factory r-mmunity L,. — ,� , hent Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Permit Numbers: D16 -0011/D16-0183 Job Number: 16-0404 We state that the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of our knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provision of the building code. Our knowledge is limited to our reports. All typewritten reports have been mailed to your office or are enclosed. All reports appear to be complete. This report should not be considered as a warranty for conditions and/or details of the building. Items inspected are: 1. Welding (fabrication shop) 2. Epoxy grouting (rebar dowels and anchor bolts) 3. Reinforcing steel 4. Brick veneer 5. Structural masonry 6. Grout under column base plates 7. Lateral framing Sincerely, OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. I�. ` Kate Rubin Report Manager Email c: Report Distribution List Ift ` OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 298495 Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector: David Kay Date: 6/22/2016 Description/Location: Onsite for inspection of epoxy grouting of reinforcing steel to existing slab for new loading dock per detail 4 on A2.1. Intended Use: Slab dowel Building Code & Year: IBC 2012 ❑ Reinforcing Steel ❑ All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: #4 Anchor Size & Quantity: Rebar Manufacturer: Cascade Type of Steel (ASTM): ❑ A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ❑ Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 E 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: E A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes E No Comments Reference Standard(s) Used: Copies to Conforms X Does Not Conform Client X Engineer Othersr�� l Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: dV Architect Building Dept. N. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) Anchor Length: 36"-48" Hole Depth: 8" Required Embedment: 6"-8" Hole Diameter: 5/8" Concrete Thickness: Existing Concrete Strength: Existing Hole Orientation: ❑ Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up E Horizontal Base Material: E Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: E Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 110 Brushed: E Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: E Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): E Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ❑ No Adhesive Type: Hilti HY 20OR Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather: Sunny Ambient Temperature: 67°F Substrate Temperature: Comments Reference Standard(s) Used: Copies to Conforms X Does Not Conform Client X Engineer Othersr�� l Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: dV Architect Building Dept. N. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) ` OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 319944 - Revised Permit Numbers: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc., 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector: Kevin Byrne Date: 7/8/2016 Description/Location: Inspected the epoxy grouted installation of (12) #5 bar vertical reinforcing steel dowels for CMU wall at new vestibule. It is unclear if the reinforcing steel installed meets ASTM A-615, grade 60 requirements as specified, since the reinforcing steel had no standard mill or grade markings to indicate that it meets specifications. The contractor also did not have mill certification information on site to prove that the reinforcing steel is grade 60 as specified. Intended Use: Vertical reinforcing steel for CMU block wall at Building Code & Year: IBC 2012 new vestibule ® Reinforcing Steel ❑ All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: #5 (12) Anchor Size & Quantity: Rebar Manufacturer: ? Japan Type of Steel (ASTM): ❑ A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ❑ Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: i►��v L,.�' Architect Building Dept. W ter C. Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) Anchor Length: 40" Hole Depth: 8 1/8" Required Embedment: 8" Hole Diameter: %11 Concrete Thickness: 10"+ Concrete Strength: Unknown Hole Orientation: ® Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up ❑ Horizontal Base Material: E Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 100 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ❑ No Adhesive Type: Hilti HIT HY 200A Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather: Partly Cloudy Ambient Temperature: 70°F Substrate Temperature: 68'F Comments Note from Office: Received copy of correspondence from Peter Opsahl, PE, SE, DBIA, of Lund Opsahl, LLC, stating, "We have reviewed the loading on the CMU wall shown in C /A6 and have determined that even if the reinforcement was Grade 40, there would still be sufficient capacity in the wall system to resist the lateral loads in the Design Criteria. The as built condition of the wall is acceptable." This report now conforms. Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: i►��v L,.�' Architect Building Dept. W ter C. Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) y OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 313576 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number: 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St.. Seattle Inspections Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Brick Veneer X Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection Inspector and Date Remarks Mike Preciado 1. 4" CMU infill at storefront south of entrance between the 2nd CMU column and 3rd CMU column. 7/09/2016 2. Inspected the seismic clips, seismic hooks, and seismic system ties for correct type, spacing, and location. 9 wire used for ties. 3 3/4" air gap between veneer and wall per plans. Clips were at 16" on center vertically and horizontally. 3. Elevation 0' feet (street level) up to 14' feet. 4. Vertical bars from slab to tie into CMU were in-place. Reinforcing steel completed per plans. Conforms Copies to: Client X Engineer Others , 1' Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: WqCt 4W4 -,AA Architect Building Dept. I Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -63-05 (Rev 10/10) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 314296 Permit Number: D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector: Dwayne Helgeson Date: 7/13/2016 Description/Location: Inspected the epoxy grouting of 5/8" all thread rods at base of column plates at D -K/26 and 27 (14) total columns as per SK -01. Intended Use: Anchor Bolts Building Code & Year: IBC 2012 ❑ Reinforcing Steel ® All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: Anchor Size & Quantity: 5/8" (56) Rebar Manufacturer: Type of Steel (ASTM): ❑ A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ® Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Anchor Length: 12" Hole Depth: 9" Required Embedment: 6" Hole Diameter: 3/<" Concrete Thickness: - Concrete Strength: - Hole Orientation: ® Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up ❑ Horizontal Base Material: ® Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete ❑ CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: ® Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 120 Brushed: ® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: ® Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): ® Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ® No Adhesive Type: Hilti HIT HY 200A Expiration Date: 3/2017 ICC ESR #: 3187 Weather: Indoors Ambient Temperature: 68°F Substrate Temperature: 68°F Comments Work inspected was completed using and in accordance with all approved project documents. Reference Standard(s) Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) ` OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 281111 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number: 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspections Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Non -Shrink Grout X Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection Inspector and Date Remarks Darren Reid Non -shrink grout placed under column base plate as required per engineers approved project 7/16/2016 document at K/27. Conforms Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: �IN er��` W w✓� Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -63-05 (Rev 10/10) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 314062 Permit Number: D16 -0011/D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk St., Seattle Inspector: Darren Reid Date: 7/16/2016 Description/Location: 5/8" all thread epoxied into new 4" CMU wall (bond beam) at along L for future man door lintel Intended Use: Angle Iron at Center Building Code & Year: ❑ Reinforcing Steel E All Thread Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: Anchor Size & Quantity: 5/8" (7) Rebar Manufacturer: Type of Steel (ASTM): E A-36 ❑ A-325 ❑ A-449 ❑ Other: Rebar Grade: 17140 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Comments Reference Standard(s) Used: Copies to Conforms X Does Not Conform Client X Engineer Others `,� Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: ILAa Wytr �tyV�4o, Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) Anchor Length: 8" Hole Depth: 3 3/" Required Embedment: 3'/4" Hole Diameter: 11/16" Concrete Thickness: 4" Concrete Strength: - Hole Orientation: ❑ Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up E Horizontal Base Material: ❑ Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete E CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: E Compressed Air ❑ Hand Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: 80-100 Brushed: E Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: E Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI B212.15): E Yes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes E No Adhesive Type: Hilti HY 70 Expiration Date: 8/2017 ICC ESR #: 3342 Weather: Indoors Ambient Temperature: 70°F Substrate Temperature: 65°F Comments Reference Standard(s) Used: Copies to Conforms X Does Not Conform Client X Engineer Others `,� Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: ILAa Wytr �tyV�4o, Architect Building Dept. Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -86-02 (Rev. 05/13) • OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing MASONRY REPORT Job Number: 16-0404 Report Number: 241010 Permit Number: D16 -0011/D16-0183 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Client: Burlington Coat Factory Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwilla Inspector & Date: Darren Reid 7/16/2016 Masonry Sub or Contractor: Arnt Masonry DESCRIPTION / LOCATION IBC Level of Inspection: (Projects located outside Seattle) Level 1 ® Level 2 [-1SBC Ref. 17-04.5.1/17-04.5.3/17-05.4 IBC (2006, 2009, 2012) Level of Inspection: (projects located in Seattle) Level 1 (Periodic) ElLevel 2 (Continuous) ❑ Ref. 17-04.5.1/17-04.5.3 SBC (2006, 2009) Fine grout placed solid into all cells of CMU veneer knee walls (x2) at along line L per 5&C/A6.0 from slab up to 3'/'0" top of wall. Approximate square footage completed on this date: 70 Are anchors in place? (if required) Was reinforcing steel verified? Yes Is reinforcing steel secured in place?: Grade of reinforcing steel: 60 Manufacturer: Nucor Is high lift grouting approved?: GROUT INFORMATION (ASTM C 1019) Mix no./type: Fine Grout supplier: Design mix Grout preparer: Arnt Masonry Grout temperature: 607E 1 Grout slump: 8-10" Total yardage: Method of consolidation: Vibrator Grout ingredients & weights: 1 -bag to water as required MORTAR INFORMATION (ASTM C 780 Mix no./type: Mortar supplier: Mortar preparer: Mortar temperature: Mortar ingredients: MATERIAL INFORMATION (ASTM C 67/ ASTM C 140) Block/unit supplier: Mutual Material I Block/unit type: 1-11-C90 SAMPLE INFORMATION Were any samples made? No If Yes — see attached report OTHER INFORMATION Weather & ambient temperature: Overcast Protection methods: Is this a re -inspection? No If yes — original inspection date: COMMENTS Other ASTM Methods Used: Conforms X Does Not Conform Copies to: Client X Engineer Others Owner X Contractor Technical Responsibility: WArchitect X Building Dept. yILA Walter C Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -72-07 (Rev 05/13) > • r ' OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing LATERAL FRAMING INSPECTION REPORT Report Number: 309472 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011/ D16-0183 Address: 17500 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Job Number: 16-0404 Client: Burlington Coat Factory Client Address: c/o Alegis Construction, Inc. 3701 S. Norfolk Street, Seattle Inspections Performed Nail / Screw Size and Spacing Bottom Plate Nailing Light Gauge Framing Anchor Bolt Sheathing Nailing Light Gauge Yield: 30ksi ❑ 50ksi ❑ Blocking Diaphragm Nailing Light Gauge Welding Installation of Holdown System Sheathing Rated By: Welder's Name: Clips ® Straps El Sheathing Type: WABO Number: Hardware Manufacturer: Other (specify): Insulation X WABO Card Exp.: Inspector and Date Remarks Paul Kanikkeberg Verified addition of double studs andbox beam header (plus stud clips) at door 06. 7/22/2016 Also, verified insulation of wall at door 06. Inspected to the approved plans and a letter from the architect dated 7/21/2016. Conforms Copies to: Owner X Contractor r _ A , g �_ �WkAA Architect X Building Dept. Technical Responsibility: _ �/l� �V�J X Engineer Walter Hansen, Project Manager This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: ADMIN -84-03 (Rev 05/13) I 0 N -1 n �. N a o -a DOC)°1 ;' 3 � = O 3_0 CD N m: m PL N 0 0 S CD X X CD 3 op n m N C O = m 0--. = �° m co cM m m 0) a o CD a CD a o T a S � ill _ N Cn X N O d C N C G G CD CD a N p S -O = CD CDP. = O_ co 0 C a D 0 t N CD v -i _= CD CD 90 0 N D = rn p o v -^ O N 91 CCD CP CD N O = O = N OCD— c a 0 a T CL o = 0 0 O= o cn x o x CD _ -7� NO CD X - T n N N J OS CD lio O. C^ N C N = n Z N 0 rn Cl O 0 0) 0 00 w C- 0 U z O rn 6 O x 'z'^ V+ m m —ni zp z cn90 C mD r Orn G) ;u D r m ch Z G) O co va N O 0) O O w � 3 Op 0O ((D N = CSD W O CD v C) Frl iD CD 93N M CD m ij Cl) 0 r m v 7 N CD D 3 O CD 12. CDC �m a s a ID p a X ;CDS N v o < o O m CD rn Q. CD M Z N 0 rn Cl O 0 0) 0 00 w C- 0 U z O rn 6 O x 'z'^ V+ m m —ni zp z cn90 C mD r Orn G) ;u D r m ch Z G) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES. INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION FIELD REPORT Report Number: 335464 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: 016-0011 Address: 17500 Southcenter Parkway -Tukwila Job Number. 16-0404 Client: rl;sn! Aaii—... - Inspectigns Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Adhesive Anchors X Other (specify): 1 Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection X ..0pauw. and Data Remarks Stephen Ramos Arrived on site to perform special inspections in accordance wWproject plans and specifications as 7/14/2016 follows: / 1. Visually inspected field;Welding of the Main Entry HSS beam splice as per LO Sketch S -SK - 03. The following non -conforming conditions were noted: a. Exterior face-- Splice plate located off center and joint between HSS sections welded with square'butt partial joint penetration weld. Repair --splice plate per detail. b. Bottom face: Unacceptable weld profile as per Tabie 6.1 AWS D1.1 welding code. Repair --grind and re -weld marked area to 3./16 fillet weld per sketch. 2. Observed and inspected installation of adhesiue anchors for the new CMU strong back columns towall and slab; gridline U25 to 26 line: Reference adhesive anchor reports 335644A and 3356448 for additional information. DOES NOT CONFORM Start Time: On site Finish Time: Offsite Inspected by: Is this a re -inspection? ❑ Yes ® No Original inspection date: Reviewed by: This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: INSP-63a-05 LT (Rev 10/10) OTTO ROkJAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. . s , r3 PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION REPORT Job Number: Permit Number: Project: (�/�(�J, Client: Contractor: Address: & Ljf�//4 Inspector: Date: _ -"& DESCRIPTION&OC N vA �>4 Intended Use: �./ v� Building Code & Year: ❑ R+lilnforeft SWW AN TttireW Bar/Dowel Size & Quantity: Anchor Size & Quantity: `7 Rebar Manufacturer: Type of Steel (ASTM): A-36 CIF -1554 ❑A-307 Grade: ❑ 36 ❑ 50 ❑ 75 ❑ Other: Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑ Othtr: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Anchor Length: Iq Hole Depth: 3 Required Embedment: 3 31 if Hole Diameter: l Concrete Thickness: G �' Concrete Strength: L/` Hole Orientation: L Vertical Down ❑ Vertical Up A Horizontal Base Material: ❑ Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light Weight Concrete OCMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck. Hole Cleaning: j Compressed Air ❑ Hana Pump ❑ Other: Compressed Air PSI: ti v Brushed: ATYes ❑ No Hole Condition: fXDry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 8212.15): OrYes ❑ No Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes No Adhesive Manufacturer/Type: �/ Expiration Date: ICC ESR #: 7 Weather: Ambient Temperature: (,r� Substrate Temperature: Commonta Rei Sta x"*) tlaad: Conforms Doss'IlW ontin Is this a re -inspection? No ❑ Yes - Original inspection date: Inspected by: Reviewed by: 9�! Start Time: Finish Time: \,,�'fhis report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. 7 Page Q— of ..� 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: 1NSP-86-02 (Rev 05/13) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. Geotechnical Engineering, Construction Inspection & Materials Testing PROPRIETARY ANCHOR ADHESIVE INSPECTION FIELD REPORT _ R±e n#arcing Styehrolcl ® ` Bar/Dowel Size &Quantity: � ;- • Anchor Size & Quantity: l$ (qty. 29), Rebar Manufacturer: Type of Steel (ASTM): Grade: _• ❑ A 3 ❑ F-1554 ❑ A-307 ®36., [] 50 ❑ 75 ®Other: HAS Rebar Grade: ❑ 40 ❑ 60 ❑ Other: Type of Bar: ❑ A-615 ❑ A-706 ❑ A-775 ❑'Other: Special Ductile Quality (SDQ): ❑ Yes ❑ No Anchor Length: 6"= Hole Depth: 3° Required Embedment: 3 " Hole Diameter: 3/4" Concrete Thickness: Concrete Strength: Hole Orientation: ❑ Vertical Down ❑ VerticI,Up _ ® Horizontal Base Material: ❑ Normal Weight Concrete ❑ Light 'Weight Concrete ® CMU ❑ Brick ❑ Composite Deck Hole Cleaning: a'Campressed Air f-1 Hand Pump ,;Qtherl'r Compressed Air PSI: 120 Brushed: <: <`® Yes ❑ No Hole Condition: 0 Dry ❑ Damp ❑ Water Saturated ❑ Submerged Drill Bit (ANSI 13212.15): ® Yes [!`No ! Approved Diamond Cored Hole: ❑ Yes ® No Adhesive Manttfacturer/Type. Hilti HY 70 Expiration Date: 2/2017 ICC ESR #: 2682 Weather: Indoors- Ambient Temperature: 64°F Substrate Temperature: 65°F Reference Standard(s) Used-.' . Start Time: Finish Time: Inspected by: Conforms X Does Not Conform Is this a re -inspection? ❑ Yes ® No Original inspection date: Reviewed by: This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 3 of 3 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: INSP-86-02 LT (Rev 05/13) OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES. INC CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION FIELD REPORT Report Number: 335467 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011 Address: 17500 Southcenter Parkway -Tukwila Job Number. 16-0404 Client: r.Nznf Arldrecc• lnspectigns Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Other (specify):, Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection X and Date Remarks Stephen Ramos Arrived on site to perform visual inspection of repair welding in accordance with project plans and 7/15/2016 specifications as follows: 1. Visually inspected field repair welding of the Main Entry HSS beam splice, noted as nonconforming at previous inspection, as per LO Sketch S -SK -03: a. Exterior face-, Splice plate located correctly. b. Bottom face: Unacceptable weld profile found to be repaired. Repair welding found to be in conformance with AWS D1.1 welding code Table 6.1 and detail. This closes nonconformance noted in ORA report # 335464, dated 7-14-2016 2. At contractor request verified. Installation of R19 insulation batting, from 14 feet to roof along front entry wall (Grid line, L) , as specified by City of Tukwila inspector. CONFORMS Start Time: On site 1130 Finish Time: "Off site 1200 Inspected by: Is this a re -inspection? ® Yes ❑ No Original inspection date: #335464, 7-14-16 Reviewed by: This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our firm is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 - Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTTO-4-US - Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: INSP-63a-05 LT (Rev 10/10) y OTTO ROSENAU & ASSOCIATES, INC. CONSTRUCTION INSPECTION FIELD REPORT Report Number: 335467 Project: Burlington Coat Factory Permit Number: D16-0011 Address: 17500 Southcenter Parkway -Tukwila Job Number. 16-0404 Client: Client Address: Inspections Performed Steel Decking Other (specify): Other (specify): Structural Steel Fabrication Structural Steel Erection X Inspector and Date Remarks Stephen Ramos Arrived on site to perform visual inspection of repair welding in accordance with project plans and 7/15/2016 specifications as follows: 1. Visually inspected field repair welding of the Main Entry HSS beam splice, noted as nonconforming at previous inspection, as per LO Sketch S -SK -03: a. Exterior face:. Splice plate located correctly. b. Bottom face: Unacceptable weld profile found to be repaired. Repair welding found to be in conformance with AWS D1.1 welding code Table 6.1 and detail. This closes nonconformance noted in ORA report # 335464, dated 7-14-2016 2. At contractor request verified installation of R19 insulation batting, from 14 feet to roof along front entry wall (Grid line L) , as specified by City of Tukwila inspector. CONFORMS Start Time: On site 1130 Finish Time: Off site 1200 Inspected by: �r Is this a re -inspection? ® Yes ❑ No Original inspection date: #335464, 7-14-16 Reviewed by: RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 18 2016 PERMIT CENTER This report applies only to the items tested or reported and is the exclusive property of Otto Rosenau & Associates, Inc. Reproduction of this report, except in full, without written permission from our fine is strictly prohibited. Page 1 of 1 6747 M.L. King Way S., Seattle, Washington 98118 — Phone (206) 725-4600 or 1-888-OTT0.4-US — Fax (206) 723-2221 Form No.: INSP-63a-05 LT (Rev 10/10) Interior • • Summary LTG -SUM 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Jan 2014 Project Info Project Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Date 1/11/2016 Compliance SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY For Building Department Use forms do not TUKWILA, WA require a password to use. Instructional and FIL Applicant Name: Applicant Address: calculating cells are write- Applicant Phone: Project Description ❑ New Building ❑ Addition Q Alteration ❑ Plans Included Lighting Compliance Path Q Lighting Power Density Calculations 0 Total Building Performance (If Total Building Performance then only LGT-CHK is required.) Lighting Power Allowance Q Building Area Method Q Space -By -Space Method Method Selection required to enable LPA forms Interior Lighting System REVIEWED FOR Description CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED Briefly describe lighting system type and features. 2016 O MAR 0 8 Additions and Change of Space Use (C101.4.3 & C101.4.4) Cid( of ` Ukwila ❑ Addition area or Change of Space Use area complies with all applicable provisions as stand alone project BUILDING DwISIC N ❑ Addition area is combined with existing building lighting systems to demonstrate compliance with all applicable provisions per C101.4.3 Provide Building Area Method (LTG -INT -BLD) or Space -By -Space Method (LTG -INT -SPACE) Compliance Form. Document maximum allowed and proposed (including existing if applicable) lighting wattage of Addition or Change of Use space. Provide applicable lighting controls per C405.2 and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13. Alterations, Renovations and Repairs (C101.4.3.1) Q 60% or more of luminaires in space replaced Provide Building Area Method (LTG -INT -BLD) or Space -By -Space Method (LTG -INT -SPACE) Compliance Form. Document maximum allowed wattage within the lighting retrofit space in Maximum Allowed Wattage table and proposed (including existing) lighting wattage in Proposed Wattage table. Retrofit and non -retrofit spaces shall be documented separately using multiple forms. ❑ Less than 60% of luminaires in space replaced Provide a separate Space -By -Space Method (LTG -INT -SPACE) Compliance Form for this retrofit area. Document existing total wattage within the lighting retrofit space in cell provided in the Maximum Allowed Wattage table. Document proposed (including existing) lighting wattage in the Proposed Wattage table. ❑ Lamp and/or ballast replacement within existing luminaires only — existing total interior building wattage not increased Q New wiring installed to serve added fixtures and/or fixtures relocated to new circuit Provide applicable manual lighting controls (C405.2.1), occupancy sensors (C405.2.2.2), daylight zone controls (C405.2.2.3), specific application controls (C405.2.3), and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13 ❑ New or moved lighting panel Provide all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring, automatic time switch controls (C405.2.2.1), and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13. ❑ Space is reconfigured - luminaires unchanged or moved only Provide all applicable lighting controls as noted for New Wiring and commissioning of lighting controls per C405.13. ❑ No changes are being made to the interior lighting and space use not changed. RECEIV 001- JAN 13 2056 i PERMIT CENTER 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings includinq R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 RevisPri .Ian 9M d Project Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Date 1/11/2016 Lighting Alterations, Renovations & Building Additions O Less than 60% 60% or more O Stand alone O Addition Notes: a. Lighting fixtures in a building addition may comply as a stand alone project, or they may be combined with the overall existing bldg lighting to demonstrate compliance. Refer to C101.4.3. b. For retrofits and building additions, provide Space Types and gross interior areas in the Maximum Allowed Lighting table. If a builidng addition will comply as combined with the overall existing builidng, include all applicable existing Space Types and gross interior areas. c. Document new fixtures and all existing to remain fixtures in the Proposed Lighting table. d. If less than 60% of existing fixtures will be replaced, provide total existing lighting wattage (prior to retrofit) in the space provided in the Maximum Allowed Lighting table. For Building Department Use Building Area Method selected. Use LTG -INT -SLD form. Location (plan Allowed room #) Space Type* Watts per ft2 Gross n error--VV-atts Allowed Area in ft2 (watts/ft2 x area) Atrium** Enter Height: Existing Lighting Enter Exist. Watts: Retail Display Allowance from LTG -INT -DISPLAY * Select Table C405.5.2(2) category from drop down menu. ** For atriums, indicate height. Allowed wattage for first 40 feet is 0.03 W/ft. ht., above 40 feet is 0.02 W/ft. ht. Building Area Method selected. Use LTG -INT -BLD form. Area Allowed Watts Total Location (plan #, Number of Watts/ Watts room #) Fixture Description*** Fixtures Fixture I Proposed Retail Display Lighting from LTG -INT -DISPLAY Total Proposed Watts may not exceed Total Allowed Watts for Interior Lighting *** Include existing to remain lighting fixtures and exempt lighting equipment per notes below. Total Proposed Notes: 1. Include ALL proposed lighting fixtures. 2. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 3. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section C405.5.1. For line voltage track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices of the transformer. For low voltage track lighting list the transformer rated wattage. 4. For lighting equipment eligible for exemption per C405.5.1, note exception number and leave Watts/Fixture blank. 5. Document existing to remain fixtures in Proposed Lighting table in the same manner as new fixtures. Identify as existing in fixture description 6. If #NA appears in Retail Display cells, information on LTG -INT -DISPLAY is incomplete. Interior Lighting Power Allowance Interior Display Lighting - Space -by -Space LTG -INT -DISPLAY: 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Jan 2014 Project Info Project Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Date 1/11/2016 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY For Building Department Use TUKWILA, WA Applicant Name: Building Area Method selected. Use LTG -INT -BLD form. Location (plan room #) Allowed Retail Display Area Type* Watts per ft2 ** Gross Interior Wafts AHowed Area in ft2 (watts/ft2 x area) * Only retail sales areas that meet the requirements defined in Table C405.5.2(2) footnote A may be entered here. Select retail sales areas form drop down menu. ** Wattages per Table C405.5.2(2) footnote A. ++ Display light allowance per footnote A calculation. Building Area Method selected. Use LTG -INT -BLD form Area Area Watts Total Display Lighting Base Allowance ++ Total Display Allowance Only separately controlled display fixtures independent of general area lighting per Table C405.5.2(2) footnote A may be entered here. Location (plan #, Number of Watts/ Watts Display Area* room #) Fixture Description Fixtures Fixture Proposed oeiecr reran sales aispiay area rrom crop down menu. Proposed Display Lighting Totals Total Proposed Watts Retail1 Retail Retail Retail Notes: 1. For proposed Display Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 2. For proposed WattslFixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section C405.5.1. For line voltage track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. For low voltage track lighting list the transformer rated wattage. 3. List all display fixtures. 2012 Washington State Enerqv Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildinas indiAnn R9 R RR nvPr *1 �t-- ..H .0 P1 De.,;,...a — Project Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Date 1/11/2016 VV Lighting Alterations, Renovations & Building Additions O Less than 60% 0 60% or more O Stand alone O Addition Notes: a. Lighting fixtures in a building addition may comply as a stand alone project, or they may be combined with the overall existing bldg lighting to demonstrate compliance. Refer to C 101.4.3. b. For retrofits and building additions, provide Building Area types and gross interior areas in the Maximum Allowed Lighting table. If a builidng addition will comply as combined with the overall existing builidng, include all applicable existing Building Area types and gross interior areas. c. Document new fixtures and all existing to remain fixtures in the Proposed Lighting table. d. If less than 60% of existing fixtures will be replaced, use LTG -INT -SPACE form. For Building Department Use Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Location (plan #, Allowed Building Area* room #, or ALL) Area Description Watts per ft2 Gross Interior Watts owe Area in ft2 (watts/ft2 x area) Retail E7.1 BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY SOTRE 1.33 30810 40977 COMPLIES * Select Table C405.5.2(1) Building Area from drop down menu. Totall 30810 Proposed Lighting Wattage Location (plan #, Building Area* room #) Fixture Description** Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed Retail E1.1 8 ft INDUSTRIAL LED LINEAR BAY Metalux 88 290 25520 25520 COMPLIES aeiecr raoie c4v0.0.zf7/ rsuuamgArea trom drop down menu. ** Include existing to remain lighting and exempt lighting equipment per notes below. Compliance by Building Area Building Area Warnings Total Allowed Watts Total Proposed Watts Interior Lighting Power Allowance Retail 40977 25520 COMPLIES Notes: Totall 40977 25520 1. Proposed Wattage for each Building Area type shall not exceed the Allowed Wattage for that Building Area type. Trading wattage between Building Area types is not allowed under the Building Area Method compliance path. 2. Proposed fixtures must be listed in the building area in which they occur. Include ALL proposed lighting fixtures. 3. For proposed Fixture Description, indicate fixture type, lamp type (e.g. T-8), number of lamps in the fixture, and ballast type (if included). For track lighting, list the length of the track (in feet) in addition to the fixture, lamp, and ballast information. 4. For proposed Watts/Fixture, use manufacturer's listed maximum input wattage of the fixture (not simply the lamp wattage) and other criteria as specified in Section C405.5.1. For line voltage track lighting, list the greater of actual luminaire wattage or length of track multiplied by 50, or as applicable, the wattage of current limiting devices or of the transformer. For low voltage track lighting list the transformer rated wattage. 5. For lighting equipment eligible for exemption per C405.5.1, note exception number and leave Watts/Fixture blank. 6. Document existing to remain fixtures in Proposed Lighting table in the same manner as new fixtures. Identify as existing in fixture description. 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Jan 2014 Project Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER Date 1/11/2016 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability Location in Building Department (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Documents Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section C405.2) C405.2.1.1 Manual interior Indicate on plans the manual control type & locations served; Indicate of plans the 50% lighting load reduction method No C405.2.1.2 lighting controls provided or identify exception taken Indicate lighting system automatic shut-off capability - identify lighting zone areas served on plans; Automatic time Indicate locations of override switches on plans and the areas E1.1 Yea C405.2.2.1 switch controls and override switching served, include area sq. ft.; Indicate locations where automatic shutoff is provided by other methods (occupancy sensor, daylight controls, etc) Yes C405.2.2.2 Occupancy sensors Indicate on plans the locations served by occupancy sensors E1.1 Daylight zones - Indicate vertical fenestration primary and secondary daylight NA C405.2.2.3 Vertical fenestration zone areas on plans, include sq. ft.; and skylights Indicate skylight daylight zone areas on plans, include sq. ft. Daylight zone Indicate on plans the locations served by daylight zone controls; NA C405.2.2.3.2 controls Indicate in plans the lighting load reduction (dimming) method - stepped or continuous dimming NA C405.2.3 Specific application lighting controls - Indicate on plans the locations served by specific application General lighting controls Indicate lighting control method for display and accent lighting, C405.2.3 - Display and accent and display case lighting; Indicate these fixtures are controlled independently from both NA Items 1&2 lighting general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space C405.2.3 - Hotel/motel guest Provide a lighting control device at each guest room entry for all NA Item 3 rooms permanently installed fixtures in guest room; Indicated whether lighting control is manual or automatic NA C405.2.3 - Supplemental task Provide automatic shut-off vacancy controls for supplemental Item 4 lighting task lighting, including under -shelf or under -cabinet lighting Identify eligible non -visual applications and method of lighting C405.2.3 - Lighting for non - control; Indicate these fixtures are controlled independently from both NA Item 5 visual applications general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space Indicate lighting control method for lighting equipment for sale C405.2.3 - Lighting equipment or demonstration; Indicate these fixtures are controlled independently from both NA Item 6 for sale or demonstration general area lighting and other lighting applications within the same space If egress lighting power density is greater than 0.05W/ft2, C405.2.3 - Means of egress indicate method of automatic shut-off during unoccupied Yea Item 7 lighting periods; Identify on plans the egress fixtures that function as both normal E1 1 and emergency means of egress illumination C405.10 Cooler and freezer Provide vacancy device or timer to turn off fixtures within 15 NA C405.11 lighting minutes of unoccupancy for cooler and freezer lighting fixtures with lamp efficacy less than 40 lumens per watt NA C405.2.4 Exterior lighting Indicate on exterior lighting plans the automatic lighting control controls method and locations served Exterior building Provide motion sensor controls for building grounds fixtures NA C405.6.1 grounds lighting rated at greater than 100 watts with lamp efficacy less than 60 controls lumens, or identify exception taken Identify applicable commissioning documentation requirements per Section C408 or eligibility for exception; Provide written procedures for functional testing of all automatic NA C408.3 Lighting system functional testing controls and describe the expected system response; Identify in construction documents the party responsible for functional testing of automatic lighting controls INTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY Sections C405.5, C405.10, C405.11 shington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Jan 2014 Address PARKWAY SUPERCENTER 7Thefollowing Date 1/11/2016 information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the lighting, motor, and transformer requirements in the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicability Location in Building Department (yes,no,na) Code Section Component Compliance information required in permit documents Documents Notes Provide fixture schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and rated watts per fixture; E1.1 C405.5.1 Identify spaces eligible for lighting power exemption on plans C405.5.1.1 Total connected and in compliance forms; Yea C405.5.1.2 C405.5.1.3 interior lighting power Identify lighting equipment eligible for exemption in fixture C405.5.1.4 schedule and in compliance forms; Indicate that exempt lighting equipment is in addition to general area lighting and is controlled independently Yes C405.4 Exit signs Provide exit sign types and rated watts per fixture in fixture E1.1 schedule (maximum 5 watts per fixture) C405.10 Cooler and freezer For lighting in walk-in coolers and freezers, and refrigerated NA C405.11 lighting warehouse coolers and freezers, provide rated lamp efficacy (in lumens per watt) in fixture schedule Lighting Power Calculation - Indicate compliance path taken Complete required compliance forms — proposed wattage per Yes C405.5.2 Building Area Method building area does not exceed maximum allowed wattage per E1.1 building area. Identify locations of building areas on plans Complete required compliance forms — total proposed wattage No C405.5.2 Space -By -Space does not exceed maximum allowed wattage. Identify locations Method of space types on plans, including retail display areas as applicable EXTERIOR LIGHTING POWER & EFFICACY Section C405.6 Provide fixture schedule with fixture types, lamps, ballasts, and Total connected rated watts per fixture; Identify exterior applications eligible for lighting power NA C405.6.2 exterior lighting power exemption on plans and in compliance forms; Indicate that exempt exterior lighting is controlled independently from non-exempt exterior lighting NA Table C405.6.2(1) Exterior lighting zone Indicate building exterior lighting zone as defined by the AHJ Exterior building For building grounds fixtures rated at greater than 100 watts, NA C405.6.1 grounds lighting provide rated lamp efficacy (in lumens per watt) in fixture schedule Exterior lighting Complete required compliance form — proposed wattage for NA C405.6.2 power calculations exterior lighting plus base site allowed does not exceed maximum allowed MOTORS & TRANSFORMERS (Sections C405.8, C405.9) NA C405.8 Electric Motors For motors not part of an HVAC system, provide electric motor schedule on electrical plans with hp, rpm, and rated efficiency NA C405.9 Transformers Provide distribution transformer schedule on electrical plans with transformer size and efficiency 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 'Mechanical Summary 2012 Washington State Energy Code Com liance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 MECH-SUM Revised Aug2015 Project Info Project Address: Burlington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 17480 Southcenter Parkway For Building Dept. Use Tukwila, WA 98188 Applicant Name: 1 - This address line will copy onto other forms I L Applicant Address: 1 - This address line will copy onto other forms Applicant Phone: 1 - This address line will copy onto other forms Project Description ❑ New Building ❑ Building Addition Q Tenant Improvement [] System Retrofit ❑ No System Changes Briefly describe mechanical systems in Ti commercial retail space is being remodeled. Existing packaged gas/elec rooftop equipment is being demo'd. the text box provided New rooftop packaged gas/elec equipment is being installed. ❑ Total Bldg performance REVIEWED FOR Total Bldg Performance compliance CODE COMPLIANCE all mandatory provisions per C401.2 Option 2. MECH-SUM, p pry �/ AP i— RO tl EE) MECH-CHK, and C407 Energy Analysis Summary forms required. KAhQ Mechanical Systems Summary Compliance Heating Fan Flow Air//+�..` Econorntxe ��%�,'i dn), Villi; Ia Equip ID Type of System (Note 1) Space(s) Served Path and Cooling Controls t ) tmy,overy RTU -1 unitary rooftop air handler retail single Complex zone Heating and Constant Yes 03.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -2 unitary rooftop air handier retail Complex single zone Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -3 unitary rooftop air handler retail Complex single zone Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -4 unitary rooftop air handler retail Complex single zone Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -5 unitary rooftop air handler retail Complex single zone Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -6 unitary rooftop air handler retail Complex single zone Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -7 unite rooftop air handier unitary p Storage, fitting, toilet, office g ' g' Simple single Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required zone system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation RTU -9 unite rooftop air handler unitary p retail, office Simple single Heating and Constant Yes C403.2.6.1 Not Required zone system cooling volume (CV) Ventilation Note 1 -.Provide basic description of system type, for example: unitary rooftop air handler, built-up central air handler, singlepackaged, split system or packaged terminal air conditioner or heat pump, unit heater, warm -air furnace, electric resistance heater, 4 -pipe fan coil, VRF system, energy recovery air handier, make-up air system, ground or water -source heat pump, etc. Note 2 - If taking an exception to air economizer, select exception taken from drop down menu and complete MECH-ECONO form. SummiRt t gj exception are listed in MECH-ECONO. 11'"'[[ ll.. �C 11 VV Note 3 -!f ventilation Not applicable" is selected, provide explanation in Project Description box above. CITY OF TU K`i ILA ❑ Hydronic chilled water Elwater-loopheat pump No h drop' HVAC Hydronic Systems ftems �N� 3 �� ❑ Hydronic heating El Geothermal 10 Equipment Type (s) ❑✓ Hot water heating tank(s) ❑ Instantaneous PE IM9ENTERS Service Water Heating ❑ ❑ Heat exchange from s Dedicated boiler n9 pace heat boiler or Systems central hot water/steam Distribution Type (s) 0 Circulation System ❑ On -demand hil- IAN QW 2012 Washington State Energy Code Combliance Forms for Commercial. Grouo R1. and > 3 story R2 and R3 Q Mechanical Plans ❑ MECH-EQ Form Mechanical Schedules Indicate location of equipment compliance information. It provided on plans then MECH-EQ forms are not requited, however, include on plans all applicable compliance information listed in MECH-EQ tables. ❑ Load calculation summary Q MECH-LOAD-CALC Form Design Load Calculations Provide design load calculations for all mechanical systems and equipment serving the building heating, cooling or ventilating needs. If a load calculation summary is provided with the permit documents that includes all applicable compliance information then the MECH-LOAD•CALC form is not required. 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 •• 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Aug 2015 Q Project includes HVAC air distribution systems that provide heating and/or cooling If yes, provide a MECH-FANSYS -SUM fort. Fan Power ❑ For one or more systems, the total fan motor nameplate hp of all fans in HVAC system exceeds 5hp. If yes, provide a separate MECH-FANSYS form for each HVAC system exceeding the 5 horsepower threshold. Refer to Section C403.2.10 and MECH-FANSYS-DOC for requirements and exceptions. Commissioning Exception Q Commissioning will be provided for all applicable systems Summary Commissioning Exceptions: Describe means of eligibilty for commissioning exception (capacity, Mechanical system(s) etc) for all systems noted as taking exception in Mechanical Systems Summary table. Refer to Section C408.2 and C408.4 for exceptions. Service water heating system(s) For systems requiring commissioning, Figure C408.1.2. I Commissioning Compliance Checklist shall be submitted to the code official upon project completion. Low Energy and Semi -Heated Spaces (Note 6 and 7) Peak Space Space Type Location in Plan(s) Space(s) Served Area Served, square feet Heating Capacity, Btu/h (Note 4) Cooling Capacity, Btu/h (Note 5) Conditioning Capacity, Btu/h-sf Compliance Check Notes Note 4 - Provide total installed heating output capacity of systems serving Low Energy or Semi -Heated space(s) in btuh. Note 5 - Provide total installed cooling capacity of system serving Low Energy space(s) in Bfu/h. Not allowed for semi -heated spaces. Enter 0 if no cooling. Note 6 - Refer to Section C101.5.2 Low Energy Building. Intalled peak space conditioning capacity, heating or cooling, may not exceed 3.4 Btulh-sf. Note 7 - Refer to Section 0402.1.4 and Semi -Heated Space definition in Chapter 2. Total heating output capacity may not exceed 8 btuh/sf. Only systems without electric resistance heating and no cooling are eligible for the wall insulation exception under semi -heated. 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Wechanical P' '.•- 1 of 2012 Washnneton State Enerov Code Comoliance Forms for Commarrial 9ulktinns Inchndinn R9 A R3 nvar s t.A.. —1 sc 01 Project Address Burlington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanicial systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na), Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Building Department Documents Notes GENERAL PROVISIONS Equipment Sizing & Performance MECH yes C403.2.1 Load calculations Load calculations performed per ASHRAE Sid 183 or equivalent per Chapter 3 LOAD CALC yes C403.2.2 Equipment and system Output capacities of heating and cooling equipment and systems do not exceed the next larger NIA sizing available equipment size above the calculated bads; note exceptions taken Yes C403.2.5 Minimum ventilation Ventilation (natural or mechanical) provided per IMC; indicate mechanical ventilation is capable M2.0 of being reduced to minimum requirement per IMC yes C403.2.3 & 0403.2.32 & Equipment minimum Provide equipment schedules or complete MECHSUM tables with type, capacity, efficiency, M2.0 0403.2.12.1 efficient y test standard or other efficient source for all mechanical ( Y ) equipment y es C403.2.13 Electric motor efficient yp, Provide equipment schedule with h rpm, and efficiency for a9 motors; note exceptions taken M2.0 no C403.2.10.1 Fan power limitation For all applicable systems > 5hp, provide system total nameplate hp in MECH-FANSYS-SUM N/A form no C403.2.10A Fan power limitation For all applicable fan systems > 5hp, verify fan system motor hp or bhp complies with fan N/A power limits per Table C403.2.10.1(1), provide MECH-FANSYS forth for each system yes C403.2.10.2 Motor nameplate hp Indicate fan motors specified are the smallest available motor hp size greater than fan bhp, M2.0 note exceptions taken yes C403.2.10.3 & C403.2.13 Fractional hp fan motors Indicate fan motors 1/12 to 1 hp are ECM type or meet minimum efficiency req. M2.0 na C403.2.3 aaximu air cooled chiller pacity indicate air-cooled chiller capacity does not exceed air-cooled chiller limit ne C403.2.3.1 Non-standard water-cooled Full -load and NPLV values for water-cooled centrifugal chiller adjusted for non-standard chillers operational conditions na C403.2.12.0 Centrifugal fan cooling Large capacity cooling towers with centrifugal fan(s) meet efficiency requirements for axial fan towers open circuit cooling towers na C403.2.3 Forced air furnace and unit heaters Indicate intermittent ignition or IID, flue/draft damper & jacket loss na C4032.3.3 Packaged electric Verify all packaged electric equipment that provides > 20,000 Btu/h cooling capacity and heating/cooling equipment heating is a heat pump, note in equipment schedule na C403.2.3.4 Humidification Indicate method of humidification (note requirements for systems with economizer) HVAC System Controls & Criteria yes C403.2.4.1 Thermostatic controls Indicate locations of thermostatic control zones onlans, including p g perimeter systems M1.0 na 0403,2,4,1,1 Heat pump supplementary Indicate staged heating (compression/supplemental) and outdoor lock -out temperature is set heat to 40'F or less yes 0403.2.4.2 Setpoint overlap (deadband) Indicate 5"F deadband minimum for systems controlling both heating & roofing M3.0 yes 0403.2.4.3 Automatic setback and shutdown Indicate zone t stat controls with required automatic setback & manual override M3,0 no C403.2.4.3.3 Automatic (optimum) start Indicate system controls that adjust equip start time to match load conditions 0402.4.5.2 & OSA, exhaust, and relief arc Indicate location of outdoor air supply intake, and exhaust and relief outlet dampers; verify M3.0 yes C403.2.4.4 dampers p Class 1 leakage rating and control motorized or rev 9 9 type ( gravity); note exceptions taken no 0402.4.5.2 Retum air dampers Indicate location of return air dampers that are integral to economizer operation; verify motorized control and Class 1 leakage rating; note exception taken no 0402.4.5.1 Stairway and shaft vents Indicate location of stairway and shaft vents, verity Class 1 leakage rated motorized dampers and method of activation no C403.2.11 Heating outside a building Indicate radiant heat system and occupancy controls no C403.2.4.5 Snow melt systems Indicate shut-off controls based on outdoor conditions no C403.2.4.6 Combustion heating equipment Indicate modulating or staged control no C403.2.4.7 Group R1 hotel/motel Indicate method for guest room temperature automatic setback (heating) & set-up (cooling), systems confirm adjustment of at least 5°F minimum. no 403.2.4,8 / E Group R2/R3 dwelling and Indicate 5-2 programmable thermostats in primary spaces with minimum of two setback sleeping unit systems periods and 10'F deadband; note exceptions taken yes 0403.2.5:1 ventilation Demand controlled Indicate high -occupancy spaces and systems requiring DCV M2,0 na C403.2.5.2 Occupancy sensors Indicate spaces requiring occupancy -based system control and method; or aftemats means 18 rovided to autDmaticall reduce OSA when partially occupied 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 2012 Washington State Enemv Code Comnlianra Fnrms fnr rn—mini RniBtinna inM, ,dinn 00 A as — 2 +nA. —A �u o, Project Address Burfington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechanicial systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location in Building Department Documents Notes GENERAL PROVISIONS, CONTINUED HVAC System Controls & Criteria, Continued na 0403.2.5.3 Enclosed loading docktparking garage Indicate enclosed loadingdock and enclosed parking P g garage ventilation system activation and ventilation control method na C403.2.5.4.1 Kitchen exhaust hoods Indicate kitchen hoods requiring make-up air; indicate make-up air source and conditioning method na C403.2.5.4.2 Laboratory exhaust systems Indicate lab exhaust systems requiring heat recovery, method & efficiency; or aftemative method taken (VAV, semi -conditioned makeup, or CERM calculation) na C403.2.6.1 Energy recovery (ER) - ventilation systems Indicate ventilation systems requiring ER, method & efficiency; note exceptions na 0403.2.6.2 Energy recovery (ER) - condensate systems indicate on-site steam heating systems requiring energy recovery na C403.2.6.3 Energy recovery (ER) - coolert6eezer condensers Indicate remote refrig. condensers requiring ER and use of captured energy na C403.4.6 Energy recovery (ER) - Indicate condenser systems requiring ER to pre -heat service water, indicate ER effectiveness; condenser systems note exceptions taken na 04032.12 Variable flow control - Indicate fan and pump motors a 7.5 hp and the method of variable flow control (VSD or fanstpumps equivalent controls) na C403.2.12.1 Variable flow control - heat Indicate heat rejection equipment and cooling tower fans requiring variable flow control and rejection equipment method Indicate single zone fan systems requiring airflow reduction capability in response to reduced na C403.2.12.2 Large volume fan systems cooling or heating demand in a zone, or adjacent zones without separating walls, with > 10,000 CFM supply air, note exceptions taken na C403.2.12.2 Single zone AC systems Indicate method of cooling demand -based fan control for air conditioning systems > 110,000 Btu/h serving single zones na C403.2.4.10 DDC system capabilities Identify all DDC system input/output control points and indicate capability for trending and demand res onse se int ad ustment Ducting Systems C403.2.7A & y" Indicate all ductwork constructed and sealed per IMC, C402.4 leakage requirements and IBC Duct construction C403.2.7.3 vapor retarder requirements M2.0 yes 403.2.7.3.1- Duct pressure class'if'ications Identify location of low, medium and high pressure ductwork on plans M2.0 na C403.2.7.3.3 High pressure duct leakage Indicate high pressure dud leakage testing requirements on plans; provide test results to test jurisdiction when completed yes C403.2.7.1 ! 2 Duct insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on ductwork M2.0 Piping Systems na C403.2.8 Piping insulation Indicate R -value of insulation on piping na C403.2.8.1 Piping insulation exposed to weather Indicate method of protection from damageldegredation SIMPLE SYSTEMS Qualifying Systems yes 040333 Qualifying single zone Verify unitary or packaged equipment does not exceed capacity limits, does not have active systems humidification or simultaneous heating/cooling na C403.3 Qualifying 2 -pipe heating systems Verify 2 -pipe heating -only system does not exceed capacity limits na C403.3.2 Hydronic system controls Refer to Complex Systems Section 0403.4.3 Simple System Economizers yes 0403.3.1 Air economizer required Indicate cooling systems requiring economizer controls; note in equipment schedule M20 no C403.3.1 Air economizer exceptions Indicate eligible exception(s) taken and provisions to comply with exception(s) yes C403.3.1.1.1 Air economizer capacity indicate modulating OSA control capability up to 100% OSA; note exceptions taken M2.0 yes Integrated 0403.3.1.1.2 air economizer indicate capability for partial air economizer operation for systems with capacity > 65,000 Btuih operation M2.0 yes C403.3.1.1.3 Air economizer high limit controls Indicate high limit shutoff control method per Table 0403.3.1.1.3(2) M2.0 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Permit'.•- 3 of 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Aug 2015 Project Address Burlington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for comptiance with the mechaniciai systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location In Building Department Documents Notes COMPLEX SYSTEMS Complex System Economizers yes 0403.4.1 Air economizer required Indicate cooling systems requiring economizer controls; note in equipment schedule M2.0 no C403.4.1 Air economizer exceptions Indicate eligible exception(s) taken and provisions to comply with exception(s) no C403.4.1.1 Water economizer capacity For eligible systems where water economizer may be provided in lieu of air economizer, indicate system Is capable of 100% cooling capacity at 50°F db/45°F wb OSA no C403.4.1.2 Water economizer Indicate precooling coils and heat exchangers in water economizer system do not exceed maximum pressure drop pressure drop limit no C403.4.1.3 Integrated economizer operation indicate capability for partial economizer operation for air or water economizer systems no C403.4A .4Economizer heating system Verify control method of HVAC systems with economizers does not increase building heating Impact energy usage during normal operation Specific System Requirements no C403.4.2 & C403.2.12 VAV fan control Indicate fans requiring variable flow control and method no 0403.4.2.1 VAV fan stalk pressure Indicate sensor locations on lens; include at least one sensor P per major duct branch sensors no ' 0403.4.2.2 JVAV fan stalk pressure setpo(nt Indicate fan system static pressure setpoint based on zone requiring most pressure no C403.4.5 VAV systems serving Indicate supply air systems serving multiple zones, method of primary air control, and zones multiple zones served; Indicate VAV or note exceptions taken no C403.4.5 VAV systems serving For each air system terminal, indicate the maximum air flow rate of primary supply air during multiple zones zone peak cooling and the maximum air flow rates during zone peak heating. no C403.4.5.4 VAV system supply air reset Indicate controls that automatically reset supply air temp in response to loads no 0403.4 Large capacity cooling Indicate method of mufti -stage or variable control for building cooling system capacity > 300 systems tons no C403.4.7 Hot gas bypass limitation Indicate cooling equipment unloading or capacity modulation method no C403.4.3 Large capacity boiler systems indicate multi -stage or modulating burner for single boilers > 500,000 Btu/h no C403.4.3 Boiler sequencing Indicate automatic controls that sequence operation of multiple boilers no 0403.4.3.5 Chiller / boiler plant pump Indicate capability to automatically reduce overall plant flow and shut-off flow through chillers & g isolation boilers when not in use 0403.4.3.6 & Variable flow control - no C403.2.12 pumps Indicate pumps requiring variable flow control & method 0 Variable flow control - no & 0403.4.4 0403.4.4 cooling towers Indicate cooling tower fans requiring variable flow control and method no C403.4.3.4 Hydronic system part load Indicate heating & chilled water systems have the capability to automatically reset supply water controls temp AND reduce flow by 2 50% for systems > 300.000 Btu/h no C403.4.3.2 Two -pipe changeover indicate systems deadband, heating/cooling mode scheduling and changeover temperature range no C403.4.3.3.1 Water bop heat pump - Indicate capability of central equipment to provide min. 207 water supply temp deadband deadband between heat rejection and heat addition modes no 0403.4.3.3.2.1 heat Water loop heat pump - indicate rejection, Zone 4 method used to limit system heat loss when heat rejections is not needed no C403.4.3.3.2.2 heat Water bop heat pump - rejection, Zone 5 Provide heat exchanger that separates cooling tower and heat pump loop no C403.C3.3.3 Water loop heat pump - Indicate 2 -way isolation valve on each heat pump and variable flow control for systems with isolation total pump power > 10 hp no C403.5 anti Walk-in cooler / freezer - Indicate -sweat heaters wlsf & control method for walk-in cooler/freezer door anti -sweat heaters no C403.5 / 6 Cooler and / freezer - evaporato indicate condenser fans motor type for evaporator and condenser fans < 1 hp 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Mechanical Permit ' - 2012 Washnnolon State Enemv Cafe Comniianep Fnrms fnr Cnmm—im RuiMrinn- i—i,. ri.,,. o-3 k o -A -- -.-Z - . ,, o, Project Address Burlington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 The following information is necessary to check a permit application for compliance with the mechaniciai systems and equipment requirements of the Washington State Energy Code, Commercial Provisions. Applicable (yes,no,na) Code Section Code Provision Information Required - Must be in permit documents Location inFBuildi-ingepartment Documentstes SERVICE WATER HEATING Service Water Systems yes C404,2 Water -heating equip min. Provide equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency, test standard or other efficiency efficiency source P1.2 yes C404.3 Temperature controls Indicate temperature controls have required setpoint capability P1.2 na C404.4 Heat traps Indicate piping connected to equipment have heat traps on supply & discharge yes C404.5 Insulation underwater heater Indicate R-10 insulation under electric water heater tanks P1.2 yes C404.6 Service water piping insulation indicate R -value of insulation on piping; note exceptions taken P1.2 na C4p4,7 / 8 Circulation systems and heat trace shut-off Indicate shut-off capability based on occupancy Panc Y and Periods of limited demand na C404.9 Group R-2 service hot water Indicate method of usage metering for dwelling units served by a central service hot water meters system Pools & In -Ground Permanently Installed Spas na C404.10.1 die eating equip min. Provide equipment schedule with type, capacity, efficiency, test standard or other efficiency Y source na C404.10.1 J 2 Pool heater on I off controls Indicate automatic ordolfcontrol based on scheduling & accessible on/off switch on heater that operates independent of thermostat setting; note exceptions taken na C404.10.3 Pool covers Indicate vapor retardant cover and insulation rating as required Ire C404.10.3 Pool assembly insulation indicate rating of insulation on sides and bottom of pools heated to > 90°F na C404.10.4 Heat recovery Indicate method, exhaust air temperature reduction and recovered energy use; note exceptions taken COMMISSIONING Specific System Requirements no C408.2 Mechanical systems Indicate all mechanical systems to be commissioned; for those that will not be commissioned, commissioning note exception taken no C408.4 Service water heating Indicate all service water heating systems to be commissioned; for those that will not be systems commissioning commissioned, note exception taken no C408.1.1 Commissioning plan Provide commissioning pian for all systems requiring commissioning; include in plan a8 required items per this section no C408.2.2.1 & Air system and hydronic Include in commissioning plan that air and hydronic systems shall be balanced in a manner to C408.2.2.2 system balancing first minimae throttling losses, then adjust to meet design flow conditions yes C408,2,2.1 Air system balancing Indicate devices that provide the capability to balance all supply air outlets, zone terminals and devices equipment requiring system balancing M1.0 na C408.2.2.2 Hydronic system balancing Indicate devices that provide the capability to isoiate, balance and measure flow for all devices hydronic equipment requiring system balancing no 6408.2.3 Mechanical systems functional performance Provide description of functional erformance testin P P 9 Procedures for all applicable systems testing including: equipment, controls, economizers no C408.4.1 Service water heating functional performance Provide description of functional Performance testing procedures for all applicable systems testing including: equipment, controls, pools and spas no C408.1.4 Systems operation training Indicate required systems operation training measures to be provided no 0408.1.2 & Documentation Indicate required documentation including; record documents, manuals, balancing reports, C403.1.3 commissioning preliminary and final reports no C408.1.2.1 Acceptance report Indicate that Commissioning Compliance Checklist (Figure C408.1.2.1) is required upon coin letion of ereliminary commissioning report 2012 Washington State Energy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Mechanical Fan System Power 2012 Washinoton State Enerav Code Compliance Forms for Commercial Buildinas includino R2 & R3 over 3 stnrips and add R1 RPviaPrd Ai n MIR Project Info Project Address: Burlington Coat Factory Date 1/1/2015 17480 Southcenter Parkway For Building Dept. Use Tukwila, WA 98188 Applicant Name: Fill this line out on MECH-SUM Applicant Address: Fill this line out on MECH-SUM Applicant Phone: Fill this line out on MECH-SUM HVAC Air Distribution System Schedule List all HVAC systems that have the capability to provide heating and/or cooling to the spaces they serve. Fan System ID Speed Control (Note 1) Description System Total Nameplate HP (Note 2) Fan Power Calculation (Note 3) RTU -1 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -2 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -3 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -4 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -5 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -6 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 3.3 No RTU -7 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 1 No RTU -9 CV Packaged rooftop gasldx 1 No Note 1 - Constant Volume (CV), Variable Air Volume (VAV), or Hospital/Lab CV system that qualifies for VAV budget per C403.2.10.1 Exception 1. Single zone VAV systems shall comply as CV. Note 2 - Enter the total nameplate hp of all fans associated with the delivery and removal of conditioned air by the system. Include all supply, retum/relief, exhaust and exhaust hoods (>I hp), make-up air, dedicated outside air (DOAS), booster fans, and series fan -powered terminals. VAV parallel fan -powered terminals and economizer relief fans do not need to be included if the fans do not operate at peak conditions. Note 3 - Indicate if MECH-FANSYS form is required (Yes), or the system is not required to provide this information because it has a combined total nameplate motor hp less than 5 hp (< 5 hp) or the system is ventilation only and thus has no heating or cooling capacity (No). MECH-FANSYS Forms A MECH-FANSYS form shall be provided for each system with total nameplate hp greater than 5 hp. Select (Add Fan System Form) to generate an additional form. Added forms can be deleted with button in cell E38 of the added 2012 Washington State Enerqy Code Compliance Forms for Commercial. Grow R1, and > 3 story R2 and R3 Design Load Calculation 2012 Washington State Energy Code Com liance Forms for Commercial Buildings including R2 & R3 over 3 stories and all R1 Revised Aug 2015 Project Info The following information shall be included in the load calculation program summary submitted with the permit documents. If a load calculation summary is not available, provide the required information below. Project Address: Applicant Name: Applicant Address: Applicant Phone: Burlington Coat Factory 17480 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 Fill this line out on MECH-SUM Fill this line out on MECH-SUM Fill this line out on MECH-SUM Date 1/1/2015 For Building Dept. Use Equip. ID Area(s) Served Heating Design Load - Btu/h (Note 1) Cooling Design Load - Btu/h (Note Calculation Method 1) (Note 2) Notes RTU -1 Retail 200 150 Elite RTU -2 Retail 200 150 Elite RTU -3 Retail 200 150 Elite RTU -4 Retail 200 150 Elite RTU -5 Retail 200 150 Elite RTU -6 Retail 200 150 Elite i inng, Toilet, RTU -7 Storage, Frttti 100 60 Elite RTU -9 Retail, Office 100 60 Elite Note 1 - Design load shall account for the building envelope, lighting, ventilation and occupancy loads of the space(s) served by the mechanical system. Heating and cooling loads shall be adjusted to account for load reduction achieved by an energy recovery system, if applicable. Note 2 - Computer load calculation program, worksheet (identify source), or equivalent computation procedure in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 183. BILE STRUCTURAL CALCULATIONS 15-193-01 Burlington Coat Factory TI 17480 Southcenter Parkway Tukwila, WA 98188 for JJW Architects and Planners REVIEWED FOR 12/23/15 00DE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 8 2016 �O 0 _ City of Tukwila BUILDING 01VISION 423 �2k G�URAL EAG �,�w �r SIGNAL ti�G Page 1 of 55 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER 1201 First Avenue South, Suite 310 1 Seattle, Washington 98134 1 206-402-5156 1 www.lundopsahl.com rr�r t� Ii Project shRaae 2 of 55 Subject Client P3ge Na Designer Date w r,dundopsahl.com i Tel: 206.402.5156 tiO A /- er eofi� 4zevoo ,* AVAO U/✓T-�O.' '! /tr ' j ,N //Ti�O I i i a , Ac;f -16 a p � laxj ,,eV V2-) r Prom shftae 4 of 55 Arent Page No Designer Da2e r.ww.lundopsahl.com I Tel:206.402.5156 f�o�x 4�-eloklvvl— 0140011�* ..$ /05 -Ir ZoAW /-4 7,-,%, 4 f r i f4 - ls�� 45;1 s /7 L �vX 6 or -511P. (E) ROOF 11-011 Page 4 of 55 SS 4X2X1/4 (A500 R B) STRONG ACK OFFSET 16" ROM EACH SIDE OF PENING 5X5/16 (A36) -EL EXTEND ,T OPENING 8" SIDE NING PER PLAN S-SK-ol Page 5 of 55 (E) CMU PER PLAN LINTEL PER PLAN 5/8" DIAMETER X 4" THREADED ROD (36KS1) @ 16" O.C. W/ HILTI HY 70 EPDXY INTO BOND BEAM, IF BOND BEAM IS NOT PRESENT PROVIDE SCREEN TUBE AND INSTALL PER MANUFACTURES RECCOMENDATIONS S -SK -04 Project 9411taep R of 55 Client Page No. Designer Date wi-w.lundopsahl.com I Tel:206.402.5156 \/,-, el kil 11 1-1 or gr., AIje f5 A r1i ;71e- 10 .yP vzz ra )� 1 CIOVII v c)- Ua- 40h�o iia C 3 SIDE ....................................... •,•••••• v.vr.,v.vr.vrnv.,v. . . . .•.•- ar.y!.�•!.w_vr_,v.�• •,•,•,• vr.vr.vr.,v.,v.vr.v . . . ' •'•"•'•' iv:{•r:ib:vr:i•iSv:v' .'.'. .�!;vi:}i'1{:J!:}'!:}� . .. .. xwnvnvnv.viai: ... v.w i %,•in•r.vr, .. . v.,•r.vr. !,� !_vr.vr.• ... '.!e?]!e?] , �:iv.vi.,v. ' V:i............. ............. Page 7 of 55 'LAN L4X4X1/4"XO-4" (A36) EA SIDE @a 48"O.C. AMETER X 6" )THREADED C HILTI HY 70 INSTALLED CENTEREDINTO BOND BEAM '.'.'.'. :'i:w:w:i•i:vi:w:vi: '.'.'. vi:vi:vr:��!•.yi:vr:v! •.•... 'ri:i°i:iv.,v.vr•}' :. !: ... i•i:�•i:J!:�°!:Jh°!:a'r •.rr;vr.}'tn°!.ve. ° y ' i:�'i;vi_i%i;}�� vi;i ; •;.; •;. •rnv.,•ii�r:vr:j:: !: '.'.'. r i%liv:i-!:i•!:Li:i•i vr. r.�•r.�•!.vr.vr. �• r.vr.i'!;�'in•i.yi.v!.} ;.,.;..................... (E) CMU PER PLAN HSS PER PLAN S -SK -02 ........................................ ........................................ ...............................I........ ........................................ ........................................ \. ........:..................... ............................... . /.\'/.,'/. 1/4" 5/16"X4"X8" PL Page 8 of 55 (E) CMU PER PLAN ....................................... ........................................ ....................................... ........................................ ....................................... ....................................... ....................................... ........ I ................ I ............ .................................. ........................................ ......,. ... .............................................................. . 5/8" DIAMETER X 3" O (36KS1) THREADED ROD W/ HILTI HY 200 EPDXY HSS PER PLAN S -SK -03 Page 9 of 55 "ASCE710W.xls" Program Version 1.0 WIND LOADING ANALYSIS - Wall Components and Cladding Per ASCE 7-10 Code for Buildings of Any Height Using Part 1 & 3: Analytical Procedure Section 30.4 & 30.6 Job Name: Burlington Coat Factory I Subject: lWind Load Job Number: 15-193-01 1 Oriqinator: 1EAE I Checker: 1AS Wind Speed, V = Bldg. Classification = Exposure Category = Ridge Height, hr = Eave Height, he = Building Width = Building Length = Roof Type = Topo. Factor, Kzt = Direct. Factor, Kd = Enclosed? (Y/N) Hurricane Region? Component Name = Effective Area, Ae = 110 II B 30.00 30.00 165.00 250.00 Gable 1.00 0.85 Y N Wall 10 mph (Wind Map, Figure 26.5 -1A -C) (Table 1.5-1 Risk Category) (Sect. 26.7) ft. (hr >= he) ft. (he <= hr) ft. (Normal to Building Ridge) ft. (Parallel to Building Ridge) (Gable or Monoslope) (Sect. 26.8 & Figure 26.8-1) (Table 26.6) (Sect. 28.6-1 & Figure 26.11-1) (Girt, Siding, Wall, or Fastener) ft.^2 (Area Tributary to C&C) Resulting Parameters and Coefficients: Roof Angle, 0 =1 0.00 Ideg. Mean Roof Ht.,h=l 30.00 Ift. (h =he, for roof angle <=10 deg.) hr L Plan eO hhe L Elevation Wall External Pressure Coefficients, GCp: GCp Zone 4 Pos. = 0.90 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg GCp Zone 5 Pos. = 0.90 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg GCp Zone 4 Neg. _ -0.99 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg GCp Zone 5 Neg. _ -1.26 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg Positive & Negative Internal Pressure Coefficients, GCpi (Figure 26.11-1): +GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (positive internal pressure) -GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (negative internal pressure) If z <= 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(1 5/z^(2/a) , If z > 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(z/zg)^(2/(X) (Table 30.3-1) a = 7.00 (Table 26.9-1) (Note: z not < 30' for Exp. B, Case 1) zg = 1200 (Table 26.9-1) Kh =11 (Kh = Kz evaluated at z = h) Pressure: qz = 0.00256*Kz*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (Sect. 30.3.2, Eq. 30.3-1) qh = 18.45 psf qh = 0.00256*Kh*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (qz evaluated at z = h) Design Net External Wind Pressures (Sect. 30.4 & 30.6): For h - 60 ft.: p = qh*((GCp) - (+/-GCpi)) (psf) For h > 60 ft.: p = q*(GCp) - qi*(+/-GCpi) (psf) where: q = qz for windward walls, q = qh for leeward walls and side walls qi = qh for all walls (conservatively assumed per Sect. 30.6) 1 of 3 12/23/2015 11:54 AM Page 10 of 55 "ASCE710W.xls" Program Version 1.0 Wind Load Tabulation for Wall Components & Cladding Component z ft. Kh qh s p= Net Design Pressures s Zone 4 + Zone 4 - Zone 5 + Zone 5 - Wall For z = hr: For z = he: For z = h: 0 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 10.00 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 20.00 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 30.00 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 30.00 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 30.00 0.70 18.45 19.92 -21.58 19.92 -26.56 Notes: 1. (+) and (-) signs signify wind pressures acting toward & away from respective surfaces. 2. Width of Zone 5 (end zones), 'a'.= 1 12.00 Ift. 3. Per Code Section 30.2.2, the minimum wind load for C&C shall not be less than 16 psf. 4. References : a. ASCE 7-10, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". b. "Guide to the Use of the Wind Load Provisions of ASCE 7-02" by: Kishor C. Mehta and James M. Delahay (2004). 2 of 3 12/23/2015 11:54 AM ME-, US GSDesign Maps Summary Report User -Specified Input Report Title Burlington Coat Factory Thu December 17, 2015 21:11:04 UTC Building Code Reference Document 2012 International Building Code (which utilizes USGS hazard data available in 2008) Site Coordinates 47.445420N, 122.25951°W Site Soil Classification Site Class D - "Stiff Soil" Risk Category I/II/III R£N T ON Issaquah - Vashort Buden, '- .Renton SEAM, t' TACOMA W71 AVAN'7 ' Maple Valley �. 11 Des Moines, 1 II" , Xent AEOURN USGS-Provided Output Ss = 1.441 g Sh,s = 1.441 g Sos = 0.961 g S1 = 0.537 g SM1 = 0.805 g Sol = 0.537 g ovington ,H o Ce Page 11 of 55 For information on how the SS and S1 values above have been calculated from probabilistic (risk -targeted) and deterministic ground motions in the direction of maximum horizontal response, please return to the application and select the "2009 NEHRP" building code reference document. MCER Response Spectrum 1.65 1.50 1.35 1.20 1.05 w r 0.90 H 0.75 0.60 0.45 0.30 0.15 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.90 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 Period. T (sec) 1.10 1.00-- 0.30-- 0.10 .000.900.10 0.00 0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40 1.60 1.80 2.00 Period. T (sec) Design Response Spectrum Although this information is a product of the U.S. Geological Survey, we provide no warranty, expressed or implied, as to the �OCf�X2� LAA" (00 0.11 BOND BEAM LAO= iUB-PURI. (E) 4x1h JOIST 8), cm " NEW 51MPSON LOB TIE rot EACH JOIST WA L ro wP4 # ANCHOR HILTI HIT C -Wo EPDXY (. 6o A TYP. TIE OF EXISTING JOIST TO N CMU =1'-0" --.'w �,� id�K �oA� y17 `Ni ol*/VrNb two BEAM SPL k 0 t OF GMIJ PIER a D BOLTS Mo%W4 REF. f4 PLAN -BASE fE 46xl%x3'-4" u, !4) o A.B.14 LONG SLOTTEI HOLES f2PBOTTOM_,_�4A BEAM FOR LT HEAD 1iV2" NON-SWRR G 1 ROUT x 8�� CM PIER, SOLID GROUTED TYP. GL BEAM TO CMU PIER Aj so lie f� 14 f 4 of 55 Beam: MI Shape: HSS6X6X3 Material: A500 Gr.46 Length: 24 ft 1 Joint: N1 J Joint: N2 LC 2: D+,755+.75W Code Check: 0.909 (bending) Report Based On 97 Sections 19.725 at 0 ft A __ k 14.55 at 14.25 ft Dy in -1.122 at12.5ft .628 at 0 ft VY k -.879 at 14 ft Dz vz k Mzk-ft T k -ft 11F I My k -ft ,8.795 at 14 ft 4.95 at 0 ft fa ksi 3.651 at 14.25 ft 14.188 at 14 ft fc A&L ksi A/SC 13th ASD Code Check ft ksi -14.188 at 14 ft Max Bending Check Location 0.909 Max Shear Check 0.028 (y) Equation 14 ft H1 -1a Location Max Defl Ratio 14 ft L/257 Bending Flange Bending Web Non -Compact Compression Flange Compact Non -Slender Compression Web Non -Slender Fy 46 ksi Pnc/om 40.438 It Y_Y Z_Z Lb 24 ft Pnt/om 109.768 k Mny/om 18.556 k -ft 24 ft KL/r 121.706 121.706 Sway No Mnz/om 18.556 k -ft No Vny/om 31.567 k L Comp Flange 24 ft Vnz/om 31.567 k Torque Length NC Tn/om 16.273 k -ft Cb 1.387 3/4" x7.625x5' " Seat Plate (E) Beam Splice -� L4x4x1 /4 CENTERED TYP EACH SIDE 3/16" (E) GLB Beam DEMO CMU PER ARCH Page 15 of 55 3/16"X8" X 5'-0"S I D E PLATE WITH 1" DIA. BOLTS (USE EXSTING HOLES) HSS 6x6x3/16 UND SAHL 1401 Rnt Avomw South. Suit* 910 Seattle. Washington 88194 208-4025158 wwwlundopsohl.com Project Project No. Date Reference Scale Page 16 of 55 (E) GLB (E) BEAM SPLICE CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM (E) BEAM SPLICE/BUCKET (SHOWN DASHED) W/ ENGR. PRIOR TO PROCEEDING i NEW WELDED BUCKET 1/4" PLATE STEEL HSS 10X6X114" 3EAM (�4A SADDLE DETAIL "A" -05/8.1 A6.0 SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" ISEE S -SK -051 TYP 3/16" L4x4x 1 /4 (A36) CENTERED TYP EACH SIDE TYP 3/16" / TY (E (F DEMO CMU PER ARCH Page 17 of 55 (E) GLB Beam (E) Beam Splice 3/16"X8" X 7'-0"SID E PLATE (A36) WITH 1" DIA. BOLTS (36KS1) (USE EXSTING HOLES) 3/4"x7.625x5'-0" Seat Plate 0 0 1 �1 HSS PER PLAN NCC PFR PI AAI RESESSED 1 /2"x10X10 PLATE (A36) W/ (4) 1/2" KWIK BOLT TZ W/ 3-1/4" EMBED, 1.5" EDGE DIST \-I .DOTING S -SK -05 [Mi I wi-wl www.hilti.us Profis Anchor 2.6.2 Company: Lund Opsahl Page: 1 Specifier: A Slivers Project: Burlington Coat Tukwila Address: 1201 1 st Ave S Sub -Project I Pos. No.: 15-193-01 Phone I Fax: 206402-51556 1 Date: 12/18/2015 E -Mail: Specifier's comments: HSS Baseplate 1 Input data Anchor type and diameter: Kwik Bolt TZ - CS 1/2 (3 1/4) -- Effective embedment depth: het = 3.250 in., h„om = 3.625 in. Material: Carbon Steel Evaluation Service Report: ESR -1917 Issued I Valid: 10/1/2015 15/1/2017 Proof: Design method ACI 318 / AC193 Stand-off installation: without clamping (anchor); restraint level (anchor plate): 2.00; eb = 1.181 in.; t = 0.500 in. Hilti Grout: CB -G EG, epoxy, fc,Grout = 14939 psi Anchor plate: Ix x ly x t = 10.000 in. x 10.000 in. x 0.500 in.; (Recommended plate thickness: not calculated Profile: Square HSS (AISC); (L x W x T) = 6.000 in. x 6.000 in. x 0.500 in. Base material: cracked concrete, 3000, fc' = 3000 psi; h = 16.000 in. Reinforcement: tension: condition B, shear: condition B; no supplemental splitting reinforcement present edge reinforcement: none or < No. 4 bar Seismic loads (cat. C, D, E, or F) no Geometry [in.] & Loading [lb, in.lb] Z' 0 Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Anchor ( c ) 2003-2009 Hilti AG, FL -9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan www.hilti.us L"i I wi-wl Profis Anchor 2.6.2 Company: Lund Opsahl Page: 2 Specifier: A Slivers Project: Burlington Coat Tukwila Address: 1201 1 st Ave S Sub-Project I Pos. No.: 15-193-01 Phone I Fax: 206-402-51556 1 Date: 12/18/2015 E-Mail: 2 Proof I Utilization (Governing Cases) Loading Proof Shear Steel failure (with lever arm) Design values ]Ib] Utilization Load Capacity ON / PV I%] Status 250 699 -/36 OK Loading SN PV Utilization PN,y 1%] Status Combined tension and shear loads 3 Warnings • Please consider all details and hints/warnings given in the detailed report! Fastening meets the design criteria! 4 Remarks; Your Cooperation Duties • Any and all information and data contained in the Software concern solely the use of Hilti products and are based on the principles, formulas and security regulations in accordance with Hilti's technical directions and operating, mounting and assembly instructions, etc., that must be strictly complied with by the user. All figures contained therein are average figures, and therefore use -specific tests are to be conducted prior to using the relevant Hilti product. The results of the calculations carried out by means of the Software are based essentially on the data you put in. Therefore, you bear the sole responsibility for the absence of errors, the completeness and the relevance of the data to be put in by you. Moreover, you bear sole responsibility for having the results of the calculation checked and cleared by an expert, particularly with regard to compliance with applicable norms and permits, prior to using them for your specific facility. The Software serves only as an aid to interpret norms and permits without any guarantee as to the absence of errors, the correctness and the relevance of the results or suitability for a specific application. • You must take all necessary and reasonable steps to prevent or limit damage caused by the Software. In particular, you must arrange for the regular backup of programs and data and, if applicable, carry out the updates of the Software offered by Hilti on a regular basis. If you do not use the AutoUpdate function of the Software, you must ensure that you are using the current and thus up-to-date version of the Software in each case by carrying out manual updates via the Hilti Website. Hilti will not be liable for consequences, such as the recovery of lost or damaged data or programs, arising from a culpable breach of duty by you. Input data and results must be checked for agreement with the existing conditions and for plausibility! PROFIS Anchor (c ) 2003-2009 Hilti AG, FL -9494 Schaan Hilti is a registered Trademark of Hilti AG, Schaan T 0 of 55 00 --c r%LVIVIIIVVIVI DIVV\L IVIL IML FINISH TO MATCH AUTOMATIC DOOR AUTOMATIC ENTRY DOOR JAMB SCALE: 1 1/2" = l'-0" s � TUBE STEEL COLUMN BASE PLATE A6.0 % SCALE: 1112" = 1'-0" Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: 1lt®d? M n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington User Defined Curtain Wall Layout 7in Cntia_- ARI-11Ay 21 .333 (Ibs) 6 (ft) 14 (ft) Dead Load 9 Ibs) 14 (ft) Seismic Load Gross Section Properties: Ix major (in4) 2.861 Sx (major) in3) 0.954 rx (major) in 2.268 I minor) (in4) 0.18 S minor) (in3) 0.149 ry minor in 0.57 Area int 0.556 Xo in -1.049 J x 1000 (in4) 0.594 Cw (in6) 1.337 Ro in 2.563 Weight lbs/ft 1.893 Wall InMrmatinn 6 (ft) 14 (ft) Live Load 6 (ft) 14 (ft) Snow/Roof Live Load Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S 100-07/ S2-10 Design Method ASD Wall Height (ft) 20 Stud Spacing (in) 16 6 (ft) N 14 (ft) Wind Load 1.625 0.085 0.5 0.057 6005162-54mil, 50 ksi Material Pronerties: F ksi 50 Fu ksi 65 E ksi 29500 G (kso 11300 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 118 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Vf®de M n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington lin QR14d User Defined Curtain Wall Layout (nrin• Allowable HI. Deflection L i Absolute Deflection (in) Dead Load (lbs/ft) Wall Own Weight (ps1) Max. Bridainp Spacing (ft) Deflection calculation method at parapet free end Span Loads: Span Wind Load s 1 20.42 2 0 Bracing Data: 0 0 0 Relative value considered Lateral Bracing (in) @ Bridging Spacing Torsional Bracing (in) Full Ky Distortional Buckling Rotational Stiffness (Ibf-in.An.) 0 Reactions: Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in 1 -0.094 0 0 0 2 -0.181 0 0.213 0 3 -0.063 0 0 0 Unfactored Reactions: Load Case Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in Dead Load 1 0 0 0 Dead Load 2 0 0.213 0 Dead Load 3 0 0 0 Live Load 1 0 0 0 Live Load 2 0 0 0 Live Load 3 0 0 0 Wind Load 1 -0.157 0 0 Wind Load 2 -0.302 0 0 Wind Load 3 0.078 0 0 Seismic Load 1 0 0 0 Seismic Load 2 -0.09 0 0 Seismic Load 3 -0.09 0 0 Snow/Roof Live Load 1 0 0 0 Snow/Roof Live Load 2 0 0 0 Snow/Roof Live Load 3 0 0 0 Design Options: ° Section Layout Single ° Fastener Spacing (in) N/A ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered ° CMx 1 'Cb 1 ° Shear Coeff. Kv 5.34 ° X (in) 4 Note:Applied Members Loads are calculated from Wall Loads ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 218 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: VT®de OW N 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Zip Code: 98134 Joint Supports: Joint Loads: Joint Support Type # Load Case Axial Ibs Lateral Ibs M Ibs.ft 1 Hinged 3 Dead Load 213.333 0 0 2 Hinged 2 Seismic Load 0 90 0 3 Roller 3 Seismic Load 0 90 0 Member Loads: # Load Case Axial Lateral Moment X/L 1 Wind Load 0 (lbs/ft) 27.227 (lbs/ft) 0.0(lbs/ft) Uniform 2 Wind Load 0(lbs/ft) 0(lbs/ft) 0.0(lbs/ft) Uniform Load Combination Factors: # Dead Live Wind Seismic Snow/Roof Live Load Used For 1 1 0 0 0 0 Strength 2 1 1 0 0 0 Strength 3 1 0 0 0 1 Strength 4 1 0.75 0 0 0.75 Strength 5 1 0 0.6 0 0 Strength 6 1 0 0 0.7 0 Strength 7 1 - 0.75 0.45 0 0.75 Strength 8 1 0.75 0 0.525 0.75 Strength 9 0 0 0.6 0 0 Deflection 10 0 0 0 0.7 0 Deflection Capacity Check: Member Moment (kips.in) Shear (kips) Tension (kips) Compressior (kips) Hz. Def(ec)tion in Crippling (kips) Ixe (in4) 2.861 Actual 3.362 0.121 N/A N/A 0.097 N/A 1 Allowable 26.351 1.947 15.321 4.48 0.467 N/A Tension T Act./All. 0.128 0.062 * N/A N/A 0.208 N/A N/A X/L 1.000 0.940 N/A N/A N/A N/A X/L Actual 3.362 0.047 N/A 0.213 0.013 N/A 2 Allowable 26.351 1.947 15.321 4.48 0.2 N/A Shear V Act./All. 0.128 0.024 * N/A 0.048 * 0.066 N/A X/L 0.000 0.200 N/A 0.200 N/A N/A Use of Connections Clips Eliminates Need for Web Crippling Design Check * Forces are calculated for punched-out section Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Effective Section Properties: Member Value (M,V) Ae(Comp.) (in') 0.358 1 Sxe (in3) 0.954 (M,T) Ixe (in4) 2.861 M,P Fy Design (ksi) 55.316 Moment Mx Ae(Comp.) (inZ) 0.358 2 Sxe (in3) 0.954 Moment Mx Ixe (in4) 2.861 Moment Mx Fy Design (ksi) 55.316 Member Combined (M,V) Combined M,Pcr Combine (M,T) Combined M,P Moment Mx 3.362 Moment Mx N/A Moment Mx N/A Moment Mx N/A 1 Shear V -0.134 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension T N/A Com P N/A Act./All. 0.121 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A X/L 1.000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L N/A Moment Mx 3.362 1 Moment Mx N/A Moment Mx N/A Moment Mx 3.362 2 Shear V 0.047 Pcr (Crippling) N/A Tension T N/A Com P -0.213 Act./All. 0.112 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. 0.175 X/L 0.000 X/L N/A X/L N/A X/L 0.000 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 318 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: 1lf8d? DW n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington 7i.. f`n.dn• QA14d Y User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Connection Data: 1 Clip Data Clip Position Base Connection @ Wall F21 F1 F3 ° p Clip Type StiffClip AL600 Screws 2 (#12) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) 0.866 F2 (kips) 2.091 F3 (kips) 3.015 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 Actual Loads F1 (kips) 0.000 F2 (kips) 0.000 F3 (kips) -0.094 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.055 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.096 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • ° ° • Min. Penetration (in) 0.75 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.125 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.1 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.047 Actual Tension (kips) 0.015 Interaction Ratio 0.525 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 418 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Mtl? 9W n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Zi Code: 98134 2 Clip Data Clip Position Bypass Connection @ joint 2 F Fes' o • 0 • Clip Type StiffClip LB 1000 with 4" offset Screws 4 (#12)''' Allowable Loads F1 (kips) 0.532 F2 (kips) 1.062 F3 (kips) 1.192 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 Actual Loads F1 (kips) 0.000 F2 (kips) -0.181 F3 (kips) 0.213 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.159 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.349 Base Material Material Steel with fy >= 36 ksi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 Min. Penetration (in) 0.188 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 0.25 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 0.25 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 1 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 1 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.72 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.535 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.107 Actual Tension (kips) 0.39 Interaction Ratio 0.876 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 518 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: 11TOde, Meg M 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Zin Code: 98134 3 Clip Data Clip Position Head connection @ Wall F2 f � Inj x U Clip Type VertiClip SLD600 Screws 2 (#8) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.405 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Actual Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) -0.063 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.156 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 ills • Min. Penetration (in) 0.75 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.125 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.1 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.032 Actual Tension (kips) 0.02 Interaction Ratio 0.453 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 When more than one load affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. C Displayed actual & allowable are for one fastener. ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 618 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Vf®d? EYe(d n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington lin Cnrla• 9R13d y User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Bridging Data: ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 7/8 Type of Bridging Member Cold -Rolled Channel Bridge Spacing (ft) 5 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 16 Bridging Allowable Bending Moment (M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Member Actual Bending Moment (M1) (kips.in) 0.081 1 Allowable Axial Load (F1) (kips) 1.332 Actual Axial Load (F1) (kips) 0.000 Interaction Ratio N/A Type of Bridging Clip BridgeClip (1 Screw) Clip Data Bridging Clip Allowable Bending Moment (kips.in) 0.18 Bridging Clip Actual Bending Moment (kips.in) 0.081 Allowable Tension on Clip (kips) 0.075 Actual Tension on Clip (kips) 0.000 Clip Interaction Ratio N/A Allowable tension of #10 screws (kips) N/A Connection Actual tension on #10 screws (kips) N/A of Clip to Act./All. N/A Wall Stud Required quantity of #10 screws N/A Allowable shear of #10 screws (kips) 0.376 Connection Actual shear on #10 screws (kips) 0.000 of Clip to Bridging Act./All. N/A Member Required quantity of #10 screws 1 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 7/8 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Weds, OW n 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 CMU Veneer Wall Country: United States State: Washington User Defined Curtain Wall Layout Zi Code: 98134 2 Bridging Member Type of Bridging Member Cold -Rolled Channel i _'F1 �E f Fs M1 Bridge Spacing (ft) 5 Bridging Row Anchored @ (ft) 16 Allowable Bending Moment (M1)(kips.in) 1.23 Actual Bending Moment (M1) (kips.in) 0.000 Allowable Axial Load (F1) (kips) 1.332 Actual Axial Load (171) (kips) 0.026 Interaction Ratio N/A Clip Data Type of Bridging Clip BridgeClip (1 Screw) Bridging Clip Allowable Bending Moment (kips.in) 0.18 Bridging Clip Actual Bending Moment (kips.in) 0.000 Allowable Tension on Clip (kips) 0.075 Actual Tension on Clip (kips) 0.004 Clip Interaction Ratio N/A ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 818 Allowable tension of #10 screws (kips) N/A Connection Actual tension on #10 screws (kips) N/A of Clip to Act./All. N/A Wall Stud Required quantity of #10 screws N/A Allowable shear of #10 screws (kips) 0.376 Connection Actual shear on #10 screws (kips) 0.004 of Clip to Bridging Act./AII. 0.011 Member Required quantity of #10 screws 1 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 818 (E) CANOPY STRUCTURE 15 4'-0" (E) SOFFIT HT. PROVIDE COLD -ROLLED CHANNEL BRIDGING AT 4'-0" OC MAXIMUM WHERE STUDS ARE NOT Page 29 SHEATHED ON BOTH SIDES ATTACH NEW METAL STUDS TO BACK OF (E)18g STUDS @151-W A.F.F. WITH MIN 350T125-54 & 14'-0" (2) #12 SCREWS EA END 0 v NEW 4" SINGLE SCORE CMU VENEER SY" ANCHORED TO STUD WALL W/ SEE DUR-O-WALL, INC., D/A 213, SEISMIC SYSTEM TIES OR APPROVED EQUAL -PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT NEW STUD WALL AT CMU INFILL - 5/8" GWB OVER 6" 60OS162-54 (50 KSI) MTL STUDS SPACED 16" O.C. TO ROOF STRUCTURE R-19 BATT INSUL W/ VAPOR BARRIER NEW SINGLE -SCORE 4" CMU BLOCK INFILL AT LOCATION OF (E) DOORWAYS & STOREFRONT -PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT CMU PROVIDE $" DENSGLAS GOLD SHTG WITH 2 LAYERS (E) SLAB & BELOW -GRADE STRUCTURE kLL FASTEN TRACK WITH 0.157" DIA. HILTI X -U WITH 1 1/2" EMBEDMENT AT 8" OC Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Weak Bad 2B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South SuitlPIA&r above Main Entry Transon Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Design Data: Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S100-07/ S2-10 Design Method ASD Wall Data: Wall Height (ft) 20 Max. Bridging Spacing (ft) 5 Stud Spacing (in) 16 Horizontal Deflection L / 240 Header Vertical Deflection L / 240 Absolute Deflection (in) 1 Wind Load Distribution Two Ways Fixed in Header Wind Load Strength Factor 0.6 Wind Load Deflection Factor 0.42 Dead Load Strength Factor 1 Dead Load Deflection Factor 1 Deflection calculation method at parape free end N/A Bracing Data: Jamb Lateral Bracing (in) 48 Jamb Torsional Bracing (in) 48 Header Lateral Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Torsional Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Lateral Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) Full Header Torsional Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Distortional Buckling Rotational Stiffness (1 f-in.An.) 0.000 Desion Ontions: ° Section Layout Toe to Toe ° Fastener Spacing (in) Full Compatibility ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered ° CMx 1 'Cb 1 ° Shear Coeff. Kv 5.34 ° X (in) 4 ° Jamb Member Extends to Parapet N/A Dimensions ft: Span Jamb Height Door Height Door Width 1 20 14 16.1 Reactions: Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in 1 0.772 0 0 2 0.772 0 0 5 0.378 0.773 0 6 0.378 0.773 0 1 6 (ft) 3 14 (ft) Wind Load / Span (psf): 1 20.42 Dead Load / Span (lbs/ft): 1 1 96 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 -Version 7.0.0.183 Page 115 5 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: V®d�:Det 2B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South SuitHA9er above Main Entry Transon Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Unfactored Reactions: Load Case Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in Wind Load 1 1.287 0 0 Wind Load 2 1.287 0 0 Wind Load 5 0.629 0 0 Wind Load 6 0.629 0 0 Dead Load 1 0 0 0 Dead Load 2 0 0 0 Dead Load 5 0 0.773 0 Dead Load 6 0 0.773 0 Sections Data: Member Check: Span # Jamb Stud Section 2 x 6005200-54mil, 50 ksi Shear (kips) Tension (kips) Compression (kips) Track Section N/A 1 Header Horizontal Stud N/A 0.765 Horizontal Track N/A Closure Track 2 x 600T125-68, 50 ksi Vertical Stud 2 x 6005200-54mil, 33 ksi Jamb Vertical Track N/A Member Check: Span # Member Moment, Shear Moment ki s.in Shear (kips) Tension (kips) Compression (kips) Hz. Deflection in V.Deflection Crippling in (kips) -53.825 Mx Actual 53.825 0.765 N/A 0.773 0.917 N/A N/A 0.723 Jamb Allowable 58.229 3.895 34.321 10.681 1 N/A N/A 0.905 Act./All. Act./All. 0.924 * 0.196 * N/A 0.072 * 0.917 N/A N/A -45.733 Header Actual 47.639 0.986 N/A N/A 0.753 N/A N/A 1 Lateral Allowable 51.461 10.701 N/A N/A 0.805 N/A N/A 0.889 Elements Act./All. 0.926 0.092 N/A N/A 0.935 N/A N/A 35.833 Header Actual 37.326 0.693 N/A N/A N/A 0.741 N/A 0.155 Gravity Allowable 41.273 3.779 N/A N/A N/A 0.805 N/A 0.745 Elements Act./All. 0.904 * 0.183 * N/A N/A N/A 0.920 N/A Use of Connections Clips Eliminates Need for Web Crippling Design Check * Forces are calculated for punched-out section Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Span# Member Moment, Shear Moment, Crippling Moment, Tension Moment, Compression Mx -53.825 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx -53.825 Jamb VY 0.723 Pcr N/A T N/A P -0.773 Act./All. 0.905 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. 0.997 Header Mx -45.733 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx N/A 1 Lateral VY 0.197 Pcr1 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./All. 0.889 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Header My 35.833 My N/A My N/A My N/A Gravity Vx 0.155 Pcr2 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./AII. 0.745 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 215 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: WOO Ved 25 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South SuitlPlMer above Main Entry Transon Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Allowable Screws Loads: Span Attachment of Header to Jamb 1 Clip Type F2� �Fe F3 Allowable F1 (kips) 1.732 Allowable F2 kips 4.182 Allowable F3 kips 6.03 Actual F1 kis 0.000 Actual F2 (kips) 0.693 Actual F3 (kips) 0.986 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.329 o o Attachment to Jamb All. Screw Shear (kips) 9.669-0.534 -1011110111 N� All. Screw tension (kips) —9.42&-0. 158 Act. Screw Shear kis —G-.244-0.201 Act. Screw Tension (kips) —t -t43-0.107 Linear Interaction Ratio --9-98 0.944 F2 Screws Qty. Attachment to Header All. Screw Shear kis -- ^�-0.534 All. Screw tension (kips) ^�r0.158 Act. Screw Shear (kips) 0.247 Act. Screw Tension (kips) 0.173 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.928 F3 Screws Qty. 2 #12 USE (2) 54mil --_(16ga) ANGLE 1 1/2"xi 1/2"x4" USE (3) #12 SCREWS ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 315 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Wei Dgd 28 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South SuitPlAger above Main Entry Transon Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Connection Data: 1 Clip Data Clip Position Head Connection @ Jamb FZ Clip Type 2 x VertiClip SLD600 Screws 2 (#8) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.81 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Actual Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.772 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.953 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • o Min. Penetration (in) 1.5 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.42 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.325 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.193 Actual Tension (kips) 0.123 Interaction Ratio 0.839 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 ASI SteelSmart@) System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 415 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: 1/V@O god 2B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South SuitPlAger above Main Entry Transon Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door 2 Clip Data Clip Position Base Connection @ Jamb F21 F� F3 0 0 Clip Type StiffClip AL600 Screws 2 (#12) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) 0.866 F2 (kips) 2.091 F3 (kips) 3.015 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 Actual Loads F1 (kips) 0.000 F2 (kips) 0.000 F3 (kips) 0.378 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.219 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.385 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • • Min. Penetration (in) 1.25 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.31 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.28 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.189 Actual Tension (kips) 0.059 Interaction Ratio 0.820 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 c When more than one load affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. c Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. c Displayed actual & allowable are for one fastener. c The number of screws and fasteners are calculated for one clip. ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 515 Page 35 of 55 "ASCE710W.xls" Program Version 1.0 WIND LOADING ANALYSIS - Wall Components and Cladding Per ASCE 7-10 Code for Buildings of Any Height Using Part 1 & 3: Analytical Procedure Section 30.4 & 30.6 Job Name: 113urlington Coat Factory I Subject: lWind Load Job Number: 15-193-01 1 Oriqinator: 1EAE I Checker: 1AS Input Data: Wind Speed, V = Bldg. Classification = Exposure Category = Ridge Height, hr = Eave Height, he = Building Width = Building Length = Roof Type = Topo. Factor, Kzt = Direct. Factor, Kd = Enclosed? (Y/N) Hurricane Rere= Component NaEffective Area, 110 mph (Wind Map, Figure 26.5 -1A -C) (Table 1.5-1 Risk Category) (Sect. 26.7) ft. (hr >= he) ft. (he <= hr) ft. (Normal to Building Ridge) ft. (Parallel to Building Ridge) (Gable or Monoslope) (Sect. 26.8 & Figure 26.8-1) (Table 26.6) (Sect. 28.6-1 & Figure 26.11-1) II B 30.00 30.00 165.00 250.00 Gable 1.00 0.85 Y Vali ` (Birt Siding, Wall, or Fastener) 25 1 ft.^ (Area Tributary to C&C) hr Plan 00 fh The L Roof Angle, 8 = 0.00 deg. Elevation Mean Roof Ht., h = 30.00 ft. (h = he, for roof angle -10 deg.) Wall External Pressure Coefficients, GCp: GCp Zone 4 Pos. = 0.84 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg. ) GCp Zone 5 Pos. = 0.84 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle -10 deg. ) GCp Zone 4 Neg. _ -0.93 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg. ) GCp Zone 5 Neg. = -1.13 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg.) Positive & Negative Internal Pressure Coefficients, GCpi (Figure 26.11-1): +GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (positive internal pressure) -GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (negative internal pressure) If z <= 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(1 5/z^(2/a) , If z > 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(z/zg)^(2/a) (Table 30.3-1) a = 7.00 (Table 26.9-1) (Note: z not < 30' for Exp. B, Case 1) zg = 1200 (Table 26.9-1) Kh = 0.70 (Kh = Kz evaluated at z = h) Velocity Pressure: qz = 0.00256*Kz*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (Sect. 30.3.2, Eq. 30.3-1) qh = 18.45 psf qh = 0.00256*Kh*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (qz evaluated at z = h) Design Net External Wind Pressures (Sect. 30.4 & 30.6): For h <= 60 ft.: p = qh*((GCp) - (+/-GCpi)) (psf) For h > 60 ft.: p = q*(GCp) - qi*(+/-GCpi) (psf) where: q = qz for windward walls, q = qh for leeward walls and side walls qi = qh for all walls (conservatively assumed per Sect. 30.6) 1 of 3 12/18/2015 11:52 AM �I Plan 00 fh The L Roof Angle, 8 = 0.00 deg. Elevation Mean Roof Ht., h = 30.00 ft. (h = he, for roof angle -10 deg.) Wall External Pressure Coefficients, GCp: GCp Zone 4 Pos. = 0.84 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg. ) GCp Zone 5 Pos. = 0.84 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle -10 deg. ) GCp Zone 4 Neg. _ -0.93 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg. ) GCp Zone 5 Neg. = -1.13 (Fig. 30.4-1, GCp is reduced by 10% for roof angle <=10 deg.) Positive & Negative Internal Pressure Coefficients, GCpi (Figure 26.11-1): +GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (positive internal pressure) -GCpi Coef. = 0.18 (negative internal pressure) If z <= 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(1 5/z^(2/a) , If z > 15 then: Kz = 2.01 *(z/zg)^(2/a) (Table 30.3-1) a = 7.00 (Table 26.9-1) (Note: z not < 30' for Exp. B, Case 1) zg = 1200 (Table 26.9-1) Kh = 0.70 (Kh = Kz evaluated at z = h) Velocity Pressure: qz = 0.00256*Kz*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (Sect. 30.3.2, Eq. 30.3-1) qh = 18.45 psf qh = 0.00256*Kh*Kzt*Kd *VA 2 (qz evaluated at z = h) Design Net External Wind Pressures (Sect. 30.4 & 30.6): For h <= 60 ft.: p = qh*((GCp) - (+/-GCpi)) (psf) For h > 60 ft.: p = q*(GCp) - qi*(+/-GCpi) (psf) where: q = qz for windward walls, q = qh for leeward walls and side walls qi = qh for all walls (conservatively assumed per Sect. 30.6) 1 of 3 12/18/2015 11:52 AM Page 36 of 55 "ASCE710W.xls" Program Version 1.0 Wind Load Tabulation for Wall Com onents & Cladding Component z ft.) Kh qh (pso = e g ressures s Zone 4 + Zone 4 - one 5 + Zone 5 - Main Door Head, Jamb For z = hr: For z = he: For z = h: 0 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 10.00 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 20.00 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 30.00 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 30.00 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 30.00 0.70 18.45 18.76 -20.42 18.76 -24.23 Notes: 1. (+) and (-) signs signify wind pressures acting toward & away from respective surfaces. 2. Width of Zone 5 (end zones), .'a'= 1 12.00 Ift. 3. Per Code Section 30.2.2, the minimum wind load for C&C shall not be less than 16 psf. 4. References :a. ASCE 7-10, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures". b. "Guide to the Use of the Wind Load Provisions of ASCE 7-02" by: Kishor C. Mehta and James M. Delahay (2004). 2 of 3 12/18/2015 11:52 AM Company: Lund Opsahl Date: Fri, Dec 1Pali 37of55 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 Country: United States State: Washington Zin Code: 98134 Screws Utility Report Design Data: Design Mode Design Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S100 -07/S2-10 Design Method ASD Design Carteria Shear Input Input Parameters: Screw Diameter (in) #12 (0.216') Washer Diameter (in) N/A Screw Head Diameter (in) N/A Washer Status N/A tw (in) N/A tc (in) N/A t1 (mil) 54 Q (mil) 54 Fu 1 (ksi) 65 Fu2 (ksi) 65 Applied Loads: Applied Shear (Q) (kips) 0.151 Applied Tension (T) (kips) N/A I _ Output _ Allowable Loads: Allowable Shear/ Screw (kips) 0.569 Allowable Tension/ Screw (kips) N/A Act. /All. 0.265 Number of Screws(N) 1 Status Safe - t1, t2, and screw diameter are limited to given values by NASPEC ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 1/1 Company: Lund Opsahl Date: Fri, Dec 1Pali 38 of 55 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310 Country: United States State: Washington Zio Code: 98134 Screws Utility Report Design Data: Design Mode Design Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S100 -07/S2-10 Design Method ASD Design Carteria Tension Input Input Parameters: Applied Loads: Screw Diameter (in) #10 (0.190') Washer Diameter (in) 0.313 Screw Head Diameter (in) 0.313 Washer Status Round head, hex head, or hex washer head screw with an independent and solid steel washer beneath the screw head tw (in) 0.05 tc (in) 0.045 t1 (mil) 54 Q (mil) N/A Fu 1 (ksi) 65 Fu2 (ksi) 65 Output Allowable Loads: Allowable Shear/Screw (kips) N/A Allowable Tension / Screw (kips) 0.158 Act. /All. 0.678 Number of Screws(N) 1 Status Safe T Washer diameter i Applied Shear (Q) (kips) N/A Applied Tension (T) (kips) 0.107 - t1, t2, and screw diameter are limited to given values by NASPEC ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 1/1 t1 Page 39 of 55 JJAW 43MAM 0.8A18 MOIT038 JJAW :339 Y39TVI3 01TAMOTUA (2) 600S200-54, 50 ksi 3MAH02 3939 39004 JAMB STUDS, FULL HEIGHT r oo 0 J - - 93303V UM0 °r r 0.8AIC HOIT038 AWN :339 A 9X3 @ TMAJA38 A 4039 RDOA8 1/8 1-24 FASTEN TRACK AT BASE OF JAMB 1/8 1.24 A0(WITH (4) 0.157' DIA. HILTI X -U WITH 1 1/4" EMBEDMENT (--5�AAUTOMATIC ENTRY DOOR JAMB A o SCALE: 11/2" =11-011 BE/Ro ---\ PLYWD SHTG018" METAL JOISTS I 6 3/16 HSS QX6X+14" i PLATE Pag 40 of 5 + NEW BEAM SADDLE --- 1 RE: DETAIL "4A" CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM SA LE (E) BEAM SPLICE/BUCKET OF ET (SHOWN DASHED) W/ ENGR. PRIOR TO PROCEEDING NEW WELDED BUCKET 114" PLATE STEEL HSS 10X6X1/4" I I BOT. OF BO> BEAM ('-4�ASADDLE DETAII '-0 518" A6.0 SCALE: 1/2" =1'-0" I I ATTACH BOX BEAM TO JAMBS WITH 1 1/2" X 1 1/2"X4"X54 MIL ANGLES TOP AND BOTTOM WITH (3) #12 SCREWS AT EACH LEG EE S -SK -C DEMO (E) CMU_ WALL KWIK BOLT TZ HILTI Qtlift-BQLf — ANCHORS RECESS COLUMN — BOX BEAM PER 3/A6.0 l4—Ce) BE)E)RI 1@- BOT. OF BEAM T-6" (CONFIRM W/DR MFR.) BASE PLATE 1-1/2' e a CO ,'(t )� kM V- 6 OTde I See 4/S5.4 on existing drawings COLUMN DETAIL AT DEMOLISHED CMU PIER SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" METAL STUDS (E) FRAMING & SOFFIT i4, 50 KSI RACK )-54,33 %L STUD Page 41 of 55 (E) 4" 43 MIL TRACK 25-33, 33 KSI TRACK BEAM (2)60oT125-68, 50 KSI CLOSURE TRACK (2) 600S200-54, 33 KSI VERTICAL STUD ATTACH TO JAMB PER 4/A6.0 4112" � o 00 I u j- 5/8" GYP. BD. VESTIBULE SOFFIT 1" SUSPENDED GYPSUM BOARD CEILING (USING GRID SUSPENSION SYSTEM) BACKER AND SEALANT AS REQUIRED, TYP. BOTH SIDES BESAM SL -500 ALUM STOREFRONT, TRANSOM & DOORS. SEE SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION LINE OF STUD WALL BEYOND VESTIBULE DETAIL A6.0 SCALE: 11/2" = l'-0" (A Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Weak tW 2B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310Main Auto Door Header Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Design Data: Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S100 -07/S2-10 Design Method ASD Wall Data: Wall Height (ft) 14 Max. Bridging Spacing (ft) 5 Stud Spacing (in) 16 Horizontal Deflection L / 240 Header Vertical Deflection L / 240 Absolute Deflection (in) 1 Wind Load Distribution Two Ways Fixed in Header Wind Load Strength Factor 0.6 Wind Load Deflection Factor 0.42 Dead Load Strength Factor 1 Dead Load Deflection Factor 1 Deflection calculation method at parape free end N/A Bracing Data: Jamb Lateral Bracing (in) 48 Jamb Torsional Bracing (in) 48 Header Lateral Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Torsional Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Lateral Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) Full Header Torsional Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Distortional Buckling Rotational Stiffness (1 f-in./in.) 0.000 Desian Ontiens- ° Section Layout Toe to Toe ° Fastener Spacing (in) Full Compatibility ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered ° CMx 1 ° Cb 1 ° Shear Coeff. Kv 5.34 ° X (in) 4 ° Jamb Member Extends to Parapet N/A Dimensions (ft): Span Jamb Height Door Height Door Width 1 14 7.5 16.1 Reactions: Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in 1 0.427 0 0 2 0.427 0 0 5 0.378 0.563 0 6 0.378 0.563 0 Wind Load / Span (psf): 1 1 20.42 6.5 (ft 7.5 (ft Dead Load / Span (lbs/ft): 70 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 115 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: wed get 28 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310Main Auto Door Header Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Unfactored Reactions: Load Case Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in Wind Load 1 0.712 0 0 Wind Load 2 0.712 0 0 Wind Load 5 0.63 0 0 Wind Load 6 0.63 0 0 Dead Load 1 0 0 0 Dead Load 2 0 0 0 Dead Load 5 0 0.563 0 Dead Load 6 0 0.563 0 Sections Data: Member Check: Sp#an Jamb Stud Section 2 x 6005200-54mil, 50 ksi Shear (kips) Tension (kips) CompressionDeflection (kips) Track Section N/A 1 Header Horizontal Stud N/A 0.42 Horizontal Track N/A Closure Track 2 x 600T125-54, 50 ksi Vertical Stud 2 x 6005200-54mil, 50 ksi Vertical Track N/A Member Check: Sp#an Member Moment, Shear Moment i s.in (kips. Shear (kips) Tension (kips) CompressionDeflection (kips) in V.Deflection Crippling in (kips) -31.238 Mx Actual 31.238 0.42 N/A 0.563 0.266 N/A N/A 0.374 Jamb Allowable 58.229 3.895 34.321 15.04 0.7 N/A N/A 0.523 Act./All. Act./All. 0.536 * 0.108 * N/A 0.037 * 0.380 N/A N/A -32.013 Header Actual 33.347 0.69 N/A N/A 0.701 N/A N/A 1 Lateral Allowable 35.512 5.457 N/A N/A 0.805 N/A N/A 0.902 Elements Act./All. 0.939 0.127 N/A N/A 0.871 N/A N/A 26.127 Header Actual 27.215 0.505 N/A N/A N/A 0.54 N/A -0.113 Gravity Allowable 54.775 3.895 N/A N/A N/A 0.805 N/A 0.431 Elements Act./All. 0.497 * 0.130 * N/A N/A N/A 0.671 N/A Use of Connections Clips Eliminates Need for Web Crippling Design Check * Forces are calculated for punched-out section Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Span# Member Moment, Shear Moment, Crippling Moment, Tension Moment, Compression Mx -31.238 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx -31.238 Jamb VY 0.374 Pcr N/A T N/A P -0.563 Act./All. 0.523 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. 0.574 Header Mx -32.013 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx N/A 1 Lateral VY 0.138 Pcr1 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./All. 0.902 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Header My 26.127 My N/A My N/A My N/A Gravity Vx -0.113 Pcr2 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./All. 0.431 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page P/5 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Hyo* !9B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310Main Auto Door Header Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Allowable Screws Loads: Span Attachment of Header to Jamb 1 Clip Type 2 x StiffClip AL600 F21 F3 Allowable F1 (kips) 1.732 Allowable F2 kips 4.182 Allowable F3 kis 6.03 Actual F1 kis 0.000 Actual F2 (kips) 0.505a Actual F3 (kips) 0.69 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.235 Attachment to Jamb All. Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 o All. Screw tension (kips) 0.225 Act. Screw Shear kis 0.214 Act. Screw Tension (kips) 0.133 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.966 F2 Screws Qty. 2 #12 Attachment to Header All. Screw Shear kis 0.569 All. Screw tension kips 0.225 Act. Screw Shear (kips) 0.173 Act. Screw Tension (kips) 0.126 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.864 F3 Screws Qty. 2 #12 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 315 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: WoO Ded 28 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310Main Auto Door Header Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Connection Data: 1 Clip Data Clip Position Head Connection @ Jamb F2 Clip Type 2 x VertiClip SLD600 Screws 2 (#8) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.81 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Actual Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.427 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.527 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • • Min. Penetration (in) 1 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.225 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.17 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.107 Actual Tension (kips) 0.068 Interaction Ratio 0.876 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 ASI Stee/Smart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 415 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: W90 ge�d 28 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 310Main Auto Door Header Country: United States , State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door 2 Clip Data Clip Position Base Connection @ Jamb F21 Ft F3 LO 0 Clip Type StiffClip AL600 Screws 2 (#12) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) 0.866 F2 (kips) 2.091 F3 (kips) 3.015 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 Actual Loads F1 (kips) 0.000 F2 (kips) 0.000 F3 (kips) 0.378 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.219 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.385 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • 0 0 0 • Min. Penetration (in) 1.25 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.31 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.28 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.189 Actual Tension (kips) 0.059 Interaction Ratio 0.820 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 c When more than one load affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. c Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. c Displayed actual & allowable are for one fastener. c The number of screws and fasteners are calculated for one clip. ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 515 Page 47 of 55 BACKER & SE BOTH SIDES BACKER & SE BOTH SIDES ?)600T125-54, 50 KSI LOSURE TRACK >_) 600S200-54, 33 KSI ERTICAL STUD .UM. BREAK METAL. )LOR & FINISH TO ETCH DOOR RIGID INSUL. ;8 T.S. BEAM JTOMATIC )OR HEAD 3 VESTIBULE DETAIL A6.0 SCALE: 11/2" =1'-0" Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: V9oc4 OM%B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 31 gnterior End of Vestibule Country: United States L State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Design Data: Design Code 2012 IBC w/AISI S100-07/ S2-10 Design Method I ASD Wall Data: Wall Height (ft) 20 Max. Bridging Spacing (ft) 5 Stud Spacing (in) 24 Horizontal Deflection L / 240 Header Vertical Deflection L / 240 Absolute Deflection (in) 1 Wind Load Distribution Two Ways Fixed in Header Wind Load Strength Factor 0.6 Wind Load Deflection Factor 0.42 Dead Load Strength Factor 1 Dead Load Deflection Factor 1 Deflection calculation method at parape free end N/A Bracing Data: Jamb Lateral Bracing (in) 48 Jamb Torsional Bracing (in) 48 Header Lateral Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Torsional Bracing -Lateral Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Header Lateral Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) Full Header Torsional Bracing -Gravity Ld (in) @ Stud Spacing Distortional Buckling Rotational Stiffness 0.000 Desian Ontions: ° Section Layout Toe to Toe ° Fastener Spacing (in) Full Compatibility ° Standard Punchout Considered ° Strength Increase from Cold Work of Forming (AISI, Sec. A7.2) Considered ° CMx 1 ° Cb 1 ° Shear Coeff. Kv 5.34 ° X (in) 4 ° Jamb Member Extends to Parapet N/A Dimensions (ft): Span Jamb Height Door Height Door Width 1 20 14 23 Reactions: Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in 1 0.272 0 0 2 0.272 0 0 5 0.134 1.104 0 6 0.134 1.104 0 Wind Load / Span (psf): 1 5 Dead Load / Span (lbs/ft): 1 96 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 115 6 (ft; 14 (1 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: WOO Ogd !98 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 31 gnterior End of Vestibule Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Unfactored Reactions: Load Case Joint Rx kis R kis Rm ki s.in Wind Load 1 0.453 0 0 Wind Load 2 0.453 0 0 Wind Load 5 0.223 0 0 Wind Load 6 0.223 0 0 Dead Load 1 0 0 0 Dead Load 2 0 0 0 Dead Load 5 0 1.104 0 Dead Load 6 0 1.104 0 Sections Data: Member Check: Span S n Jamb Stud Section 2 x 6005200-54mil, 50 ksi Shear (kips) Tension (kips) CompressionDeflection (kips) Track Section N/A 1 Header Horizontal Stud N/A 0.269 Horizontal Track N/A Closure Track 2 x 600T125-54, 33 ksi Vertical Stud 2 x 10005200-54mil, 50 ksi Jamb Vertical Track N/A Member Check: Span S n Member Moment, Shear Moment ki s.in Shear (kips) Tension (kips) CompressionDeflection (kips) Hz. in V.Deflection Crippling in (kips) -18.903 Mx Actual 18.903 0.269 N/A 1.104 0.323 N/A N/A 0.254 Jamb Allowable 58.229 3.895 34.321 10.681 1 N/A N/A 0.318 Act./All. Act./All. 0.325 * 0.069 " N/A 0.103 * 0.323 N/A N/A -22.855 Header Actual 23.807 0.345 N/A N/A 0.982 N/A N/A 1 Lateral Allowable 26.333 5.457 N/A N/A 1 N/A N/A 0.868 Elements Act./All. 0.904 0.063 N/A N/A 0.982 N/A N/A 73.129 Header Actual 76.176 1.104 N/A N/A N/A 0.962 N/A 0.221 Gravity Allowable 93.259 3.322 N/A N/A N/A 1 N/A 0.719 Elements Act./All. 0.817 * 0.332 N/A N/A N/A 0.962 N/A Use of Connections Clips Eliminates Need for Web Crippling Design Check * Forces are calculated for punched-out section Interaction Check (kips.in, kips): Span# Member Moment, Shear Moment, Crippling Moment, Tension Moment, Compression Mx -18.903 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx -18.903 Jamb VY 0.254 Pcr N/A T N/A P -1.104 Act./All. 0.318 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. 0.428 Header Mx -22.855 Mx N/A Mx N/A Mx N/A 1 Lateral VY 0.069 Pcr1 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./All. 0.868 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Header My 73.129 My N/A My N/A My N/A Gravity Vx 0.221 Pcr2 N/A T N/A P N/A Elements Act./All. 0.719 Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A Act./All. N/A ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 2/5 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: V9ed� EW 23 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 31 gnterior End of Vestibule Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Allowable Screws Loads: Span Attachment of Header to Jamb 1 Clip Type 2 x StiffClip AL600 F2�. F3 Allowable F1 kis 1.732 Allowable F2 kis 4.182 Allowable F3 kips 6.03 Actual F1 kis 0.000 Actual F2 (kips) 1.104 Actual F3 (kips) 0.345 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.321 o o 0 0 Attachment to Jamb All. Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 0 0 0 0 All. Screw tension (kips) 0.225 Act. Screw Shear kis 0.145 Act. Screw Tension (kips) 0.103 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.712 F2 Screws Qty. 4 #12 Attachment to Header All. Screw Shear kis 0.394 All. Screw tension kips 0.156 Act. Screw Shear kips 0.043 Act. Screw Tension (kips) 0.138 Linear Interaction Ratio 0.995 F3 Screws Qty. 4 #12 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 315 Y Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: Vyoolq- ced 2B 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 31 gnterior End of Vestibule Country: United States State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door Connection Data: 7 Clip Data Clip Position Head Connection @ Jamb n U Clip Type VertiClip SLD600 Screws 2 (#8)Z Allowable Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.405 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Actual Loads F1 (kips) N/A F2 (kips) 0.272 F3 (kips) N/A M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) N/A Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.670 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • • Min. Penetration (in) 1.25 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.31 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.28 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.136 Actual Tension (kips) 0.087 Interaction Ratio 0.748 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 415 Company: Lund Opsahl Burlington Coat Factory Tukwila Date: V®%4 Vad 28 15 Address: 1201 First Avenue South Suite 31 gnterior End of Vestibule ti Country: United States , State: Washington Zip Code: 98134 Simple Stud Door 2 Clip Data Clip Position Base Connection @ Jamb t F2I Ft F3 ° o Clip Type StiffClip AL600 Screws 2 (#12) Allowable Loads F1 (kips) 0.866 F2 (kips) 2.091 F3 (kips) 3.015 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.569 Actual Loads F1 (kips) 0.000 F2 (kips) 0.000 F3 (kips) 0.134 M1 (kips.in) N/A Screw Shear (kips) 0.077 Interaction Linear Interaction ratio 0.136 Base Material Material NW Concrete, fc = 4000 psi Concrete Compressive Strength (psi) N/A Attachment to Structure Fastener Designation X -U, 0.157(in) Quantity 2 • ° ° ° Min. Penetration (in) 0.75 Min. Edge Distance for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Edge Distance for Tension (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Shear (in) 2.75 Min. Fastener Spacing for Tension (in) 2.75 Allowable Shear (kips) 0.125 Allowable Tension (kips) 0.1 Fastener Design Load Actual Shear (kips) 0.067 Actual Tension (kips) 0.021 Interaction Ratio 0.743 Tensile Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 Shear Strength Reduction Factor 1.000 o When more than one load affect a connection, simple linear relationship is used to check the interaction of multiple loads acting on the connection. o Fastener attachment of connectors to the primary structure should be reviewed by a design professional. o Displayed actual & allowable are for one fastener. ASI SteelSmart® System 7.0 - Version 7.0.0.183 Page 515 (2) 600S200-54, 50 ksi JAMB STUDS, FULL HEIGHT, EACH SIDE SIM TO 5A/S6.0 TYPICAL FOR ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS IN SALES AND OFFICE SPACES 40 CARTS END POST TO 14'-0" A.F.F. 65 CENTER POST CART CORRAL RAIL (2 LEVELS) 23'-0112" 0 0 5A Page 53 of 55 JOIN NEW CURB RAMP WITH EXISTING RAMP AND PROVIDE CONTINUOUS TACTILE WARNING STRIP _TAL FRAMED WALL ANOPY IM. STOREFRONT INDOW & DOORS. SCHEDULES FOR Ip PROVIDE SOLID —/ BLOCKING AT ROOF STRUCTURE AS REQ. (E) BATT INSUL W/ S RI OLD-ROLLED CHANNEL 0 T 4'-0" MAXIMUM WHERE STUDS HEATHED ON BOTH SIDES 5/8"KU UVtK 0 Mt IAL J1 UUJ LL4"U.C.- FARENOT FSTOREFRONT FRAME TO UNDERSIDE TURE. (TYP. 3 SIDES OF VESTIBULE). 0.6. FROM GENTER GF WALL @ 45' ANGLE.0 0 1 A5.0 ;u I� r I S u�m�anm nm 5/8" GYP. BD. OVER 8" METAL STUDS @ 24' 941 jSEE STRtJe:FIJRAt BESAM SL500 ALUM. STOREFRONT SYSTEM,— TRANSOM WINDOW & DOORS. SEE ELEVATIONS AND SCHEDULES FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION j EQ. EQ. AIR FRESHNER. SEE SHEET A1.3 FOR ADDITIONAL j INFORMATION AL INFORMATION WALL PROTECTION UP TO 48" A.F.F. ON BOTH GYPSUM BOARD WALLS IN INTERIOR OF VESTIBULE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 4" CONC. FLOOR SLAB W/ WWF @ MID -DEPTH OVER VAPOR BARRIER. SEE STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. A VESTIBULE SECTION A6.0 SCALE: 1/2" = V-0" r1 -� EIN E I GYPSUM BOAT U ING GRID SUSP y Page 54 of 55 i #- @ 0 m � � & � m cn .� .� � m 0 m .� L cq\\ �j\ ?mK Ln I �k®/ \? \\r -- r- I .ox I=0§ dmz« em ri u§/o 2 k 0 \ /% //_- » I o� om7 \$»\ ,/ \\/{ 0�R/ 00al >0X > §7,» �fWM f x >o�m. \ 2 @ d3mz m w m --I \ m 0 \ / m 0 0 0 0 X20 0 m C,\/ 0 ®> cn cnm Mo kE m v� \\ . m 7k/R �\ o Ek \ §kqpzX ggmmmEl k�2 cX /EE 0 00 ~qF co Cc) M -n 0 X >««z.o 2\/\ r»$�go \ / \ § /\�\ =C) E 0 Emcee ��Mm q /\// \»og ^� R. co � \ 0m §� March 01, 2016 YFJJW Architects and Planners RECEiVEL BILL RAMBO CITY OF TUKWILA Permit Technician 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 MAR 0 2 2016 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Ph: 206431-3670 PERMIT CENTER Fax: 206431-3665 Re: Project# Permit # D16-0011 BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY Written Response to Correction Notice #1 This written response is in reply to Correction Notice #1, dated Feb. 02, 2016 and signed by Bill Rambo. All drawing corrections have been clouded and labeled as Revision 1. Please note the following list of corrections: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: (Building Review Notes) 1. On structural plans, provide quality control inspection notes or table specifying type of "Special Inspections" required for engineered construction of structural masonry components for this project. JJW Response: Please note that a list of required special inspections has been included on sheet S0.1. 2. It appears the roof hatch is less than 10 feet from the roofs edge. Guards shall be provided where appliances, equipment, fans, or other comonenets that require service (and roof hatch openings) are located within 10 feet of a roof edge or open side of a waling surface... Show on the plan a guard or indicate that required protection is provided in compliance with mechanical code. (IMC B 304.11) JJW Response: The roof plan on sheet A 1.7 has been modified to include a guard rail placed and dimensioned in accordance with IMC B 304.11. Please note that a detail for this rail has also been included on sheet A 1.7. PW DEPARTMENT: 1. The subject building has all the necessary backflow preventers installed; however, they are overdue for the WA State Department of Health mandatory testing. There are 15 assemblies at the Parkway Supercenter that are either due for testing or overdue. The 9 assemblies for domestic and irrigation backflow prevention were last tested in March 2013, while the 6 fire system assemblies were tested in January 2015. On January 21, 2016 a separate letter was mailed to Kimco Realty, property O R R �CT �� owner responsible for annual testing. The Public Works Director will withhold a issuance of this TI permit until the Permit Center receives passing test +_TR*' reports. JJW Response: Kimco project representative Tim Hamann has been in direct correspondence with Development Engineer Joanna Spencer of Public Works regarding this issue. The requirement for passing test reports is noted and understood and is in the process of being fulfilled. DIS OD l l 5628 Airport Way South, Suite 112 Seattle, Washington 98108 phone 206.420.2242 JJW Architects and Planners This response will be included with corrected drawings as a hard copy. If you have any questions or additional comments please let me know. Thank you for your time and help. Jeff Wasserman, RA JJW Architects and Planners 5628 Airport Way S. Suite 112 Seattle, WA. 98108 Ph: 206.420.2242 jwasserman(aD-iiwarch.com 5628 Airport Way South, Suite 112 Seattle, Washington 98108 phone 206.420.2242 City of Tukwila Allan Ekberg, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director February 02, 2016 JAMES WASSERMAN 5628 AIRPORT WAY S #112 SEATTLE, WA 98108 RE: Correction Letter # 1 DEVELOPMENT Permit Application Number D16-0011 BURLINFTON COAT FACTORY - 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Dear JAMES WASSERMAN, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the following departments: BUILDING DEPARTMENT: Allen Johannessen at 206-433-7163 if you have questions regarding these comments. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size l 1x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size. New revised plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) (If applicable) "STAMP AND SIGNATURES" "Every page of a plan set must contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee(s) who prepared or who had direct supervision over the preparation of the work, and date of signature. Specifications that are prepared by or under the direct supervision of a licensee shall contain the seal/stamp, signature of the licensee and the date of signature. If the "specifications" prepared by a licensee are a portion of a bound specification document that contains specifications other than that of an engineering or land surveying nature, the licensee need only seal/stamp that portion or portions of the documents for which the licensee is responsible." It shall not be required to have each page of "specifications" (calculations) to be stamped and signed; Front page only will be sufficient. (WAC 196-23-010 & 196-23-020) (BUILDING REVIEW NOTES) 1. On structural plans, provide quality control inspection notes or table specifying type of "Special Inspections" required for engineered construction of structural and masonry components for this project. 2. It appears the roof hatch is less than 10 feet from the roofs edge. Guards shall be provided where appliances, equipment, fans or other components that require service and {roof hatch openings) are located within 10 feet of a roof edge or open side of a walking surface. The guard shall extend min. 30 inches beyond each end of the equipment indicated to include roof hatch openings and ... guard height shall be not less than 42 inches above surface adjacent to the guard. The guard shall be constructed so as to prevent the passage of a 21 -inch -diameter sphere and shall comply with the loading requirements for guards specified in the International Building Code. Show on the plan a guard or indicate the required protection is provided in compliance with mechanical code. (IMC B] 304.11) PW DEPARTMENT: Joanna Spencer at 206-431-2440 if you have questions regarding these comments. • The subject building has all the necessary backflow preventers installed; however, they are overdue for the WA State Department of health mandatory testing. There are 15 assemblies at the Parkway Supercenter that are either due for testing or overdue. The 9 assemblies for domestic and irrigation backflow prevention were last tested in March 2013, while the 6 fire system assemblies were last tested in January 2015. On January 21, 2016 a separate letter was mailed to Kimco Realty, property owner responsible for annual testing. The Public Works Director will withhold issuance of this TI permit until the Permit Center receives passing test reports. 6300 Southeenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washinvon 98188 9 Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 Please address the comments above in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that two 2 sets of revised plan pages, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a 'Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206) 431-3655. Sincerely, I � �W-wm M � �� ' �/' I Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. D16-0011 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite #100 • Tukwila Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 City of Tukwila Allan Ekberg, Mayor Public Works Department - Bob Giberson, Director January 21, 2016 Mr. Tim Hamann Kimco Realty 4065 Factoria Mall SE, #F4 Bellevue, WA 98006 RE: Burlington Coati Factory Tenant Improvement 17480 Southcenter Pkwy, Tukwila Permit Number: D16-0011 To Whom It May Concern: In accordance with Washington State Department of Health guidelines for Group A Public Water Systems, Public Works has implemented a cross -connection control program to protect the public water system from contamination via cross -connection. The program requires elimination or control of any cross -connection between the distribution system and a consumer's water system by the installation of an approved backflow device. The subject building has all necessary backflow preventers installed; however, they are overdue for mandatory annual testing. There are 15 assemblies at the Parkway Supercenter that are either due for testing or overdue. I have attached test forms for the assemblies. The 9 assemblies for domestic and irrigation backflow prevention were last tested March 2013, while the 6 fire system assemblies were last tested January 2015. If you need assistance to locate these backflows in the field, please contact Mr. Todd Reedy, Tukwila Water Department, at (206) 571-6309. The Public Works Director will withhold issuance of the Burlington Coat Factory's Tenant Improvement permit until the Permit Center receives passing test reports for the above backflows. Please contact me (206) 431-2440 or via email at joanna.spencer(@tukwilawa.gov if you have any questions. Sincerely, oanna Spencer Development Engineer JS:Iw PERMANENT FILE COPY cc: D16-0011 File Todd Reedy James Was �l erman, Applicant (W:PW Eng/Other/Joanna Spencer/Letter Tim Hamann 012116 6300 Building • 6300 Southcenter Boulevard Suite 100 • Tukwila, WA 98188 • 206-433-0179 Tukwila City Hall • 6200 Southcenter Boulevard • Tukwila, WA 98188 • 206-433-1800 Website: TukwilaWA.gov Joanna Spencer From: Todd Reedy Sent: Thursday, January 21, 2016 6:50 AM To: Joanna Spencer Subject: RE: backflows @ 17480 SC Pkwy (BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY TI) D16-0011 Attachments: ParkwaySuperctr.pdf Thank you Joanna. That would be a big help. There are 15 assemblies at the Parkway Supercenter that are either due for testing or overdue. I have attached a file with test forms for the assemblies. The 9 assemblies for domestic and irrigation backflow prevention were last tested March 2013, while the 6 fire system assemblies were last tested January 2015. I notify them every July about the annual testing and also tried calling their office last year about the overdue tests. The address I have been using is: Kimco Realty Corporation 3535 Factoria Blvd SE, #520 Bellevue, WA 98006 Hopefully you can get the testing done and I will switch their contact information for future testing. Let me know if there is anything else you need from me. Todd From: Joanna Spencer Sent: Wednesday, January 20, 2016 2:26 PM To: Todd Reedy <Todd.Reedy @TukwilaWA.gov> Cc: Han Kirkland <Han.Kirkland@TukwilaWA.gov>; Joanna Spencer <Joanna.Spencer@TukwilaWA.gov> Subject: FW: backflows @ 17480 SC Pkwy (BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY TI) D16-0011 Good Afternoon Todd, I'm going to deny their TI until they submit copies of passing backflow test report. Do you have a list what they have and who was notified? Permit application shows Tim Hamann @ Kimco Realty, 4065 Factoria Mall SE #F4 Bellevue, WA 98006 Joanna Dl6,-Ooli pFRIVIANENT FILE COPY 'ERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D16-0011 DATE: 03/03/16 PROJECT NAME: BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY SITE ADDRESS: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued X Response to Correction Letter # 1 1 Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: A -T N (:, Building Division Fire Prevention ❑ Public Works� Structural ❑ PRELIMINARY REVIEW: Not Applicable ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved ❑ Corrections Required ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: Planning Division ❑ Permit Coordinator ❑ DATE: 03/03/16 Structural Review Required ❑ IZII_Y_:1 DUE DATE: 03/31/16 Approved with Conditions Denied ❑ (i.e: Zoning Issues) DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg ❑ Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: 12/18/2013 - PERMIT COORD COPY PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP PERMIT NUMBER: D16-0011 DATE: 01/13/16 PROJECT NAME: BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY SITE ADDRESS: 17480 SOUTHCENTER PKWY X Original Plan Submittal Revision # before Permit Issued Response to Correction Letter # Revision # after Permit Issued DEPARTMENTS: hi Ry -til 4V\ AWC I�� C' P L � �- q ( b Building Divisio Fire Prevention Planning Division JJS Cowl- Public Works Structural ❑ Permit Coordinator PRELIMINARY REVIEW: DATE: 01/14/16 Not Applicable ❑ Structural Review Required ❑ (no approval/review required) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: DUE DATE: 02/11/16 Approved ❑ Approved with Conditions ❑ Corrections Required � Denied ❑ (corrections entered in Reviews) (ie: Zoning Issues) Notation: REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg k Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW lzrStaff Initials: 12/18/2013 City of Tukwila Department o2=d munity Development 6300 Southcenter , Suite 4 100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila-wo.us REVISION SUBMITTAL Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: 03/01/201(f Plan Check/Permit Number:—D16-0011 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 RECEIVED Revision # after Permit is Issued CITY OF T(jKWILA ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner MAR 0 2 2016 Project Name: Burlington Coat Factory PERMIT CENTER Project Address: 17480 Southcenter Pkwy Contact Person: Phone Number: 2010 •q'ZO.2?fFZ Summary of Revision: i•L45TOF M►� X1 tet, MS7VETN SheetNumber(s): takl ?Z 1 Qr—LL/�N 5,0'I pi LRAM' ��1�J "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of r vision Received at the City of Tukwila Pe it Center by: Entered in TRAKiT on lapplications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Revised: ALEGIS CONSTRUCTION INC Home Espaiiol COTltaet. Safety & Health Claims & Insurance 45 Washington State Department of Labor & Industries ALEGIS CONSTRUCTION INC Owner or tradesperson Principals JONES, BARRIE GLYN, PRESIDENT PRICE, MICHAEL RAY, VICE PRESIDENT PRICE, MARK ALLAN, SECRETARY EVERTON, ROBERT K, TREASURER Doing business as ALEGIS CONSTRUCTION INC 6900 SW Atlanta St. Bldg 2, suite 110 PORTLAND, OR97223 503-970-8312 WA UBI No. Business type 603 073 077 Corporation Governing persons BARRIE GLYN JONES DANIEL ANTHONY FINNEGAN; JASON WYNECOOP; MICHAEL RAY PRICE; License Page 1 of 2 1v�. A-7.. Index Help b1;}- L&I Workplace Rights Trades & Licensing Verify the contractor's active registration / license / certification (depending on trade) and any past violations. Construction Contractor Active. _.................................. _.............................. . Meets current requirements. License specialties GENERAL License no. ALEGIC1894CN Effective — expiration 02110/2011— 02/19/2017 Bond ................. Travelers Cas and Surety Co of America $12,000.00 Bond account no. 106017187 Received by L&I Effective date 02/12/2014 01/12/2014 Expiration date Until Canceled Bond history Insurance Valley Forge Ins Co $1,000,000.00 Policy no. 5086230808 Received by L&I Effective date 06/30/2015 06/28/2015 Expiration date https://secure.Ini,wa.gov/verify/Detail.aspx?UBI=603073077&LIC=ALEGIC1894CN&SAW= 3/25/2016 rn Q i m O 00 0 a C) 0 (14N r -I r\-1 1111 Burlin ton Coat . Factor I U 04 PROJECT TEAM LANDLORD (OWNER) STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: PLUMBING ENGINEER: 9 y KIMCO REALTY LUND OPSAHL JET INDUSTRIES_j Irl - 4065 FACTORIA MALL SE #F41201 FIRST AVENUE SOUTH, SUITE 310 1935 SILVERTON RD. L 5 E BELLEVUE, WA 98006 SEATTLE WASHINGTON 98134 SALEM, OR 97301 C ° P: 425.373.3905 P: (206) 402-5156 P: 503.798.4401 C .0 � M U III, ff ParKwa Supercenter ATTN: TIM HAMANN E: THAMANN@KIMCOREALTY.COM ATTN: ADAM SLIVERS ATTN: HAL SPENCE E: ASLIVERS@LUNDOPSAHL.COM E: HAL.S@JETINDUSTRIES.NET a o L_ M c, o N to 0) TENANT co �: rn "t M � BURLINGTON STORES, INC. MECHANICAL ENGINEER: ami 1` Q N rn E °Q ler 17480 Sout'h'ceno Parkway 4287 ROUTE 130 SOUTH EDGEWATER PARK, NJ 08010 JET INDUSTRIES ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: JET INDUSTRIES � N C3' s- L Q d. ry N Q 1935 SILVERTON RD. }, c� co cc P: 609.387.7800 EXT. 71180 SALEM OR 97301 1935 SILVERTON RD. � N N N 3 Tukw'i 1 F: N/A P: (503) 363-2334 ATTN: DEAN DIPALO ATTN: JIM COOK SALEM, OR 97301 P: (503) 363-2334 a) ) � cin Q- � a) E: DEAN.DIPALO@BURLINGTONSTORES.COM E: JIM.0@JETINDUSTRIES.NET ATTN: DAVID ROOT P.E. . " Pt �ZRMIT Sw[�ZT1 . ARCHITECT JJW ARCHITECTS AND PLANNERS, LLC E: DAVID.R@JETINDUSTRIES.NET LIGHTING - I CARMEN BLAKELY I 5628 AIRPORT WAY SOUTH, SUITE 112 .&q - M 81 lk - SEATTLE, WA 98108 P: 206.420.2242 E: CARMEN.B@JETINDUSTRIES.NET 44 i4A . I F0 I Z ki F: 206.260.9595 V a ATTN: DAN RASMUSSON E: DRASMUSSON@JJWARCH.COM . GENERAL NOTES VICIN.ITY MAP CODE INFORMATION SHEET I .- - ---- APPLICABLE CODES 1. FLAME SPREAD & SMOKE DEVELOPED RATINGS: 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE 2008 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) 70) ARCHITECTURAL 1 I N I N 1.a. ALL FINISHES TO BE AS NOTED & SHALL NOT HAVE SMOKE DEVELOPED RATINGS GREATER THAN 450. (IBC) (NFPA G0.1 TITLE SHEET M 0 a a` 1.b. INTERIOR FINISHES OF WALLS & CEILINGS IN ALL ROOMS OR ENCLOSED SPACES SHALL HAVE A CLASS C FLAME SPREAD INDEX 76-200; SMOKE DEVELOPED + WAC 51-50* + PART 1 AND PART 3 2009 A0.1 CODE DATA AND EGRESS PLAN �a F INDEX 0-450. INTERIOR FINISHES OF EXIT ENCLOSURES &EXIT PASSAGEWAYS SHALL HAVE A CLASS B FLAME SPREAD INDEX 26-75; SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX ' " `k.: - + ORD. 6113, CHAP. 23.05 & 23.10** WASHINGTON CITIES ELECTRICAL + IC A117.1-2009 ACCESSIBLE AND CODE **** E OS t 0-450. ASTM E 84. IFC TABLE 803.3. 11 .�1 ,� '. F��Iiy F1;�,�,r� M4°f if9tl3 71 .,: .... •: S 1.1.1�1�11, s1. «-,, h t?tiiSrir��is's l�=�t pro#; USABLE BUILDINGS AND FACILITIES 2012 INTERNATIONAL MECHANICAL CODE A0.3 ACC BIIBLITY DETAILSUL DEMOLITION PLAN o L FLAME SPREAD SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX &SHALL COMPLY WITH ASTM E 84. 1.c. MATERIALS USED AS INTERIOR TRIM SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLASS C & 11 11 IAD1.1 5 `. , x .".., m , �, ur � m _.. `1 I 2012 INTERNATIONAL RESIDENTIAL CODE (IMC AD1.2 ROOF AND CEILING DEMOLITION PLAN COMBUSTIBLE TRIM SHALL NOT EXCEED 10% OF THE AGGREGATE WALL OR CEILING AREA IN WHICH IT IS LOCATED IFC 804. ( ) ,q K �x Y a�z M X11, .,, -. •:, - e a 3 xis "t�F IRC +WAC 51-52* ( ) A1.3 CONSTRUCTION PLAN 1.d. INTERIOR WALL &CEILING FINISHES SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 286 TESTING MEASURES. INTERIOR FLOOR FINISHES SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 253 WITH A ., iia �:...., % fat ��sva=,_ >>1. Y`` .. + WAC 51-51* + ORD. 6113, CHAP. 23.50* A1.4 FLOOR FINISH PLAN CLASS 2 CRITICAL RADIANT FLUX > 0.22 WATTS /CM2. FLOOR FINISHES IN EXIT /ACCESS CORRIDORS SHALL BE CLASS 1 CRITICAL RADIANT FLUX > 0.45 WATTS " „t�,U�, t:.,. ; ',.: f-'� ,�,I +ORD. 6113, CHAP. 23.12** 2012 INTERNATIONAL NATIONAL FUEL 2012 WASHINGTON STATE ENERGY CODE AND GAS CODE (IFGC) A1.6 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.7 ROOF PLAN / CM2.11 '�r,�, '' w�rvi tl� f, li ,�r� 9 (WSEC) +WAC 51-52-21000* A2.0 ENLARGED PLANS FINIS RIALS SHALL BE APPLIED SO THAT THEY WILL NOT BECOME READILY DETACHED WHERE SUBJECTED TO 200 DEGREES F. FOR NOT LESS 1.e. INTERIOR H MATE �+Ifrv,1. 1•,, 11 11, +WAC 51-11* 2012 UNIFORM PLUMBING CODE (UPC) A2.1 RESTROOM ENLARGED PLAN AND ELEVATION THAN 30 MINUTES (IFC 803.2). v� Slbt til w : 8t�11fi.11;St sif ,. - v:: M. s�v.7 ,�1sa 2012 INTERNATIONAL FIRE CODE (IFC) + WAC 51-56 A3.0 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS 1.f. THE REQUIRED FLAME SPREAD OR SMOKE DEVELOPED INDEX OF SURFACES IN EXISTING BUILDINGS MAY BE ACHIEVED BY APPLICATION OF APPROVED FIREt��t'1.„ " i 1 . - `'1.1. + WAC51-54A* + ORD. 6113, CHAP. 23.60** + ORD. 6114, CHAP. 23.11*** A3.1 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS A4.0 SCHEDULES AND DETAILS RETARDANT COATINGS & SHALL COMPLY WITH NFPA 703 (IFC 803.4). ,ir7&,w�I V - ' A4.1 DETAILS 2. ALL ELECTRICAL WORK SHALL CONFORM TO LOCAL CODES, THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, &NFPA 72. -I n-11 4.{FJthSY OCCUPANCY CLASIFICATION A4.2 DETAILS 3. THE CONTRACT WORK SHALL INCLUDE FURNISHING ALL MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, TOOLS, LABOR &SERVICES NECESSARY FOR COMPLETION OF THE PROJECT. 11 - _ "° ° i ": 11'"''' AS.o ENLARGED ENTRY PLAN AND EXT. ELEVATION 4. THE G.C. SHALL PERFORM ALL WORK IN CONFORMITY WITH THOSE LAWS HAVING JURISDICTION WHETHER OR NOT SUCH WORK IS SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON : 11 ��t,st -1.1. ,. r• i_,,rern-�, , ' CLASSIFICATION ACTUAL SF NET SF/PERSON TOTAL OCCUPANCY A6.0 SECTIONS AND DETAILS A7.0 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS THESE DRAWINGS, INCLUDING ALL SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS. THE G.C. SHALL PROCURE & PAY FOR ALL NECESSARY BUILDING PERMITS & SHALL BE REIMBURSED Gs�111 1.(M) MERCHANTILE 38,481 SF 30 SF/PERSON 1,284 PERSONS A7.1 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR GENERAL BUILDING PERMIT COSTS BY OWNER. BUSINESS LICENSE COSTS ARE NOT REIMBURSABLE. A, , �f 11 -FLOOR �faix X 1.u��_ AREA SF :INTERIOR +EXTERIOR ALTERATION ONLY - NO ADDED OVERALL ( ) AREA A7 2 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATI NS A7.3 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS A7.4 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS 5. THE G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE QUALITY OF WORKMANSHIP &FOR COMPLIANCE WITH THE DESIGN. THE G.C. SHALL CORRECT ALL ERRORS & DEVIATIONS AS REQUESTED BY THE OWNER. , Q - z 1 I IKB Sd tip , A7.5 ARCHITECTURAL SPECIFICATIONS 6. G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR QUALITY OF ALL REFURBISHED MATERIALS. ALL REFURBISHED MATERIALS TO APPEAR NEW. - ^... � s i ^,`,:.r,„ at "ittE ;I 3 (tis t CONSTRUCTION TYPE ` .� i `t �� 4! i y ., Y. I %50.1 STRUCTURAL STRUCTURAL DETAILS 7. THE G.C. SHALL PROVIDE &INSTALL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PER CFC STANDARD 10-1.1�1 8. ALL WOOD BLOCKING, STUDS, PLYWOOD, ETC. TO BE FIRE RETARDANT. r � �'%1., �" wi �� rl ., �� ti11 ,� i ,,, ,4� . CONSTRUCTION TYPE VB -FULLY SPRINKLED NUMBER OF STORIES - SINGLE STORY NOTE THAT MEP DRAWINGS ARE BOUND SEPARATELY 9. T THE TIME OF SUBMITTING FINAL BID, THE G.C. SHALL VERIFY ALL RELEVANT DIMENSIONS, ELEVATIONS, ANGLES, & EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE AFFECTED ORK & rNOTIFYTHE ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES IMMEDIATELY. ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE RESOLVED PRIOR TO PROCEEDING WITH AFFECTED WORK. . "' ��" c,u l,si. DEMISING WALLS HOUR RA TED ELECTRICAL ED -1.o POWER PLAN - DEMO 10. THE G.C. SHALL CONTACT THE OWNER / TENANT IMMEDIATELY IF THEY ENCOUNTER ANY HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. 11. EXACT LOCATIONS OF PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONDUIT & FIXTURES SHALL BE COORDINATED BETWEEN CONTRACTORS & SUBCONTRACTORS TO AVOID INTERFERENCE. °� ,',' 1 ''1. ' ` MECHANICAL ROOM WALLS 1 HOUR RATED E1.1 LIGHTING PLAN 12. EXISITNG SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE MODIFIED. HEAD REPLACEMENT TO MEET ALL LOCAL & NATIONAL CODES INCL. NFPA-13. ED -2.0 ELECTRICAL CEILING PLAN - DEMO 13. EACH CONTRACTOR SHALL COORDINATE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS WITH THE PLUMBING, MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS & ALL SPECIFICATIONS BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE WORK & BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY PARKING E2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER PLAN SHALL NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY DISCREPANCIES OR CONFLICTS IMMEDIATELY. ALL DISCREPANCIES SHALL BE RESOLVED PRIOR TO THE CONTRACTOR PROCEEDING WITH AFFECTED WORK. PARKWAY SUPERCENTER 17480 SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY NO ADDED OVERALL FLOOR AREA - NO CHANGE TO EXISTING COUNT E2.2 ELECTRICAL POWER PLANS E3.0 ELECTRICAL DETAILS 14. 15. SHOULD ANY OF THE DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS ON THE DRAWINGS CONFLICT WITH THE NOTES OR SPECIFICATIONS OR WITH EACH OTHER, THE STRICTEST PROVISION SHALL APPLY. ADDITIONAL WORK, IF APPLICABLE, MUST BE AUTHORIZED IN WRITING BY BOTH THE BURLINGTON CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER & ARCHITECT AFTER THE FORMAL REQUEST FOR INFORMATION TUKWILA, WA 98188 Z H Q E4.0 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM, CONTRACTOR PANELS & NOTES E4.1 PANEL SCHEDULES SCOPE OF WORK HAS BEEN COMPLETED ISSUES; RFI TO THE ARCHITECT, IF THE CLARIFICATIONS AND / OR SUPPLEMENTAL INFORMATION INVOLVE AN ADJUSTMENT IN THE CONTRACT SUM, THE JQ E5.0 LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, NOTES AND DETAILS (RFI) PROCESS (GC AN n E5.1 LIGHTING CONTROL ARCHITECT SHALL ISSUE A WORK CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST TO THE G.C. TO OBTAIN PRICE QUOTATIONS NEEDED FOR NEGOTIATING CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION). -Z E6.0 FIRE ALARM PLAN 16. JOB SITE CLEANING: DURING DEMOLITION & CONSTRUCTION, THE JOB SITE & BUILDING INTERIOR SHALL BE CLEANED ON A DAILY BASIS, INCLUDING REMOVAL OF TRASH, RUBBLE, DEBRIS & TENANT IMPROVEMENT OF EXISTING 38,500 SF RETAIL SPACE FOR NEW TENANT. EXTERIOR E7.0 COMMUNICATION PLAN ORGANIZATION OF MATERIALS & EQUIPMENT. UPON COMPLETION OF THE WORK, THE JOB SITE & BUILDING INTERIOR SHALL BE THOROUGHLY CLEANED, INCLUDING AREAS OF THE BUILDING MADE NOT TO SCALE WORK TO INCLUDE TWO NEW EGRESS DOORS CUT IN TO EXTERIOR WALL, ADA RAMP & NEW E7.1 COMMUNICATION DETAILS DIRTY BY CONSTRUCTION WORK. THE G.C. SHALL REMOVE TRASH, RUBBLE, TOOLS, EQUIPMENT &EXCESS MATERIALS FROM THE PREMISES. THE BUILDING IS TO BE LEFT IN PERFECTLY CLEAN ROOFTOP HVAC UNITS. INTERIOR WORK TO INCLUDE MISC. BACK OF HOUSE ROOM PARTITIONS, ADDITIONAL PLUMBING FIXTURES, AND FINISHES. Es.O LOSS PREVENTION & SECURITY SYSTEM PLAN E9.o ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS KEY PLAN CONDITION. 17. G.C. IS TO PROVIDE SUPERVISION OF ALL TRADES / SUBS (INCLUDING THOSE HIRED BY BURLINGTON) AS WELL AS ON-SITE SUPERVISION UNTIL THE STORE'S GRAND OPENING. G.C. & E.C. TO BE ON PLUMBING SITE GRAND OPENING DAY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY. ___ -" � -J PtL�S��I�� AP��a�� LEGAL DESCRIPTION . P1.0 PLUMBING PLANS - DEMO 18. STAGING AREA WILL BE CONTAINED TO AN AREA AS DICTATED BY THE BURLINGTON PM. i ��O changes'can bre made.. to $h�S� P1.1 PLUMBING PLANS P1.2 PLUMBING SCHEDULES., NOTES &DETAILS PARCEL ID: 262304-9110 19. - IN A L PROVED BY RD MALL OR OWNER. G.C. IS REQUIRED TO HAVE 30 YARD DUMPSTERS AVAILABLE DURING CONSTRUCTION & THROUGH THE FIXTURE STALL PROCESS, AT LOCATION AP THE LANDLORD, 20. MAINTAIN A CLEAR AND UNOBSTRUCTED PATH TO EXITS. NEW EXIT CORRIDOR TO BE COMPLETED PRIOR TO CLOSING OFF COMMON MALL AREA FOR NEW WORK. plans without approval fro81f11 the ZONING: TUC - TUKWILA URBAN CENTER MECHANICAL 21. PROVIDE WORK AND MATERIALS IN ACCORDANCE WITH APPLICABLE CITY COUNTY AND LOCAL BUILDING AND FIRE CODES AS REQUIRED. IN CASE OF CONFLICT Planning Division of DCDt. M-1.0 MECHANICAL PLAN M1.OA MECHANICAL PLAN WHERE THE METHODS OR STANDARDS OF INSTALLATION OF THE MATERIALS SPECIFIED DO NOT EQUAL OR EXCEED THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LAWS OR n ' ' \ ? �3�{: PORTION OF SE 1/4 OF SW 1/4 -BEGIN NE CORNER THS 01-12-25 W TO SE CORNER OF SW -DEMO M1.1 ENLARGED MECHANICAL PLAN ORDINANCES, THE LAWS OR ORDINANCES ARE TO GOVERN. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF CONFLICTS. I, 7,3W,SK�R E �'"Ft'oVad - 1/4 TH WLY ALONG S LINE TO A LINE 6 FEET DISTANT NELY, MEAS AT R/A FROM ELY M2.0 MECHANICAL SCHEDULES & NOTES 22. WORK IS GOVERNED BY CONDITIONS AS INDICATED IN CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUILDINGS. I �, AREA OF WORK ^fe: `' - " ° ` MARGIN OF SOUTHCENTER PARKWAY TH NWLY ALONG SAID LINE TO POINT WILY OF POINT M3.0 MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS' 23. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS: STRUCTURAL, PLUMBING MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND FIRE PROTECTION ARE SUPPLEMENTARY TO THESE DRAWINGS. \,, 1.D : OF BEGINNING TH ELY TO POINT OF BEGINNING LESS PORTION IN MINKLER BLVD NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE CONSULTANTS DRAWINGS WITH A WRITTEN REQUEST FOR CLARIFICATION. WORK INSTALLED IN CONFLICT OR SPECIFICATIONS IS TO BE CORRECTED BY THE CONTRACTOR AT NO EXPENSE TO THE OWNER, TENANT, OR ARCHITECT. I f :.: •a . estiayMorning L WITH THESE DRAWINGS _ __ M ��::_-__.._.--_-=---_____ -- �Tu ---- ---- - 24. VISIT JOB SITE AND VERIFY FIELD DIMENSIONS AND. CONDITIONS AND NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF DISCREPANCIES BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH WORK. > ; .. .. 1.---"------� 1. 25. OBTAIN PERMITS AND APPROVALS REQUIRED. __7 i Pay ` • , ,, - HomeFkness� ; ` � CbSf :� �� •�: David's t�le7Cy�S` I SYMBOLS BUILDING PERMIT NOTES 26. WALLS ARE TO BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED FOR SEISMIC CONDITIONS IN BUILDING JURISDICTIONS WHERE APPLICABLE. O °° 1 sM,' 5 1 L- '.. :u pnoxriS ..;. Z°'2"'` �Ius 2s1.6= Brida FurnitureGalie . ry ,. ., .. 18,BD8sf .. 12945st' 18,878sf 27. PROVIDE AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARMS PER CODE. THESE ARE TO BE OPERATIONAL IN NEW EXIT CORRIDOR PRIOR TO CLOSING OFF COMMON MALL AREA FOR 1 19,288sf ; 28,138sf 2 ;:: °' p 45'994sf 2°� �°°°°�' y� LL 12,1934('. 'm ` - (SE ORE INFORMATION . NEW WORK.___j111-1. .: r` f 4 N . F: ALLSYMBOLSO SLARE NOT NECESSARILY USOED)MFRE COPY 28. PROVIDE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IN NEW CORRIDOR PER NFPA 13, PROVIDE SPRINKLER STANDPIPE TO NEW TENANT SPACE. COMPLY W/ TENANT FIRE PROTECTION AS NOTED ON THIS SHEET. � • 4999sf -Arrlericas'Best' " ...: _» I-39oa:r - ; - Bath &Body Works ` 1 " - 2' d-. Hobby Town 27201.. Mieeg , 5943sf :..i�); m E o �' 62495r'. ''" gia'g e;:. fqo.. htCRITERIA w' 8787sf Liieway Christian Store - = - .. . :..:. .e-. Famous Daves .. , _%� . 29. PROVIDE FIRE TREATED WOOD OR EQUIVALENT SHEET METAL BLOCKING REQUIRED FOR WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED ITEMS . - a ;70..,-- P�r 3 i`�'IOW' € �Qa;'<i i6 aitb( f0 @rt'�}t'S aI�i Ot D:3. 30 DAMAGE DUE TO ADJACENT WORK BY CONTRACTOR OR CONTRACTOR'S FORCES ARE TO BE REPAIRED AT CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE. D TO UNLESS NOTED AS FURR AND FINISH ON CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. r 11,915x1 uitaCosoietics ::. SprintPCS TfiaiMali2000sr Stantords r �� '.::.. :l .. - 169 DOOR NUMBER .!5 tr AI°c� %moi rf��' °�' .s11Cig% u�`�91R�i$S �ZL e3 ;�..�3 31. ASSUME PIPES CONDUITS VENTS ETC. BE EXPOSED 1 1 1 1 1 5 f 1443: :• Capriotti'sSandwlchSftop,,,BarBGrllf WingStop 2o99gj o ".:� � a CoidStoneCreamery ... t �L �IG!�; _J^ rr c n adopted code of ordi!?ance'. Re" int 32. INVESTIGATE AND VERIFY LOCATIONS OF STRUCTURAL MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ELEMENTS AND OTHER EXISTING CONDITIONS PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE 1 1 pacrficDentai 3690st i mgt_ ". ,,,.,,/ :: i�;r r,_:?;v ^ ! �^, •.y . 1 f �pprov�:.cl , Copy e, GOfidl:it.:i}�a 4:� izs.rrlDi�:i�Jt'��:,.1. WORK. I 923531.-" 169 ROOM NUMBER .:all J 33. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS: USE DIMENSIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND ACTUAL FIELD MEASUREMENTS. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OF DISCREPANCIES. _�� oen�erpa�kWay Sou Env: 34. DEVIATIONS FROM DIMENSIONED LOCATIONS REQUIRE ARCHITECT APPROVAL. "ALIGN" MEANS TO ACCURATELY LOCATE FINISHED FACES IN THE SAME PLANE. OFFSET STUDS WHERE REQUIRED TO ASSURE FLUSH WALLS AT COLUMNS. . = r :- - -,a". FIEVtSIOI�tS ©Changes shaft b ae m de to VIP. sct B WINDOW TYPES r Dasa: �?�,� f�,.� Q °f �`�ork �"'thQ� Rdar approval of 35. COORDINATION: VERIFY AND COORDINATE THE WORK OF TRADES TO ASSURE COMPLIANCE WITH THE DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. jSEEP PAP �- `NER',,4I I tl' Wila Building Division. Cly � � I��l4a 36. NOTIFY ARCHITECT, IF INFORMATION IN THE DRAWINGS IS INCOMPLETE OR IN CONFLICT, FOR CLARIFICATION. �4 '-f'°°P �{�a�t�� NOTE: Re-via-'O.:ZSWillra require fans � � p ubmi11a1 El KEY TO WALL FINISH SCHEDULE �UIL#1ICa Dl�l�l � Y 37. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, ALL DOORS ARE TO BE LOCATED AT 4 FROM INSIDE FACE OF PARTITION TO EDGE OF DOORJAMB. (HINGE SIDE ONLY) andna� ih....�d�atld� Ilxonaiplanrevieu��fees O � 38. ANY REFERENCE MADE TO CONTRACTORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO L.L.C., G.C., OR E.C., INDICATES WORK WHICH IS THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE 0 Mechanical I ( I� ) KEY TO FLOOR FINISH SCHEDULE (,) � 0- 39. LANDLORD'S GENERAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS SPECIFICALLY NOTED. PUBLICLY ACCESSIBLE PORTIONS OF THE BUILDING INCLUDING SIDEWALKS, ENTRY RAMPS, AND EXIT DOORS SHALL COMPLY AT A MINIMUM WITH THE AMERICANS 0 2"Sci al n '1 g f -i _ Z �� O KEY TO CEILING FINISH SCHEDULE B " _ - Li- Z W W o0 WITH DISABILITIES ACT, TITLE III, AND LOCAL ARCHITECTURAL BARRIER BOARDS. F., as Piping J� I- (5 L CO 40. 41. DETAILS REFERRED TO AS "TYPICAL" SHALL BE CONSIDERED AS A TYPICAL CONDITION REPEATED THROUGHOUT THE PROJECT, WHETHER REFERENCED OR NOT. CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE TENANT SHELL PACKAGE WITH TENANT T.I. DRAWINGS TO LOCATE BLOCKING OR PLYWOOD SHEATHING. NOT TO SCALE ,psi,v of Tukwila s' " 'i G DIVISION 0-z B KEY TO WALL TYPES ry z co W 0) W U a C L T T FI SU SSI® SIC CRITERIA: - COLUMN CENTERLINE W z z)z Q _ (� >_ � MATERIAL KEY &GRAPHIC ABBREVIATIONS 1. FIRE SPRINKLER DRAWINGS FOR THE SITE AND BUILDING CONSTRUCTION AND ANY OTHER ASSOCIATED LANDLORD WORK SHALL BE SUBMITTED AND REVIEWED BY THE TENANT ARCHITECT CONCURRENT WITH THE LANDLORD'S SUBMISSION OF THE DRAWINGS TO THE LOCAL AHJ. U) (D Q O Q 2. LANDLORD'S FIRE SUPPRESSION CONTRACTOR IS RESPONSIBLE FOR OBTAINING ALL PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS FROM THE LOCAL AHJ FOR THEIR OWN SCOPE WORK. GROUT MORTAR BRICK AB ACT ADJ ANCHOR BOLT FD FLOOR DRAIN SF SQUARE FEET ACOUSTICAL CEILING FE FIRE EXTINGUISHER SPECS SPECIFICATIONS. TILE FIN FINISH STRUCTSTRUCTURAL ADJUSTABLE FM FACTORY MUTUAL STL STEEL �\5OF SECTION MARK 11 � � -- -"" -�- A� AO r�� 20 Ki `: rn J W S "' J 3. LANDLORD IS REQUIRED TO PROVIDE ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR THE FIRE ALARM MONITORING SYSTEM FROM ALL EXTERIOR PIV AND SHUT OFF VALVES PLYWOOD CONCRETE BLOCK ® AFF ALT ALUM ABOVE FINISH FLOOR FR FIRE RATED SS STAINLESS STEEL ALTERNATE FRT FIRE RETARDANT T1BM TOP OF BEAM ALUMINUM TREATED TEMP TEMPERED A_1 2r TUKV,k,.. � � C.F. � Z) v Z) r.. 4. 4. TO THE BUILDING (TO BE LOCATED BY THE TENANT ARCHITECT AND SUBJECT TO THE AHJ). ANY SPRINKLER HEADS PLACED BY LANDLORD SHALL BE PER TENANT STORE LAYOUT PLANS AND BE IN COMPLIANCE WITH LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. RIGID INSULATION STEEL ® ® ARCH BJ BLDG BLK ARCHITECTURAL FS FLOORSINK TG TRUSS GIRDER BAR JOIST FV FIELD VERIFY T&G TONGUE & GROOVE BUILDING FTG FOOTING TIJST TOP OF JOIST BLOCK GA GAUGE T1ST TOP OF STEEL r5__� ENLARGED PLAN/ A-� hi9BL�C'1 M //�•� W L.L. T- I"' SPRINKLER HEADS IN EXPOSED FINISHED SOFFITS, CANOPIES, RECEIVING POD, DRYWALL CEILINGS, AND FINISHED CEILINGS BELOW 11'-0" WITH VIEW OF BLK'G BLOCKING GALV GALVANIZED TOM TOP OF MASONRY ( DETAIL REFERENCE DATE REVISION THE PUBLIC SHALL HAVE SEMI RECESSED FLUSH HEADS. BATT OR BLANKET , , ® INSULATION CONCRETE BM BRG BEAM GP GUARD POST TOS TOP OF SLAB BEARING GWB GYPSUM WALL BOARD TYP TYPICAL I I REVIEWED FOR 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 5. 6. LANDLORD SHALL FURNISH TO TENANT AN APPROVED 5 -YEAR CERTIFICATION FOR ANY SPRINKLER SYSTEM COMPONENTS THAT LANDLORD INSTALLS. ALL FIRE PIPING SHALL MEET THE MINIMUM STANDARDS OF A CORROSION RESISTANCE RATIO (CRR) OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION 0� REVISION INDICATOR BRK BTM CIC CJ BRICK HC HANDICAPPED UNO UNLESS NOTED BOTTOM HM HOLLOW METAL OTHERWISE CENTER TO CENTER HR HOUR VT TILE CONTROL JOINT HT HEIGHT VCT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE l J �3\ OODE COMPLIANCE '" APPROVED 1.0 OR GREATER. NEW CONSTRUCTION � ROD&SEALANT CKT COG CIRCUIT HVAC AIRCOHEATING,DITIONILATING, CEILING AIR CONDITIONING W/ VINYL WALL COVERING COLUMN INSUL INSULATION W! WITH ELEVATION KEY A-� RECEIVED . FEAR O Q 2016 CITY � � ��g��iq�� ea `l O lU 1 TY A 7. 8. . WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM IS REQUIRED THROUGHOUT THE INTERIOR OF THE BUILDING. HOSE RACK SYSTEM: 1-W HOSE RACKS SUPPLIED FROM SEPARATE RISER (IF REQUIRED)C DOOR IDENTIFICATION + FLOOR ELEVATION COL CONC CONST CONT CONCRETE JB JUNCTION BOX W/O WITHOUT CONSTRUCTION LF LINEAL FEET CONTINUOUS LG LONG Q REVISION CLOUD WITAl a 0 ��13 �Ut6 O GRIDLINE CONTR CONTRACTOR LLH LONG LEG HORIZONTAL REVISION DELTA TAG iO TU iId 9. 10. ff CONTROL RISERS FROM FLOOR TO ROOF ELEVATION SHALL BE NOT LESS THAN 6 IN DIAMETER. DESIGN DENSITIES AND AREAS OF APPLICATION AS FOLLOWS: X SECTION INDICATOR e DETAIL INDICATOR CL CMU CENTERLINE LLV LONG LEG VERTICAL CONCRETE MASONRY MASY MASONRY UNIT MFR MANUFACTURER REFER TO p►� BUILDING D€VISION PERMIT CENTER a. FOR OFFICES, VESTIBULE, CORRIDORS, HALLWAYS, MEN'S RESTROOM, WOMEN'S RESTROOM: LIGHT HAZARD- 0.10 GPM/SF OVER 1,500 SF; MAXIMUM AX.X AX. CRS DA COURSE MECH MECHANICAL DIAMETNG MoER R MET METALRYOPENING DETAIL NUMBER NOT IN CONTRACT COVERAGE PER SPRINKLER HEAD= 225 SF DIM ON DIMENSION NIC DOWN NOM NOMINAL b. ALL OTHER AREAS - STORAGE AND DISPLAY OF CLASS I - IV COMMODITIES ON SHELVES TO MAXIMUM 12'-0" STORAGE HEIGHT (NFPA 13 TABLE 12.1.10.1.1 DS DW DOWNSPOUT NTS NOT TO SCALE DRYWALL ON CENTER 2 SEE 2/A-1 AND FIG. 12.1.10) -.20 GPM/SF OVER 1,500 SF C. DESIGN AREA SHALL BE THE HYDRAULICALLY MOST REMOTE RECTANGULAR AREA HAVING A DIMENSION PARALLEL TO THE BRANCH LINE AND EQUAL TO DWGS EF ELEC EQ DRAWINGS PL PLATE, PROPERTY LINE EACH FACE PR PAIR ELECTRICAL PT PRESERVATIVE TREATED PT EQUAL RAD RADIUS A-1 LV OR GREATER THAN 1.2 TIMES THE SQUARE ROOT OF THE AREA OF SPRINKLER OPERATION. EJ EW EACH EXPANSION JOINT REINF REINFORCE (ED) (ING) FXCHWAY REP REPRESENTATIVE SHEET NUMBER qmw d. COMBINED HOSE STREAM ALLOWANCE = 500 GPM EXT EXTERIOR READ REQUIRED G-0.1 11. LOWER AND UPPER CANOPY AREAS ARE TO HAVE ASIDE WALL, DRY HEAD FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM UNLESS OTHERWISE DIRECTED BY LOCAL AHJ. 2015-29-00 t,' ;.r m U Q LL Q d 0 0 LL a N iri In in C) 0 N ri m a. a 0 F- 0 0 f CL v v m 0 N `\i M 0 C 0 LANDLORD = J Z � DESCRIPTION z u — BCF BCF SUB NOTES = J C� J Q � z z O C/) D U = J Z ; � z U — �^ E � � — 08 DOORS & WINDOWS cont'd THE COMBINATION DOOR COMPANY ADT I SENSORMATIC SECURITY SERVICES 2500 SW 3RD AVE, �- O GLASS & GLAZING (& ACCESSORIES) ? DOCK OVERHEAD DOORS & KEY SWITCHING HOLLYWOOD, FL 33023 � FLUORESCENT LAMPS KNOX BOX FOR FIRE DEPARTMENT NEW CASTLE, DE 19720 CONTACT: BOB STEPHENS U �N Q o 0O EXIT SIGNS DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) �LoCn Q4- ` PH: (800) 531-4770 EXT. 4807 MISC. z EM: trocco@adt.com adt.com CELL: (954) 605-3100 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION I MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH (IF APPLICABLE) LU Q PH: (215) 654-7450 09 FINISHES 00 SEE BCF VENDOR LIST PORCELAIN / CERAMIC TILE (SALES FLOOR) GROUT FOR PORCELAIN I CERAMIC TILE (SALES FLOOR ONLY) SEE BCF VENDOR LIST LVT (LUXURY VINYL TILE) FX: (302) 328-5184 SEE BCF VENDOR LIST WIRING ACCESSORIES ADHESIVES FOR LVT z�=Q EM: tricia_ulery@mohawkind.com VESTIBULE & ENTRY FLOORING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM SEE BCF VENDOR LIST ADHESIVES FOR VESTIBULE & ENTRY FLOORING VESTIBULE FLOORING ROOM SIGNAGE ELECTRICAL 1 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION TO BE CIRCUITED 50150 SWITCHING 1 TO BE CONNECTED ANTI -THEFT DEVICES TRANSITION STRIPS FOR PORCELAIN ! CERAMIC TILE SCOTT SIGN SYSTEMS, INC. 3 -way mirrors, hooks, doors stops, mirrors, benches SENSORMATIC ADT SECURITY SERVICES) 37 SHUMAN AVENUE CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM / ACOUSTIC CEILING TILES CONTACT: KATHY HANNON J GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS W/ FRAMING STOUGHTON, MA 02072 SWITCH GEAR I PANEL DISTRIBUTION & TRANSFORMERS: MDP 1600 AMPS., 480Y/277l314/60 EM: kathyh@scottsigns.com FLOORING PREP EM: mgiosa@tycoint.com CONTACT: CANDACE ROSA SPECIALTY LAMPS CERAMIC TILE & GROUT (TOILET ROOM WALLS & FLOORING) € 439 MAIN STREET, SUITE 311 PH: (215) 946-8118 THINSET MORTAR SPECIALTY LIGHTING ON EXTERIOR ENTRY FACADE FX: (941) 684-0517 r T 06457 ADHESIVES FOR VESTIBULE & ENTRY FLOORING CELL: (267) 566 2111 STANDARD EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING VINYL BASE : BEN CONTACT: BERN FRU51 CONTAMIDDLCT: PH: (781) 573-0262 METAL BASE TRANSITION (TOILET ROOMS) SEE BCF VENDOR LIST EM: modarinc.com THERMOPLASTIC SHEETS (KYDEX, KOROGAURD) ! TELEPHONE SYSTEM/ WIRING FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PANELS (FRP) DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ! WIRING STAINLESS STEEL SPLASH SHIELDS (TOILET ROOMS) CELL: (860) 212-6249 GYPSUM BOARD W/ FRAMING ' KYDEX l INTERIOR PAINTING DISCONNECT SWITCHING COMPACTOR (INTERIOR I EXTERIOR) EXTERIOR PAINTING GRAND ENTRANCE TYCO INTEGRATED SECURITY EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD SHEATHING 9932 PROSPECT AVENUE, SUITE 137 (CONSTRUCTION SPECIALITIES) EXTERIOR FACADE FINISHES (TO MATCH INTERIOR MALL FINISHES) ' RELOCATION OF PHONE "D" MARK (IF APPLICABLE) i INTERIOR MALL ENTRANCE FINISHES (TO MATCH EXTERIOR FACADE FINISHES) CONTACT: JERRALD HAYLES EM: trocco@tyco.com DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM (CASH ROOM ONLY) DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) CONTACT: SCOTT BILBREY EM: jhayles@c-sgroup.com MISC. 3 ' EM: bilbrey@blairsign.net PH: (888) 424-6287 CELL: (610) 733-26420 CAMERA WIRING 10 SPECIALTIES STORAGE SHELVING: BABY WIDESPAN SHELVING, & BABY REGISTRY KIOSK & LAYAWAY i ROOF TOP DISCONNECTS SHELVING & CAGE FX: (619) 792-1608 CASHWRAPS & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER SAWCUTS &JUNCTION BOXES TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES STOCKROOM & STORAGE ROOM SHELVING & RACKING CART CORRAL QUESTMARK Stainless steel accessories, toilet paper cover & toilet seat dispensers, sanitary napkin receptacle, EXTERIOR BUILDING SIGNAGE DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) CONTACT: ANDREW PRITT i baby changing station PYLON SIGNAGE CONTACT: THERESA GREEN POWER POLE FOR BABY KIOSK EM: andrew.pritt@centimark.com QUEUE CUSTOMER SERVICE TRAFFIC SYSTEM PCA EM: tgreen@gatekeepersystems.com CART CORRAL RAILING SYSTEM PH: (484) 488-3045 PAINT WALL ACCENT RED. PH: (949) 271-3820 LOCKERS PH: (661) 219-3174 CELL: (484) 951-0778 `s WILLOW GROVE, PA 19090 FITTING ROOM DOORS, FRAMES, HARDWARE, AND FLAT WALL MIRRORS 17 ? HOOKS ARE SUPPLIED BY MODAR TO BCF CONTACT: JILL BLATSTEIN FITTING ROOM BENCH, 3 -WAY MIRROR, AND HOOKS HOOKS ARE SUPPLIED BY MODAR TO BCF TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES: HAND DRYERS, BABY CHANGERS, SOAP, TOILET SEAT COVER & SEE BCF VENDOR LIST COMPUTERS, TELEPHONES PAPER TOWEL DISPENSERS, SANITARY NAPKIN RECEPTACLES, TRASH RECEPTACLES, PH: (800) 257-9362 COMPACTOR & GUIDE RAILS TOILETS, URINALS, SINKS, COUNTERS, GRAB BARS, TOILET PARTITIONS, MIRRORS & ' FX: (215) 659-9158 DRINKING FOUNTAINS TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SPECIALTY FLOORING Hand dryers, plastic paper towel dispensers, soap CORNER GUARDS (PLASTIC) PRE -OPENING EXPENSES CORNER GUARDS (STEEL) ROOM NAME PLATES & ADA SIGNAGE CAMERAS SEE BCF VENDOR LIST 6060 ROCKSIDE WOODS BLVD, SUITE 400 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS NUMBER & LOCATIONS DICTATED BY FIRE MARSHALL t AIR FRESHENERS (VESTIBULE) YARLEY, PA 19067 ` 1 PENN PLAZA, 44TH FLOOR DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) CONTACT: CAROL SCHACHTMAN NEW YORK, NY 10119 MISC. EM: bob.langan@novar.com PH: (215) 968-8661 11 EQUIPMENT l PH: (216) 682-1324 MICROWAVE CELL: (215) 776-0484 VENDING MACHINES EM: liz.fristachi@bunzlretailusa.com CELL: (216) 310-7700 REFRIGERATORS ` PH: (212) 307-7100 EXT. 4011 WATER COOLER (EMPLOYEE LOUNGE) DOCK EQUIPMENT: DOCKS, SEALS & BUMPERS, CANOPIES 1 SHELTERS-� DOCK EQUIPMENT: DOCK LEVELER, EDGE -OF -DOCK LEVELER, RECESSED SCISSORS LIFT SEWAGE EJECTORS / DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) MISC. ` \` 12 FURNISHINGS OFFICE FURNITURE (CHAIRS, FILE CABINETS, DESK) ARTWORK \ BULLETIN BOARDS / \, SAFE DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) MISC. E f \ 13 SPECIAL CONSRUCTION MEZZANINE SYSTEMS OVERHEAD HANGING RAIL (IN STOCK I RECEIVING) ' DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) MISC. N 3 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS FREIGHT ELEVATORS (6000 LB CAPACITY, 10'x 12' CAB SIZE) PASSENGER ELEVATORS (4500 LB CAPACITY, 5'-8" x T-9"' CAB SIZE) ESCALATORS EXISTING ESCALATORS: MACHINE CLEANING OF TREADS & RISERS MERCHANDISE CONVEYOR Pg� PLATFORM LIFT G� P WHEELCHAIR LIFT DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) MISC. 15 MECHANICAL SPRINKLER SYSTEMS I FIRE PUMP PLUMBING: ROOF DRAINS, DRINKING FOUNTAINS, FIXTURES, TOILET ROOM PLUMBING, ETC. ADA COMPLIANT TOILET ROOMS COLD WATER & HOT WATER PIPING, PIPING INSULATION, HOT WATER HEATER ROOF TOP UNITS (CARRIER OR APPVD EQ) W/ ASSOCIATED GAS, ELECTRIC & MISC. STEEL / ASHRAE CALCULATIONS FOR SIZING PRELIMINARY & FINAL ADJUSTING, TESTING, & BALANCING W/ DOCUMENTATION PROPER COMMISSIONING OF ALL MECHANICAL SYSTEMS MAINTENANCE MANUALS & OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS PROTECTIVE CAGE FOR HVAC UNITS (IF REQUIRED) HVAC DISTRIBUTION HVAC SMOKE DETECTORS EXHAUST SYSTEMS EXHAUST SYSTEMS (TOILET ROOMS, EMPLOYEE LOUNGE, ETC.) ® 1 BACKFLOW DEVICES i LANDSCAPING IRRIGATION (IF REQUIRED) DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) i MISC. 3 E 16 ELECTRICAL LL TO PULL WIRE SECURITY ROOM MONITORS & DVR'S SOUND SYSTEM (AMPLIFIER) AMPLIFIER BY BCF TELEVISION, ANTENNA & TV WALL MOUNTING BRACKET E TV & BRACKET PROVIDED BY BCF, INSTALLED BY LL GATEKEEPER CART STOP SYSTEM SOUND SYSTEM (WIRING & SPEAKERS) i BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM I WIRING i SEE BCF VENDOR LIST, LL TO PULL WIRE SECURITY SYSTEMS SEE BCF VENDOR LIST SENSORMATIC LOSS PREVENTION SYSTEM SEE BCF VENDOR LIST BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (B.A.S.) LL TO CONTRACT WITH NOVAR HVAC SYSTEM CONNECTED TO BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM (B.A.S.) i M 0 C 0 DESCRIPTION LANDLORD 2 i J (n I J _ z BCF BCFSUB = J C� J Q � z 2 J CIS J z Q Z:) z 16 ELECTRICAL cont'd MOHAWK ALADDIN MILLS LIGHT OPTIONS INTERNATIONAL THE COMBINATION DOOR COMPANY ADT I SENSORMATIC SECURITY SERVICES 2500 SW 3RD AVE, �- O LIGHT FIXTURES (GENERAL, EMERGENCY, NIGHT) c o ? 18 BOULDEN CIRCLE, SUITE 24 HOLLYWOOD, FL 33023 � FLUORESCENT LAMPS EM: daschmidt@combinationdoor.com M E NEW CASTLE, DE 19720 CONTACT: BOB STEPHENS U �N Q o 0O EXIT SIGNS o �N (zNCj PH: (920) 922-2050 �LoCn Q4- CONTACT: ANTHONY ROCCO PH: (800) 531-4770 EXT. 4807 GENERATOR TO SUPPLY LIGHTING & COOLING FOR 50% OF THE BUILDING (IF APPLICABLE) z EM: trocco@adt.com adt.com CELL: (954) 605-3100 PORTABLE GENERATOR CONNECTION I MANUAL TRANSFER SWITCH (IF APPLICABLE) LU Q PH: (215) 654-7450 EM: bob_stephens@mohawkind.com 00 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION (LOCATION TO BE DETERMINED BY BCF) ry z CELL: (610) 733-6420 CONTACT: TRICIA ULERY WIRING FX: (302) 328-5184 CELL: (954) 605-1344 WIRING ACCESSORIES z�=Q EM: tricia_ulery@mohawkind.com -' FIRE ALARM SYSTEM U) m VESTIBULE FLOORING ROOM SIGNAGE ELECTRICAL 1 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION TO BE CIRCUITED 50150 SWITCHING 1 TO BE CONNECTED ANTI -THEFT DEVICES MATS, INC. SCOTT SIGN SYSTEMS, INC. 3 -way mirrors, hooks, doors stops, mirrors, benches SENSORMATIC ADT SECURITY SERVICES) 37 SHUMAN AVENUE TO BUILDING GENERATOR WITH THE B.A.S. PANEL BOARDS (IF APPLICABLE) CONTACT: KATHY HANNON J CONTACT: MIKE GIOSA STOUGHTON, MA 02072 SWITCH GEAR I PANEL DISTRIBUTION & TRANSFORMERS: MDP 1600 AMPS., 480Y/277l314/60 EM: kathyh@scottsigns.com MODAR INC. EM: mgiosa@tycoint.com CONTACT: CANDACE ROSA SPECIALTY LAMPS PH: (800) 237-9447 € 439 MAIN STREET, SUITE 311 PH: (215) 946-8118 EM: Crosa@matsinc.com SPECIALTY LIGHTING ON EXTERIOR ENTRY FACADE FX: (941) 684-0517 r T 06457 CELL: (267) 566 2111 STANDARD EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING : BEN CONTACT: BERN FRU51 CONTAMIDDLCT: PH: (781) 573-0262 BALANCE OF LOADING OF ALL PANELS, SUBMIT REPORT & TYPED AMENDED PANEL SCHEDULE EM: modarinc.com FX: (781) 344-1537 TELEPHONE SYSTEM/ WIRING PH: (860) 316-2555 EXT. 23 DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ! WIRING CELL: (860) 212-6249 CARRIER MISCELLANEOUS WALL & COLUMN OUTLETS KYDEX l DISCONNECT SWITCHING COMPACTOR (INTERIOR I EXTERIOR) BLAIR SIGN PROGRAMS GRAND ENTRANCE TYCO INTEGRATED SECURITY POWER TO PYLON SIGN BUILDING SIGNS (TO BE CONNECTED TO B.A.S.) 9932 PROSPECT AVENUE, SUITE 137 (CONSTRUCTION SPECIALITIES) CONTACT: ANTHONY ROCCO RELOCATION OF PHONE "D" MARK (IF APPLICABLE) i CONTACT: JERRALD HAYLES EM: trocco@tyco.com DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM (CASH ROOM ONLY) CONTACT: SCOTT BILBREY EM: jhayles@c-sgroup.com PH: (302) 395-3520 BUZZER SYSTEMS EM: bilbrey@blairsign.net PH: (888) 424-6287 CELL: (610) 733-26420 CAMERA WIRING PH: (619) 792-1600 x102 ROOF TOP DISCONNECTS FX: (619) 792-1608 SAWCUTS &JUNCTION BOXES TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES CART CONTAINMENT SYSTEM CART CORRAL QUESTMARK Stainless steel accessories, toilet paper cover & toilet seat dispensers, sanitary napkin receptacle, GATEKEEPER DEMO EXISTING AS REQUIRED (IF APPLICABLE) CONTACT: ANDREW PRITT i baby changing station CONTACT: THERESA GREEN POWER POLE FOR BABY KIOSK EM: andrew.pritt@centimark.com PCA EM: tgreen@gatekeepersystems.com MISC. PH: (484) 488-3045 2425 MARYLAND ROAD PH: (949) 271-3820 PH: (661) 219-3174 CELL: (484) 951-0778 `s WILLOW GROVE, PA 19090 FX: (949) 453-8148 17 SYSTEMS & FIXTURES CONTACT: JILL BLATSTEIN FIXTURES (SEE PLANS FOR DETAILS) EM: jill@pleasecallagain.net COMPUTERS, TELEPHONES PH: (800) 257-9362 COMPACTOR & GUIDE RAILS ' FX: (215) 659-9158 BALER (IF APPLICABLE) TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SPECIALTY FLOORING Hand dryers, plastic paper towel dispensers, soap NOVAR PRE -OPENING EXPENSES CAMERAS 6060 ROCKSIDE WOODS BLVD, SUITE 400 640 LONG ACRE LANE MISC. t YARLEY, PA 19067 NOTES SEE BCF VENDOR LIST SEE BCF VENDOR LIST SEE BCF VENDOR LIST SEE BCF VENDOR LIST PTR MODEL TP2000SP BCF VENDORS PORCELAIN TILE LIGHTING FITTING ROOM DOORS E SECURITY SYSTEMS MOHAWK ALADDIN MILLS LIGHT OPTIONS INTERNATIONAL THE COMBINATION DOOR COMPANY ADT I SENSORMATIC SECURITY SERVICES 2500 SW 3RD AVE, �- O 1251 METROPOLITAN AVE WEST c o CONTACT: DAN SCHMIDT 18 BOULDEN CIRCLE, SUITE 24 HOLLYWOOD, FL 33023 � DEPTFORD, NJ 08066 EM: daschmidt@combinationdoor.com M E NEW CASTLE, DE 19720 CONTACT: BOB STEPHENS U �N Q o 0O CONTACT: MICHELLE PICCONE o �N (zNCj PH: (920) 922-2050 �LoCn Q4- CONTACT: ANTHONY ROCCO PH: (800) 531-4770 EXT. 4807 EM: Michelle.Piccone@cooper-electric.com z EM: trocco@adt.com adt.com CELL: (954) 605-3100 TEL. (856) 853-9922 LU Q PH: (215) 654-7450 EM: bob_stephens@mohawkind.com 00 FAX (856) 853-9581 ry z CELL: (610) 733-6420 CONTACT: TRICIA ULERY w FX: (302) 328-5184 CELL: (954) 605-1344 z�=Q EM: tricia_ulery@mohawkind.com -' 0 U) m VESTIBULE FLOORING ROOM SIGNAGE FITTING ROOM ACCESSORIES ANTI -THEFT DEVICES MATS, INC. SCOTT SIGN SYSTEMS, INC. 3 -way mirrors, hooks, doors stops, mirrors, benches SENSORMATIC ADT SECURITY SERVICES) 37 SHUMAN AVENUE z CONTACT: KATHY HANNON J CONTACT: MIKE GIOSA STOUGHTON, MA 02072 V EM: kathyh@scottsigns.com MODAR INC. EM: mgiosa@tycoint.com CONTACT: CANDACE ROSA PH: (800) 237-9447 Z) 439 MAIN STREET, SUITE 311 PH: (215) 946-8118 EM: Crosa@matsinc.com C0 FX: (941) 684-0517 r T 06457 CELL: (267) 566 2111 : BEN CONTACT: BERN FRU51 CONTAMIDDLCT: PH: (781) 573-0262 EM: modarinc.com FX: (781) 344-1537 PH: (860) 316-2555 EXT. 23 CELL: (860) 212-6249 CARRIER EXTERIOR SIGNAGE KYDEX LOSS PREVENTION CARRIER BLAIR SIGN PROGRAMS GRAND ENTRANCE TYCO INTEGRATED SECURITY 3 HOLLYHOCK WAY 9932 PROSPECT AVENUE, SUITE 137 (CONSTRUCTION SPECIALITIES) CONTACT: ANTHONY ROCCO NEWTON, NJ 07860 SANTEE, CA 92071 CONTACT: JERRALD HAYLES EM: trocco@tyco.com CONTACT: BOB ECKWEILER CONTACT: SCOTT BILBREY EM: jhayles@c-sgroup.com PH: (302) 395-3520 EM: bob.eckweiler@carrier.utc.com EM: bilbrey@blairsign.net PH: (888) 424-6287 CELL: (610) 733-26420 PH: (973) 222-6742 PH: (619) 792-1600 x102 FAX: (860) 998-2679 FX: (619) 792-1608 POLISHED CONCRETE TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES CART CONTAINMENT SYSTEM CART CORRAL QUESTMARK Stainless steel accessories, toilet paper cover & toilet seat dispensers, sanitary napkin receptacle, GATEKEEPER LAVI INDUSTRIES CONTACT: ANDREW PRITT baby changing station CONTACT: THERESA GREEN CONTACT: ROSE LOCKWOOD EM: andrew.pritt@centimark.com PCA EM: tgreen@gatekeepersystems.com EM: rosel@lavi.com PH: (484) 488-3045 2425 MARYLAND ROAD PH: (949) 271-3820 PH: (661) 219-3174 CELL: (484) 951-0778 WILLOW GROVE, PA 19090 FX: (949) 453-8148 CONTACT: ERIC BIEGLER CONTACT: JILL BLATSTEIN EM: ericb@lavi.com EM: jill@pleasecallagain.net PH: (661) 219-3158 PH: (800) 257-9362 BID INSTRUCTIONS: SUBMIT $2800 FOR FX: (215) 659-9158 SINGLE ENTRY STORE, TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM SPECIALTY FLOORING Hand dryers, plastic paper towel dispensers, soap NOVAR C.A.S. ASSOCIATES dispensers 6060 ROCKSIDE WOODS BLVD, SUITE 400 640 LONG ACRE LANE BUNZL INDEPENDENCE, OH 44131 YARLEY, PA 19067 1 PENN PLAZA, 44TH FLOOR CONTACT: BOB LANGAN CONTACT: CAROL SCHACHTMAN NEW YORK, NY 10119 EM: bob.langan@novar.com PH: (215) 968-8661 CONTACT: LIZ FRISTACHI PH: (216) 682-1324 CELL: (215) 776-0484 EM: liz.fristachi@bunzlretailusa.com CELL: (216) 310-7700 FX: (215) 493-6193 PH: (212) 307-7100 EXT. 4011 FX: (212) 307-7055 GENERAL NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: THE RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX IS FOR USE AS A GUIDE IN BIDDING. SCOPE OF WORK VARIES PER STORE AND THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS SHALL GOVERN. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE BIDDING GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE FINAL RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR EACH SPECIFIC PROJECT WITH THE BURLINGTON CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THEIR FINAL BID. GENERAL NOTE TO CONTRACTOR: ITEMS WITH A LONG LEAD TIME TO BE ORDERED AT THE START OF CONSTRUCTION. EXAMPLES INCLUDE BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO: ROOF TOP UNITS, CART CONTAINMENT AND LOSS PREVENTION SYSTEMS. CONFIRM LEAD TIMES FOR ALL OTHER EQUIPMENT / MATERIALS TO ENSURE ON TIME DELIVERY TO KEEP SCHEDULE. € #VIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED h MAR 0 8 2016 city Of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TFL MIflLA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER UT J � J N L-� E C U) O �0 f6"Ci-' U �- O M c o LO � N :— dNM 04 aLO a)ii`QN°' M E COL. N U �N Q o 0O om o �N (zNCj �LoCn Q4- N DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET u �0 DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 0�� UJ W Q Q z in U-UwCO LU Q �-- 00 U ry z C)o U)O w Wwa) z�=Q -' 0 U) m r�In� V � O z z�cn— J n J V q W Z) Q C0 n r �" DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET y i * :fir v T is+ t � 4) - U) • U , :ai ;;:'R .�. :., ,SFS �.. � � a,�,,.`�,.. ;,„,_ �Vi• I� _... :°'` ,:ate ;...:...-�.-:...;�r,.d,..;;„s O Rf : • � � tom- s , -: min_ ; ...: $': .aY✓;`::'.� ,. : Ye u�> "':vs... � � `.: _ ; ;y.... � tea, x :� '> i •��._ � ., I CD O C'4 LO 49V cu _., �. N {y :,, 1✓ f , „ , WR G , .. '. ..... .. '• .Ftp :NNM1F ,LMIY416 lIKMM' gMM1P1�` �WYMYF .., ,. N :, ^' ,: ..r'. t ,. ..,. ..,.,.._,.,.. - .. , fj cu yr. ,> Uj itE 7. :. .. �, " f. ' z I gE5v j� .y 4 1., .yam .... .". .: ,. ... .. ,.... }....... ,. t ...... M#Kj 2 • •' � ,`� I , max17-25 ........... e,��y 1 SO 11�'ia0+4`> 3cNOTE: X IS < OR EQUAL TO 25" (635 MM); Z SHALL BE > OR EQUAL X, WHEN X < 20" (510 MM), THEN Y SHALL BE 48" (1220 MM) MAXIMUM. WHEN X IS 20-2511(510 - 635 MM), THEN Y SHALL BE 44 " (1120 MM) MAXIMUM. ('_�1013STRUCTED HIGH FORWARD REACH 2 KNEE CLEARANCES 3 TOE CLEARANCES 4 MAXIMUM SIDE REACH OVER AN OBSTRUCTION 5 MAXIMUM FORWARD REACH OVER AN OBSTRUCTION ��3SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: NTS 0 P InU �� as 0 p FITTING ROOM GENERAL NOTES: 1. ACCESSIBLE CHANGING STALL DOOR SHALL HAVE ACCESSIBILITY SYMBOL LOCATED ON STALL DOOR. L 1. THRESHOLDS SHALL NOT EXCEED 112" IN HEIGHT & BEVELED @ 1:2 MAX PER 2. AT LEAST 1 MIRROR BOTTOM SHALL NOT HAVE A DISTANCE GREATER THAN 20" ICCIANSI SECTION 404.2.4. LOCATED OFF FINISH FLOOR. MIRROR SHALL BE MIN. 18" WIDE BY 54" HIGH, AND 2. ALL HANDLES, PULLS, LATCHES, LOCKS, ETC. SHALL BE LEVER TYPE SHALL BE MOUNTED IN A POSITION AFFORDING A VIEW TO A PERSON ON THE BENCH 3. IF A DOOR HAS A CLOSER, THE SWEEP SHALL BE ADJUSTED SO THAT FROM AN AS WELL AS TO A PERSON IN A STANDING POSITION. OPEN POSITION OF 90 DEGREES, THE DOOR WILL TAKE AT LEAST 5 SECONDS TO NOTES 3. CLOTHING HOOKS SHALL BE MOUNTED AT 48" A.F.F. MOVE TO AN OPEN POSITION OF 12 DEGREES PER ICC/ANSI SECTION 404.2.7. 1. 5%, BUT NOT LESS THAN ONE OF THE LOCKERS SHALL BE ACCESSIBLE. THIS DETAIL FOR REFERENCE 4. CAULK ALL EDGES OF MIRRORS & BENCHES V- rONLY - TENANT TO PROVIDE I I MAXIMUM FORCE ON EXTERIOR DOOR SHALL BE 8.5 LBF AND INTERIOR DOORS 5 2. THE BOTTOM OF THE LOCKER SHELF IS 15" MINIMUM A.F.F. & A 5. ALLOWABLE STRESSES SHALL NOT BE EXCEEDED FOR MATERIALS USED WHERE A I LBF. SHELF/ROD (IF PROVIDED) MUST BE LOCATED 48" MAXIMUM A.F.F. LOCKERS, GC TO INSTALL VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL FORCE OF 250 POUNDS IS APPLIED AT ANY POINT ON THE z j 4. FLOOR/ LANDING SHALL BEAT THE SAME ELEVATION ON EACH SIDE OF THE 3. THE ACCESSIBLE LOCKER SHALL BE IDENTIFIED WITH THE EXACT MODEL AND TYPE MAY VARYSHOWN FOR SEAT, FASTENER MOUNTING DEVICE, OR SUPPORTING STRUCTURE. . INTERNATIONAL SYMBOL OF ACCESSIBILITY. , 6. FITTING ROOM BENCH HEIGHT A.F.F. AND DEPTH TO COMPLY WITH ANSI 117.1 I FLOOR ACCESSIBILITY PLACEMENT ONLY : ( ) co N 1 SPACE 4. THE DOOR 48" MIN.%60" MIN. 5. PROVIDE A 5A0""DTURN NG RAD US N FRONWARE SHALL BE LEVER T OFF THE ACCCCESSIEQUAL DOOR B DWARF. �/// I I LOCKER. I �--------- ' 18,E 1'-5" MIN. z V-7" MAX. 1 PULL SIDE I HEAVY DUTY STAINLESS STEEL / 17 LU 7M 4'-0" MIN. I PUSH SIDE I COAT ROD (1" DIAMETER) WITH - z LL zoj I (2) WALL MOUNT FLANGES.FaMPcf) "' o 48" MIN. 20"-24" j NOTE: HOT WATER AND DRAIN I I I I COAT ROD 0- O_ 1 z_ > PIPES UNDER LAVATORIES SHALL I I oo ¢ a Y w ' 1 z o N v BE INSULATED OR OTHERWISE j I WALL PER w o w __j (SEE PLAN) 1 , �, N "' LL CONFIGURED TO PROTECT I I I FLOOR PLAN m o Z co N 0 AGAINST CONTACT PER ICC/ANSI I z 12 ° o z 0117.1-2009 606.6. WATER o ACCESSIBLE o„ I -p b b b b b b O oo ti TEMPERATURE AT ALL LAVATORIES I _ = I = LOCKERS N o a�--------------- oo v i - I w co (TOILET AND PANTRY) SHALL NOT `V w I LL (TYPICAL OF 6) MIRROR CLOTHING ACCESSIBLE ACCESSIBLE 8" MIN. KNEE 6" MAX. TOE BE GREATER THAN 110 DEGRESS.---------------J ¢ HOOK BENCH BENCH CLEARANCE CLEARANCE HAND DRYER PAPER TOWEL SOAP MIRROR OVER DIAPER CHANGING STATION (FRONT VIEW) (SIDE VIEW) DISPENSER DISPENSER LAVATORY ELEVATION SECTION TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY ACCESSIBLE (�_6 ACCESSIBLE SINK DETAIL7 ACCESSIBLE DF DETAIL 8 ACCESSIBLE DOORS s ACCESSIBLE BREAK ROOM LOCKERS 10 MOUNTING HEIGHTS 11 FITTING ROOM ACCESSORIES A0.3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: NTS A0,3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: N.T.S. A0 3 SCALE: N.T.S. A0 3 SCALE: 114" = 1'-0" ACCESSIBILITY NOTES: CONTROLS & OPERATING MECHANISMS: • ALL REQUIRED CONTROLS AND OPERATING MECHANISMS SHALL BE PLACED BETWEEN 15 INCHES AND 48 INCHES ABOVE THE FLOOR AND MEET FULL COMPLIANCE WITH ANSI 308 OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE OPERABLE WITH ONE HAND AND SHALL NOT REQUIRE TIGHT GRASPING, PINCHING, OR TWISTING OF THE WRIST. • THE FORCE REQUIRED TO ACTIVATE OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE 5.0 POUNDS MAXIMUM. 39" - 41" / DOORS: '` • ALL DOORS PROVIDE THE REQUIRED MANEUVERING CLEARANCE AT DOOR PER ICCIANSI SURFACE MOUNTED, T-0" 4'-6" ®,, Al 17.1-2009 CHAPTER 4.404.2.3. BOTTOM FED TOILET MIN. z MIN.' \� • ALL NEW OR ALTERED DOORS TO HAVE LEVER -OPERATED HARDWARE PER ICCIANSI PAPER DISPENSER 6" 1'-0" 2'-0" 3' 6" 1'-0" s- Al 17.1-2009 CHAPTER 4.404. 6" T-0" T-6" 1' 0" t '" • ALL DOORS SHALL HAVE A 32" CLEAR DOOR OPENING MEASURED FROM THE FACE OF THE WALL FINISH WALL FINISH MIN. MIN. MIN. MAX. © \ DOOR WHEN IT IS OPENED 90° TO THE DOOR STOP PER ICCIANSI Al 17.1-2009 CHAPTER MIN. MIN. MAX. WOOD BLOCKING, WOOD BLOCKING, WOTYPFOR ALL GRAB j 4.404. PEENED GRIP NP. FOR ALL GRAB PEENED GRIP BAR LOCATIONS � • ALL DOORS LEADING INTO HAZARDOUS ROOMS OR SPACES TO HAVE KNURLED BAR LOCATIONS 1-1/2" DIAM. METAL w HARDWARE. 1-1/2" DIAM. METAL v GRAB BARS GRAB BARS = o o • ALL PUBLIC AND COMMON AREA INTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE 5# MAX. FORCE TO OPEN PER LL_ - / \ ICC/ ANSI 117.1-2009 SECTION 404.2,8. `L � � "- `.) � ° ti • ALL PUBLIC AND COMMON AREA EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE 8.5 # MAX FORCE TO OPEN LL ch < - C�i M - o M z PER ]CC/ANSI A117.1 2009 SECTION 404. co `"i a r' CARPETING AND FLOORING: a 11„ 11„ "' a> " 12 12 13-1 - • CARPET TILE THICKNESS NOT TO EXCEED %" PER ICC/ANSI - 2009 SECTION 302.2. 2 2 - o- WALL 0 WALL oTHIS DETAIL FOR REFERENCE • CARPET TILE THICKNESS IS FROM THE FLOOR FINISH TO TOP OF TILE PER ICCIANSI 2009 " ONLY - TENANT TOFURNISH SECTION 302.2. 1'-6" 7EE _ g 16"-18" SURFACE MOUNTED, 2'-0"MIN. AND INSTALL FIXTURE, GC TO • FLOOR SURFACES SHALL BE FIRM, STABLE AND SLIP RESISTANT PER ICCIANSI A117.1-2009 BOTTOM FED TOILET PROVIDE POWER AND DATA SECTION 302.1 PAPER DISPENSER AND FINAL CONNECTION • THRESHOLDS SHALL BEA MAXIMUM%" WITH A 1:2 BEVEL. VENDING MACHINES: ADAAG ADAAG - ACCESSIBLE ADAAG - ACCESSIBLE ANSI ANSI - ACCESSIBLE ANSI - ACCESSIBLE ALL OPERABLE PARTS SHALL BE WITHIN THE REACH RANGE OF 15"48" AFF 11 GRAB BAR SECTION 12 TOILET FRONT ELEVATION13 TOILET SIDE ELEVATION11A GRAB BAR SECTION 12A TOILET FRONT ELEVATION13A TOILET SIDE ELEVATION 14 CASH WRAP - ISOMETRIC REV EWE FOR AO.3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: NTS A0 3 SCALE: N.T.S. CODE-COMPLIANCEAPPROVED R V CITY OF TUWvflfiLA MAR, 0 8 2016 AN 13 2016 6„ i r' Tu PERMIT CENTER IN ,.>." CENTERED ON , ..,� �u.,.,.,� UILL7IN�,.�IVISI � � S: TACTILE - -� ARACTERS, SYMBOLS AND THEIR BACKGROUND SHALL HAVE A NONGLARE FINISH. I -- W Q CHARACTERS CHARACTERS AND SYMBOLS SHALL CONTRAST WITH THEIR BACKGROUND. U I-- �, 2. CHARACTERS ON SIGNS SHALL BE RAISED 1132" MINIMUM & SHALL BE SANS SERIF G� z 9" 8" 9" POWER POLE PROVIDED & THIS DETAIL FOR REFERENCE oo� co UPPERCASE CHARACTERS ACCOMPANIED BY GRADE 2 BRAILLE. RAISED CHARACTERS V J LL W INSTALLED BY GC. PROVIDE 24" 10" ONLY - TENANT TO PROVIDE 00 POWER POLE G REQUIRED FIXTURE, GC TO PROVIDE THE ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN MEETS ALL OF THE REQUIREMENTS PER ANSI 602. L__ __J �a a SHALL BE A MINIMUM OF 518 AND A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH. J U W 3. PICTOGRAMS SHALL BE ACCOMPANIED BY THE VERBAL DESCRIPTION PLACED DIRECTLY I- 00 WHEN BABY KIOSK IS NOT POWER AND DATA 18" MIN. GRADE II BELOW THE PICTOGRAM. THE OUTSIDE DIMENSION OF THE PICTOGRAM FIELD SHALL BE Q 7- 1. AT THE LO ACCESSIBLE DRINKING FOUNTAIN, A CLEAR FLOOR SPACE COMPLYING WITH SECTION 305, POSITIONED FORA I- Z 00 LOCATED ON WALL. POWER BRAILLE A MINIMUM OF 6" IN HEIGHT. 0 POLE COLOR TO BE WHITE. FORWARD APPROACH, SHALL BE PROVIDED. KNEE AND TOE SPACE COMPLYING WITH SECTION 306 SHALL BE PROVIDED. Q U � W m THE CLEAR FLOOR SPACE SHALL BE CENTERED ON THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN. DOOR MOUNTED TYP. ADA SIGNS 4. CHARACTERS AND BRAILLE SHALL BE IN A HORIZONTAL FORMAT. BRAILLE SHALL BE A.) THE SPOUT SHALL BE LOCATED 15 INCHES MINIMUM FROM THE VERTICAL SUPPORT AND 5 INCHES MAXIMUM FROM SIGN (114 THK.) PLACED A MINIMUM OF 318" AND A MAXIMUM OF 112" DIRECTLY BELOW THE TACTILE Z Co THE FRONT EDGE OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN, INCLUDING BUMPERS. CHARACTERS; FLUSH LEFT OR CENTERED. WHEN TACTILE TEXT IS MULTILINED, ALL B.) THE SPOUT SHALL PROVIDE A FLOW OF WATER 4 INCHES MINIMUM IN HEIGHT. THE ANGLE OF THE WATER STREAM n BRAILLE SHALL BE PLACED TOGETHER BELOW ALL LINES OF TACTILE TEXT. ~ 0 I-- FROM SPOUTS WITHIN 3 INCHES OF THE FRONT OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN SHALL BE 30 DEGREES MAXIMUM, AND o, 5. CONTRACTED II BRAILLE SHALL BE USED WHEREVER BRAILLE IS REQUIRED. DOTS SHALL -� �- �.. ALIGNMENT HOLES FROM SPOUTS BETWEEN 3 INCHES AND 5 INCHES FROM THE FRONT OF THE DRINKING FOUNTAIN SHALL BE 15 BE 1/10" ON CENTER IN EACH CELL WITH 2110" SPACE BETWEEN CELLS. DOTS SHALL BE m 0 Q 0 AREA OF wow r� RAISED A MINIMUM OF 1140" ABOVE THE BACKGROUND, BRAILLE DOTS SHALL BE DOMED - J 13" 13" DEGREES MAXIMUM - ❑ REFUGE 1'-0" 11. '-0" I - OR ROUNDED. BRAILLE SHOWN IS FOR PLACEMENT ONLY. USE CORRECT BRAILLE FOR Z m �I� SIGN PRODUCTION, w _l NI TYP. IDENTIFICATION SYMBOLS 6. WHERE PERMANENT IDENTIFICATION SIGNS ARE PROVIDED FOR ROOMS AND SPACES, Vry ry 00 v SIGNS SHALL BE INSTALLED ON THE WALL ADJACENT TO THE LATCH SIDE OF THE DOOR. U Q POWER / DATA INLET WHERE THERE IS NO WALL SPACE ON THE LATCH SIDE SIGNS SHALL BE PLACED ON THE LATCH SIDE-1NEAREST ADJACENT WALL. OF DOOR 7. MOUNTING HEIGHT SHALL BE 60" A.F.F. TO THE CENTER LINE OF THE SIGNS. MOUNTING o c 5" 6" LOCATION SHALL BE DETERMINED SO THAT PERSON MAY APPROACH WITHIN 3" OF DATE REVISION 26" �4 "' Co 0'� SIGNAGE W/O ENCOUNTERING PROTRUDING OBJECTS. o o 8. EXIT SIGN LOCATION REQUIREMENTS: 01-11-16 PERMIT SET EXIT d TO EXIT 8.1. EACH GRADE LEVEL EXTERIOR EXIT DOOR SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT o D O z_ SIGN WITH THE WORD'EXIT `O o _ z o GRADE II 8.2. EACH EXIT DOOR THAT LEADS DIRECTLY TO A GRADE -LEVEL EXTERIOR EXIT BY 0 O � _ can BRAILLE co �CO-� =' MEANS OF A STAIRWAY OR RAMP SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN z ao � z 8.3. EACH EXIT DOOR THAT LEADS DIRECTLY TO A GRAD -LEVEL. EXTERIOR EXIT BY � � � NP. EXIT SIGNS MEANS OF AN EXIT ENCLOSURE THAT DOES NOT UTILIZE A STAIR OR RAMP, OR BY Mv • z N N MEANS OF AN EXIT PASSAGEWAY SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN co co WITH THE WORDS'EXIT ROUTE' o� NOTE: 8.4. EACH EXIT ACCESS DOOR FROM AN INTERIOR ROOM OR AREA THAT IS REQUIRED • THE FOLLOWING ROOMS WILL REQUIRE STANDARD SIGNAGE W/ HANDICAP SYMBOL: MEN'S TO HAVE A VISUAL EXIT SIGN, SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE EXIT SIGN WITH IN W 8" MIN. KNEE 6" MAX. TOE RESTROOM, WOMEN'S RESTROOM, AND ANY ROOM AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODES. PLEASE THE WORDS,'EXIT ROUTE' runW CONFIRM LOCAL REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFY FINAL ORDER WITH BURLINGTON. 8.5. EACH EXIT DOOR THROUGH A HORIZONTAL EXIT SHALL BE IDENTIFIED BY A TACTILE L CLEARANCE CLEARANCE • SIGNAGE REQUIRED AT TOILET ROOMS: "DO NOT TAKE MERCHANDISE INTO RESTROOMS" EXIT SIGN WITH THE WORDS'TO EXIT LL a EE- 26 • ADDITIONAL ROOM SIGNAGE SHALL ONLY BE PROVIDED WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. F 47 3" 24" 3" 9. ALL SIGNS SHALL COMPLY WITH STATE AND LOCAL CODES AND/ OR ORDINANCES. FRONT SIDE INSTALL INTERNATIONAL SIGN OF ACCESSIBILITY AT ALL BUILDING ENTRANCES THAT 30" CONTACT: SCOTT SIGN SYSTEMS, INC. ! Kathy Hannon (kathyh@scottsigns.com) 800.237.9447 ARE ACCESSIBLE o LL TOP LEFT FRONT ISOMETRIC ACCESSIBLE ro 1-01 15 BABY KIOSK DETAILS 16 DRINKING FOUNTAIN ELEVATIONS(17SIGNAGE DETAILS:. 3 AO.3 SCALE: NTS A0.3 SCALE: N.T.S. A0.3 SCALE: N.T.S. s _` 15 00 I 25 55'-0" 26 165'-0" 55'-0" 27 55'-0" EXISTING CONDITIONS - MAIN SPACE- PHOTOS WITH DEMOLITION NOTES SCALE: NONE DEMOLITION PLAN SCALE 1116" =1'-0" GENERAL DEMO. NOTES 1. REMOVE EXISTING PARTITIONS AS REQUIRED. PATCH, REPAIR, AND PREP ALL PARTITIONS AS REQUIRED FOR NEW FINISHES. 2. CAP OR REMOVE ALL ELEMENTS AS INDICATED; CAP OR REMOVE ALL ABANDONED PLUMBING/ELECTRICAL DEVICES. PATCH, REPAIR, AND PREP ADJACENT SURFACES AS REQUIRED FOR NEW FINISHES. 3. SALVAGE: VERIFY WITH LANDLORD/KIMCO -ITEMS FOR SALVAGING AND STORAGE: LIGHT FIXTURES, CEILING TILES, SPEAKERS. MECHANICAL DEMOLITION NOTES 4. COMPLETELY REMOVE ALL DUCTWORK, PIPING, DUCT COILS, CONTROLS AND ELECTRICAL. ENSURE ROOF OPENINGS ARE COMPLETELY SEALED TO BE WEATHERTIGHT. 5. ALL FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE AND OPERATIONAL DURING DEMOLITION PHASE. ELECTRICAL DEMO. NOTES 6. EXISTING INTERIOR WALLS AND CEILINGS ELEMENTS TO BE REMOVED ARE SHOWN DASHED. 7. FOR WALLS, SOFFITS, CASEWORK, ISLANDS, CEILINGS, ETC. SHOWN TO BE DEMOLISHED REMOVE THE FOLLOWING: • TELECOM OUTLET BOXES AND RACEWAYS, COORDINATE CABLE REMOVAL WITH TC. • POWER OUTLETS, WIREMOLD, RECEPTACLES AND ALL OTHER ELECTRICAL DEVICES INCLUDING THEIR J -BOXES, CONDUIT AND WIRE. • LIGHT SWITCHES INCLUDING THEIR J -BOXES, CONDUIT AND WIRE. • FIRE ALARM & OTHER LOW -VOLTAGE DEVICES INCLUDING THEIR J -BOXES, CONDUIT AND WIRE. PATCH PANEL AND INCOMING SERVICE CONDUIT SHALL REMAIN. • ALL J -BOXES ON EXPOSED CEILINGS AND WALLS, REWORK CONDUIT AND WIRING IF CIRCUIT CONTAINED OR USED IN J -BOX SERVES EXISTING TO REMAIN LIGHTING OR DEVICES, RELOCATE J -BOX AS REQUIRED TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING. INTENT IS TO HAVE NO BLANK COVERPLATES ON FINISHED SURFACES AT COMPLETION OF PROJECT. • REMOVE EXISTING LUMINAIRES, ASSOCIATED CONDUIT AND CONDUCTORS. • REMOVE ALL EXIT SIGNS, LEAVE EXISTING CONDUIT AND WIRING, WHERE APPROPRIATE, THAT IS LOCATE ABOVE CEILINGS, INTENT IS TO KEEP EXISTING EMERGENCY POWER SYSTEM WIRING AND INSTALL NEW EXIT SIGNS ABOVE NEW DOOR LOCATION. • REMOVE ALL EXISTING BRANCH CIRCUIT CONDUCTORS AND CONDUITS ASSOCIATED WITH REMOVED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND DEVICES BACK TO THE EXISTING HOME RUN FROM WHICH THEY ARE FED OR THE NEAREST ACTIVE DEVICE THAT IS TO REMAIN. REMOVE ALL OLD TYPE WIRING IF IT IS NOT RATED FOR 90°C. • REMOVE 2'X4' LUMINAIRES, TRACK LIGHTS, AND RECESSED CAN FIXTURES. THEY SHALL BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE OWNER UNLESS OWNER DIRECTS OTHERWISE, IF NOT TO BE RETAINED THEN THEY SHALL BECOME THE CONTRACTOR'S PROPERTY AND SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE JOB SITE. • ALL REMOVED ELECTRICAL MATERIAL INCLUDING WIRING, RACEWAYS, OUTLETS, DEVICES, SUPPORTS SHALL BECOME THE PROPERTY OF THE CONTRACTOR AND SHALL BE REMOVED FROM THE JOB SITE. • DAMAGE TO OTHER TRADE'S WORK AS A RESULT OF THIS WORK IS TO BE PROMPTLY REPAIRED AT NO EXPENSE TO THE OWNER AND TO THE COMPLETE SATISFACTION OF THE OWNER. 7. CONTRACTOR SHALL VISIT THE JOB SITE PRIOR TO SUBMISSION OF BID AND FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CONDITIONS AND THE EXTENT OF THE DEMOLITION WORK. ALL ASSOCIATED DEMOLITION COSTS SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BID PRICE. NO EXTRA PAYMENT WILL BE ALLOWED FOR WORK REQUIRED BECAUSE OF DISCERNIBLE CONDITIONS, WHETHER OR NOT SPECIFICALLY SHOWN ON THESE DRAWINGS. 8. THE EXISTING BUILDING INCLUDING PORTIONS OF THE RENOVATED AREA SHALL REMAIN IN SERVICE DURING THE CONSTRUCTION PHASE OF THIS PROJECT. ANY MODIFICATIONS TO THE EXISTING ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS THAT MAY REQUIRE THE TEMPORARY INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES SHALL BE COMPLETED AFTER THAT MAY REQUIRE THE TEMPORARY INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING SERVICES SHALL BE COMPLETED AFTER NORMAL WORKING HOURS. PRE -SCHEDULE ANY SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS WITH THE OWNER PRIOR TO STARTING ANY WORK. DO NOT DISTURB THE EXISTING DEPARTMENTS IN THE EXISTING BUILDING COMPLEX. 9. UTILITY OUTAGES: NOT LESS THAN 10 WORKING DAYS ( VERIFY WITH LANDLORD) . PRIOR TOA REQUIRED UTILITY ( POWER, TELE, NET) OUTAGE, NOTIFY AND OBTAIN APPROVAL IN WRITING OF SAID OUTAGE FROM THE FACILITY. NO APPROVAL. CONTRACTOR SHALL LOCK -OUT AND RED -TAG THE APPROPRIATE CIRCUIT BREAKER, SWITCH, ETC. RED -TAG SHALL INDICATE WHEN THE OUTAGE WILL BE TERMINATED, AND A TELEPHONE NUMBER TO CONTACT REGARDING THIS OUTAGE. THE TAG SHALL ALSO WARN PEOPLE NOT TO RE-ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT SYSTEM BECAUSE OF POTENTIAL DANGER TO PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT. ALL WORK ASSOCIATED WITH ANY POWER OUTAGES SHALL BE COMPLETED AFTER NORMAL WORKING HOURS. EXISTING CONDITIONS - BACK OF HOUSE SPACE- PHOTOS WITH DEMOLITION NOTES SCALE: NONE DEMOLITION KEY NOTES DEMOLITION NOTES CODED NOTES: 250. REMOVE COLUMN WRAPS, CORNERGUARDS, ACCESSORIES TO REVEAL BUILDING STRUCTURE - REPAIR/PREPARE FOR NEW WORK, TYPICAL AT ALL EXPOSED COLUMNS. 251. REMOVE ALL TENANT FINISHES, BASE AND ITS ASSOCIATE ACCESSORIES FROM WALLS, TYP- REPAIR/ PREPARE WALLS FOR NEW TENANT FINISHES. 252. REMOVE GYP BD. WALLS, BASE AND FRAMING - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 253. SAWCUT EXISTING CONCRETE/CMU WALLS, BASE AND FRAMING - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 254. REMOVE DOORS, WINDOWS, FRAMES AND/OR TRACKS - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING TO REMAIN SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 255. REMOVE STOREFRONT, FRAMES AND ITS ACCESSORIES - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 256. REMOVE EQUIPMENT, FRAMES, AND ITS ACCESSORIES - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING TO REMAIN SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 257. REMOVE DRINKING FOUNTAINS, AND ITS ACCESSORIES - REPAIR AND PREPARE EXISTING SURFACES FOR NEW WORK 258. REMOVAL OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS TO BE COORDINATED WITH MECHANICAL DWGS. - REMOVE / REPAIR ACCESSORIES AND PREPARE SURFACES AS NECESSARY FOR NEW WORK/FINISH. 259. REMOVE COUNTERS, CABINETS AND SHELVING UNITS, TYP. 260. REMOVE RESTROOM FIXTURES, PARTITIONS, AND HARDWARE - REPAIR AND PREPARE REMAINING SURFACES AS NECESSARY FOR NEW WORK/FINISH. - SEE MECHANICAL DWGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 261. REMOVE EXISTING FLOORING - REPAIR/PREPARE REMAINING SURFACES FOR NEW WORK. 262. REPAIR/PATCH/REFINISH EXISTING CONCRETE FLOOR - PREPARE FOR NEW WORK. 263. APPROXIMATE CONCRETE FLOOR AREA(SHOWN HATCHED) FOR SAWCUT /REMOVAL. COORDINATE WITH GC. PATCH, SEAL, PREPARE FOR NEW WORK 264. SAWCUT & REMOVE EXISTING CONCRETE TO ACCOMMODATE NEW WORK 265. SALVAGE PLYWOOD SHEATHING FOR RE -USE AT LAYWAY AREA 266. EXISTING FURRING WALL TO REMAIN - REMOVE ANY FIXTURES, TRIM AND SURFACE IRREGULARITIES AS REQUIRED IN PREPARATION FOR A NEW LEVEL 5 GWB FINISH - SEE WALL TYPE NOTE PER SHEET A1.3. 267. STUD FRAMING AND INSULATION TO REMAIN. REMOVE UNFINISHED GWB TO 8' HT. IN ORDER TO INSTALL "IN WALL" BACKING AND UTILITIES AT NEW OFFICE AREAS. 268. EXISTING FURRING WALL TO REMAIN 269. REMOVE EXISTING PLYWOOD AT BREAKROOM & JANITOR CLOSET yamREVIEWED FOR a APPROVED MAR z s 08 2016 R LCity of TukWil� UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF 1 UliallLA JAI 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER V N J � J � o 0) ) � C U N U n- o cu -0 U) c C �, O U) � m N In ori U N C Q N m f0 E U0-5NCfl N L d N ¢00 �00 �N�NN.� (0 v) Cn Q L;-. N DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 10 ori C) n u-W� I- ULLJ00 Q p�z o IV0-U zo��Q o (D 0 < oz�U� Lu (Ifry 00 D vt0 D MD W nQ 1i DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 10 m U a LL 0 CL0 F- 0 f a -i v CN 110 CN N -I -1 1 0 N I 1D I— - �l 453 451. EXISTING SKYLIGHT TO REMAIN - REPAIR/PREPARE FOR COVER/ NEW WORK. INCLUDES ALL WORK, TYPICAL. ACT CEILING IN = THIS AREA 455. SALVAGE ALL HIGH BAY METAL HALIDE LIGHT FIXTURES FOR OWNER'S USE. 55 ®5 N INCLUDES ALL ACCESSORIES AND PREPARE FOR NEW WORK/FINISH - SEE MECHANICAL DWGS FOR LIGHTING / 457. THESE AREAS TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL MECH 458. SALVAGE: VERIFY WITH LANDLORD/KIMCO FOR SALVAGE AND STORAGE - SALVAGE FIXTURES IN AREA REMAIN -REPLACE BULBS SEE ELEC DWGS . 459. EXISTING FIXTURES THIS AR 0 ( ) THIS AREA MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. C EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM FOR NEW PATCH. 453 ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES INCLUDES ALL 2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE ACT CEILING IN INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY THISAREA O 55 c ; I INCLUDESALL NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL LIGHTING/ 5. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL MECH REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT FIXTURES IN OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. THIS AREA 7. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR RTU SIZING & LOCATIONS D-.....-.. _ -` 0 Z;n N ©E® , CD o ,-,-, in N N N ©IIIIIIIIII® O rn N MEN 0 N N ©m® O N J 1-....+.... O N Imm® o N�i.R.T�; inN INC] ALL L 453 455 456 T1 T!`'T T 1-- ATT T Tl,TTT Tl /A TT u u u 165'-0" 1 165'-0" ! : i I ' 55'-0" 55'-0" 55'-0" 1 55'-011 i 55'-011 55'-0" ! /Is . i 452 ! i - IF FIXTURES IN THIS AREA 55 (m ! __===___==__===___=== INCLUDES ALL 1 LIGHTING/ MECH ! ! FIXTURESIN ! , r:,/ HIS AREA C 7 / I -;i it �' l n 459 ,'`` I IY-11'�11 III I I F--1 I 451 LJ L II LJIZ�I-J x �X� I ! __ __ 1453 i --- ---- 1 - _ INCLUDES ALL ! I I / �=r=_! �'� =1}i ce I I ACT CEE.INGIN ! i i fI I I I ' ! I X ( ! 11 r� �I IL THIS AREA I 455 :________.I. i _ T; 1 ! ! u ` � ' I I"_i ! 455 ® ! Jj I _.L - i- 56 , Px'1 -i I J. ; { ' iI• 't !.r -I'! -?!I INCLUDES ALLc =i ====c U -I I Ilex j` 1j+ ]I I ! I ! 4I0=G/ __== I' -i I : -�- /_FI! -I- XK; -�- ! EX URESIN . __ J_ II- -- -_I=mo I III, ! 1 � ; i 1 jHISAItEn ` ,1 . ...... .. -!- ...'.._I- _, - . __= .. --. ------------- ---=---. -- -- = -=2-7.=_-===7 .......................................... ......... .................. .... ........ ......... ,r^r, ,t 1�X -r i.. 1 I T... _.. T T-r-rT--rTZ-rY-r-rT-r-rT-T-r-T� .T ... ......... .. .. N I��-`r=T_ _ r : . _4_ r�� T I r i T� r-r-� i z rT� 113 1 ! rn! I�'T- I I -t -II -- t -T 1 I--!---i_1I-+• I 1- I J -T -!-i +J �l r -1 T r r t- ! ?-t-r? �- -IF �� .�"' -[L JI I III; !(! 1 1 11 I! I! I I I II I i! 4 5 56 4 3' I±!!! I! i I i 1 I I I I !: I I I€ I I!! I I I C UDES L J IG c I/'� I I I I _ I i I i 1! 1! 1 i i! ! I' INQLUDESIAL I! I' I! 1 I! I I -___ s TtJIs REA �! II!-L1� LJ�_ _ T ---L��_`1_ Ll�_ 1J_L�J_I�LJ_ / 1 i I I I I j II i j I i T -1-f T 1`I T I- iTir -T-1-FT`-F- r T I I I l I '� ( I 1 I I I 1 I ��I--- =-= sj 1 i 11 I I I �i ! ,! i l! I 1 1 1 ,I �I 3F H si i I i i I �I I I{ I_� I I I 1 I I I !! I I �1"1 j�j1 NccuDE®cHraac /' i ! L._;_�1__I_J_L.___-°L_J_��_._J___--_--L1_4___.L -I- r-! T -T -i -I- !_F {-- i - I I ! ! ! I I 1 II -!-}-H-;_._{-1-_, ! I ! FIXTURES IN THIS AREA tj� _i _ _ J _I I ! II 1 I ! ! ! '! I i i ! I ! ! !I I ! ! IN�T UDESIAL t I ! ! T - i i 3 t l I ! ! ! ; ! I I I t ! ! I ! ! ' / 1 1 ! II 1! I I I i I i I lAL'TCI+ILINGIN li l!, I I I I ,I ! t ; ' ( l i! 1 1! 1! i.... !! 1 111! ! ! I ! i ! I ! 1 1/'' 7 6 t !j t-! Il r i -r T i-I-+-i-i-t-I-h-+- !1- l i-I�THiS 111E l- -i-!- i+l-+ !-- l -r r -r T s -f T-rT-I-I- T 1-!-T -II -' 1.1 !! H! ! I I! I I ! I I I I II ' l!! I I I I I 1 T l 1- J I 451 I!! I! I 1 I i !! I! i 11 I ~' j kIc uDs L S c ! IjJ._' .LJ__t_.J. J_.I ,1 ! i i I I I i ,I I I ! I ! f 'I I I ! !_I I I�i I I L_ _Ly_J _L1�__l 1. _1_I__J �_� .L _s 11 I x' i "i- T I _IJI I j H I ( I I'� r T -1-r- T 1-r"T i�f-�+�t_i-T-l"I-T �- r T 1 T ! T 1 I l 1! I ';rl I I I I I 1 I I 'l ;�I / I+ -rT -1_ r 1 I I I f 1 11 1 1!� I I I I 1 1 1 1 1 11 ;0 I I I I I I I I I I C, I I! 1 I 1 I `I ! I I! I I I I I 11 11 ,.' I I I i I I I i 1 I 11 I-111+- -! 4 -!-L'I--1_L1J-LJ-J_It_1J_L1J_L1J-L1J_L-LJ-L1J_� �_I-+ t -I- f -I-+-!JI i 11 H I ! V I I I I! , 1 I I i; I I I I I I I I I I L_L I i I l l i l l l"-!1I I 1 t1 I• -- '-11- -- . - v....._...-- -....-.._..-.. -_ ...................__. _..._.- .. ...... I 1 � 1 .I 1 l lt. _..I ,-1 ..,.--1.-, I.T ..... T:..... IJ . ... .. ... .. .. ... r I I I I ! I! I! I ! fI ! 45-1- - -I--•- -';' -r i t- -T -i+ h! -i I 1 ! r.r-!..rl t 1TI • ILt I" ! Ii ,�ey� II 1 1 1LLII I I II 111- I I I I I I I I!-- -- - I !! 1 3 1 1- - - I ! I I I€ 1 1 1! 1 1 1 I 17 { I !Eke= =�T=j=_�J y�-L =-;I f I ! i I I II I I I I! i! I 1! I! I I I I J-L1J_LJ 1-!_1J_LSJ_L1J_L1-4-J-4 1-J--I--1-J--I--1-J---1--I-1--1--J-!-4-!- -� `1-r i� 1 1 -' i I I! I I I I i I:ii-I`r T�-t T -t-1 T�-1 T --r ?-I`r ?-I-t Ti -1 T! I I I! I I I 1! I I I II 1 1 1 1 1= 1==�-=1-'-� =1==� 1 1 1 1 /! I 's !!I ! I t l i l i i I i it I I I I I I iI ^ I l l l i l l l i l 1 1 1!! 1 1 1 !� I I I: i I l i la 1!! I I 1! i I! I I ! i In l i II 5 L v : i __ tt L_.:-- _ _1 _!._a i--r.�- ! r F t r i-1 j-} i 1 t T 1! I r r -t' r7 1 5 1 t'H'1'-! I i I I I I -! 1--t- ;--Y--t, I I I ,1 i I! I I I I ,1 ! I I! I I i I i I! 1 1 I!!!!! t I 1 1 I!! 1 I!! 1 I!! I 1! I =t- t --r-°' I I I I 1 1 1' I! I �;' !! I 1_LL=1I=_ 1T�-,=�! I I I !I I l i l i i! '! ! I, I 4 51 4196 5 I I I I 1 1 I 1 1! 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1! 1 1 r�=1= _ =1 _ i=l=_t=9 _3_111 _I -J 1J 1- --r l -I-t p -I-T T I r7 -jh h i -I- 11--fi t I -t h-1- cL DESA'L '� t -I--? -r ?_I -T T ;`T T -1-F-171-1_ i _I I I I I I I', I 1 I I 1! I I IIII I /! ( IIII 1 1 1 1 1 1!}-t--l--F.-t« ! 1! L/� I I! II i l I I i�cFInNG/ I I` I! I I_ I I I I I! I i I l!!! I I I ft I l I l l l i 'T-1-- I ( f 1 1 1 1 H i I ! I !III i_ I _I_I ! !_! 1___1_1_-_1. 1_ 51_ ! I I I I I I II ! I I I MECIJ ! I l_I 1 J_L1J-L 1 _J_L1J L I 1-1_1J i____I_I-4-4-�, �__t 4 1 . �_,_.��- L �_ j j -r-1t1-i I L J �_ �� T !1 T 1-r' r! r T 1 i FUTRE�INTi r! -I t T I '"1 I l k=-1=r�#=1= I -T I p _ _�___- --_' =_d T1 T T I! I 1 I ,1T l I !; I I I I T __--� I I I ! I' E F i t 1 1 1 l l l i l I ! :! i l! I l l i l! I T1❑s pREy I I I I I 1�1. !! I• I f l l l T+ 1 1 1! 1 11 i! 1 I �' 1_i ! _I_i �_L J �+ -�� -F J_'L1J_L1J_LJ J_L1J_Lr3c�T�nEs�n1L _L1J_LJ J-LJ-r��-�y�-;-- --i �+�-1_..J.-_}-.- I i l I 1 I 1 I I! I i I I I 1 III i! ! I i l! I ! I! I l l i l! 1 1 I! ! 1! 1 1! 3 I 1 1 1 1 TACTgEn4GIIN I I! 1 1 1! I i I I I I!! I I I H 1 I I I I I I! -r 1 -I-r� -J-r-17-1-r - t- I t -1- i 1 I I I I I I I I I I 1 45 I I I / 1! ! I I 5 I i I 11 1! I! 1 lI ! 1 3 1 1 f I I I 1 I I I I I I i I 1 H 1 3 1 i t 1 1 1 l i ! ! I ! ! ! ! I 1 I ! I ! ! I I I I I I ! I I I I I ! -r t� r r, T- T 1 � 7� i t -� -r � 1 t t: F --i r- . i T 1 T -! r T I r' r `� t- I l l r� i I T t l( I i =. !! I i T l! 1 1 I /: I I! k I - I I I I I I __I_! l i f f iI I I I I I! !I I l l I f! I i l l 1!; I I;! I l l i l l( i' I! I t I I 1! I I �J._1=L !=1=L 1_I=L� ! 111 !{ htt I -' �J T r3_1 j! I I I I I ! I I I! I 3 1!! I; i^ I I J-L1J-L.1�J_L1��L1J_L1J�L1 I-{ rt I I� � I I� ��I-4--4- ll-,---T----,- .- i_ ___ __- - T - - - T-'- _ _ _ _ - r >* I� r l I T- !! T- I I I I �1 i T I `! 1 T 1 T T I r T ! I I I I T ! I I I I i ! ! I T I I I I I 1 1 1 1 1! 1 i l l l l l 11 t I 11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1; 1 1 1 1 1 �1 ! J 1 1 I I I I I !I I I I I I I i I I I 1 I I I 1 I I! �I 1 1 III I l! I 1! 1 I! I I i! I I I I! I i I I I°I I -�-= II)-�-L_J._1_..._-i_...}. i- I F i ..4_..r !_1.L.1__I_; 1J L E !-_L -I-- J_J_1_1J_.L1J_L.1.- .-1-1-I--r-+f 11 -i--!---i-T--I--iJ---h-i- J i-1 h -t -r i 1-r 7 -!-r f i --t -y -, -r -;- tA-.;,..-,- .. `, 11 !HL I i I I I I I I I I I I i I !I I I i 1 1 I i 11 11! I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I! I I I III ; I! I I I f l l l l l! I; I I I I I! 1 1 IIII i __l. y. _.,_a II 1-J--+' 1-1 if- �_ __ �_= ! I -J -f- -i-t 1 -i -f t-i-!-fi-1-! r i-J--t--I-i--', -t--t-i t- -I ! I I I I ! I ;TI r ! I I i 1 _!__ F_?_1= _ I T �:!. !_ �__i._�11=-�- \ \ / t--i-r-t-i-t-4--I-i r I"'I i �- r-i'""r" ; --rT r, _t __1 T -i -r 1 1 1 1 1!! i l i l l l l l l l! 1 \4 ! 455 ! I; j! I; I I I I 'I I I I 1 1! I I I I{ ! I I I I I i I !! 11 I ! Ill ! !!! I 1 i I I I! I! I ; I I I! 1 I !!! I f!!!!! 459 I I I I i I IIII I ----1-1-'-J._L.._I__I-!I I I ! I I ! i ) ! I -I-! -- 454'._I_..T`t-,-r-t iJ_ 1-.L_L_J_-...4541.1--1.-L__1._J_L.1-�-. _T-� J- I ;- * J._.; .J .{._!... ' 1-r ttri_ 'h 1 1 t 1!! t I I I t it ! 1 J T_�._.r_i t -r? T- t I -I -; -r -i-j , 451 11 I I I! i! ! I I! i I! I ! I I , I l i !! 1-1_± s1__ I I jl I I I I I I! ;I ! I 1 I 1 1! 1 1 1 1 ! ! I I I I I! 1; I i I l I! I 1 1 1 I I I 1 i I I I I I _d I I I! 1 1 1 r===1=rte;=1=��==1=rd ! 111 ! 1 t I I ! i= rl-i _L_ I,,. �._IL_i.J__L1J_L.1 1_11_J_L1 I-1 _L_J._. 1J_l.1J._.L-L i-: f -- i �I-{ i-'-f--h-l--t--F-, f-'+--1---r-1-r'ti-t--t-l-t--•--i--t--T-1--i-fl -1 a- v /!-� TfFI_1 J_� -i_ 7 I I! I I l f! 1 I 'P1 I I 1 1! I I! 1 I i I I ..�1 t 1 T 1 ! ! I H \ H I I i 1 1 1! l i l �„ I I I I `1 i 1 I 11� I I I 1 I 1 i I 1! ( 1 1 1 3! 11 11! I( ! t!!!_ 'I : I 1 i I I I! i I 1 I I i I I i 1 I! I t I 1 I i I l i l l l I i I I i I ! _ _ __ ,_ I � I _-. 4- _ _.1 _ _ - - I � , I -' Z I 1 E '-_ __ ' .. ...... ......... 1 I I T T- I - 1 _ I f L .. t t Z ...L . 1 L 1 i 7 I L=__ II �v i I I F-.--�_ - 1 i 1 1 I 1 - ; ! I I I I I I 1 I I' I t�i!r Ir. I i s r 1 r i I � 465 ! ! i I I I! I I 1 U iT ; ! I I I I I ! I I I I„! Ill II I 1 1 I!! ! I i 1 E I I I I I I 1 1 1 ! 'I I I I I ! �. 1 I I I ! ��_L.1__ J__L.1__I_L_.L_,_, � ' J_L_LJ_L�_J__.____. 1 I I--J--a-I--i--1-J--I--J-J--1--a--d--i--1-LN.J_i_. !--1-T_ T - 1- I I I I I! !r `r `l r `r i int i -T 1'-r r t 1 r-I-r'T'-I'- T' -i -i i I I I! 1 I I I I! 1 ! 1 I I I I I 1 1 I I I! I I 1 1 I! I I Ill I I ',I l i l t 5 I I I I I 1 I I I I ;I I l t l i l l .1 ! I 1 I 1 I I I I!; I I I! I t I 1 1 1 I 1 1! 1 III 1 1 1 1 1 1! I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1! 455 1 1 Inl I - I- --I_1 I�--L- J ''-f-i i -i -! - _L 1. - --!-. I _ I. -.I--11,- -� - - 1 1_! ! -J- -1-L.L_l..-i-;- h i- I h -i- .1 i -; -h i -I_ t t -1-i- 7 -t -r_t.. t l1--T--r-7-r--f-1-j-,1-1- / r -1 I 1 1 I I i! I I I I ! I I I I I I!! 1 1 1 1 1 I! I! I I I; I I`I 1 1 1 1 1 1! I I 1 1 1! I 1 1 1 I I I! I I I I I 1=I=-� =i-= T= __� ! 1! II I! i l i l l ;I I I I I I i! I I I 1 I I I I I 1 I! I I I I I! I I. I i I I I I I 1 I__I_y r-��_r_-t,-I-�� -I T= I-!Jl 1 1- / I -J--1 it-I---t-l-t--h-1-t- I_r j lr-�plr4 i -it ♦ -i- 4- i' -L t. L 4.�i - t --I i -r -I -i_1-i-17't i' -i -t-1-i (-1-T r j _j-t--l---;_T--r--OT- I --I I I { I I I Ii I I 1 I I I I ! I!! I ! I I I111 I I! I! I I 1 I! I! 111 ! 1 11 1 1 1 I I t I !I `'� I 3 1 1 1 1 ': I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I I! 1 1 1; 1 r l 1 I I I I I I I !: I, I I I I I 1 111 1! / I I IIII i l! 1 1 1! ! I l l i l l l( ;I ! I I I! i I I I! I! I 1._J__1_1J._L-I__I._L_1_J-J_1_J-L_L-1•--I-_}--i_L } -F..--.-.-1.--I--+.--}� . 1' t'-� I' -i- ; -1- _.._ 1 _1_ L _r_1`, I -1 - -J- TI !„ 1 1--r 1! 1! 1 1 1' 'r.�.._I._.' T !- T_ _1_T._r__1._j._T_.i 45 ('r' -t' 1_.T.__{_� 1 i I I I I I I I I! I l i I l l l i l 1( i l l 1 1 I i l! I i! I I I I_- 1--L 1 �=1==- I! 1 ;I I I t I I I I ';I f( 1 1 1 1 i l!! i l l! ': I! I! I 1 1; 1 1 1 1; I I f; l; l 1 1 i k =1= ==1=r T=!= �! III 1! /' I i -i it 1 _I. _��--i-!--r--1-h--I'.J_!. --I i--i--I--h-i--+-!-1--+--t-+--I--r-t-l--j--t- -r-!-r-t 1-r7 t"rll r -l- / I I I I I I! I I I I I I! 1 1 1 1 i I; 1 1 1 1 1 II I I I I I I i I I I I I I I i I I I! 1 I I t I!! 1:1 i l! I I I! ! I I I t l 1 1' ! i III! I l i l I I I I!! J I I! I I I! 11 ! I I I I I I I I I i I I I I!!! I I I! I I I !i I!!! I; I! -! �- --t-_�.._)__i._.J__,' I j 4- II I I ! / 455 I 1 1 1 1 / '- I- II J - J' f' - I ' t .. �. _... _. -t -.T -' - i - i -i i r '-i' t- . _ ' t -'i' -r- t i '-i- t -'i ' 1 - t -r'-I - f 't`-,; - --. ' - -r -1 i - I - ._ .._. i - ; 1 ill ! I i T 1 T ---r-, I-/"�'_.:_-., ! i r_.i_� I_..__._t_r.-.T !-T-? !_.r/�_,_._t_ I I I I I I I I 1!! I! 1 I 1 i I I� ! 1 9 ...._......._- `-' -----:L- ._ .. ._.I. ....'........{_.y_. . 1-t ---- ---......_... L...-, _ L. L.. J i_ _I _1.._,-._-!_ J._. I..-! _ L_! j _I�.,.h_.l_ !_ L"--i-J ` _JvJ 1 _ l __L_ l ._7 .J J 1 L L _ j _ .--.! --I _J---t-� I- f_._ an_r .I _.J _.� I ..,_ (._ ! I � __ __1= L � _' =1= _ � 1-!= _ � I 111 I t ` i `r`1 H'F1�!=r��='--_L _T�-S�_1 I' II I I! I I I I `1i 11 i I I I I I I I I I I I I! i' 1._!__L.1 ._!_.1.__L._J_1_.J._J__.L_1_! ..L_I._J_i__;_- .-I__} _1--1--4-4--F-' 1-1-I--I'-I-1414--I -I--r'-t'Itl-t--T--i--1--I -! I I I I i I�-;r--ri-r--T-I-"i-I ,!'- T ri--T-T-1--T-T-t--t 1 -1 -0- 1-r j' ! I I I I '� I I I; I I I I I ! I! I I I I I I I! 1 I I I I! IIII ! I l! III 1( I I I I i! I I i I �I f 11 I; i I I I I !I 11 1 1 1 1 1 1! i �! 1! I I i l l l `I I I I I I I!!. I 1 I i I I I I I I I I I I I i I I Ill I I /./' I_1._ I-I!J__1 L i -l- -t- t- I-J-iL..i__L._.L__L._.i._1._...1._'I_L-J---!--L--.L..J__1_..iJ.-.L1_J_L._.1.'J--1- J-L...F..-i•._.1--t_.;--i--i--!-- 11r -f-- i --t.-. {.--;'-I-+--1--r ;-1-r'1'-i I - -r-f -- t- i -1- r1--_I._..t.n_.t-1_. --1--1-1---1 ._.l-, I 111 1=1=��4,=_ I ;I t! I! I t I I! i I I i I I I! I I I I 1 I! ; f �_- -� Tom_ _ I I 51 53 45 . 4 61 45 1 I i T -r 1=I=�fi =1 n 1 I !! 1�1 I I I I I I 1 1 I I I f 1 1 1! I I I I I I; ! 1 , , 1 I / - I I ! I I I E�CLUDE$A L i_ ti_ _a_ _._;- I I I . _...cLUD L'__:_.'._,__I ! I. 1 I--I-_I---I--._- --'--L-�._1--J-•1--'-LI1-1-!_ I I. ' UI -J- 1 - 1- t - t- 1 --->- -r-- - r t- - --- 1-;- t -i- fi '- t-I--'r--t f-- -+ t r - r --T.._ - : n{ -- I I l l i 1 1 I ? LjcutIN / I ! ! r i r_ .t 1! ulclil IN r: t I 1 1 r' -I I I I I I I I I I I I !] i i ! 455 1! I I I f I i I I n ECIJ ! I I I! ;I 1€( I I I I I I I ! 1; 1 I I i I! I! ! rnECJT I!! I I I i I! I 1 I! I I I; I! III !! I I! I! 1 1 ! I( i I FU7WRE$INI 1! !I I t I I I I 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 1 1 1t I I _ '._. 5 1_ /' .1.._. _..-; _i --t._.-._,.___ _ _._--L_J_- .=-J_L_J__-.. _ = -- _- I - ' -- _J_1_.J _J._=-_L_L.L_. xrI?S.ICL_J._- _L.._1__1_. _�_ _ _t__.L_.t__. _y {..._t__t_4.- i J _; 1 1 I r -I ! I!; i l 1;] ;r rnlsjtRr ' T t!! -t- I T _I __ 1_. � __!- T. T -1-- T- i _-Z -L -! !' I I! i I i r,HlslnR�A ! I i I I I I 1 i I i I I i I I i I! 1 1 1 f I H 1 1 I I I I i! 1 1_1_' 11-!-I I I I I nY V EAgL I( I it I I I I 1 1 1 1' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ! INc D sn L ! cL:DE I f k--I-rpt=1==1=rd E I l! //' I_I_ nf=---- - I -i -t--+. {_ ,._�._.L_ , L.1_I_1 _L _J-1_. ! !.I.__l._.1._J__L _L_.I._L__L_i__t_.._i.._,_.. ._.L_.F_nGT.CL[ q-i-+-_I_.+-1r-r1.-rr-1-r't.--r---r-r-7._,__t ._1.�_. // I I IIII i i I I I Tttrs R>A"-;- i ! I I I I `� 1 7;IHsnR• I I I I I �, I i I I l i III I I I I I! I. t' r,! 1 I! :I T I l f; I l l i l 1 i l ; -;1 I I I !fill, I I I I I I! 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 jl I i l i l l I I I I I I I I I I I TI i I I I I I I I I I I I f' 11 1 I I I I I! 11_I__J_ 1._!•_,I__ I. -!.__I i -._I-._._- I--_!_-!i-j._I_ _ 1 1� - _ ..,. - ! I IIII 1 1 -i -t --'h-1-! -r l -1_T' -t- r t -i -It r! -h' f -t-t- i -i -r -h 'i -f- t -4,--i._h -i t t i' -l.-i �' '-1 --t -j-t -r -- - j -j --i- T -r ? I i I! I! I 1 I I I 1 I I I I' I / I i 1 A I!! I! I! i' I! I I I I! I! I f l! I I I I 1 1 ! I I i ! H 1 I i I i I ; I I I . I I I I! i 1 I I -_I_L ? _I_� I I I I I I __I _L ! I I .... ..... ... .... .. ..4 .,. �.. .. ..... ... .... .. .. 1 ...... ...... ..... ..... __...... ... .. ........ .... F I I I t : I I I I I I t I I � . L_ _ _ __ . 1- � a + -I- -J i � -i � i �. t : 'i 1 r� 1 i 1 T 1 i ' �� i-' v r T � ! I -, !T T ! r r 1 ! t ' I I I I I I I I I I II' I t I 1 I 1 I I! l i l' II I I I! I I I I I f I I I / I! f I I I 11 1! 1 1 I! 1 1! 1 1 1 1�A I� I I I l i l l l 11 1! I! I 1 1 1 1 I I I I t H i ! ! ! ! ! I 1 ! ! i I I I I I I I I 4551 , I I H I I . •I ! ! ! I !,_ .J.. 5 ' 1._ _ L ._L_'1_ _.L.._.i __ !_.1 __. __ _! J - L._ .1. _J._ L_.1 _._I _. L _1._.1 __ ._ .J. _.J __ -] -1 _! _ L_ _i. _. ! ! _.___tl..l- -T-i-.--!--I--r- - ! .... +- F r -f_..1--f..-,'-t- -f f -:-f .._ -' -r y -f- t.__t._T__i_..1._.,._r__..._t__ _.1._. _I 11 II I I I I I I! 1 1 1! I I! 1! II ! I I I I! `.I ! i i l l l l l i l l i l I!!! 1 i l I I I iII I f I! I 1 I i I i I! I I I! I i I! I I i I f - --- --- ! J. _1 I I ! ! 1 - il I II ! I I ! I ; - _� _.--�T--T� I i ! !: I I I. 1 11 i I i I I I 1 ��__T._:_T_.i- � 1 1 1 I In! I y_J-+.H!_�-fi-`_r-'--�-?--r--;-r-T-1-i--*--?-!I--f-i-t--h-!-*---i--1-t--t-i-t--l--i-t---F-i--t-�--1--i--r-'s-F--f--t-r--j-�--� - --I-r--i.-j -T- � `1- �-r-t-j--?'-t-I i --1--'--L _` 1 ! ! -I-I-�-T--1-Ijl ; --! I i III I{ 1 1 1 1! r T-� r' -T 11 i I 1 1 i I I I I 'I I I' 1! 1 1 1 I I 1 1' 1 1 I t I i 1 I i! I! i !: i I f I I i I I I I 1 i I 1 1 1 I! 1 1 1 1! f III 1! I I i III i I ( I ! ! _!_ J_L_LJ .. _:I I _I I _i ! I -'!_ _I I ! I-- I I_1 I i_I I ! I 1 J_11.J_LJ J-L_LJ_.L-' J_I I I _i.�--i- -�_��-i-M-y -r-_!_}11_t - -t fl1-t -�t i T !�Tu I i I 1 I '� I l €I 1! ! I �;� I 1 -j---1`! I ! I I IE ,XPi �I !r? r , 1 ii ; .r _I. l ; 7 r r� ��T� I`r? i t ! ! _j_f__L_! I 1 4 I I i !H ! ! j l l! X11 ; I I-I-!-T-�--� �►) ! II ! I! I 1 1 1 `! I I 11 1 I! 1 3 1 �;ri I I! I! I! I `I i ': I! I I I i �+! I_=1===I-�t-I=fid IH ' I / I I -!!:171=17-7- I--a-r-4--!-t---r--I-J--I '-1-.1-J-L-L--1-i--'-!1-;--1---1-. ._1__:_ J. L_: _I._L.1_f-1-J---l-i--F--1-f- i--F--i 1--f--i-i--+-1--!--h--r-r-r-l-r-l--!-r--r-, r 1'- -+- t-s-.rH_t�_. ` i i i j j l1 I I i I I I I! 1 :I i l l l l 1 1 ,I i l! l i 1 1 1 45 , 456 704 ! ! I 1 1! I! l i I l i I I I I! II ! I ' 11 1! I! 1 1 1! ;I I I l l l t; 'I I I I I I I `5 i I uDESALL_.y.._1__' !_ ! I_I I I i I i -I !-I I i-!_ I_-i._I__I_ I__I_,!__ ! 4 ! _j__) I I J ! « R' L....t. ..-P- t -'i t- - ' _ f ! - ! F Ji - t -i t -'T -I F f ! - , -! ._.J �C� �� 1- ' 4 j - L - 54 T I I I r T 59 -i"7 I ' �IctrlTNc/ h 1 1 l._..i_ �==1=t�=-!=L�=J=�� i IpI I... / I I I111==i =�? ;= r r=1= ! I I i l I I I( II i; j I I l I I i E�x I l i l i l! 1 1 1 1 1! I l l; l l l i l l l I l l I l t l i l; i I I I 1 i i i H, 1 I i I / II ! I I I I I 1! 1 I � ! I I I I I' ! i .I : _ _ . .. _ ,J.,.,,__ 1..............±�_.-,.,.�z�e l_ .., .,._...,,-rL.,, ..-1m�.,., a,,.A.,.. ,, .�,..,.. :,...m,.'.,. ,Lm,:.' ,.. :..I -:.1:,..f' . Lm.. J w -,.,J .. 11:,...t....,n 11,1._,..3,,._, I ,:., m L,.1._ J ,J..-. J.-.,... r...r,-j_,.1.. ,,T....,.1._T.,T 6�. T...:I , -T :,i..,.,t„-T,, r<,I,. j..,.r-•1r�r�NtI�J�#, 1.rt T,.._!._,.I„n. �o ! � � � 1 6 a � -J � .d' T! ........... ...... .......... ... I"'.` I! I 1�-I ! I I I I 11 I i I f 1! I 1 1 I I; i ! I i I 1 I i I I i I! I! I 7 1 1 1 III I I, I 1 1 1 1! 1 1 1 1 1! 11 1; 1 1 1 1! 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1! lNcLUD'EsALLI ! I! I I 1 I i 1 1 1 I t l i l l ! I i l i I l I 1 1 t l l f l i! 111 I I f I I , I �(__ I__ _I - -i._.1_ _l.._.J-._ _._ I -� -_' F_ _F ._3 __ }_ ..i. _.' _._ L..J. _!.._. l.. _i ._.f __ L J_ -1 _ L_ 1 _L__ L _1..._.J--1_.1 _! __. L.. _L-nC�.CEILI I IFL . - F_ _{ _.t __ f - �- f__ -f_ .-t.� h_ _.I..._.1 _._ ;_..{ _.y.-. i__ + ._ __ .. -. _._ ._. «_ _-1-.I-- .- JI . / ! I II 1=1=� -=T--- ! !I ! i ! I I 1 !I ! I ! 1 ! I i I I I ! (nnsnPEn! I i ! ! ! ! 1 ' -I- -1 T ! t -' t - _ tll_' ... _ -- � I 1 ; 1 1 1 I 11 1. I 1 i 11 i �T=1=? ��=1=1 9 11 1 "'�' 11 i II! I I 1 1 ! ! 1 I!! ! !! I ' 11 I i! I I I I I I I! I ! I I I I i! I! I I i I! 1 f I ! I I! 1 1 ! i 'E _! _1 -- 1 ! !' t I i _,_,! __I_ !._{ ttJ__1._ - t 1--rt'-i-r i-._....-!f--h- - -t -1- t- i - _. * '-F F -t- t -I - , I- I I --t--!--,'--' - � i --i- I--- -!- I -! - -- n I •� Ip "y _ I_i i i _i i .� i.... 459 3'nu ! I iII! !! 5 i I 1 1; 1` I I I I I I! l i I i ! ; i I I t 1 1 I l l!! I!! I! 1! I I -I 'I I I �i1 I' f I I I I; I!! 1 111 ! 1 i 1 I I I I I I I T_: _ I 1 I I l t ,) I I I I! 1 TI i i ! I I 1 I i i ,__- I I I.----L-.1.__.-....--J---I--_•_.;_- ._____. ... __- _.1__.-!-1-_--1_-i--+---:---+--T--.t.-a--1--I'-�--i--�-J'-I-.t.____I..,. ; I / / -, 1 i '-1- t- ..-' -' t ! i 1- i t ! ., - i ' �- --! -- 1- -t. --i .... ! t I I I I i I i I l l i r / ^.-_T._.__T'-"!l T ri 1r I I I I I i l! f !. 1 t I�/'� i i! I I i I I I I f I I! I I I I 111 i i I. ---__� I S I I I 1 1 1 1 1 i I 1 'I I 1�-: !!! ;1 1! 1 1! 1 1 1 I I I I_ ! 1! 1! ! j I i! I I I 1 1 1 11 1! I! I I I I I I I I 111 !! \ -11 n, t._I_L. a -I-F- _.-i-f- -1--LL_1__Lw.J-i_.1_J_.L_LJ_I_1J_.L_J-1-L-'- I -FJ -I-1 --F F f -I-t. 4--:-t--i--I-t-- ' ` I-._.,._ --tr i- Jl I-' - �' i t I r - 1 ! Y • 1 _ ! 1 -1- \ 5,, / 111 I \! 1 1 1 0 1 1 it ! i I! i 11 f l I;! I! l i i S! ' I I I I I 1! 1 1!!. i i 1 I !1 1! i I I '1 III I I \\ \NN \ S> 1�'-'I-' T ; T ; ! !1 ! I� ! i i 11 I ! ! I ! '� ! 1 ! 1 I T 1 1 T ! T T I I I i I f i i! I I I` ! 1, I ! I . ` III �' -'- -4- L, _ - ! - - -- - L -._._i I +! --I--- I -L 1 _�u�!_ III-:-_ - --Ill INr I F t i r i i-; - I Ti= � I 1 I 1 1 1 ;i I I I I 1 1 1! 1 1! 1! I€ I I I! 1 1 I I 1 I I I I I!! 455` .4 6 45 i t l I i III I I ',Ir yea`'`. T-71 'I I I I I ! I I 1 ! 1 I I f I t II ! I I I I ! I ! ! a 1 _i-.1_ _1 _I_ J_ .1 i __L_ J_ 1.._I__ L __ _L_.. _ 1. _. _ .f_ -1--.4-1. _ __ A -1 I_..Jc�J . --- ---- -- -'-' - -I - i - CL DfiSA L H Tr 1 .. j .__..... 1. L..... 45 I ! ye 55: >' J I r.. i.._1.. ,.... 1.... ' { 455 ,... , . !.....L_ t. f i I i t t f 1 • 1! I! 1 I!;; I! I I I i I I I! I I ! ; F t)GH7Trri ! II ,� ;- -} - -- } I I ! I I I i ! 1 1 1 1 I I I i I I I' I I ; I I MECh 1 1 1 1 1 1 1! I I ! 1 1 1 + -, +-I- i- -i --'- _.L ._L_..1._ ..1 _..!__ 1. _,� L_. 1_ _1 _!._ 1_ ! _L L _1 __I _. ;- _i __I__ J_ I -,_ L J -.;. t - I - i _I _!.... }_ -f - H. i- -i - I -F -t -t'-f- -r-Fuer{ RES INI'_ i ._.I_. ,._ ..1.__I__ .r. _t ._!_ .t_ _. _. iJIT _I ' \� _ ! ._.1_.. J . 1 -I --.J. _ I__ _ -; ri I-=1=L��=6= --J=- 1 1 1 f l l!! ,I ! I i I l l I l I i l! 1 1 1 1 ! I! I i l i l 1 1! I i l i 1 ! TIHSARtA I l l l l l l; l i i l 111 1 1 / x -- I I i I! I I! ! I 1 1 1. 11 .: I i_ I i I_ '!_ I--' _I_ ! I I ..__� -I !!! I I I I I 1 I I! 1 I I 1! 1 I-1-IaCLpDaSALL !_ 1 I -•I_ j -_f -i_ 1I -1 !- Ill -u ! -I- L -`-- - 54 T - - -'I -t - t ! r i : I F t t i- - t --; I- i- -f -'-- F -t -:- j - r - I ! t EH IR I �liL L .�Iz 11. __ -. ! {r�l 1 1 I ` 1'' I I I I i 11! ., a♦ *11 i T I T' T 1-r ' %1' �' ' ' P P P P P P I% IIS RBA ! I ! I I ri I 1 1 !! i t :T 1 1 I I i !! ! i ;I I / I 111 1_. !-.-1-!-!._t=I-! �! i I I 1_I I -I_' -'-'_ I 1_I ! I I ! �1 I I ! I I i L- , I ; I I -! , 1 i I ! I �il 1 !A �_I-,---F, .I f ' I , �ir! I , i L _ a:.. '- -- .451 II I _I_ L _1 __i__ L ! --I__ 1_. _i __!_.1_ _1 _!-- J_ 1 __i_ L _L -- I.- .I_ _.I _.,_ - _ ;.._ g_ _J _.,_ IN/ �` Itr -'i' ! l i! i l i ;! 7! I r r, 11 i 1 1 1 1! 1'"i 1 -T -I"' I i- i I! I I I; I I I! l i E; l l l i it 45 ! I A I I I i I I I I I I I I •� I I II j I 1 i!! I i I 1 I! rt' - "9"ci-T- I I I 1 I!! I i I i I I!! I! f I I I f I I I !1 I f 1 1 1 I I i I I 1 L -----IL .Li -I-1.-"--- t^-t--I--i" f„.-F_'i._1-1171--! �r�l"_i-4-•-j i'-t--j--I-t- t '1 -r 771- ["- 1 ' ;- -'t-1 bi !-f---! - I -- y- F-I--i--F--L .F F -i - t- f -I-f t -I -r t.- T' 7 I `Y -i- - 1.._1'rTi-t t -1- s' �,-��X,151- // �� = � ] I I I III I I! I! I I Ll IT, I I I I: I I i! I! I izi I I I I I I f] I! 1 1 1 i I I I I I I I I I I! I I I I I I I I 451 I I I I I I -I � s, II' i i ; ! 1 I I ! I I I i I I. 1 I ! ! ! i I i --L-L-!.-I -1 -1 =- I I.. -'I- I - j� iri- � �_.©✓ Ji ! I I! II -I 1 I I I_I_ _ I I I I I I I_I I I __I_I _ _1717 _ I +_._-- in i-; i- --I-----t--r. T_- I x I i I I I Xi i x I�11.. r--! I r I -I ( r 7 I_r j I T ..N 3 1 1 1 1 T! I I I ': I I I I! -- II; I I I[�x'r I - t-� 1717- Ic-- :/II'HI - I I 3 1 1 1 1 I l '� I' S l l l I f� ! I 1 1 %r I I I I I 1 1' t I I i I I I C1 1 1 1 1 1 CI 1 1 1 1 1 11I I I I I,/_-L-!-.1--�-1!-x1 J �" J111_I �� -,J-�_i I ;_�STIHiJ&-_ --�- _J_t. i_F I._L1.J-L1-1-L-L-1_1_J.-1_i_L_t_LJ_!_i- I --J -�-I- -I.- +- +uT- J- -lU F` LL__L_1_I-' -L '--L J _! - i ! I I I! I I L1 -.._moi •17 -,_.1_-___ .ice - - a 11 - I 453 I 453 INCLUDESALL ! ! INCLUDES ALL i ACT CEILING IN I ACI' CEILING M THIS AREA ' 1 TI[IS ARF,A - ' 455 45 I I 455 456 ! INCLUDES ALL ! INCLUDESALL - - - - - - - -I - - - - - LIC&EITNR / - i - - I- Alm- LIGUT'INrl - - s - MECH I ! MECII FIXTURES IN , ' FIXTURES IN EXISTING LINE 1 _............ .._ .....__._.__._.__ .._. ..._....._._-__. ._. .._. _ ._....._.__.__- ._ --- - _._._._.___.__ ..._ _......._.-..-.- OF'ROOF____ _ _ _ _ _ .. . _ . . DEMOLITION REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE 1116" =1'-0" 453 455 456 -TT-0 ATT TTI TTTTATrl / XXVi"TT EXISTING CONDITIONS PHOTOS WITH DEMOLITION NOTES SCALE; NONE 453 455 456 -T rm 0 A T T T Tl TTTTATf' / A,TT/"'TT 453 455 456 TAT/ -'T TTT11711 AT T T Tl `T-TTTTTTl1 / ARL'liTT i : : I. ;i � : I� ;I ...._...__ �...._.--_..-..._..._.. t_.-.__.__.......__._._.-_._._._..._..__.-__...._._...__.__._._._.__....._....._...._............ _ ..___._.___ ... _. __ ..-_._._._.____ __ ._._.___._._._ ...- ._____--- _..-..._.__-_._._..._. __._._.-._ _. G)----- _....._ ! AREA FOR NEW VENT THRU ROOF, ROOF PENETRATIONS- . I REMOVE PORTIONS OF5 EXISTING ROOF AS ! NECESSARY FOR NEW WORK PATCH! WATERPROOF/'" �I 1 REPAIRPORTIONSOF . ,a O ! EXISTING ROOF RESULTING FROM VACATED . V71! ACCESSORIES OF THE THE N REMOVED RESTROOM FIXTURES - . n ! B _ - - _._ _ _ . -I to --- -- ---_ _ - __ _--. _ -- - -. _...______. i I //I m ' /.. mm /> `; 75 I /f m !------ z ! 1 11 -1 I i 0 i I m / i i m : I____-__ NL----.--- mm I a'" LU I ,/'1 Em ..... ..... / ..... .......... ...... ..... .... I ...... .. .. ............ . ...... . . ........... ...... ............ .. .. t ....... .. ..................... .... ... .. .... ...... .............. ............................. ............. .... ................. ..............C.. . .. ..... .. .. .... ... ... ..... _............... ..... -) i r -----i 702 ": 1 I 11,sammommag-knI amom / i I--- --I ; 752 �� ; ---- 750 ;- __ 1 I cN % 751=--------� /' ; / I i /' I _ ...... _ _.......: _.......... ....... _...-.....--_........... __..--...- -- --_------ .- .--l-.1_..........._....-......._........-... _.... - .--._..... _._..........- "I - ----, .... -. _...-_............._._......._. "' -- .._----- --._.-..... (D,--- f� - .. =C / 1.-/, :...:.:.: I 75 /, ;Iz�i 75 ! l- - �I // I--- - , --------- . /� I W) ! ! N I/ L-----------' : ! / 750 i /; ---- 75 ! ---- 750 i I 751 1 1 1 I 1 1 G)- __-- - -_ .. .._.._.......,-. ..-"'-_1.... ., ..- ' """'"'___.. .. __..._I ...... .... .................. __-........ ."- - - .. •. '"-- ...... .-.. ...........p. .. ..._..., ..._ .. _.. ._. ...... .... .. - _. .... _ _. .... .. _.__.. � I I I I /' I„ \\ " \ a `11 /:11 n 752 \ I = - F_________._.// -- --- �\ \lYR` 1 ,1. . I 11 N N / I , ``\, > A ��\, \\ 12. 1, a `\ �, /' F .......... ......... -........ ...-........................................ .............. .............. ............... .......................... ............... I. ..................... ............ ............... ........ / ,�'`" . . � y y. . � q � . � / 75 (=) / --------, 75 1 ' ' r'---------' . / I I i 1 ! ! kn / I ' . N `---------� 1 I ! ---- --- . � . k //. � . , I, � .. �,-111/1/ --- . --------..--,---�---.----''--,,--,�l--:�--�-----�-.,�--.-------,-----,---�"--,--,-""---.---".---,-------�------,-----,-,-�--.---.-------.-.� : � (D,-- - I /,«t � : � . : . � t , : I '1� % ;. 752 = 750 3-------- r iI�I 750 1 I / I 751 i ! 751 ,,. 1 1 j 1 1 L -------J L -------J % .: />' O...... ...._- ....-.....--.........._. ...........................................__..............._...._... _ .._........ _...... _.......__......... _.__....._..__ ...._....._ .... _.....-.. ....... _ ... _._._... _ .. _.-......._. 1/ /i I � . � I'' ' ` 75 I 75 = -..,, / ,' ,---------- �« I '------__ 1 f I j . ! : , � " ' N`---- I / / ------ /' '`' . I . z F�� . k .�, ; z 11 J ...__. ... .._.__ ...._._.. _._-........._....-._.......... .....__.... --- .........--...... _...._..._ .. _._._.... -- .__._..........._...- _.-. _._._._........--_.-....._..._ ....._._-....._._ .._.._._....----- . _. ...... .._ ..... . . ...._-...... _.... ...__..........-..... _...-.. _......... .......... ...----......._.-_._. / , j' 1. : � . � . � /f. � - - 752 75 = 1Z/' 750 .---- -- ! 1 751 r 751 ! r----- N / I I I i\ '/ I I I 1 \ \. 1 PATCH/ WATER PROOF/ I I I I I '\ REPAIR PORTIONS OF 1 1 I I �\ \ EXISTING ROOF RESULTING 1 1 I ! �P /, FROM VACATED L -------J 1111. \ ACCESSORIES OF TILE THE __ _...: .._._._..,.... ..... ......._....,.._.._. „_REMOVT;DRESTROOM ,-_ __ _..........____. .__ _._____- - __�_______ _ _ - _ _..._______ __ �_......_.._.. _ ..._. ..._.. _._ ___.--.._».- __ ...._._.... __ ..-...._ _--_.--.-.__- - _._...-._._...... _. .._ 1\%-".. ____. K % ; FIXTURES ..- v\ ,/ � --- NO NEW RTU AT THIS -- 752 0 750 75 r- LOCATION -- --- 0 751 �------ 1 r ------- o V,' 1 I ! � 1 I ! 1 1 I I 1 1 `-171717171717--' 1 1 I L......_ �...... .. .......... ......:. ...._.... _.. ..... ...._. ... ........ �........... ........ .................. ............I... - ......_..... ...................... ommommiammummummonomomintam imumno I . � . � ! . I . -il w � 00=�--! : � 1 I � 3 i . I NOTE: SEE MECHANICAL DWGS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES DEMOLITION ROOF PLAN SCALE 1116" =1'-0" ROOF/CLG DEMO PLAN NOTES CODED NOTES 450. EXISTING ROOF HATCH TO REMAIN. 451. EXISTING SKYLIGHT TO REMAIN - REPAIR/PREPARE FOR COVER/ NEW WORK. 452. REMOVE GYP BD CEILING, GRID AND ACCESSORIES - REPAIR/PREPARE FOR NEW WORK, TYPICAL. 453. SALVAGE ACT CEILING TILES FOR OWNER'S USE , REMOVE GRID AND ACCESSORIES - REPAIR/PREPARE FOR NEW WORK, TYPICAL. 454. REMOVE CEILING FANS - CAP ELECTRICAL WORK, TYPICAL. 455. SALVAGE ALL HIGH BAY METAL HALIDE LIGHT FIXTURES FOR OWNER'S USE. REMOVE LIGHT FIXTURES; REMOVE/ REPAIR ACCESSORIES AND PREPARE SURFACES AS NECESSARY TO PREPARE FOR NEW WORK/FINISH. 456. REMOVE MECHANICAL AIR SUPPLY/RETURN FIXTURES; REMOVE / REPAIR ACCESSORIES AND PREPARE FOR NEW WORK/FINISH - SEE MECHANICAL DWGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 457. THESE AREAS TO REMAIN OPERATIONAL AT ALL TIMES. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE PROTECTED ACCESS FOR THE TENANTS AT ALL TIMES. 458. SALVAGE: VERIFY WITH LANDLORD/KIMCO FOR SALVAGE AND STORAGE - SALVAGE LIGHT FIXTURES, CEILING TILES AND SPEAKERS. AREA REMAIN -REPLACE BULBS SEE ELEC DWGS . 459. EXISTING FIXTURES THIS AR 0 ( ) 750. PROVIDE NEW ROOFTOP UNIT TO REPLACE EXISTING ROOF TOP UNIT. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. 751. REMOVE EXISTING ROOF TOP UNIT AND CURB. REPAIR/WATERPROORPREPARE EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEM FOR NEW PATCH. 752. EXISTING SKYLIGHT TO REMAIN. . ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M,E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 3. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 4. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 5. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 6. ALL RTU'S TO HAVE BURGLAR BARS. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. 7. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR RTU SIZING & LOCATIONS SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) XXX X . SFO AILS . DESIGNATION AND CALL OUT SEEM HSHEET R DET ECU RT ( Q�z REVIEWED FCR CODE COMPLIANCE APPR®VED MAR 0 8 2016 City of Tukwila t m min niximinN RECEIVED CITY OF TUKINILA JAN 13 2016 PERPAiT CENTER U N � -j T- �� cn _ a) N L :3 E 1 - C U R -O U _m a O m C 0O � 0) � Lo � N In U W -=< N 0 tis E CD CD ��N i < Q N (6 (6 N N >>c0-« 5 >� mNN.� c: -5LoU) Q-,.- a) IJ Q � �� cn tA N 3 ;j ` 39 1 - Z!t >- R 3:Z IJ Q < 112- >- 3:Z O O�� J C.) i- CLQ 0 < Z wU W oho Q�z o 2-7 O W r::) W M I Z LU 0 UJ F- � o (DQ0<C Q z3:w-1 v � v 0 � Q ti ry m0 -T -!-- DATE I REVISION 01-11-16 1 PERMIT SET I M V D- 0 a 0 F- 0 a m v io In m C) 0 N r\-1 - - -- •I.'I.'.' • I �...........••'''.••••'.••••'•••• .. "� �� i ..........•.•...•...............•••'..•• ........ ••••- r� . .. .. . _ 1 .Fit `: .- .-•-r-.- . . .--.-- .ate . r M....... ............. E. - I _ _ -^-irk- ---�- --- F . •. ... ....... . 't 3 i t rr aN'....n,_.^^.�*�.- .ice _..••i'I'.. !',� 1'Y C }X4` 3Yl - PERIMETER OF CART SECURITY SYSTEM SHOPPING CART SECURITY SYSTEM (CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE W/ BCF SUBCONTRACTOR) SCALE 1:100 CORRIDOR 109 2 A5.0 CHECK OUT 102 (E) COMPACTOR TO REMAIN - CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM UNIT IS FULLY OPERATIONAL EXIST. ELEC. 120 TYPICAL FOR ALL EXTERIOR DOORS SPRINKLER 103 104 115 114 CONSTRUCTION PLAN SCALE 1/16" =1'-0" FLOOR PLAN NOTES CODED NOTES: 200. HOLLOW METAL DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 201. EXISTING OVERHEAD DOOR TO REMAIN. 202. EXISTING COMPACTOR DOOR TO REMAIN. 203. PROVIDE EXIT TACTILE SIGNAGE PER NOTES ON A0.3. TYPICAL AT ALL EXTERIOR DOOR LOCATIONS & WHERE LOCAL JURISDICTION OFFICIALS AND/OR CODE REQUIRE. 204. LEVEL 5 WALL FINISH REQUIRED AT SALES FLOOR, LEVEL 4 FINISH AT OFFICE AREAS AND LEVEL 3 FINISH AT STOREROOM AND RECEIVING, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR LEVEL DEFINITIONS. 205. PARTITIONMALL TYPE. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 206. COLUMNS THROUGHOUT SALES AREA TO HAVE COLUMN ENCLOSURES & TO BE PAINTED P-1. COLUMNS IN OFFICE / STOCK / RECEIVING AREAS TO BE PAINTED P-2. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 207. ALL OUTSIDE GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS ARE TO HAVE CORNER GUARDS INSTALLED THROUGHOUT ENTIRE SPACE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAIeLnS.��I1 noon r+�� 20208. SOP'7Gi797nCTCR' G Hf'CEA COUNTER 209. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. 210. FLOOR FINISH LINE. SEE FLOOR FINISH PLAN ON A1.4 FOR DETAILS. �11� CI ITIIDC\/IC1All�lf'`D..��,sT'cTn7rD�O�V`e�.7'V7CP'c'c C�c l��oYi"i-�t'��S't7P'rC�'�q° L1-rf-G-rGf[�PIt YY1T Y Zi A L C �1T-C.7'CCLTCCEGTTDRIGTI DRAWINGS FOR MGRE DETAIfI GON'FTIRM FINAL -DoAGErnMENT WITH BURLINGTON jECT MANAGER 4 rnRGHiITE`T PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. 212, CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA. CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. ALL CASH WRAPS & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTERS TO BE ACCESSIBLE. SEE A0.3 & ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR CASH WRAP & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER DETAILS. 213. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER. CONFIRM REQUIREMENTS AND LOCATIONS WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. 214. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE COLUMN (IF POSSIBLE) WHEN ENTERING THE STORE FROM THE MAIN ENTRY VESTIBULE. 215. NEW CONCRETE CURB RAMP. CUT INTO EXISTING SIDEWALK. SEE A5.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 216. BABY REGISTRY KIOSK TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA (VIA POWER POLE WHEN NOT LOCATED AT FULL HEIGHT WALL). SEE A0.3 & ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. 217. EXISTING ROOF LADDER & HATCH. 218. PROVIDE GYPSUM BOARD CONTROL JOINTS AT BOTH EDGES ABOVE ALL BULKHEADS AND DOOR OPENINGS ON SALES FLOOR. SEE DETAIL TA4.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. 219, EXISTING SKYLIGHT ABOVE FLOOR PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 3. SEE SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ON SHEET A4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES, ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. Q 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE ~ co M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY Jzoo DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 6. APPROVED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL BE LOCATED AS PER THE FIRE MARSHALL DIRECTION. 7. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL PLYWOOD REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH ELECTRICAL SHEETS. INSTALL PLYWOOD AS DIRECTED ON ELECTRICAL SHEETS. 9. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 0 10. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNSMALLS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE COLUMN/WALL (IF POSSIBLE) WHEN (D<0< ENTERING THE STORE FROM THE MAIN ENTRY VESTIBULE. 11. ALL INTERIOR DOORS ARE 6' OFF FINISHED WALL U.N.O. PARTITION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION J NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION, REFER TO PARTITION TYPES ON SHEET A4.0 SYMBOL LEGEND DESCRIPTION SYMBOL X }- PARTITION TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) XX DOOR NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) XXX CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) NAME ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) xxx REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 8 2016 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIV'D CITY OF TUKW1�A JAN 13 20 116 PERMIT CENTER DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET J04 r � J i E U) O CU a 0 cuU -0U)o 3: co 0 O Q C14 C) E W Q co -"", o o �j C'4 t6 CV CV cu .3 N Lo CA Q4- N DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 0 W Q Q z LLWWco Q Q U ~ co Jzoo c)WW00 O Z Z) = Q U) 0 z:5 (D<0< 0� z U) J Z: Q ti U DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET m U C. LL 0 CL 0 F- U O Q N d' O Ql r -I O N N r -I r\ -I Compression Post 12 Gat Hanger Wre (3 Tight l'VMPs) Main Beam,,. 4'-0" O.C. Cross Tees', ., T-0" O.C. M f I I Jf✓//ff A SEISMIC SUPPORT BRACING GRIDS ATTACHED TO WALL ANGLE ON TWO ADJACENT SIDES. PROVIDE 3/4" CLEARANCE BETWEEN ENDS OF GRID AND WALL ON THE OTHER TWO SIDES. Ti4ht ScrQW �w L--- 0 -��a� Angie Moiding 7878 B FLEXIBLE BRACKET AT ATTACHED WALL LAY -IN CEILING 7 SEISMIC DETAILS A1.6 N.T.S. L L ENLARGED CASH ROOM 6 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.6 SCALE: 114" = 1'-0" SEISMIC SUPPORT FOR CEILING SYSTEM: b. WIDTH OF THE PERIMETER SUPPORTING PODS AT 12'-0" MAX. O.C. AND 6'-0" MAX. FROM 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. CLOSURE ANGLE (WALL ANGLE) SHALL NOT WALLS. A STRUT FASTENED TO THE MAIN ARMSTRONG SEISMIC RX SUSPENSION SYSTEM 403. SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL BE LESS THAN 2.0 INCHES. REFERENCE RUNNER SHALL BE EXTENDED TO AND ICC -ESR -1308 USED AS BASIS OF DESIGN. SHELVING FIXTURES (GC MUST COORDINATE LIGHTS WITH FINAL FIXTURE PLAN). ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, ITEM B. FASTENED TO THE STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 405. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL c. ON TWO ADJACENT SIDES, THE GRID SHALL SUPPORTING THE ROOF OR FLOOR ABOVE. SUBSTITUTIONS PERMITTED PROVIDED THEY ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. r^n r -E x T E ri rc u� '^rrc ^ I e' IT FI)ff IJRE SEE Sel IEBI_}EE TI'T'S 811EET-ANE) E eT-Ri AL DRAWINGS EXTERIOR E TIGISIS ONA50 FOR I�AT�NIS BE ATTACHED TO THE WALL ANGLE. POP CISCA GUIDELINES FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT COMPLY WITH ASTM C636 AND ASTM E580 PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. RIVETS ARE ACCEPTABLE. ON THE OTHER FOR DIRECT HUNG SUSPENDED CEILING EQ. 6'-07I TWO SIDES, THERE SHALL BE A 3/4" ASSEMBLIES, SEISMIC ZONES 3 & 4, MAY, STEM TO COMPLY WITH SUSPENDED CEILING SYSTEM P 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING NCE THE ENDS OF THE CLEARANCE BETWEEN 2004 INSTALLATION SECTION ITEM 3. , , THE FOLLOWING CODES AND REGULATIONS: EQ. GRID AND THE WALL. REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 L CEILINGS OVER 2,500 SF MUST HAVE SEISMIC ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, ITEM B. SEPARATION JOINTS OF FULL HEIGHT 1. 2012 INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC) d. ON THE OTHER TWO SIDES, THERE SHALL BE PARTITION THAT BREAKS THE CEILING UP SECTIONS 808 AND 1613.1 7. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL A 3/4" CLEARANCE BETWEEN THE ENDS OF INTO AREAS NOT EXCEEDING 2,500 SF. 2. ASTM C635 AND ASTM C636. OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. THE GRID AND THE WALL. REFERENCE REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, 3. ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2. 9. LAY -IN CEILING GRID TO BE CENTERED IN ROOM U.N.O. ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, ITEM B. ITEM E. 4. CISCA RECOMMENDATIONS FOR SEISMIC e. STABILIZER BARS ARE REQUIRED TO j. FOR CEILINGS WITHOUT REIGID BRACING, ZONES 3-4. (CEILINGS AND INTERIOR 3'-0" PREVENT THE SPREAD OF MAIN BEAMS SPRINKLER HEAD AND OTHER PENETRATIONS SYSTEMS CONSTRUCTION ASSOCIATION). 8' SUSPENDED SALES LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) AND/OR CROSS TEES. CISCA GUIDELINES SHALL HAVE A 2" OVERSIZE RING, SLEEVE, OR 5. IBC 102.1, WHICH STATES, "WHERE, IN ANY 8' SUSPENDED B.O.H. LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) FOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT FOR DIRECT HUNG ADAPTER THROUGH THE CEILING TILE TO SPECIFIC CASE, DIFFERENT SECTIONS OF CAN LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) SUSPENDED CEILING ASSEMBLIES, SEISMIC ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT OF AT LEAST 1" THIS CODE SPECIFY DIFFERENT MATERIALS, O ZONES 3 & 4, MAY, 2004, INSTALLATION IN ALL HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS; OR, METHODS OF CONSTRUCTION OR OTHER EXIT LIGHT- CEILING MOUNT (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) SECTION, ITEM 4. SPRINKLER HEAD EXTENSION TO HAVE A REQUIREMENTS, THE MOST RESTRICTIVE f. PERIMETER SUPPORT (TAIL) WIRES ARE SWING JOINT THAT CAN ACCOMMODATE 1" OF SHALL GOVERN. WHERE THERE IS A REQUIRED WITHIN 8" OF THE WALL FOR ALL CEILING MOVEMENT IN ALL DIRECTIONS. CONFLICT BETWEEN A GENERAL EDGES. CISCA GUIDELINES FOR SEISMIC REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, REQUIREMENT AND A SPECIFIC RESTRAINT FOR DIRECT HUNG SUSPENDED ITEM E. REQUIREMENT, THE SPECIFIC CEILING ASSEMBLIES, SEISMIC ZONES 3 & 4, k. CHANGES IN CEILING PLAN ELEVATION SHALL REQUIREMENTS SHALL BE APPLICABLE". MAY, 2004, INSTALLATION SECTION, ITEM 2. BE PROVIDED WITH POSITIVE BRACING. 6. NOTE THAT THE SUSPENDED CEILING g. VERTICAL HANGERS SHALL BE NO. 12 GAUGE I REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 SECT ON 13.5.6.2.2 SYSTEM MUST MEET THE FOLLOWING WIRE SPACED AT 4'-0" O.C. ALONG EACH MAIN ITEM F. REQUIREMENTS: RUNNER. THREE WIRE TURNS REQUIRED. I. CABLE TRAYS AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS a. ONLY HEAVY DUTY T -BAR GRID SYSTEM WITHIN 1:6 OUT -OF -PLUMB UNLESS SHALL BE SUPPORTED INDEPENDENTLY OF SHALL BE USED. REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 COUNTER -SLOPING WIRES ARE PROVIDED. THE CEILING. REFERENCE ASCE-7-05 SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, ITEM A. h. LATERAL BRACING IS REQUIRED: SPLAY WIRE SECTION 13.5.6.2.2, ITEM G. ENLARGED VESTIBULE 7 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.6 SCALE: 114" =1'-0" 25 ENLARGED RESTROOM REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1'4" C 5 Al E F G H K L 25) (26 165'-0" 55'-0" 11 55'-0" RECEIVING 123 ci 8'-0" A.F.F. @ 10'-6" A.F.F. @ 9'-0" A.F.F. I TYP. 403 _ I -416 - IN JANITOR (�'P• @ CORE -400 U.N.U.) - - @ 9'-0" A.F.F. '@ 10'-0" A.F.F. TYR 404 400 400 IN FITTING 6 BREAK ROOMS STOCK o WOMEN kEN JANITOR ROOM MANA ER 400 122 N 111 124 4(!116 112 I _ Al.6 55'-0" i T7 w 412 {- J J EQ. 15'-0" '( ELEC. EQ. EQ. 120 r 15'-0" EQ. Nit _- ...... �� _ _ ---- ------ Irr ❑ ❑ ul L w ' w r A. tti' w o EQ. EQ. wC� f 1 �. 3 pr F :J2 5 �`:01 :k! 3.3 cq '2 Y., 2 ; P IN T T,> r1 '? 402 UteIREC U.N.O. ' 7° --- --� Lu MECH $'-0" A.F.F. co -' , L_ J 410 b TYP. 406 t TYP. 410 @ T 0" A.F.F. N a^ @ 8'-0" A.F.F. I 409 A QOM LO AVIEI( N CORRIDOR FITTING ROOM FITTING ROOM CENTER IN SOFFIT 9 0 / 4 I (TYP. U.N.O.) 407 0 109A ! C106 E,' 1 % A A A x A A n A 400 ASST. MGR./ E -LEARNT (TYP. @ CORRIDQR U.N.O.) PREY.A! MPUMMMMUrn Ai ' II A A 113 A I r,. A A i q i imi I Cn 04 A pI r I::sT I h IM MM . '• TYP. 403 NP. 413 _ __.....-......_._._•__•.___._.�__ Al �k\k" \` . `. MECH I I MECH I �' `� �. Al o f ` N I �'` \ N "NI 7m o 77,E) BATT ROOF INSULATION AND �� (E) SKYLIGHT, TYP. N SCRIM TO REMAIN :• A ;,a ;. ImI I 12)I / - MECH I (N) RTU ON (E} i MI ICH 2' ' HOLDsr, EQ. 1 I CURB, TYP. I I I _ EQ. Z-13" HOLD o MnuMTMH=4.0„ il N TYP. U.N.O. ( TYP. U.N.O. ` 405 NP. TYR 405 F'wunummarrm r' i �IDID ®1® ))mm= ! uuuuuuuu W� ®1� �Il®I ®® .. .. 1 A.. 9 A . _._ TYP IL SALES_U_N 0.__.._.402. ,-� _ `n� _ .... _..._ i an ;,ik 1 I - --- --- _� __._.._.......Ma...�. a....--.._�...--.._.-...._...._..-..-..............._......-,........_.; .w......- «_,,-.__.......�.....�...........�...............-....._..:_.._.�_..-......�..-..-.-..�........:..__.....-,.gym__-�-..,m__._...._ __..-_...........__.._..m.-..__..m_....._...._-,�......m...-��.....-. - - --- MECH I I MACH ,f / t I I Cw i iI - i o hm1 :L\N, N14)1 is UA R CORRAL -VESTIBULE-.•~_____ _ MECH)7 i _jo ` 405 %N, E ;; 101 A1.6 I-=,; -. N = J ,. }FYI - -,vvll Ln ,r ulECH1 a a c�I j I I Al EQ. rTYP EQ f TYP. i / flA A I �] @ PERIMETER•.: @ PERIMETER 402 F:; I I i unninan A1.6 TYP. 1 Q ❑ ❑ C� e ❑ CUSTOMER SPRINKLER RISER CHECK OUT SERVICE STORAGE CASH COUNT 126 (E) WOOD STRUCTURE AND DECK. SALES AREA PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. 102 103 104 115 114 400 400 @ 13'-0" A. F.F. @ 9'-0" A.F.F. IN STORAGE ROOM (TYP, @ OFFICE U.N.O.) PERIMETER FITTING ROOM WALLS TO OT DECK. SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ON A1.3, ENLARGED PLANS ON A2.0, & PARTITION TYPES ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. FITTING ROOM LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. LAY -IN CEILING, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET FOR DETAILS. FITTING ROOM STALLS BEYOND. SEE PARTITION TYPES ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. FINISHED FLOOR FITTING ROOM 4 LIGHT FIXTURE DETAIL A1.6 SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0" PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED LAY -IN CEILING GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN THIS SHEET FOR HEIGHTS, SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. T-0" HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME. SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ON A1.3 AND SCHEDULES ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. TYPICAL (�2 SOFFIT DETAIL A1.6 SCALE: 1/2" =1'-0" REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES 26 400. ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE IN SUSPENDED METAL T -GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 402. EXPOSED STRUCTURE, PAINT PER FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4,0. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH STRUCTURE. ALL WIRES TO BE TUCKED TIGHT TO STRUCTURE (MUST NOT BE VISIBLE FROM BELOW). 403. SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL 401407 HAVE STRUTS INSTALLED TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT. ALL RECEIVING, STOCK & LAYAWAY SUSPENDED LIGHTS TO BE CENTERED OVER AISLES BETWEEN SHELVING FIXTURES (GC MUST COORDINATE LIGHTS WITH FINAL FIXTURE PLAN). 404. DOCK LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 401 405. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. PERIMETER LIGHTS TO BE Z-6" OFF PERIMETER WALLS. 406. RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL 10'-0" A.F.F. 407. RECESSED SOFFIT CAN LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. r^n r -E x T E ri rc u� '^rrc ^ I e' IT FI)ff IJRE SEE Sel IEBI_}EE TI'T'S 811EET-ANE) E eT-Ri AL DRAWINGS EXTERIOR E TIGISIS ONA50 FOR I�AT�NIS NP. FOR HEIGHTS. 10'-0" A.F.F. PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. 411. UNIT HEATER, SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. 412. EXISTING ROOF HATCH AND LADDER TO REMAIN. EQ. 6'-07I -,--OR HEIGHT. 417. WALL MOUNTED SPLIT SYSTEM CENTERED OVER DOOR. SEE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 6'-0" 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 61-01, EQ. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE i ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS 4 CLARIFICATION. 5 ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE CITY AND AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION F THE PROJECT. LOCAL CODES A 0 ANC S CATIO 0 6. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 7. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 8. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS/WALLS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE COLUMNMALL (IF POSSIBLE) WHEN ENTERING THE STORE FROM THE MAIN ENTRY VESTIBULE. 9. LAY -IN CEILING GRID TO BE CENTERED IN ROOM U.N.O. SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION F -- 3'-0" . ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) 3'-0" SYMBOL DESCRIPTION O 8' SUSPENDED SALES LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) nn= T RECESSED LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) 0 8' SUSPENDED B.O.H. LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) Q 2'X4' RECESSED LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) CAN LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) UEXTERIGR LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEG, DRAWINGS FGR DETAILS) J Lif O i EXIT LIGHT- WALL MOUNT (SEE ELEC, DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) l 1 EXIT LIGHT- CEILING MOUNT (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) EMERGENCY LIGHT (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) ti ry O DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET . 1 w 415 .. I 406 i . Lu TYP A t t f? �,:EQ ., .J. , ,:. Q . EQ. cJ . Lu. F ----- ENLARGED VESTIBULE 7 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A1.6 SCALE: 114" =1'-0" 25 ENLARGED RESTROOM REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1'4" C 5 Al E F G H K L 25) (26 165'-0" 55'-0" 11 55'-0" RECEIVING 123 ci 8'-0" A.F.F. @ 10'-6" A.F.F. @ 9'-0" A.F.F. I TYP. 403 _ I -416 - IN JANITOR (�'P• @ CORE -400 U.N.U.) - - @ 9'-0" A.F.F. '@ 10'-0" A.F.F. TYR 404 400 400 IN FITTING 6 BREAK ROOMS STOCK o WOMEN kEN JANITOR ROOM MANA ER 400 122 N 111 124 4(!116 112 I _ Al.6 55'-0" i T7 w 412 {- J J EQ. 15'-0" '( ELEC. EQ. EQ. 120 r 15'-0" EQ. Nit _- ...... �� _ _ ---- ------ Irr ❑ ❑ ul L w ' w r A. tti' w o EQ. EQ. wC� f 1 �. 3 pr F :J2 5 �`:01 :k! 3.3 cq '2 Y., 2 ; P IN T T,> r1 '? 402 UteIREC U.N.O. ' 7° --- --� Lu MECH $'-0" A.F.F. co -' , L_ J 410 b TYP. 406 t TYP. 410 @ T 0" A.F.F. N a^ @ 8'-0" A.F.F. I 409 A QOM LO AVIEI( N CORRIDOR FITTING ROOM FITTING ROOM CENTER IN SOFFIT 9 0 / 4 I (TYP. U.N.O.) 407 0 109A ! C106 E,' 1 % A A A x A A n A 400 ASST. MGR./ E -LEARNT (TYP. @ CORRIDQR U.N.O.) PREY.A! MPUMMMMUrn Ai ' II A A 113 A I r,. A A i q i imi I Cn 04 A pI r I::sT I h IM MM . '• TYP. 403 NP. 413 _ __.....-......_._._•__•.___._.�__ Al �k\k" \` . `. MECH I I MECH I �' `� �. Al o f ` N I �'` \ N "NI 7m o 77,E) BATT ROOF INSULATION AND �� (E) SKYLIGHT, TYP. N SCRIM TO REMAIN :• A ;,a ;. ImI I 12)I / - MECH I (N) RTU ON (E} i MI ICH 2' ' HOLDsr, EQ. 1 I CURB, TYP. I I I _ EQ. Z-13" HOLD o MnuMTMH=4.0„ il N TYP. U.N.O. ( TYP. U.N.O. ` 405 NP. TYR 405 F'wunummarrm r' i �IDID ®1® ))mm= ! uuuuuuuu W� ®1� �Il®I ®® .. .. 1 A.. 9 A . _._ TYP IL SALES_U_N 0.__.._.402. ,-� _ `n� _ .... _..._ i an ;,ik 1 I - --- --- _� __._.._.......Ma...�. a....--.._�...--.._.-...._...._..-..-..............._......-,........_.; .w......- «_,,-.__.......�.....�...........�...............-....._..:_.._.�_..-......�..-..-.-..�........:..__.....-,.gym__-�-..,m__._...._ __..-_...........__.._..m.-..__..m_....._...._-,�......m...-��.....-. - - --- MECH I I MACH ,f / t I I Cw i iI - i o hm1 :L\N, N14)1 is UA R CORRAL -VESTIBULE-.•~_____ _ MECH)7 i _jo ` 405 %N, E ;; 101 A1.6 I-=,; -. N = J ,. }FYI - -,vvll Ln ,r ulECH1 a a c�I j I I Al EQ. rTYP EQ f TYP. i / flA A I �] @ PERIMETER•.: @ PERIMETER 402 F:; I I i unninan A1.6 TYP. 1 Q ❑ ❑ C� e ❑ CUSTOMER SPRINKLER RISER CHECK OUT SERVICE STORAGE CASH COUNT 126 (E) WOOD STRUCTURE AND DECK. SALES AREA PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. 102 103 104 115 114 400 400 @ 13'-0" A. F.F. @ 9'-0" A.F.F. IN STORAGE ROOM (TYP, @ OFFICE U.N.O.) PERIMETER FITTING ROOM WALLS TO OT DECK. SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ON A1.3, ENLARGED PLANS ON A2.0, & PARTITION TYPES ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. FITTING ROOM LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR DETAILS. LAY -IN CEILING, SEE PLANS THIS SHEET FOR DETAILS. FITTING ROOM STALLS BEYOND. SEE PARTITION TYPES ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. FINISHED FLOOR FITTING ROOM 4 LIGHT FIXTURE DETAIL A1.6 SCALE: 1/8" =1'-0" PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED LAY -IN CEILING GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN THIS SHEET FOR HEIGHTS, SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. T-0" HOLLOW METAL DOOR AND FRAME. SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ON A1.3 AND SCHEDULES ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. TYPICAL (�2 SOFFIT DETAIL A1.6 SCALE: 1/2" =1'-0" REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES CODED NOTES: 400. ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE IN SUSPENDED METAL T -GRID SYSTEM, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 401. GYPSUM BOARD CEILING, SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 402. EXPOSED STRUCTURE, PAINT PER FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4,0. ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT TO BE PAINTED TO MATCH STRUCTURE. ALL WIRES TO BE TUCKED TIGHT TO STRUCTURE (MUST NOT BE VISIBLE FROM BELOW). 403. SUSPENDED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. ALL SALES FLOOR LIGHTING IN CONTINUOUS ROWS TO HAVE STRUTS INSTALLED TO ENSURE ALIGNMENT. ALL RECEIVING, STOCK & LAYAWAY SUSPENDED LIGHTS TO BE CENTERED OVER AISLES BETWEEN SHELVING FIXTURES (GC MUST COORDINATE LIGHTS WITH FINAL FIXTURE PLAN). 404. DOCK LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. MOUNT LIGHT @ 6-6" A.F.F. 405. PERIMETER LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. PERIMETER LIGHTS TO BE Z-6" OFF PERIMETER WALLS. 406. RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. 407. RECESSED SOFFIT CAN LIGHT FIXTURE, SEE SCHEDULE THIS SHEET AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. r^n r -E x T E ri rc u� '^rrc ^ I e' IT FI)ff IJRE SEE Sel IEBI_}EE TI'T'S 811EET-ANE) E eT-Ri AL DRAWINGS EXTERIOR E TIGISIS ONA50 FOR I�AT�NIS FOR ETA11-2E€ €l AND DIM1 ENSIE)NS 409. GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT. SEE DETAIL 2 ON THIS SHEET FOR DETAILS. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. 410. GYPSUM BOARD BULK HEAD. SEE DETAIL 1 ON THIS SHEET FOR DETAILS. SEE PLAN FOR HEIGHTS. 411. UNIT HEATER, SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. 412. EXISTING ROOF HATCH AND LADDER TO REMAIN. 413. HEAVY DASHED LINE SHOWS ROOF TOP UNIT ABOVE. BET 414. ReGF LEADER (DOWNSPE)UT). SEE RGGF PLAN 9N A1.7 FOR -AILS. 415. 2' X2' CEILING ACCESS PANEL, PAINT TO MATCH CEILING. 416. GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT CCC -DET IL 3 ON THIS SHEET FOR DETAILS. SEE PLAN -,--OR HEIGHT. 417. WALL MOUNTED SPLIT SYSTEM CENTERED OVER DOOR. SEE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFORMATION. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 3. SEE SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ON SHEETA4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES, ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 5 ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE CITY AND AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION F THE PROJECT. LOCAL CODES A 0 ANC S CATIO 0 6. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 7. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 8. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS/WALLS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE COLUMNMALL (IF POSSIBLE) WHEN ENTERING THE STORE FROM THE MAIN ENTRY VESTIBULE. 9. LAY -IN CEILING GRID TO BE CENTERED IN ROOM U.N.O. SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION F -- P CODED NOTE SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES ( ROOM NAME ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) LIGHT FIXTURE LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION O 8' SUSPENDED SALES LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) nn= T RECESSED LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) 0 8' SUSPENDED B.O.H. LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) Q 2'X4' RECESSED LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) CAN LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) UEXTERIGR LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEG, DRAWINGS FGR DETAILS) J Lif TRUCK DOCK LIGHT FIX. (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) () EXIT LIGHT- WALL MOUNT (SEE ELEC, DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) l 1 EXIT LIGHT- CEILING MOUNT (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) EMERGENCY LIGHT (SEE ELEC. DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS) ti REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE 1/16" =1'-0" (E) STRUCTURE AND DECK 3-518" 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. 518" GYP. BD. (1) SIDE TO DECK. BOTTOM OF SOFFIT SEE PLAN THIS SHEET FOR HEIGHTS RECEIVED CITY OF WKWILA JAN 13 2016 PERT CENTER (E) STRUCTURE AND DECK LAY -IN CEILING GRID SYSTEM. SEE PLAN THIS SHEET FOR HEIGHTS, SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. PROVIDE BLOCKING AS REQUIRED 5/8" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES TO DECK. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE ON SHEET A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 6" 20 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. STUD SIZE MAY VARY (REFER TO PARTITION SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS). BOTTOM OF BULKHEAD SEE PLAN THIS SHEET FOR HEIGHTS TYPICAL BULKHEAD DETAIL A1.6 SCALE: 1/2" =1'-0" V N `- J J r - O C U) O 0�� 0- O U t0 CO co 3: Lo f co dN N LO LLZ� U M E 42'CQN6? I- U U.2L��N ¢co 0000 U) �j oo N N N c6 .� 00 U-, U) a ai I V: 5 Q f 0�� UIQ--< J LLZ� W °- I- U 0000 Z O�z 00 J 0�w Lu Z�_Q U 0U)i- F -- uj V Q O I- U Z UUJI J - J Lif 00 i w Q ti ry DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET 165'-0" ROOF PLAN SCALE 1116" =1'-0" 1 a'-0" 2'-6" MIN BEYOND 2'-6" MIN BEYOND EDGE OF HATCH EDGE OF HATCH 2X2 SQUARE TUBE RAILS 2X2 ANGLE WELDED VERTICALS CONNECTION TYP. to "' ROOF DECK (q ROOF EDGE COPING Lu HATCH `D �o(2) 1/2" DIA. EXPANSION o BOLTS EMBEDDED 2" MIN. INTO TILT -UP PANEL ° EO. TILT -UP WALL L E0. L ROOF HATCH BARRIER ELEVATION A1.7 SCALE: 1/2" =1'-0" ROOF PLAN NOTES CODED NOTES 700. EXISTING ROOF HATCH TO REMAIN. 701. PROVIDE NEW ROOFTOP UNIT TO REPLACE EXISTING ROOF TOP UNIT. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS AND STRUCTURAL DETAIL 6/S0.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. O 702. EXISTING SKYLIGHT TO REMAIN, INFILL PER DETAIL 91A1.6. 703. EXISTING ROOFING TO REMAIN 704. INFILL OLD RTU/CURB LOCATION WITH STRUCTURAL ASSEMBLY PER STRUCTURAL cu DRAWINGS. PATCH AND SEAL ROOF SURFACE. 3 ROOF PLAN GENERAL NOTES 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / (v E INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. cu u) .3 3. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL N CODES AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 4. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 5. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 6. ALL RTU'S TO HAVE BURGLAR BARS. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS. 7. SEE MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR RTU SIZING & LOCATIONS SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) xxx X RTU DESIGNATION AND CALL OUT (SEE MECH. SHEETS FOR DETAILS). REVIEWED FOR 'CODE COMPLIANCE PPR u L MAR 0 8 2016 City of `dui wila BUILDING DIVISION UN J J _ N i N =3E U) O W CL O cu C (1) O 3 co cc) ' Lo 0 CV LO U NL,�NM (v E 0�� Q Q 0 0 0 X00 N N N cu u) .3 � Lo U) N PERMIT CENT413 A1.7 2015-29-00 0�� UP a- LLWci� W I. co coo < o 00 Ua-W0) z Q U<0<C Z 3: c J L_ _I VO RECEIVED 00 Z) < co It 0� m CL r MAR 0 4 2016 DATE REVISION TUKWILA 02-05-16 BID SET PUBLIC WORKS 03-01-16 REVISION Qi IRRECT N R R" CITY F TUKWILA PERMIT CENT413 A1.7 2015-29-00 M 0 a 0 F_ 0 f a 0 m 0 CD 0 ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM STALL ACCESSORIES PLAN SCALE: 112" =1'-011 EQUIPMENT ROOM ENLARGED PLAN SCALE: 1/2" =1'-011 KEY TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SEE SHEET A 3.0 A EL1 D B ELI ) . ELI c EL1 KEY TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SEE SHEET A 3.0 TYPICAL FITTING ROOM STALL , , 4 ACCESSORIES PLAN EL1 D B A2.0 SCALE: 1/2" = 11-0" ELI ELI c ELI IV KEY TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SEE SHEET A 3.0 CASH/COUNT ENLARGED PLAN SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" OFFICE CORE/RESTROOMS 2 ENLARGED PLAN A2 0 SCALE: 114" = 1'-011 FITTING ROOM/LAYAWAY/RECEIVING ENLARGED PLAN A2.0 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" ELI D B ELI ELI C ) KEY TO INTERIOR EL1 ELEVATIONS SEE SHEET A 3.0 A ELI D B EL1 ELI c EL1 KEY TO INTERIOR ELEVATIONS SEE SHEET A 2.1 FOR RESTROOMS SEE SHEET A 3.0 FOR OFFICE CORE REVIEWED FOR CEDE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 3 2016 A City o gull--'ila BUILDING DIVISION U N ENLARGED PLAN NOTES J � � CODED NOTES: 500. HOLLOW METAL DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 501. ELIASON STOCK ROOM DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 502. WOOD FITTING ROOM DOOR. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 503. PROVIDE EXIT TACTILE SIGNAGE PER NOTES ON A0.3. TYPICAL AT ALL EXTERIOR U m DOOR LOCATIONS & WHERE LOCAL JURISDICTION OFFICIALS AND/OR CODE REQUIRE. 504. LEVEL 5 WALL FINISH REQUIRED THROUGHOUT ENTIRE TENANT SPACE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR LEVEL DEFINITIONS. 505. PARTITION/WALL TYPE. SEE PARTITION SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR DETAILS. 506. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -2) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD OUTSIDE CORNERS IN F- STOCK / RECEIVING AREAS. 507. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -1) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD OUTSIDE CORNERS IN .� SALES & OFFICE AREAS. 508. INSTALL ALUMINUM CORNER (ST -3) @ WING WALL CORNERS IN RESTROOMS AS SHOWN. 509. 30" DEEP PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTER @ 32" A.F.F. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 510. 30" DEEP PLASTIC LAMINATE COUNTER @ 42" A.F.F. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 511. 12" DEEP PLASTIC LAMINATE SHELVING ABOVE COUNTER. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 512. 2" DIAMETER PLASTIC DESK/ COUNTER GROMMET (COLOR: WHITE) LOCATED 4" U) AWAY FROM WALL BELOW EACH VERTICAL SHELF STANDARD & 4" FROM BOTH ENDS (LEFT & RIGHT). NOTE: WHEN NO SHELF STANDARDS EXIST, INSTALL GROMMETS @ 4'-0" O.C. & 4" FROM BOTH ENDS (LEFT & RIGHT). 513. OFFICE 1 BREAK 1 FITTING ROOM FURNITURE FURNISHED BY BURLINGTON. 514. DOOR STOP MOUNTED @ 3'4" A.F.F. 515. CASH ROOM SAFE (NOT IN CONTRACT) 516. EMPLOYEE TIME CLOCK. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR MORE DETAIL. 517. PASS THRU WINDOW. SEE DETAIL 4 ON A4.1 FOR MORE DETAIL. 518. BREAK ROOM COUNTER W/ SINK. SEE DETAIL 8 ON A4.1 AND PLUMBING SHEETS FOR MORE DETAIL. 519. EMPLOYEE FRIDGE / FREEZER (N.I.C). SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR MORE DETAIL. 520. EMPLOYEE VENDING MACHINE (N.I.C.). SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR MORE DETAIL. 521. EMPLOYEE LOCKERS. SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.3 AND INTERIOR 0- ELEVATIONS ON A3.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 522. TV & MOUNTING BRACKET MOUNTED @ l'-6" BELOW FIN. CEILING. PROVIDE WOOD BLOCKING BEHIND WALL AS REQUIRED FOR TV MOUNT. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR MORE DETAIL. 523. RESTROOM GENDER & BRAILLE SIGN. SEE ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS ON A0.3 FOR MORE DETAIL. 524. MOP SINK W/ HOT WATER TANK ABOVE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. 525. MOP & HOSE HANGER. SEE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ON A3.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 526. BOTTOM OF SOFFIT @ T-0" A.F.F. 527. BOTTOM OF SOFFIT @ 8'-0" A.F.F. 528. 6" 0 X 4'-0" LONG PVC TUBE MOUNTED TO WALL FOR DRAWING STORAGE. BOTTOM CAP TO BE FIXED TO TUBE, TOP CAP TO BE REMOVABLE. BOTTOM OF TUBE TO BE 6" A.F.F. 529. ACCENT WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 530. PROVIDE 1X4 WOOD TRIM MOLDING AT TOP OF OUTSIDE FACE OF FITTING ROOM STALL WALLS. SEE WALL TYPE 6 ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 531. PROVIDE SHEET METAL BEHIND GYP. BD. IN ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM STALL FROM 30" TO 42" A.F.F. WHERE SHOWN ON 7/A3.0. 532. THREE-WAY MIRROR TO BE MOUNTED AT 12" A.F.F. 533. CLOTHING HOOK MOUNTED @ 5'-8" A.F.F. IN STANDARD FITTING ROOM, OR MOUNTED @ 4'-0" A.F.F. IN ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOM. 534. 2'-0" X 5'-0" MIRROR @ V-0" A.F.F. USE CLEAR SILICONE CAULK AROUND ALL EDGES. GC TO FURNISH. 535. EXISTING ROOF HATCH AND LADDER 536. BURGLAR & FIRE ALARM PANELS MOUNTED ON 8'X4'X314" F.T. PLYWOOD PANEL PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 537. PHONE AND IT EQUIPMENT MOUNTED ON 8'X4'X314" F.T. PLYWOOD PANEL PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 538. INSTALL 112" F.T. PLYWOOD ON ALL WALLS IN JANITOR'S CLOSET. MOUNT @ 12" All AND GO UP TO 8'-0" A.F.F. 539. ADD PLYWOOD OR KYDEX TO 48" A.F.F. TO COLUMNS NEAR ENTRY TO STOCK AREA. CONFIRM FINAL LOCATIONS WITH BURLINGTON PM. 540. DASHED LINE INDICATES KYD-1 TO BE INSTALLED UP TO 4'-0" A.F.F. 541. APPROXIMATE LOCATION OF FIRE EXTINGUISHER. CONFIRM REQUIREMENTS AND 542 LOCATIONS WITH LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. YS -TEM. E GUSTE)ME T'r'AFFIG SYSTEM. QUEUE P RE)JEE)T LJIT VIISI BURLINGTONMANAGER O Af]/�ECT PRIOR INSTALLATIONTOOF 544. J VIR PS O CUSTOMER MATERIALS.ALL GAS! PERV16E 6OUNTERrTO BE O 6 STE)ME f CI-'I7VIGE COUNTER A/+GESSIB P' SEE AO.3 OS2A FOR GAS' I WRAP DETAIL SEASONAL CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA OFF WALL LOCATION @ 24" A.F.F. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. G.C. TO CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. 545. EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL FURRING TO REMAIN AT LOADING AREA. PATCH/REPAIR 546. EXISTING PLYWOOD SHTG/INSULATION AS REQUIRED. STEEL BOLLARD FILLED WIT' I GONGRETE, PAINT SAFE -11"I'ELLI&A'. SJEEDETAIL� ON FOR IEET A A n FORA 597 548. �TICL I I"1Y.L ORE DETAIL. S - PAD A VVTCD1TFfS7nMER SEEE EGTR1.6_ 81.'.EETS FOR AOR CLTP7L-. NOVAR EQUIPMENT MOUNTED ON 4'X4'X3/4" F.T. PLYWOOD PANEL PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 549. IDF EQUIPMENT MOUNTED ON 4'X4'X3/4" F.T. PLYWOOD PANEL PER ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. 550. FRP ON WALLS BEHIND MOP SINK. SEE SHEETS A3.0 & A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. -551, INSTA66 1I2" F.T. P nrEnn ON ALL WALLS 1Ar1�;GORRIDOR TO 4'0" A.F.F. S=E WALL TYPE 7 IEET 552. ON SI A4.0. WALL MOUNTED AIR CONDITIONING UNIT CENTERED ABOVE DOOR, SEE ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL SHEETS FOR MORE INFORMATION. 553. 72" WIDE X 48" HIGH BULLETIN BOARDS. SEE DETAIL 131A3.0 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION, ENLARGED PLAN GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 3. SEE SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ON SHEET A4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES, ROOM SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 6. APPROVED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS SHALL BE LOCATED AS PER THE FIRE MARSHALL DIRECTION. 7. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 8. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL PLYWOOD REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH ELECTRICAL SHEETS. INSTALL PLYWOOD AS DIRECTED ON ELECTRICAL SHEETS. 9. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 10. ALL EQUIPMENT TO BE MOUNTED ON SALES FLOOR COLUMNS/WALLS SHALL BE MOUNTED ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE COLUMN/WALL (IF POSSIBLE) WHEN ENTERING THE STORE FROM THE MAIN ENTRY VESTIBULE. 11. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS THROUGHOUT ENTIRE BURLINGTON SPACE. CG -1 TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK & RECEIVING AREAS. 12. SEE SHEET A1.3 FOR MORE DETAIL ON DOOR TAG CALLOUTS. 13, ALL INTERIOR DOORS ARE 6" OFF FINISHED WALL U.N.O. PARTITION LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION NEW PARTIAL HEIGHT PARTITION, REFER TO PARTITION TYPES ON SHEET A4.0 SYMBOL LEGEND DESCRIPTION SYMBOL X }- PARTITION TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) O XXX DOOR NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) NAME xxx ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) REVIEWED FOR CEDE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 3 2016 A City o gull--'ila BUILDING DIVISION U N J � � J L E a) 07 O (o '-' a o U m C07 co O W co co � M O Q N M E U F- L - -,;t 04 �Q Oowcu Cn >co oo >0 �NNco .� z J uj 0 ry Q z Lu DATE REVISION 01-11-16 1 PERMIT SET ryN�N O W ry U F- n LL Wry o�z00 U w 0-) z = Q o U) 0< z co J J q ry Se m 0- r REVISION 01-11-16 1 PERMIT SET M a LL a 0 F- r) f CL M 1.0 N TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY NOTES 1. REFER TO DETAIL #02 ON A2.0 FOR RESTROOM DIMENSIONS AND NOTES. 2. REFER TO TOILET ROOM SCHEDULE ON THIS SHEET FOR LIST OF ALL ACCESSORIES. ELEVATION 131 #111 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM 3 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE. 1/4', /4 -1-0 MOUNTING BRACKET RUNS FULL LENGTH OF PARTITION PANEL. TYP. ELEVATION D1 #110 MEN'S TOILET ROOM 7 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" RESTROOM / JANITOR ACCESSORIES PLAN SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" SEE NOTE #03 ON TOILET . ROOM SCHEDULE. ELEVATION B #111 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM STALL 4 PARTITION ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE. 1/4 -1-0 VLL INW 1 L "vv VIN 1 WILL 1 ROOM SCHEDULE. ELEVATION D #110 MEN'S TOILET ROOM STALL s PARTITION ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" c Lu U) O z J J m m 06 lz FULL LENGTH MOUNTING BRACKET STAINLESS STEEL DIAMOND PATTERN PARTITION TYPICAL TOILET PARTITION MOUNTING BRACKET DETAIL SCALE: NTS P-6 ST -1 �-/ <H} -i / 575 TYP ELEVATION D #111 WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM 5 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE. 1/4 -1-0 ELEVATION B #110 MEN'S TOILET ROOM 9 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" P-2 ELEVATION A #124 JANITOR ROOM 6 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE. 114 -1-0 P-2 55 CODED NOTES: 575. SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP W/ INTEGRAL SINKS & 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD \ PLUMBING ENCLOSURE / APRON BELOW. SEE DETAIL 1/A4.1. 576. GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS (COLOR TO CT -2 BE WHITE). 577. ALUMINUM COVE -SHAPED FLOOR -TO -WALL TRANSITION. 578. NOT USED. KYD-1 \ INSTALL PIPE WRAP INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP. CT -2 MOP SINK W/ HOT WATER TANK MOUNTED ABOVE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR F CT -1 MORE DETAIL. 581. FRP TO EXTEND 4'-0" HORIZONTALLY ON BOTH WALLS SURROUNDING MOP SINK. 582. MOP HANGER. :•:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: HOSE HANGER. CT -1 w cwn 585. �y ••••••••....O / ............ .......... J J J m INSTALL ALUMINUM CORNER (ST -3) @ WING WALL CORNERS IN RESTROOMS AS .....•••••• / p J 577 = M All AND GO UP TO 8'-0" A.F.F. INTERIOR ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING VB-1Li- DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) ST-2 ST -2 U SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE ELEVATION D DRINKING FOUNTAIN AREA 10 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" O IO R TILE ON WALL ELEVATION A DRINKING FOUNTAIN ARE 11 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" GC TO PROVIDE INTERIOR SIGNAGE PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. GC TO CONFIRM FINAL SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFY FINAL ORDER WITH BURLINGTON PM. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE' APPROVED E 2016 City Of TukvdIa BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER U N INTERIOR ELEVATION NOTES CODED NOTES: 575. SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOP W/ INTEGRAL SINKS & 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD z PLUMBING ENCLOSURE / APRON BELOW. SEE DETAIL 1/A4.1. 576. GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR DETAILS (COLOR TO O BE WHITE). 577. ALUMINUM COVE -SHAPED FLOOR -TO -WALL TRANSITION. 578. NOT USED. 579. INSTALL PIPE WRAP INSULATION ON ALL EXPOSED PIPING, TYP. 580. MOP SINK W/ HOT WATER TANK MOUNTED ABOVE, SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. 581. FRP TO EXTEND 4'-0" HORIZONTALLY ON BOTH WALLS SURROUNDING MOP SINK. 582. MOP HANGER. 583. HOSE HANGER. 584. MOP SINK WITH FAUCET. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. 585. LEVEL 5 WALL FINISH REQUIRED THROUGHOUT ENTIRE TENANT SPACE. SEE FINISH .3 SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR LEVEL DEFINITIONS. 586. INSTALL ALUMINUM CORNER (ST -3) @ WING WALL CORNERS IN RESTROOMS AS SHOWN. 587. INSTALL 112" F.T. PLYWOOD ON ALL WALLS IN JANITOR'S CLOSET. MOUNT @ 12" All AND GO UP TO 8'-0" A.F.F. INTERIOR ELEVATION GENERAL NOTES: 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 3. SEE SCHEDULE AND DETAILS ON SHEET. A4.0 FOR PARTITION TYPES, ROOM U SCHEDULE, FINISH SCHEDULE, DOOR SCHEDULE, AND DOOR TYPES. 4. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE z M.E.P. DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / w� INSTALLATION OF MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND M.E.P. DRAWINGS SHALL BE v BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES AT THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 6. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION. 7. CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY ALL PLYWOOD REQUIRED FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT WITH ELECTRICAL SHEETS. INSTALL PLYWOOD AS DIRECTED ON ELECTRICAL SHEETS. 8. DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS SHALL BE VERIFIED IN THE FIELD BY THE GENERAL U CONTRACTOR (G.C.) PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION OR ORDER OF MATERIALS. ANY w REVISIONS, CHANGES, DEVIATIONS OR INCONSISTENCIES BETWEEN THE AS -BUILT CONDITIONS AND THESE DRAWINGS SHALL IMMEDIATELY BE REPORTED TO THE I- OWNER BEFORE CONSTRUCTION. 9. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD CORNERS THROUGHOUT z::)=�>C ENTIRE BURLINGTON SPACE. CG -1 TO BE INSTALL IN SALES, OFFICE & RESTROOM CORRIDOR AREAS. CG -2 TO BE INSTALL IN STOCK AREAS. 10. SEE SHEET A1.3 FOR MORE DETAIL ON DOOR TAG CALLOUTS. 11. SEE A0.3 FOR ALL ACCESSIBLE DETAILS. 12. CONFIRM LOCATIONS OF EQUIPMENT AND PLYWOOD IN EQUIPMENT ROOM WITH BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 13. WALL SHELVING TO BE CENTERED OVER COUNTERS, U.N.O. O SYMBOL LEGEND SYMBOL DESCRIPTION XXX CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) O RESTROOM ACCESSORY (SEE TOILET ROOM SCHEDULE THIS SHEET) X -X FINISH MATERIAL TAG (SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4,0 FOR DETAILS). O IO R TILE ON WALL ELEVATION A DRINKING FOUNTAIN ARE 11 INTERIOR ELEVATION A2.1 SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" GC TO PROVIDE INTERIOR SIGNAGE PER LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS. GC TO CONFIRM FINAL SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS AND VERIFY FINAL ORDER WITH BURLINGTON PM. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE' APPROVED E 2016 City Of TukvdIa BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER U N J � � J O z L E c U) O 0 c 0 �- O U m o c 0 N Lo U t CQNa? co E coj U N `N co > ocoo�N N� .3 -� to U) a,- ai DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET z 0 Lu �- LU W U ry z w� v I--- n �z� W Lu v w 00 pryz000 J U w w rn I- U z z::)=�>C O (DQOQ 0z w J ~ 00 Lu Q DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET M i Q LL r) 0- 0 0 H C� G Q- M M �-I M r -I V O N .\i -4 M a LL r) 0- 0 0 F- cO G a O Ln 7i d 10 ri O N m ci 0 0 F- 0 f a Ln 0 i0 �r ko 0 I- 14 HARDWARE G ROU PS GROUP # 1 ( STOREFRONT ENTRY DOORS) GROUP # 2 ( SALES / STOCKROOM ELIASON DOOR) GROUP # 3 jM, MISC. GROUP # 4 ( COUNT ROOM DOOR ) FINISH SCHEDULE TRANSITION FROM PCT -1 TO LVT S ORALE, NQUIP & CASHI OFF CO T R-2 ION STRI TRANSIT P SCHLUT ER - RE 0 U AEU N P11 -PLUS: POLYMER CELL CORE W/ 112" SOLID BUTTS' 1 -1/2 PAIR STANLEY FBB191, 41/2" x 4112" x BUTTS' 1 -112 PAIR STANLEY FBB191, 4112" x 4 112" x STILES: NARROW 2118" DOOR BODY: ABS FRAME, 314" TOTAL DOOR THICKNESS MOHAWK US26D 1 NO TILE 2x12 SIDER US26D PIVOTS: TOP & BOTTOM CONCEALED FINISH: .125" THICK HIGH IMPACT THERMOPLASTIC LATCH SET: ARROW LEVERSET LATCH SET: ARROW LEVERSET ODIZED ALU AN MINUM - NSITION FROM P T 1 T Z MAT TRA C 0 TOILE OORS T ROOM FL EXTERIOR TRANSI TION STRIP MLX82 SR SIERRA US26D IC STOREROOM MAPEI MLX82 SR SIERRA US26D IC STOREROOM ULTRACOLOR PLUS GROUT Ce SAHARA BEIGE #11 ................................................................................................................_........................................................... ............. ... ............ .... w/'ARROW' INTERCHANGEABLE CORE ..................................................... PORCELAIN TILE _..-.--__ ..__...._-.--...______ w/'ARROW' INTERCHANGEABLE CORE HARDWARE: BREAKAWAY COLOR: GRAY E AREA & H - TORAGE RM &CART CORRAL MAIN AISLES IN SAL S C ECK OUT AREA, S ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT) ................................. GROUT (118" LINES) WEATHER - PER MFR. SPECS BASEPLATE: NONE CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MTD. ON INSIDE) CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MTD. ON INSIDE) STRIPPING: TAJIMA LVT ....................................B.....................E TILE.......................................................... 3x12 SIDERNO ULLNOS TAJ-2231SE-S 18"X18" SQUARE TILE BULLNOSE TILE FOR TOILET ROOM WALLS &BEHIND DRINKING FOUNTAINS. STAGGER SEAMS OVER GREY STONE MAIN SALES FLOOR PADS GROUT (118" LINES) GLAZING: 518" INSULATED GLASS - SIDELITES HINGES: ZINC COATED FINISH KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D ----------- 11 ..................................._...__.._..._......__...__..- 15OF FLUSH MOUNT HIGH IMPACT CORNER GUARD, 48" HIGH 1" INSULATED GLASS - ACTIVE LEAF ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................-.............-.................................................................-..............................................-,............_........................................................................................................................................................................................................................._...................................................................................................................................................- ENTRY FLOORING MATS INC. PL -2 ENTERPRISE TILE -1911116" x 1911116" PIONITE ANTHRACITE THRESHOLD: 112" SURFACE MOUNTED LEAD UP ON SPRING BUMPERS: 18" HIGH THERMOPLASTIC SPRING BUMPERS FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D CLEAR NON -VESTIBULE SIDE OF BOTH DOORS cn BOTH SIDES (BLACK) SPECIALTIES L D RFA E NTERTOP & 4 n SAMSUNG STARON SO I SU C COU ----------------------_-.---.--.---------------_----.-------_-_------------------_._....________._........__._._._.._._..._.--.....___...-..---.----..-.--------------------------.-------- B244 UARRY BLUFF CT Q Q ( ) ......... cn FRP 1 ... -1111. . � _ 1111. WHITE BEHIND MOP SINK IN JANITOR ROOM DS 12000 (AL.S SILVER) BY "DOOR SCOPE" @ DEADLOCK: PROVIDE'ARROW' INTERCHANGABLE CORE JAMB GUARDS: 3" X 9" ZINC COATED FINISH O 0 UL & S OC ENTRANCE................ FITTING ROOM COMMON AREAS, TOILET ROOM CORRIDORS, SIDE WALLS F VESTIB E T K PEEPHOLE: 5 0 A.F.F. SAFETY RAILS: AS REQUIRED WINDOWS: 9" X 30" CLEAR ACRYLIC SET IN BLACK RUBBER SEE DETAILS ON 11/A4.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. O NOTE: LOCK JAMB @ COUNT ROOM DOOR TO HAVE MORTISE ...............................I......................I...... ...........................................................................................................-........................................................................................................................................................................................................................._..............................................................................................................................................................................................................._. T-6" x T-0" x 1 3/4"--- MOLDING HOLLOW METAL P-1* FOR ELECTRICAL SOLENOID SWITCH (DOOR RELEASE, MORTISE TYPE EDWARDS #181 -AF, 12V). SEE ELECTRICAL FINISH: CLEAR ANODIZED 15 --- C . -- ------ --- CORRIDOR - --- - HOLLOW METAL -- P-1 * 5B _ --- 3 NO ALRAM NEEDED ON CRASH BAR THIS DOOR ONLY 16 DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. EXT.GLAZING NON -REMOVABLE, SECURITY -TYPE GLAZING HOLLOW METAL P-1 * 12 3 STOP EXTRUSION: BEAD PLYWD OD SHEATHING. - - n 3 518 INTERIOR STUD WALL: n 6 INTERIOR WALL STUD O 3 n O 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL GROUP # 5 ( EXIT DOORS w/ CENTER STILE) GROUP # 5B ( EXIT DOOR- SINGLE LEAF) f _. T a � . A � E) , O-.iR,HEA,r L'f.-0.,R _ ��,. ( . ' � 1 f , ��i r ,' I t.� �'.0R �,00� t ,, C 3 PAIR STANLEY FBB191 EMPLOYEE BREAK ROOM 1 -1/2 PAIR STANLEY FBB191 4112" x 41/2" x "`i � GA. jTl. E._ .a w0.� F�J ' 1 r':I sI~.: � .'' �; . 1 4 , 1 . : ; [N(3ES �:. __["E`J T+_1 "1. �. R ; ; . BUTTS: 4112"x4 112"xUS26D NRP BUTTS: US26D, NRP :; . a mm �t ,^,)A ._.fw TNS I„ tib. E , :A-ti„-� ; E . a�ATS - Af ,. , ` . -=z, =,: EXIT DEVICE: 2 VON DUPRIN 99E0-ALK-US26D EXIT ALARM () 1 22 123 VON DUPRIN 99EO-ALK-US26D EXIT ALARM li")nD: s..":L T.,; llv. ,d o : ; `T ";: :,, f P °OVA ", I T 'w�'''` tkC ! w� ' �� 4" , OPEN OPEN DEVICE, BATTERY OPERATED EXIT DEVICE: DEVICE, BATTERY OPERATED _--_- 124 21 R CLOSER: (2) LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MOUNTED w.=w: wtr° Ut,i : r�,'',�:, Tf7 ,'. ;I ;" :. ,%` sw„.Es GROUP #8 ( ROOF HATCH ) 2 INSIDE 22 E (2) T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SALES AREA EXIT DOOR HOLLOW METAL KICKPLATE: (2) IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (0 1_oG'14iN,',: , R ' 1D ,i'\R�,.)`4v _ �,� T_{..,«:, >° I-; LOCK: PROVIDE'ARROW PAD LOCK OPEN P 5 OPEN INSIDE) r, NI B �' ` " ' ' ' ' WITH INTERCHANGABLE CORE FLOOR STOP: (2) IVES FS438 US26D KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D v `i1 e�+.. {, , _ ifl3ptil L''� P,4 c 1-( �,, AL.:;:.'" `v:"�`. Ci: 24 & 39 _ T-0" x 5'-6" x 1 318" ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOMS a P-2* 13 7 THRESHOLD: (2) NGP 424 x 36" FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D �Ii _F..'=_- :;FIEF ' ,"=i ' T _'�3 MCst t, C�?E i��,.-r` GROUP # 9 (ELECTRICAL ROOM) GASKETING: (2) NGP 160V 36"x84" THRESHOLD: NGP 424 x 36" - 2'-2" x 5'-6" x 1 3/8" BUTTS: 1 112 PAIR STANLEY FBB191, 4-112"x4-112" x P-2* . 7 SEE DETAILS ON DRAWING A4.1. DOORS ARE SHOP PRIMED & FIELD PAINTED. (IN A 6-8 HIGH OPENING) US26D NRP DOOR SWEEP: (2) NGP 20ONA x 36" GASKETING: NGP 160V 36"x84" ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. -- - 41 - 42 EXIT DEVICE: VON DUPRIN 99NL-US26D EXIT DEVICE -.---.---- -------..----- RECEIVING OVERHEAD DOOR (EXIST.) NOTE: DOOR SWEEP: NGP 20ONA x 36" _..-.-------------- ----------.-.----- --- ------------------- (E) DOOR TO REMAIN. REKEY AS REQUIRED --------- ----- ------------ --------- CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MOUNTED INSIDE) -------- NO HARDWARE ON EXTERIOR SIDE --------- D -.- "�9" ---------------------------- COMPACTOR DOOR (EXIST.) ------------- * NOTE: PROVIDE SECURITY ASTRAGALS ON PEEPHOLE: DS / 2000 (AL.S SILVER) BY "DOOR SCOPE" @ 44 KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 12x34 -32D RECEIVING EXIT DOOR (EXIST.) BOTH LEAFS SEE DETAIL 131A4.1 #6. 5'-0" A.F.F. (RECEIVING DOOR ONLY) (E) DOOR TO REMAIN. REKEY AS REQUIRED 45 C 3'-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SPRINKLER RISER ROOM NOTE: PROVIDE SECURITY ASTRAGAL, SEE DETAIL 13/A4.1 #6. P-1* 3 3 ------ - --------------------------- --------- ------------ ------ 46 ---- C1 ------------- T-0" x T-0" x 1 3/4" ---------------------------- ELECTRICAL ROOM --- ----- .HOLLOW METAL FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D 3 NOTE: NO HARDWARE ON EXTERIOR SIDE C T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" EQUIPMENT ROOM HOLLOW METAL GROUP #10 ( TOILET ROOM DOORS) OORS, LEARNING & GROUP #11 T. MAN GER, GROUP #12 GROUP #13 (FITTING ROOM DOORS) EMPLOYEE BCK & MISC. OFFICE 1 -1/2 PAIR STANLEY FBB191 4112" x 4112" x 1 -112 PAIR STANLEY FBB191, 4112" x 4112" x 1 -1/2 PAIR STANLEY FBB191, 4112" x 4112" x - PATCH AND REPAIR (BONDO) WHEN EXISTING HARDWARE IS REPLACED AND UPGRADED ON EXISTING DOORS. NOTE: ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE PROVIDED BUTTS: US26D BUTTS: US26D BUTTS: US26D BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. ARROW LEVERSET ARROW LEVERSET CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MTD. ON INSIDE) LATCH SET: MLX87 SR SIERRA US26D IC CLASSROOM LATCH SET: MLX81 SR SIERRA US26D IC OFFICE - w/'ARROW' INTERCHANGEABLE CORE w/'ARROW' INTERCHANGEABLE CORE KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 12x34 -32D FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MTD. ON INSIDE) CLOSER: LCN MODEL 4040 XP ALUM. (MTD. ON INSIDE) PUSH PLATE: IVES 8200-31/2"x15" US26D KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D KICKPLATE: IVES 8400 -12x34 -32D PULL PLATE: IVES 8302-6, 3112"x15" US26D FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D FLOOR STOP: IVES FS438 US26D NOTE: SUBSTITUTE LATCH SET ABOVE FOR NOTE: SUBSTITUTE LATCH SET ABOVE FOR TRILOGY DL2700 SERIES (US26D) FOR EMPLOYEE BREAK ROOM DOOR. TRILOGY DL2700 SERIES (US26D) FOR DOOR #15 & #20. NOTES: 1. ALL HARDWARE LISTED TO BE SUPPLIED BY LISTED MANUFACTURER OR EQUAL. 2. ALL HARDWARE TO COMPLY WITH ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS 3. PROVIDE HOUSINGS AS REQ'D FOR EXIT DEVICE ALARM UNITS TO RECEIVE "ARROW" INTERCHANGEABLE CORES 4. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE RAIN DRIP BY HAGER, MODEL # 810SA RAIN DRIP, ON EXTERIOR SIDE INSTALLED PER MANUF. SPECIFICATIONS. 5. ALL INTERCHANGEABLE CORES SHALL BE 7 PIN CORES. 6. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE SECURITY ASTRAGAL STRIP INSTALLED PER MANUF. SPECIFICATIONS, SEE DETAIL 13/A4.1 #6. . VB -1 VINYL COVE BASE JOHNSONITE 4" VINYL WALL BASE 20 - CHARCOAL TR -1 TRANSITION STRIP SCHLUTER JOLLY A100AT FINISH SCHEDULE TRANSITION FROM PCT -1 TO LVT UU u) Q T R-2 ION STRI TRANSIT P SCHLUT ER - RE 0 U AEU N ED A NODIZ ALUMINUM KEY MATERIAL MFR. SPECIFICATIONS COLOR REMARKS _. ..--- - _1111 ...._..._..._-...._._._.... .. _...._ .._...__....._.__ .. -__.... _-.................._..._..._._......_...__.._... C ERAMIC TILE MOHAWK TR -3 1 NO TILE 2x12 SIDER SCHLUTER _ GRIS ANODIZED ALUMINUM __. ... -_ EIGHT ._H. ) 1.11.1... ._ . .... .....-.... __. .........1-1.11.. _.._ -.. .1111. _ _ __ ___.__-._._ _ CT 1 TR -4 S TRAN SITION TRIP SCHLUTER - RENO TK ODIZED ALU AN MINUM - NSITION FROM P T 1 T Z MAT TRA C 0 TOILE OORS T ROOM FL TR- 5 TRANSI TION STRIP GROUT (1/8" LINES) MAPEI BLACK ULTRACOLOR PLUS GROUT Ce SAHARA BEIGE #11 ................................................................................................................_........................................................... ............. ... ............ .... ............ PCT -1 ..................................................... PORCELAIN TILE _..-.--__ ..__...._-.--...______ .................................................. MOHAWK TILE .__ ____.___..... ............._._ 1111___ w....................................................................................................._..............._....................................................................................................................................._................................_........................................................................ Z ................................................................... ......1.1 11......................................... 12x12 TILE __ _.-_._-_-- _ 1111__---1111___ __. _....__. __---_..--.-___-__ ..CR..........L BEACH......................... YSTA ..----.----,---1111. 1111_._ _._ 1111.- E AREA & H - TORAGE RM &CART CORRAL MAIN AISLES IN SAL S C ECK OUT AREA, S ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT) ................................. GROUT (118" LINES) MAPEI TILE EXPANSION JT. ULTRACOLOR PLUS GROUT DILEX-BT GRAY #9 CERAMIC I PORCELAIN TILE EXPANSION JOINT OVER SUBSTRATE EXPANSION JOINT (WHERE REQ'D) 3 ------- LVT-1 LUXURY VINYL TILE TAJIMA LVT ....................................B.....................E TILE.......................................................... 3x12 SIDERNO ULLNOS TAJ-2231SE-S 18"X18" SQUARE TILE BULLNOSE TILE FOR TOILET ROOM WALLS &BEHIND DRINKING FOUNTAINS. STAGGER SEAMS OVER GREY STONE MAIN SALES FLOOR PADS GROUT (118" LINES) LVT-2 LUXURY VINYL TILE TAJIMA LVT 12"X12" TILE BELOW. TAJ-2734SE-S 3"X36" --..........-----.--_._-_... CG -1 GREY TIGER BORDER FOR ALL SALES FLOOR PADS ----------- 11 ..................................._...__.._..._......__...__..- 15OF FLUSH MOUNT HIGH IMPACT CORNER GUARD, 48" HIGH .................................. Z-1 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................-.............-.................................................................-..............................................-,............_........................................................................................................................................................................................................................._...................................................................................................................................................- ENTRY FLOORING MATS INC. PL -2 ENTERPRISE TILE -1911116" x 1911116" PIONITE ANTHRACITE ADHESIVE MATS INC. RELEASE - BOND VINYL BASE .1111_ 1111_.. -1111.--- - ---- ------------_.. -- ---- _.. ..___...-_-......._. _.._.....___...__------------------------- . 1111._.......111 FS -1 FLOOR SEALER H&C .._..._._......_..-_.._........._._..__. CO STRUCTION N H&C CONCRETE SEALER SOLID COLOR ..__._.._... ......... S TAINLESS STEEL CLEAR RECEIVING, STOCK, ELECTRIC, RISER EQUIPMENT & JANITOR ROOM cn SOLID SURFACE SPECIALTIES L D RFA E NTERTOP & 4 n SAMSUNG STARON SO I SU C COU ----------------------_-.---.--.---------------_----.-------_-_------------------_._....________._........__._._._.._._..._.--.....___...-..---.----..-.--------------------------.-------- B244 UARRY BLUFF CT Q Q ( ) ......... cn FRP 1 ... -1111. . � _ 1111. WHITE BEHIND MOP SINK IN JANITOR ROOM � _ . 1111. .......... ....... ........................... .111.1.. ....... ........... CONSTRUCTION ................. ........11 11. ..... . -....1 .. ....... ......... . ........................ O 0 UL & S OC ENTRANCE................ FITTING ROOM COMMON AREAS, TOILET ROOM CORRIDORS, SIDE WALLS F VESTIB E T K 12 - 13 KYD-1 THERMOPLASTIC SPECIALTIES ACROVYN, TEXTURE: SUEDE 265 - FOG SEE DETAILS ON 11/A4.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. O EXTERIOR / HALLWAY SIDE: P-1 INTERIOR! TOILET ROOM SIDE: P-4 ...............................I......................I...... ...........................................................................................................-........................................................................................................................................................................................................................._..............................................................................................................................................................................................................._. T-6" x T-0" x 1 3/4"--- JANITOR HOLLOW METAL P-1* ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. LL_ CC 9 15 --- C -- T-6" x T-0" x 1 314" -- ------ --- CORRIDOR - --- - HOLLOW METAL -- P-1 * 5B VB -1 VINYL COVE BASE JOHNSONITE 4" VINYL WALL BASE 20 - CHARCOAL TR -1 TRANSITION STRIP SCHLUTER JOLLY A100AT ANODIZED ALUMINUM TRANSITION FROM PCT -1 TO LVT UU u) Q T R-2 ION STRI TRANSIT P SCHLUT ER - RE 0 U AEU N ED A NODIZ ALUMINUM ANSITION FROM - LVT-1 RESTROOMS TR CT 1 TO ( ) Z ..1-11 ..._ 111....1. __. ..... ...... _...._. ._...._.....__ .. _ -_ .--...._ _. ..--- - _1111 ...._..._..._-...._._._.... .. _...._ .._...__....._.__ .. -__.... _-.................._..._..._._......_...__.._... .111 ..- ..1-.1.._._........_........._........ - .....__._._.......... TRANSITION FROM PCT -1/ CT -1 TO CONCRETE (PLEASE VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS FOR REQUIRED TRANSITION - 0- TR -3 TRANSITION STRIP SCHLUTER _ RENO -RAMP AERP 11 _. ._.._ ANODIZED ALUMINUM __. ... -_ EIGHT ._H. ) 1.11.1... ._ . .... .....-.... __. .........1-1.11.. _.._ -.. .1111. _ _ __ ___.__-._._ � TR -4 S TRAN SITION TRIP SCHLUTER - RENO TK ODIZED ALU AN MINUM - NSITION FROM P T 1 T Z MAT TRA C 0 GROUP TR- 5 TRANSI TION STRIP JO HNSONI TE - X -B SSR X BLACK ITI N FR E PLEA E VE I E I TI NDITIONS F R RE UIRED TRANSITION HEIGHT TRANS 0 OM LVT TO CONCRET S R FY X S NG CO 0 Q ) ( Ce ....111.1. .....1 1 11. ....... .1111 ... ............. ... ............ .... .1111..... ._...._........ ............................ ............. .. _ 11 ......... .................... ............... .... N FR - T ET LEASE VERIFY EXI TIN NDITI NS FOR RE UIRED TRANSITION ... .......... _. 1111. TRANSITIO OM Z MAT 0 CONCR E (P S G CO 0 Q w....................................................................................................._..............._....................................................................................................................................._................................_........................................................................ Z TR -6 TRANSITION STRIP GRADUS AR268 ANODIZED ALUMINUM HEIGHT) ................................. - TEJ TILE EXPANSION JT. SCHLUTER DILEX-BT ANODIZED ALUMINUM CERAMIC I PORCELAIN TILE EXPANSION JOINT OVER SUBSTRATE EXPANSION JOINT (WHERE REQ'D) VB -1 VINYL COVE BASE JOHNSONITE 4" VINYL WALL BASE 20 - CHARCOAL C� - � w............................................................................................................... U VB -2 VINYL COVE BASE JOHNSONITE 4" VINYL WALL BASE 40 - BLACK CUSTOMER SERVICE WALL AND CASHWRAP COUNTERS UU u) Q _.1.11.1-.-____ ............ ST -1 . ...__......__..__ 1111_ ......__._ - - - --- 1111-.__ ALUMINUM WALL BASE .................__...-_..---.._.....-1111..------,--.._......._.._.. _.. SCHLUTER __.._.-...____.._____---__---------------------_._........-__._._._._..__...._.__...-_.-....._._._._..------..._._.._._ DILEX-AHK 1S 100 AE ANODIZED ALUMINUM WALL BASE _._._........_..._..._._.__._._.._.._.__._..._._-..._._...__._ SATIN ANODIZED ALUM INUM _ .__-_____-______.----------.._..----------------------..._._..._._..____________----____...._..._______-_.._....--________-_--._..-.._---------_.......__--_...._._...._._.-_......_..__.._......._.......__..... TOILET ROOMS Z ___._____._._........___.._.__.__________._._.___._._.........___ P-2 PAINT _---.--.-.---..-.-.---_.----__......._.__.._ __.-___._ SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQ. _ SW COLOR COLLECTIONS (EGGSHELL FINISH) SW 7015 REPOSE GRAY BREAK ROOM, OFFICES, CORRIDORS, FITTING ROOMS, STOCK, RECEIVING - 0- ST -2 ALUMINUM WALL SCHLUTER DILEX-AHKA 100 AE ANODIZED ALUMINUM WALL BASE SATIN ANODIZED BEHIND DRINKING FOUNTAINS � P-3 BASE .. __._...... --... . __ _ _---..... -__..__ __1__1.11 .....--._...__....... 1 .11_ ......_-- ALUMINUM -_1 ..........-_.-- -.-- -- ..11 ..11...._. 1.111--1-111 --- _-1111.. ------_ ._.....----.._...._..... _......_._._._.__. 1111... ._.__....._...._ _. ._.... .11.11 - --.._....._....-.. GROUP 1111.. ST -3 ......_..... ALUMINUM CORNER PIECE -1111.. SCHLUTER . ____._..._...._... RONDEC ANODIZED ALUMINUM CORNER PIECE SATIN ANODIZED ALUMINUM AT WING WALL CORNERS IN TOILET ROOMS Ce P-4 CERAMIC TILE MOHAWK 12x12 SIDERNO TILE GRIS INTERIOR SIDE OF TOILET ROOM DOORS & FRAMES w....................................................................................................._..............._....................................................................................................................................._................................_........................................................................ Z CT-1 .................................................................................................................. ...........................................................................................................................................................I......... ..............................._................................... ......... TOILET ROOM WALL & BEHIND DRINKING FOUNTAINS - C GROUT (118" LINES) MAPEI ULTRACOLOR PLUS GROUT SAHARA BEIGE #11 .................................................................................................................. ....................................................................................................................................._............................................................................. 3 ------- ...11...11 ....... ...................... .......................... C ERAMIC TILE .... ................. MOHAWK ....................................B.....................E TILE.......................................................... 3x12 SIDERNO ULLNOS ...GRIS BULLNOSE TILE FOR TOILET ROOM WALLS &BEHIND DRINKING FOUNTAINS. STAGGER SEAMS OVER ----- P-1* C GROUT (118" LINES) MAPEI ULTRACOLOR PLUS GROUT SAHARA BEIGE #11 12"X12" TILE BELOW. U) --..........-----.--_._-_... CG -1 _....... I VINYL .--------._.._- _.__._._...---_...---------- GRADUS ----------- 11 ..................................._...__.._..._......__...__..- 15OF FLUSH MOUNT HIGH IMPACT CORNER GUARD, 48" HIGH ---.---_..._...........-----...--.--.-.--..-.----............................------...-------- 151 - BIRCH .._.._.__.._._......__........_...._._._...---.._._.__.._._._._.........-.....___..---.-_.....__...._ ----------------- _.--......._..... P F RNER GUARDS ON ALL COLUMN ENCLOSURES OFFICE &SALES AREA CORNERS. INSTALL TIGHT TO TO 0 Q11_.1.1. PL -2 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE SG214 BANKERS GRAY SG214 BANKERS GRAY VINYL BASE .1111_ 1111_.. -1111.--- - ---- ------------_.. -- ---- _.. ..___...-_-......._. _.._.....___...__------------------------- . 1111._.......111 � --..- -... _ - CG 2 _.____............ 1111. _._ LE TEFL STAIN SSS .._..._._......_..-_.._........._._..__. CO STRUCTION N .................__.. 1111__ .--------- -----1111._.__...___..__..-------_......_ .__ T 4 HI H ACROVYN CO SERIES 90 DEGREE SURFACE MOUN 8 G ..__._.._... ......... S TAINLESS STEEL GU 00 & CE G I STALL TIGHT TO TOP OF VINYL BASE. CORNER ARDS ON ALL CORNERS IN STOCK R M RE IVIN . N 9'-0" A.F.F. ------------------------.........-- L SOLID SURFACE SPECIALTIES L D RFA E NTERTOP & 4 n SAMSUNG STARON SO I SU C COU ----------------------_-.---.--.---------------_----.-------_-_------------------_._....________._........__._._._.._._..._.--.....___...-..---.----..-.--------------------------.-------- B244 UARRY BLUFF CT Q Q ( ) TOILET ROOM LAVATORY cn FRP 1 G SS N FIBER LA PA EL 1111-._.......___----1111._ 1111..-------. 4' X 8' SHEETS WHITE BEHIND MOP SINK IN JANITOR ROOM � ......._ .......... ....... ........................... .111.1.. ....... ........... CONSTRUCTION ................. ........11 11. ..... . -....1 .. ....... ......... . ........................ .............. ........1..1..11 0 UL & S OC ENTRANCE................ FITTING ROOM COMMON AREAS, TOILET ROOM CORRIDORS, SIDE WALLS F VESTIB E T K 12 - 13 KYD-1 THERMOPLASTIC SPECIALTIES ACROVYN, TEXTURE: SUEDE 265 - FOG SEE DETAILS ON 11/A4.1 FOR MORE INFORMATION. C� - � w............................................................................................................... U ACT -1 SCG -1 DW -1 CEILING TILE CEILING G RID DRYWALL ARMSTRONG ARMSTRONG .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. TBD CORTEGA #769 (NON DIRECTIONAL FISSURED 2'x4' x 518" ACOUSTIC TILE ) n STANDARD 15116 GRID SEE PLANS / SPECS WHITE WHI TE SEE ROOM SCHEDULE OVIDE SEISMIC RESTRAINTS IN SEISMIC ZONES OR AS RE UIRED BY CODE PR Q 5. ALL DOORS LEADING FROM SALES FLOOR TO STOCK ROOM ARE TO HAVE 18" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES. P 1 PAINT BENJAMIN MOORE OR EQ. OFF WHITE COLOR COLLECTION OC -26 SILVER SATIN SALES AREA - EGGSHELL FINISH ON WALLS AND SEMI -GLOSS FINISH ON DOORS & FRAMES Z ___._____._._........___.._.__.__________._._.___._._.........___ P-2 PAINT _---.--.-.---..-.-.---_.----__......._.__.._ __.-___._ SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQ. _ SW COLOR COLLECTIONS (EGGSHELL FINISH) SW 7015 REPOSE GRAY BREAK ROOM, OFFICES, CORRIDORS, FITTING ROOMS, STOCK, RECEIVING - 0- 1111.-11-11 ...... .......__ __- . ___1111 1.11_ -...._...._ ..---._._ ------------------ _ 1111__. _............_ ......._ ._ ._ _ 1111_..- - - - - .. _.__.._..___.-.. ------ -- - -- - - - - - -- 1111.. -- --1111. _.__._..... CHECK-OUT / CUSTOMER SERVICE AREA (TO 14'-0" A.F.F.), BREAK ROOM (1 WALL) E -LEARNING (1 WALL), WALL � P-3 PAINT PPG OR EQ. VOICE OF COLOR (EGGSHELL FINISH) 335-7 MADEIRA RED _ 1111__ _.___._.__.______.___ C WA AREA. SEE ENLARGED PLANS FOR LOCATIONS. _BEHIND CART CORRAL_(TO.14-0 _A.F.F.),_BA __K WALL IN LAYA__ Y GROUP DETAIL OPEN --- O - O A BESAM SL -50010'-0" X 10'-0" AUTOMATIC ENTRY DOORS Ce P-4 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQ. SW COLOR COLLECTIONS (GLOSS FINISH) SW 7016 MINDFUL GRAY INTERIOR SIDE OF TOILET ROOM DOORS & FRAMES w....................................................................................................._..............._....................................................................................................................................._................................_........................................................................ Z P-5 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQ. SW COLOR COLLECTIONS (MATTE FINISH) SW 7005 PURE WHITE ... _....................................................................................................................................................................................-............................................... OPEN DECK, STRUCTURE, SPRINKLER LINES, DUCTWORK & CONDUIT IN EXPOSED CEILING AREAS. - C T-0" x 7'-0" x 1 314" STORAGE .....................................-.............................-................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ P-1 * GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS IN VESTIBULE, TOILET ROOMS, CASH OFFICE, & SOFFITS. 3 ------- P-6 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS OR EQ. SW COLOR COLLECTIONS (EGGSHELL FINISH) SW 7016 MINDFUL GRAY TOILET ROOM WALLS ABOVE CERAMIC TILE ----- P-1* PL 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE SW836 WINTER WHIT E SW836 WINTER WHITE HELVIN BRA KET KIT HEN ABINETS OFFICE COUNTERS S G C S& C C , SALES AREA EXIT DOOR (EXIST.) .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................._.................................................................................................................... P-1* 5B 4&6 INSTALL CT -1 & CT -2 BULLNOSE TILE ON WALLS BEHIND DRINKING „ FOUNTAINS PER A3.0. INSTALL KYD-1 TO 48 A.F.F. ON ALL OTHER WALLS IN TALL CT -2 PITCH /SLOPE FLOOR TOWARD FLOOR DRAINS. S BULLNOSE TILE ABOVE CT -1- SEE A3.0 FOR LOCATION. O8 Q J PL -2 PLASTIC LAMINATE PIONITE SG214 BANKERS GRAY SG214 BANKERS GRAY KITCHEN COUNTERTOP LOCK JAMB TO HAVE MORTISE FOR ELECTRICAL SOLENOID SWITCH (DOOR 1_1.11.._------ PL -3 ---__------_---_._._._._._._._._.......___ PLASTIC LAMINATE -________---_-...__-.______---...._..._....___-______.-__-_....--_-----_-__._-...._.._-____--_---------------.--.-------._._-._.__.__._._..._-----._._..__...__-________.__-..._ FORMICA 902-58 PLATINUM ......................._.. ___-_ 902-58 PLATINUM _-_-___-__.____1._-111-----______-.............-__._.-.__.--.--.__...__._.___-__.___---------.._.-___-.__....-_-----_---_----_-------_--...--.-----._.-.--.1.1.1.1.........--------.. 1.111.-...-.-. SINK & LAVATORY APRONS 9'-0" A.F.F. ------------------------.........-- L SOLID SURFACE .-------------------_..----------------...------------.-.-.----.-.-.--.-----_---_---------------------------------- SAMSUNG STARON L D RFA E NTERTOP & 4 n SAMSUNG STARON SO I SU C COU ----------------------_-.---.--.---------------_----.-------_-_------------------_._....________._........__._._._.._._..._.--.....___...-..---.----..-.--------------------------.-------- B244 UARRY BLUFF CT Q Q ( ) TOILET ROOM LAVATORY cn 1111.__ ._ .---..__......_.__ ...._._._. 1111-._.......___----1111._ 1111..-------. C S 1 INTEGRAL SINK BASINS BA __PLASH W 1111 ...- - ----- ------------------1111.---------------- ----- ---- - - -- __-1111. _.. A3181 PEARL SINK 1111_ __...... -- - .................._.------_...._...__...------....__...._..___._...._---- ._----___._.._-__-_---_-------_.._....._..___-_._-._._---------------------------------1111 _---__.....__. � FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 * - ------- E EX FLAT : SW A-1 0 EXT. LATEX FLAT A-6 SERIES EXT RIOR LAT 0 E ER 0 NCE STRUCTURE SURFACE - W ED KHAKI XT I R ENTRA PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS S 6149 RELAX I- XP 1 ( ) w � I � � I � I LQ LEVEL 5 DRYWALL FINISH z LEVEL 5 REQUIRES ALL THE OPERATIONS IN LEVEL 4. ADDITIONALLY, A THIN SKIM COAT OF JOINT COMPOUND, OR MATERIAL MANUFACTURED ESPECIALLY FOR THIS PURPOSE, IS APPLIED TO THE ENTIRE SURFACE. THE SURFACE IS SMOOTH AND FREE FROM TOOL MARKS AND RIDGES. THE PREPARED SURFACE SHALL BE COATED WITH A PRIMER PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF FINAL FINISHES. THE LEVEL 5 FINISH IS REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE THE HIGHEST DEGREE OF QUALITY BY PROVIDING A UNIFORM SURFACE AND MINIMIZING THE POSSIBILITY OF JOINT PHOTOGRAPHING AND/OR FASTENERS "BURNING THROUGH" THE FINAL DECORATION. IMPORTANT NOTE: ALL RECEPTACLES, SWITCH & OUTLET COVERS, SWITCHES, OCCUPANCY SENSORS, PLUGMOLD POWER STRIPS & RELATED DEVICES TO BE' WHITE" THROUGHOUT TENANT SPACE EXCEPT FOR STOCK / RECEIVING AREA. STOCK / RECEIVING AREA TO BE GALVANIZED. DOOR SCHEDULE GENERAL DOOR NOTES: 1. EGRESS DOORS WITH LOCKS SHALL ALSO INCLUDE A READILY VISIBLE SIGN STATING "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED." SIGN SHALL BE IN ONE INCH LETTERS ON CONTRASTING BACKGROUND. 2. ALL EXTERIOR DOORS TO HAVE HINGES WITH NON -REMOVABLE PINS. 3. EXIT DOORS THAT ARE NOT ACCESSIBLE TO PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES TO BE PROVIDED WITH A SIGN STATING'NOT ACCESSIBLE TO PERSONS WITH DISABILITIES'. 4. MAXIMUM EFFORT TO OPERATE DOORS SHALL NOT EXCEED 5 POUNDS FOR BOTH INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR DOORS. 5. ALL DOORS LEADING FROM SALES FLOOR TO STOCK ROOM ARE TO HAVE 18" HIGH STAINLESS STEEL KICKPLATE BOTH SIDES. 6. ALL EXIT DOORS, OTHER THAN MAIN ENTRANCE DOORS, SHALL BE OPERABLE FROM THE INSIDE WITHOUT THE USE OF A KEY OR ANY SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE OR EFFORT. 7. BOTTOM 10" OF ALL DOORS, EXCEPT AUTOMATIC & SLIDING, SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH, UNINTERRUPTED SURFACE. 8. SEE HEAD & JAMB DETAILS ON 13/A4.1. . DOOR DOOR SALES P-1 FRAME FS -2, FS -3 HARDWARE HEAD/JAMB OPEN w 101 SIZE DESCRIPTION /LOCATION VB -1 FINISH DW -1 - P 5 REMARKS NO. TYPE ------- - --- CHECK OUT --P-1 / P-3 -- SEE REMARK S MATERIAL - -- - PCT 1 GROUP DETAIL OPEN --- O - O A BESAM SL -50010'-0" X 10'-0" AUTOMATIC ENTRY DOORS ALUMINUM CLEAR ANODIZED 1 1 BESAM SL -500 AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS W/ OPERATOR & MOTION SENSOR 104 STORAGE W1 TRANSOM WINDOW VB -1 PCT -1 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 / SCG -1 13'-0" A.F.F. CONTROL DEVICE. O5 C T-0" x 7'-0" x 1 314" STORAGE HOLLOW METAL P-1 * 3 3 ------- ------. _ _--- ---- -- ----- -- O6 ----- C --------- T-0" x T-0" x 1314" ----------------- --- SALES AREA EXIT DOOR - -- HOLLOW METAL ----- P-1* ----... -- 5B 4&6 _ ---- _-. 7 O C T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SALES AREA EXIT DOOR (EXIST.) HOLLOW METAL P-1* 5B 4&6 INSTALL CT -1 & CT -2 BULLNOSE TILE ON WALLS BEHIND DRINKING „ FOUNTAINS PER A3.0. INSTALL KYD-1 TO 48 A.F.F. ON ALL OTHER WALLS IN TALL CT -2 PITCH /SLOPE FLOOR TOWARD FLOOR DRAINS. S BULLNOSE TILE ABOVE CT -1- SEE A3.0 FOR LOCATION. O8 C T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" COUNT ROOM HOLLOW METAL P-1* 4 3 LOCK JAMB TO HAVE MORTISE FOR ELECTRICAL SOLENOID SWITCH (DOOR MANAGER P-2 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 1 SCG -1 9'-0" A.F.F. RELEASE, MORTISE TYPE EDWARDS #181 -AF, 12V). PROVIDE DOOR VIEWER. ------ - ------------ O9 C T-0' x 7 -0 x 1 314 - n n n CASH OFFICE HOLLOW METAL P-1 3 3 114 COUNT P-2 n n n FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 * - ------- 12 - 13 C1 - T-0" x T-0" x 1 3/4" _- TOILET ROOM DOORS 1111-_- -- HOLLOW METAL --------- P-1* I P-4* 10 3 EXTERIOR / HALLWAY SIDE: P-1 INTERIOR! TOILET ROOM SIDE: P-4 14 C1 T-6" x T-0" x 1 3/4"--- JANITOR HOLLOW METAL P-1* 3 3 - ----- --- --------- 15 --- C -- T-6" x T-0" x 1 314" -- ------ --- CORRIDOR - --- - HOLLOW METAL -- P-1 * 5B _ --- 3 NO ALRAM NEEDED ON CRASH BAR THIS DOOR ONLY 16 C 3'-0" x T-0" x 1 314" DEPARTMENT MANAGER OFFICE/ E-LEARNINGILOSS PREY. HOLLOW METAL P-1 * 12 3 -:::::::. @ 16" O.C. REQUIRED AT AREAS W/ PLYWD OD SHEATHING. - - n 3 518 INTERIOR STUD WALL: n 6 INTERIOR WALL STUD O 3 n O 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL VER 1 A. M 518" GYP. BD. B TH SIDES 0 8 G ETAL 0 n n T D 1 . T 1- AB VE FINISHED SUS@ 6 OC 0 0 0 12 0 18 C T-6" x T-0" x 1 314" EMPLOYEE BREAK ROOM HOLLOW METAL P-1* 11 3 PROVIDE TRILOGY DL2700 SERIES (US26D) 19 C T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" MANAGER OFFICE HOLLOW METAL P-1 * 12 3 1 22 123 STOCK RECEIVING - P 2 PLYWD - P 2 PLYWD n , " n F -1 S - FS 1 OPEN OPEN P-5 P-5 OPEN OPEN PLANE T i EXISTING GWB -FLOAT PATCH _--_- 124 21 _ B (2) T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SALES I STOCK STEEL SEE SPECS 2 2 - 22 E (2) T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SALES AREA EXIT DOOR HOLLOW METAL P-1* 5 4& 6 12 6 SPRINKLER RISER ROOM P-2 PLYWD 11 „ FS -1 OPEN P 5 OPEN 24 & 39 _ T-0" x 5'-6" x 1 318" ACCESSIBLE FITTING ROOMS WOOD P-2* 13 7 SEE DETAILS ON DRAWING A4.1. DOORS ARE SHOP PRIMED & FIELD PAINTED. (IN A 6'-8" HIGH OPENING) ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. 25 - 34 - 2'-2" x 5'-6" x 1 3/8" FITTING ROOMS WOOD P-2* 13 7 SEE DETAILS ON DRAWING A4.1. DOORS ARE SHOP PRIMED & FIELD PAINTED. (IN A 6-8 HIGH OPENING) ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE PROVIDED BY DOOR MANUFACTURER. -- - 41 - 42 -------- F n n n --------------------------------- °-�0- -.---.---- -------..----- RECEIVING OVERHEAD DOOR (EXIST.) --------_..__-------------- ------------- _..-.-------------- ----------.-.----- --- ------------------- (E) DOOR TO REMAIN. REKEY AS REQUIRED --------- ----- ------------ --------- -------- O-- 43 --------- D -.- "�9" ---------------------------- COMPACTOR DOOR (EXIST.) ------------- * (E) DOOR TO REMAIN. REKEY AS REQUIRED 44 C �T-O" x T -O" 1 3/4" RECEIVING EXIT DOOR (EXIST.) (E) DOOR TO REMAIN. REKEY AS REQUIRED 45 C 3'-0" x T-0" x 1 314" SPRINKLER RISER ROOM HOLLOW METAL P-1* 3 3 ------ - --------------------------- --------- ------------ ------ 46 ---- C1 ------------- T-0" x T-0" x 1 3/4" ---------------------------- ELECTRICAL ROOM --- ----- .HOLLOW METAL - ---- P-1* ---- 9 3 47 C T-0" x T-0" x 1 314" EQUIPMENT ROOM HOLLOW METAL P-1* 12 3 PROVIDE TRILOGY DL2700 SERIES (US26D) „ , n n * SEMI -GLOSS FINISH REQUIRED ON ALL DOORS & FRAMES - PATCH AND REPAIR (BONDO) WHEN EXISTING HARDWARE IS REPLACED AND UPGRADED ON EXISTING DOORS. ROOM SCHEDULE GENERAL ROOM NOTES: 1. NAMEPLATES TO BE SIZED & LOCATED PER LOCAL CODES & ADA REQUIREMENTS NO. SPACE WALL BASE FLOOR CEILING REMARKS MATERIAL FINISH HEIGHT 100 SALES P-1 VB -1 FS -2, FS -3 OPEN P-5 OPEN w 101 VESTIBULE - - P 1, KYD 1 VB -1 PCT -1 DW -1 - P 5 n - A.F.F. 10 0 INSTALL KYD-1 ON GYPSUM BOARD WALLS U PTO 48" A.F.F. ___--------------- --1111 102 ------- - --- CHECK OUT --P-1 / P-3 -- SEE REMARK S - VB 1 - -- - PCT 1 -_. -1111 OPEN --------------- P-5 - OPEN --- - -n P 3 TO EXTEND FROM FLOOR T014 0 A.F.F. &FROM VESTIBULE (#101) TO STO G 00 #104 CONFIRM E TENT WI BURLIN GTON PM . P-1 TO RA E R M X EXTEND FROM 14(-0" A.F.F. TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK. 103 CUSTOMER SERVICE - --- -- P-1 / P-3 SEE REMARKS VB -1 PCT -1 OPEN - P-5 OPEN 104 STORAGE P-2 VB -1 PCT -1 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 / SCG -1 13'-0" A.F.F. CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM FURRING THICKNESS 105 .---------....- 106 CART CORRAL ---..._._._.-....................--------_............._.._.-..----__._____.__--�--....________-....____---.............---..._._....-_...__.._..._.._-._..._-__._.__._.�._.__.....-�------1111..-. WOMENS FITTING ROOM P-1 / P-3 EE REMA (S RKS P-2, KYD-1 VB 1 VB -1 FS -2 FS -3 OPEN ACT -1 / SCG -1 P 5 _1111__-_..__.._____..._.....___ ACT -1 I SCG -1 OPEN 1111_---_-._._._...._..----_..._._...._._......._�__._......______-------- 10'-0" A.F.F. G.C. TO FURNISH AND INSTALL CART CORRAL. PAINT WALL BEHIND CART CORRAL P-3 GC TO CONFIRM EXTENTS WITH BURLINGTON PM. _._._.._._..._.._._.__...-_.........-----------------_.. l 107 MENS FITTING ROOM P-2, KYD-1 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 / SCG -1 10'-0" A.F.F. _ ---- _-. 109A & B 11 0 CORRIDOR -__-___ ______ , T ROOM MEN S TOILE ___ __ P-2, CT -1, CT -2, a KYD-1, PLYWD - - - CT 1 I CT -2 ! P 61ST 3 VB -1 ______- -- ST -1 _ FS -3 - CT 1 _ _ _ _ ACT -1 /SCG -1 DW -1 - - ACT -1 1 SCG -1 P-5 __ - - 10'-0" A.F.F. - 9' 0" A.F.F. INSTALL CT -1 & CT -2 BULLNOSE TILE ON WALLS BEHIND DRINKING „ FOUNTAINS PER A3.0. INSTALL KYD-1 TO 48 A.F.F. ON ALL OTHER WALLS IN TALL CT -2 PITCH /SLOPE FLOOR TOWARD FLOOR DRAINS. S BULLNOSE TILE ABOVE CT -1- SEE A3.0 FOR LOCATION. 111 --� WOMEN'S TOILET ROOM ______ CT -1 / CT -2 I P-6 I ST -3 -- __ ST -1 - CT -1 DW -1 P-5 9'-0" A.F.F. 112 MANAGER P-2 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 1 SCG -1 9'-0" A.F.F. 113 ASST. ULOSS RI E-LEARNINGILOSS PREV. P-2 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 I SCG -1 ACT -1 I SCG -1 9'-0" A.F.F. UNDERSIDE OF DECK THE OTHER SIDE TO 1'4' 114 COUNT P-2 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 I SCG -1 9'-0" A.F.F. 115 CASH P-2 VB -1 FS -3 DW -1 P-5 9'-0" A.F.F. INSULATION. USE LATERAL BRACING PER 116 EMPLOYEE BREAK ROOM P-2 I P-3 VB -1 FS -3 ACT -1 / SCG -1 ACT -1 I SCG -1 9'-0" A.F.F. ACCENT WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3, SEE A2.0 FOR WALL SELECTION UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL `.. ROOF @ 4'-0" O.C. ROOF E I - FINISHED CEILING MAY OCCUR 0 ACOUSTIC BATT INSULAT ION - ,�� - 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES FULL �." � :_, �--.-1111.: T UNDERSIDE OF DECK HEIGHT 0 1 "�' FINISHED CLG. MAY OCCUR 6" ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION `� 'f ;- 6" 18 GA. METAL STUD @ 16" O.C. 4 ..... 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES TO „ 518 PLYWOOD TO 4 0 A.F.F. AT w , 1 AB VE FINISHED CEILING w 0 0 � YAWAY A D RECEIVING LA N . _.. STOCK AREA WALLS. NO BASE : -:::::::. @ 16" O.C. REQUIRED AT AREAS W/ PLYWD OD SHEATHING. - - n 3 518 INTERIOR STUD WALL: n 6 INTERIOR WALL STUD O 3 n O 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL VER 1 A. M 518" GYP. BD. B TH SIDES 0 8 G ETAL 0 n n T D 1 . T 1- AB VE FINISHED SUS@ 6 OC 0 0 0 12 0 S ELECTRICAL EXI T. P-2 D PLYW - VB 1 F -1 S OPEN P-5 E OP N 5/8' GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL 121 EQUIPMENT - P 2, PLYWD - VB 1 FS -1 ACT-1/SCG-1 ACT -1 I SCG -1 n - 10 0 A.F.F. NFIRM W B RLIN T N PR E T MANA ER PLACEMENT OF CO I U G 0 OJ C G EQUIPMENT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF PLYWOOD 1 22 123 STOCK RECEIVING - P 2 PLYWD - P 2 PLYWD - - F -1 S - FS 1 OPEN OPEN P-5 P-5 OPEN OPEN PLANE T i EXISTING GWB -FLOAT PATCH _--_- 124 ------_--- JANITOR P-2, PLYWD ---- - ---...--------- FS -1 ACT -11 / SCG -1 -------- ACT_11 SCG -1 - 10'-6" A.F.F. - ----------- --------------T INSTALL FRP-1 T-0" EACH SIDE OF MOP SINK UP TO 48" A.F.F. -- - - 12 6 SPRINKLER RISER ROOM P-2 PLYWD VB -1 FS -1 OPEN P 5 OPEN I til II i II i II i NA ALUMINUM ENTRY DOOR SEE SCHED. SEE SCHED. SPRING UMP®R x TB "ELIASON" STOCKROOM DOOR DOOR TYPES SEE SCHED, SEE SCHED. FA / / / / .. z-�E S ;I... R EX TI DOO 0 0 o T w w / I , 2 2 U U w w \ I;A:, , ,.. cn cn z_ \ TEET PAIf TED = \ SEE MECH. SHEETS FOR LOUVER SIZE LU © HOLLOW METAL C1 HOLLOW METAL W/LOUVER i (EXISTING) METAL COMPACTOR DOOR PARTITION TYPES GENERAL PARTITION TYPE NOTES: / GYP. BD. DOES NOT GO FULL HEIGHT OF WALL. 2. SEE 3/A4.1 FOR GYPSUM BOARD EXPANSION JOINT & SLIP TRACK DETAILS. PROVIDE / 3. INSTALL MOISTURE -RESISTANT GYP. BD. AT ALL POTENTIALLY WET LOCATIONS & AT AREAS WHERE TILE IS INSTALLED ON GYP. BD., INCLUDING TOILET ROOMS, JANITOR CLOSET, NURSES ROOM, & EMPLOYEE LOUNGE, ETC. LU \ DETAIL j REQ'TS \ / c' -o UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL ROO F UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL U ROOF DECK w U) U)�rn�(� UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL w ROOF @ 4'-0" O.C. - ❑ FINISHED CLG. MAY OCCUR / BARS \ cwn / \ 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES FULL HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK „� TYPE 5.1 - REPLACE EXIST 3 518 18 GA. METAL STUDS GWB/PLYWD AS REQ. IN FRONT _ a @ 16" O.C. OFFICE AREAS BREAKROOM ETC. \ / / / / .. z-�E S ;I... R EX TI DOO 0 0 o T w w / I , 2 2 U U w w \ I;A:, , ,.. cn cn z_ \ TEET PAIf TED = \ SEE MECH. SHEETS FOR LOUVER SIZE LU © HOLLOW METAL C1 HOLLOW METAL W/LOUVER i (EXISTING) METAL COMPACTOR DOOR PARTITION TYPES GENERAL PARTITION TYPE NOTES: 1. PROVIDE HORIZONTAL SPACER BAR BRIDGING @ 4'-0" O.C. VERTICALLY IN ALL WALLS WHEN GYP. BD. DOES NOT GO FULL HEIGHT OF WALL. 2. SEE 3/A4.1 FOR GYPSUM BOARD EXPANSION JOINT & SLIP TRACK DETAILS. PROVIDE VERTICAL EXPANSION JOINTS AT ALL VERTICAL MASONRY WALL EXPANSION JOINTS. 3. INSTALL MOISTURE -RESISTANT GYP. BD. AT ALL POTENTIALLY WET LOCATIONS & AT AREAS WHERE TILE IS INSTALLED ON GYP. BD., INCLUDING TOILET ROOMS, JANITOR CLOSET, NURSES ROOM, & EMPLOYEE LOUNGE, ETC. 518"-•3 51811 /8" SEE 31A4.1 FOR SLIP TRACK \ DETAIL j REQ'TS \ = c' -o UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL ROO F UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL DECK ROOF DECK w FASTEN KICKERS TO U)�rn�(� UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL I FINISHED CEILING MAY OCCUR ROOF @ 4'-0" O.C. - ❑ FINISHED CLG. MAY OCCUR / BARS U, EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL/FURRIN / TNO FURRING AT SIM. 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES FULL HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK „� TYPE 5.1 - REPLACE EXIST 3 518 18 GA. METAL STUDS GWB/PLYWD AS REQ. IN FRONT _ a @ 16" O.C. OFFICE AREAS BREAKROOM ETC. � W 5/8" PLYWOOD TO 4'-0" A.F.F. AT �� EXISTING PLYWOOD TO REMAIN ' RECEIVING, LAYAWAY, AND AT RECEIVING, LAYAWAY, AND STOCK AREA WALLS. NO BASE STOCK AREA WALLS. NO BASE REQUIRED AT AREAS W! REQUIRED AT AREAS WI PLYWOOD SHEATHING. PLYWOOD SHEATHING. O3-518" INTERIOR STUD WALL: 5 EXISTING EXTERIOR WALL WI FURRING: CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM FURRING THICKNESS 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL W W STUDS @ 16" O.C. FULL HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE rn OF DECK. O EXTERIOR WALL WI PARTIAL GWB OR PLYWOOD DEMOLITION: = Q CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM FURRING THICKNESS 5/8"- 3�5/8�"� 5/8" SEE 3/A4.1 FOR SLIP TRACK 7 �il DETAIL UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL ' ROOF DECK ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION 518" 3 518" 5/8" 1 X 4 WOOD MOLDING TRIM ON OUTSIDE FACE OF F.R. USE LATERAL BRACING IN MTL. STALL WALL �'�= ..,: STUD. SEE DETAIL 101A4.1. o gam.- = - FINISHED CLG. MAY OCCUR PHILLIPS GRIPSTIK L -TEAR `..., ❑ STRIP. _=:�:�, 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES. (1) 0 '=..:. SIDE FULL HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE yN f 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES � �.. OF DECK. (1) SIDE TO V-0" ABOVE K TO 8'-0" A.F.F. ' �I FINISHED CEILING. 4 `�::::a; ~ w 3 5/8" 18 GA. METAL STUDS w �= ` 3 5/8" 18 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" a @ 16" O.C. "' :_�; O.C. (6" STUDS MAY OCCUR). q ❑ I 5/8" PLYWOOD TO 4'-0" A.F.F. AT I; O° "TI RECEIVING, STOCK & LAYAWAY WALLS. NO BASE REQUIRED AT AREAS W/ PLYWOOD SHEATHING. m INTERIOR STUD WALL: O 3-5/8" FITTING ROOM STALL WALL: O3-518" 5/8" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL 5/8" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O,C. ONE SIDE FULL HEIGHT TO STUDS @ 16" O.C. TO 8'-0" A.F.F. INSTALL 20 GA. UNDERSIDE OF DECK THE OTHER SIDE TO 1'4' METAL STRAPPING BEHIND GYP. BD. PER 5/A3.0. ABOVE FINISHED CEILING W/ ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. USE LATERAL BRACING PER DETAIL 10/A4.1 6" INTERIOR STUD WALL: 5/8" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL STUDS @ 16" O.C. ONE SIDE FULL HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK THE OTHER SIDE TO V-0" ABOVE FINISHED CEILING W1 ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. USE LATERAL BRACING PER DETAIL 10/A4.1 „ " 5!8 5 3 518 IS 518" 6" 5/8" SEE 3/A4.1 FOR SLIP TRACK DETAIL FASTEN KICKERS TO _ UNDERSIDE OF TR T RAL ' � S UC U .._'. UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL `.. ROOF @ 4'-0" O.C. ROOF E I - FINISHED CEILING MAY OCCUR 0 ACOUSTIC BATT INSULAT ION - ,�� - 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES FULL �." � :_, �--.-1111.: T UNDERSIDE OF DECK HEIGHT 0 1 "�' FINISHED CLG. MAY OCCUR 6" ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION `� 'f ;- 6" 18 GA. METAL STUD @ 16" O.C. 4 ..... 518" GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES TO „ 518 PLYWOOD TO 4 0 A.F.F. AT w , 1 AB VE FINISHED CEILING w 0 0 � YAWAY A D RECEIVING LA N �� `' r. --- E L TUD 1 GA. M TAS S 3 518 8 ` _.. STOCK AREA WALLS. NO BASE : -:::::::. @ 16" O.C. REQUIRED AT AREAS W/ PLYWD OD SHEATHING. - - n 3 518 INTERIOR STUD WALL: n 6 INTERIOR WALL STUD O 3 n O 518 GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL VER 1 A. M 518" GYP. BD. B TH SIDES 0 8 G ETAL 0 n n T D 1 . T 1- AB VE FINISHED SUS@ 6 OC 0 0 0 n STUDS 16 HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE @ O.C. FULL CEILING W/ ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. OF DECK W/ ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. n 3-518 INTERIOR STUD WALL: 3. O n n IDE V ETAL 518 GYP. BD. (1) S 0 ER 18 GA. M 6 INTERIO : R STUD WALL . 0 STUDS 16" O.C. TO V-0" ABOVE FINISHED 5/8' GYP. BD. BOTH SIDES OVER 18 GA. METAL CEILING W/ ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. USE STUDS AND 1 112" HAT CHANNEL @ 16" O.C. FULL LATERAL BRACING PER DETAIL 101A4.1 HEIGHT TO UNDERSIDE OF DECK W/ ACOUSTIC BATT INSULATION. UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL ROOF UNDERSIDE OF STRUCTURAL ROOF DECK DECK EXISTING TENANT DEMISING EXISTING TENANT WALL DEMISING WALL WALL TYPES 4 AND 4A - ' � Y CONTRACTOR TO CONFIRM EXTEND EXISTING GWB ':.e TO DECK AS RE . AND EXISTING GWB FINISH AND T� Q AMMEND TO PROVIDE LEVEL FINISH ENTIRE WALL TO , FINI H A RE UIRED LEVEL 5 FINISH 5 S S Q I I EXISTING CEILING TO BE CONFIRM HEIGHT OF NEW I DEMOLISHED WHERE OCCURS TENANT FIXTURES AT WALL I PLANE T i EXISTING GWB -FLOAT PATCH WALL TYPE 4 -PROVIDE UPGRADE OR REPLACE AS RE GWB INFILL AT EXISTING TO PROVIDE CONT. FLUSH FURRING STUDS I LEVEL 5 FINISH. EXISTING TENANT DEMISING WALL : 46 EXISTING TENANT DEMISING WALL : O SOUTH WALL NORTH WALL - AT DEMOLISHED ROOMS EXISTING TENANT DEMISING WALL : 4 NORTH WALL SEE SCHED. REMOVABLE \ J T_ ULLION!�EE HARIJWARE \ c � SCF/IED. FOR \ j REQ'TS \ = c' -o -0 (0 co U r_ �, o -, w \ U)�rn�(� \'ANIC E U Q-�N� \ / BARS U, \ / "5Lo(n 0-� [E HOLLOW METAL [ (EXISTING) OVERHEAD DOOR 7 , rf :y :,t.f I iY W I._ t; 3 R II • City d ` ukwila BU iLDi� I I i i`J DVSO GENE' "ITY OF T Ui�WILA aN 13 2016 PE WI`s CENTER UN J T_ L Z3 E c � 0 U 0 _m 0- 0 c' -o -0 (0 co 3 r_ �, o -, O U)�rn�(� 2) = Q N � E U Q-�N� N Q Q 0 (o � U, Co�oo �� m-NN.� cu "5Lo(n 0-� N Q i O � W U Q � W W J _ 000 <- ��zco O w U W W W U rn z Z) = Q UjcD<OQ � Z U5 J 0 � � O 00 v U C/) m � r- � DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET M CL LL r) a- 0 p H C d i r -I O N -ii r\-1 SIDEWALK, R NEW RAMP. N EXPANSION JOINT "•cX.• `':,::r" ;;��I'" ` '` `- DEPRESSED CURB �� • ',h;;: 'ti'"'•%� EXPANSION JOINT FLARED SIDE 4" CONCRETE SLAB w/(I) 6x6 -W1 AxW1.4 pPE W.W.M. REINFORCING OVER 4" #304 AGGREGATE ON COMPACTED SUB -BASE lP VERIFY REQUIREMENTS FOR RAMP FINISH WITH LOCAL AUTHORITIES. IF REQUIRED, PROVIDE TEXTURED "DIMPLED" SURFACE. OTHERWISE, PROVIDE SLIP -RESISTANT TEXTURE WITH COURSE BRUSH PERPENDICULAR TO MAIN RAMP AND SIDES. 3 SIDEWALK DETAIL A5.0 SCALE: NTS 10112" REINFORCED CONCRETE BOLLARD MODEL TF6005 BY FS INDUSTRIES (COLOR B3 SAND) OR APPR. EQ. 114" STEEL REINFORCEMENT 4"x12" PVC PIPE A5.0 SCALE: NTS - - - FLOOR FINISH - - - - - - - TRANSITION LINE CART CORRAL GENERAL NOTES: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FROM LAVI INDUSTRIES FOR THE CART CORRAL SYSTEM AS REQUIRED. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON A0.1 FOR CONTACT INFORMATION. • CART CORRAL SYSTEM TO BE 36" HIGH, DOUBLE RAIL. • POSTS TO BE 2" 0 (36" HIGH) DOUBLE LINE BALL POSTS (PROVIDE END, CORNER, & CENTER POSTS AS REQUIRED). • POST AND RAIL TUBING TO BE 2" DIAMETER, .050" WALL THICKNESS. • CONCRETE SLAB TO BE CORE DRILLED FOR END, CORNER, & CENTER POSTS. • 4 718" 0 x 41/2" HIGH FLOOR SOCKETS TO BE PROVIDED FOR ALL POSTS. • POSTS AND RAILS TO BE SATIN STAINLESS STEEL FINISH. PROVIDE NEW FURRING TO 0 CV NEW 2'-0" TACTILE WARNING STRIP TYPICAL FOR ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS IN SALES AND OFFICE SPACES 40 CARTS END POST TO 14'-0" A.F.F. CENTER POST CART CORRAL RAIL (2 LEVELS) EXTERIOR PAINT & FINISH SCHEDULE CONTRACTOR TO PAINT DASHED PORTION OF FACADE. MAIN 0 io DESCRIPTION ANODIZED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. BODY SHALL BE "KHAKI"(XP-1) WITH "BONE WHITE" CORNICE (4)112" ° MATERIAL 0 LO ON REMARKS PRODUCT COLOR MTL-1 INSERTS PAC CLAD FLUSH 1 REVEAL FASCIA PANEL BONE WHITE NTRY CANOPY 865. CART CORRAL. PAINT WALL BEHIND CART CORRAL ACCENT RED P-3, CONFIRM CP -1 PREFINISHED METAL COPING TOP OF CONC. CONTINUOUS CLEAT COPING BONE W ENTRY FACADE & STOP SYSTEM. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 868. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. 869. CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA. CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH ii SLAB • st .. CP -2 s PAC -CLAD TYPE F GRAVEL STOP COPING r 873. CONTROL JOINTS, SEE STRUCTURAL FOR MORE DETAIL. CONTROL JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH ENTRY ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN U.N.O. 274 04121 CWK TIME GI OCK SEE Q ECTRIC41 2u€€12 RGR WIRE B€TALI THIS TIME CP -3 PREFINISHED METAL COPING PAC CLAD CONTI S CLEAT COPING MATCH SW #6149 ENTRY FACADE STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF STEEL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. ANY i .s IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. o OR DISCREPANCIES WITH PLANS IN RELATION TO EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. I I EIFS 1 ,D DRYVIT GENESIS BASECOAKINFORCING MESH 3"°SCH40 o z 11. ALL EXTERIOR MATERIALS TO BE REPAIRED, CLEANED, AND PAINTED AS TEXTURE TO BE SAND PEBBLE FINE REVIEWED FOR STEEL PIPE RELAXED KHAKI MAR 0 8 2016 P EIFS 2 s• DRYVIT GENES SECOAT 1 REINFOR MESH MATCH SW #7005 ENTRY FACADE PROVIDE 1 1/2" MIN. CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) TEXTURE TO BE SAND PEBBLE FINEPURE WHITE ° • ° 3000 PSI CONC. B-1 BRICK GLEN-GERY BRIE UTILITY -,ROSEWOOD ENTRY FACADE COURSING B-2 BRICK GLEN BRICK SOLDIER (MODULAR) SAND (R ENTRY FACADE � O W SABLE BROWN ONE-THIRD BOND B-3 BRICK GLEN-GERY BRICK UTILITY FLASHED (FW88) TRY FACADE COURSING EP -1 EXTERIOR DOORS & FRAM D.S. SHERWIN WILLIAMS EXTERIOR PAINT SW #6149 EXTE WALLS, USE SEMI -GLOSS AT (D V-6" < RELAXED KHAKI 2 BOLLARD DETAIL W A5.0 SCALE: NTS - - - FLOOR FINISH - - - - - - - TRANSITION LINE CART CORRAL GENERAL NOTES: PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING ITEMS FROM LAVI INDUSTRIES FOR THE CART CORRAL SYSTEM AS REQUIRED. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON A0.1 FOR CONTACT INFORMATION. • CART CORRAL SYSTEM TO BE 36" HIGH, DOUBLE RAIL. • POSTS TO BE 2" 0 (36" HIGH) DOUBLE LINE BALL POSTS (PROVIDE END, CORNER, & CENTER POSTS AS REQUIRED). • POST AND RAIL TUBING TO BE 2" DIAMETER, .050" WALL THICKNESS. • CONCRETE SLAB TO BE CORE DRILLED FOR END, CORNER, & CENTER POSTS. • 4 718" 0 x 41/2" HIGH FLOOR SOCKETS TO BE PROVIDED FOR ALL POSTS. • POSTS AND RAILS TO BE SATIN STAINLESS STEEL FINISH. PROVIDE NEW FURRING TO 0 CV NEW 2'-0" TACTILE WARNING STRIP TYPICAL FOR ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS IN SALES AND OFFICE SPACES 40 CARTS END POST TO 14'-0" A.F.F. CENTER POST CART CORRAL RAIL (2 LEVELS) EXTERIOR PAINT & FINISH SCHEDULE CONTRACTOR TO PAINT DASHED PORTION OF FACADE. MAIN 0 io DESCRIPTION ANODIZED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. BODY SHALL BE "KHAKI"(XP-1) WITH "BONE WHITE" CORNICE CODE MATERIAL MANUFACTURER LO ON REMARKS PRODUCT COLOR MTL-1 PREFINISHED METAL FASCIA PAC CLAD FLUSH 1 REVEAL FASCIA PANEL BONE WHITE NTRY CANOPY 865. CART CORRAL. PAINT WALL BEHIND CART CORRAL ACCENT RED P-3, CONFIRM CP -1 PREFINISHED METAL COPING PAC C CONTINUOUS CLEAT COPING BONE W ENTRY FACADE & STOP SYSTEM. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 868. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. 869. CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA. CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH ii MATERIALS. ALL CASH WRAPS & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTERS TO BE ACCESSIBLE. SEE A0.2 & E3.0 FOR CASH WRAP & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER PARAPET WALL 870. ACCENT WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE CP -2 PREFINISHED METAL COPING PAC -CLAD TYPE F GRAVEL STOP COPING ONE WHITE 873. CONTROL JOINTS, SEE STRUCTURAL FOR MORE DETAIL. CONTROL JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH ENTRY ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN U.N.O. 274 04121 CWK TIME GI OCK SEE Q ECTRIC41 2u€€12 RGR WIRE B€TALI THIS TIME CP -3 PREFINISHED METAL COPING PAC CLAD CONTI S CLEAT COPING MATCH SW #6149 ENTRY FACADE STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF STEEL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. ANY i ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. RELAXED KHAKI OR DISCREPANCIES WITH PLANS IN RELATION TO EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. I I EIFS 1 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM, DRYVIT GENESIS BASECOAKINFORCING MESH MATCH SW #6149 ENTRY FACADE PROVIDE 11/2" MIN. 11. ALL EXTERIOR MATERIALS TO BE REPAIRED, CLEANED, AND PAINTED AS TEXTURE TO BE SAND PEBBLE FINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE RELAXED KHAKI MAR 0 8 2016 INSULATION BOARD EIFS 2 EXTERIOR INSULATION & FINISH SYSTEM, DRYVIT GENES SECOAT 1 REINFOR MESH MATCH SW #7005 ENTRY FACADE PROVIDE 1 1/2" MIN. CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) TEXTURE TO BE SAND PEBBLE FINEPURE WHITE INSULATION BOARD ONE-THIRD BOND B-1 BRICK GLEN-GERY BRIE UTILITY -,ROSEWOOD ENTRY FACADE COURSING B-2 BRICK GLEN BRICK SOLDIER (MODULAR) SAND (R ENTRY FACADE � O W SABLE BROWN ONE-THIRD BOND B-3 BRICK GLEN-GERY BRICK UTILITY FLASHED (FW88) TRY FACADE COURSING EP -1 EXTERIOR DOORS & FRAM D.S. SHERWIN WILLIAMS EXTERIOR PAINT SW #6149 EXTE WALLS, USE SEMI -GLOSS AT (D 0 < RELAXED KHAKI DOORS, FRA & D.S. DOORS / TRIM W J CMU MATCH CMU -1 SPLITFACE CO ETE MASONRY UNIT OLDCASTLE SPLIT FACE SW #6149 1 FIELD D<Cti� CMU -2 SP ACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT OLDCASTLE SPLIT FACE CMU MATCH ACCENT STRIPE F__ DATEI REVISION 70 SW #7005 CMU TO MATCH FIELD BEHIND ENTRY C - SMOOTHFACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT OLDCASTLE VERASTONE SW #6149 FACADE 23'-0112" CONTRACTOR TO PAINT DASHED PORTION OF FACADE. MAIN 0 io 852. UNISLIDE OVERHEAD CONCEALED DOOR SYSTEM BY BESAM. COLOR TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. BODY SHALL BE "KHAKI"(XP-1) WITH "BONE WHITE" CORNICE 3200 SERIEC 856 MOUNTED KNOX DEPT' SEE RETAIL 5AAI SI IEET A4.1 ' 857. CONCRETE SIDEWALK, SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 858. SLOPED CURB RAMP W/ TRUNCATED DOMES, SEE 3/A5.0 FOR DETAILS - VERIFY SLOPE & DEPTH WI LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY CODE 859, INSTALL NEW METAL FURRING AND GYPSUM BOARD TO MATCH 1 ALIGN W/ T COLOR RETURN WALLS SHALL BE PAINTED 0 MATCH)) PER 860. INSTALL KYD-1 ON WALL UP TO 48" A.F.F. 861. INSTALL AIR FRESHENER 8'-0" A.F.F. MANUFACTURER - AIR DELIGHTS ;. 'BURLINGTON COAT FACTORY SPEC 864. BUZZER LOCATION FOR AFTER HOUR EMPLOYEE ENTRY. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONFIRM FINAL LOCATION WITH BURLINGTON PM. 865. CART CORRAL. PAINT WALL BEHIND CART CORRAL ACCENT RED P-3, CONFIRM EXTENTS WITH BURLINGTON PM. 866. SENSORMATIC DOOR -MAX PEDESTAL LOSS PREVENTION SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. GC TO PROVIDE MOUNTING POST FOR SENSORMATIC PEDESTAL. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON A0.1 FOR CONTACT INFORMATION, 867. G.C. TO COORDINATE W/ "GATEKEEPER SYSTEMS" FOR INSTALLATION OF CART STOP SYSTEM. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 868. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. 869. CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA. CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH ii MATERIALS. ALL CASH WRAPS & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTERS TO BE ACCESSIBLE. SEE A0.2 & E3.0 FOR CASH WRAP & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER DETAILS. 870. ACCENT WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. CONFIRM EXTENTS WITH BURLINGTON PM. 871. LEVEL 5 WALL FINISH REQUIRED THRE)IJGHBY:F Rj:FIRETENANT SPT4GE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR LEVEL DEFINITIONS. 872. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -1) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD OUTSIDE CORNERS IN SALES & OFFICE AREAS. 873. CONTROL JOINTS, SEE STRUCTURAL FOR MORE DETAIL. CONTROL JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH ENTRY ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN U.N.O. 274 04121 CWK TIME GI OCK SEE Q ECTRIC41 2u€€12 RGR WIRE B€TALI THIS TIME rl nry Ic n'm Y R€QIJ"' I - F9f�Nl�l. vwvrc Io v 875. NEW STEEL COLUMN GENERAL NOTES .z. f UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 3. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF STEEL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. ANY i ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 4. NOTIFY BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY INCONSISTENCIES OR DISCREPANCIES WITH PLANS IN RELATION TO EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. I I LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES IN THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 6. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. ALL MATERIALS NOT LABELED ARE TYPICAL FOR ALL SIMILAR LOCATIONS. QUESTIONS SHALL BE REFERRED TO THE ARCHITECT. 8. EIEC SHAT -1- -RIE DR)PAT, 99MMERGIAL`RADE AS F9I=I=Q 1�i GENESIS BASE 'n Ate_ REINFORGING MESH BASE 8 FINISH GOATS SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER MEGHANIGALL-Y FASTENED OVER MINIMUM 1 ST " IEATIIG E)VLLL__MTL.- WEATl1ER RESISTIVE BARRIER s 9. A66 EIFS 61 IACBL INSTALLEDTS PERMFR'SRCRG^G MCNDfATIf GAC, INN"O_DTING ACI- SEALANT, FLASI IING,ANB jBINE YAf DISSIMILAR MATERIALS. PRE(pEpAPjZE - 10. PROVIDE BLOCKING IN FACADE TO SUPPORT ALL BUILDING SIGNAGE. 11. ALL EXTERIOR MATERIALS TO BE REPAIRED, CLEANED, AND PAINTED AS REQUIRED. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 8 2016 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SYMBOL LEGEND a DESCRIPTION SYMBOL X }- PARTITION TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) - 23'-0112" 5A JAMB A p DETAIL, 6 BSE A6.0 D TAIL, SI . VESTIBULE 101 JAMB SE A6.0 DETAIL, k40DETAIL L■] EXIT 41'-11/4" ENLARGED EXISITNG ENTRANCE ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" COKE SM CI CH49R H49R El9Ho CH34 7 0 E `SEE DEMO PLAN FOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING CMU PIER EXISTING MASONRY COLUMN-TYP. VERIFY PROVIDE CMU INFILL AT EXISTING STOREFRONT EXISTING CURB RAMP A- NEW CONCRETE CURB RAMP CUT INTO EXISTING SIDEWALK -SLOPE 1:12 MAX a 3 T-11 112" CMU COLUMN TO EMAIN o ) o -� CH49R _1Hj9R M ( 2 LAYAWA I■.....\...■■...■■■1 IEEEN CH45 27'-0" PROVIDE CMU INFILL AT EXISTING i 1 I I I I I I II II BLACK BOX ENTRANCE PLAN & ELEVATION NOTES CODED NOTES 0 io 852. UNISLIDE OVERHEAD CONCEALED DOOR SYSTEM BY BESAM. COLOR TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 853. bIHEeFBR1e1(BEI:E)W 854. DASHED LINE INDICATES CANOPY ABOVE REGESSECI BOX VERIFY 199ATIOAI 1AII I OGAl CIRC 3200 SERIEC 856 MOUNTED KNOX DEPT' SEE RETAIL 5AAI SI IEET A4.1 ' 857. CONCRETE SIDEWALK, SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 858. SLOPED CURB RAMP W/ TRUNCATED DOMES, SEE 3/A5.0 FOR DETAILS - VERIFY 5A JAMB A p DETAIL, 6 BSE A6.0 D TAIL, SI . VESTIBULE 101 JAMB SE A6.0 DETAIL, k40DETAIL L■] EXIT 41'-11/4" ENLARGED EXISITNG ENTRANCE ELEVATION SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" COKE SM CI CH49R H49R El9Ho CH34 7 0 E `SEE DEMO PLAN FOR REMOVAL OF EXISTING CMU PIER EXISTING MASONRY COLUMN-TYP. VERIFY PROVIDE CMU INFILL AT EXISTING STOREFRONT EXISTING CURB RAMP A- NEW CONCRETE CURB RAMP CUT INTO EXISTING SIDEWALK -SLOPE 1:12 MAX a 3 T-11 112" CMU COLUMN TO EMAIN o ) o -� CH49R _1Hj9R M ( 2 LAYAWA I■.....\...■■...■■■1 IEEEN CH45 27'-0" PROVIDE CMU INFILL AT EXISTING i 1 I I I I I I II II BLACK BOX ENTRANCE PLAN & ELEVATION NOTES CODED NOTES 850. NOT USED 851. NEW DECORATIVE BOLLARD. SEE 2/A5.0 FOR DETAILS 852. UNISLIDE OVERHEAD CONCEALED DOOR SYSTEM BY BESAM. COLOR TO BE CLEAR ANODIZED. SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. 853. bIHEeFBR1e1(BEI:E)W 854. DASHED LINE INDICATES CANOPY ABOVE REGESSECI BOX VERIFY 199ATIOAI 1AII I OGAl CIRC 3200 SERIEC 856 MOUNTED KNOX DEPT' SEE RETAIL 5AAI SI IEET A4.1 ' 857. CONCRETE SIDEWALK, SEE STRUCTURAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 858. SLOPED CURB RAMP W/ TRUNCATED DOMES, SEE 3/A5.0 FOR DETAILS - VERIFY SLOPE & DEPTH WI LOCAL ACCESSIBILITY CODE 859, INSTALL NEW METAL FURRING AND GYPSUM BOARD TO MATCH 1 ALIGN W/ ADJACENT WALL SURFACE/FINISHES 860. INSTALL KYD-1 ON WALL UP TO 48" A.F.F. 861. INSTALL AIR FRESHENER 8'-0" A.F.F. MANUFACTURER - AIR DELIGHTS "MICROBURST 3000", BATTERY-OPERATED, WHITE FINISH. PROVIDE (1) AEROSOL CAN FOR EACH AIR FRESHENER. SCENT TO BE "FRENCH LINEN" 401255. 862. WALL PACK / LIGHT FEATURE, REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 864. BUZZER LOCATION FOR AFTER HOUR EMPLOYEE ENTRY. SEE ELECTRICAL SHEETS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. CONFIRM FINAL LOCATION WITH BURLINGTON PM. 865. CART CORRAL. PAINT WALL BEHIND CART CORRAL ACCENT RED P-3, CONFIRM EXTENTS WITH BURLINGTON PM. 866. SENSORMATIC DOOR -MAX PEDESTAL LOSS PREVENTION SYSTEM, SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE DETAIL. GC TO PROVIDE MOUNTING POST FOR SENSORMATIC PEDESTAL. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE ON A0.1 FOR CONTACT INFORMATION, 867. G.C. TO COORDINATE W/ "GATEKEEPER SYSTEMS" FOR INSTALLATION OF CART STOP SYSTEM. PROVIDE ELECTRICAL PER MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. 868. QUEUE CUSTOMER TRAFFIC SYSTEM. 869. CASH WRAPS TO RECEIVE POWER AND DATA. CONFIRM FINAL PLACEMENT WITH BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER & ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS. ALL CASH WRAPS & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTERS TO BE ACCESSIBLE. SEE A0.2 & E3.0 FOR CASH WRAP & CUSTOMER SERVICE COUNTER DETAILS. 870. ACCENT WALL TO BE PAINTED P-3. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR MORE DETAIL. CONFIRM EXTENTS WITH BURLINGTON PM. 871. LEVEL 5 WALL FINISH REQUIRED THRE)IJGHBY:F Rj:FIRETENANT SPT4GE. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON A4.0 FOR LEVEL DEFINITIONS. 872. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS (CG -1) ON ALL GYPSUM BOARD OUTSIDE CORNERS IN SALES & OFFICE AREAS. 873. CONTROL JOINTS, SEE STRUCTURAL FOR MORE DETAIL. CONTROL JOINTS TO ALIGN WITH ENTRY ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON PLAN U.N.O. 274 04121 CWK TIME GI OCK SEE Q ECTRIC41 2u€€12 RGR WIRE B€TALI THIS TIME rl nry Ic n'm Y R€QIJ"' I - F9f�Nl�l. vwvrc Io v 875. NEW STEEL COLUMN GENERAL NOTES 1. DO NOT SCALE DRAWING 2. DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISHED WALL TO FACE OF FINISHED WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. (U.N.O.) 3. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CROSS-CHECK THE STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS WITH THE ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS PRIOR TO THE ORDERING / INSTALLATION OF STEEL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN THE ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHALL BE BROUGHT TO THE ARCHITECTS' ATTENTION FOR IMMEDIATE CLARIFICATION. 4. NOTIFY BURLINGTON PROJECT MANAGER IMMEDIATELY OF ANY INCONSISTENCIES OR DISCREPANCIES WITH PLANS IN RELATION TO EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS. 5. ALL CONSTRUCTION SHALL COMPLY WITH ALL APPLICABLE STATE, CITY AND LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES IN THE LOCATION OF THE PROJECT. 6. WHERE EXISTING CONDITIONS ARE CUT OR DISTURBED TO PERMIT INSTALLATION OF NEW WORK, MATCH AND PATCH EXISTING DISTURBED CONSTRUCTION TO ORIGINAL CONDITION UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 7. ALL MATERIALS NOT LABELED ARE TYPICAL FOR ALL SIMILAR LOCATIONS. QUESTIONS SHALL BE REFERRED TO THE ARCHITECT. 8. EIEC SHAT -1- -RIE DR)PAT, 99MMERGIAL`RADE AS F9I=I=Q 1�i GENESIS BASE 'n Ate_ REINFORGING MESH BASE 8 FINISH GOATS SHALL BE PROVIDED OVER MEGHANIGALL-Y FASTENED OVER MINIMUM 1 ST " IEATIIG E)VLLL__MTL.- WEATl1ER RESISTIVE BARRIER s 9. A66 EIFS 61 IACBL INSTALLEDTS PERMFR'SRCRG^G MCNDfATIf GAC, INN"O_DTING ACI- SEALANT, FLASI IING,ANB jBINE YAf DISSIMILAR MATERIALS. PRE(pEpAPjZE - 10. PROVIDE BLOCKING IN FACADE TO SUPPORT ALL BUILDING SIGNAGE. 11. ALL EXTERIOR MATERIALS TO BE REPAIRED, CLEANED, AND PAINTED AS REQUIRED. REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 8 2016 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION SYMBOL LEGEND DESCRIPTION SYMBOL X }- PARTITION TYPE (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) CODED NOTE (SEE SPECIFIC SHEET CODED NOTES) NAME ROOM NAME & NUMBER (SEE SCHEDULE ON A4.0) RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER U N J � J Q) " 0 c E (n 0 cuU n- O cu -a070 Q ca C,4 Lo N�a 0) 4 LO N � p E >Q C Q> N CO N <(6 N C� C4 cu 00 • 5 c) �N coNN.� cu Lo U) Q N 01-11-16 I PERMIT SET ENLARGED ENTRANCE PLAN ' SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" a 0 ■ 0 Q W W o! 0 W Q X 0 W 0 z Q C) z LL W fy � U � z � O W CC) rn U � z z Z) = Q W 0 co o (D 0 < 0 z > W J � Qry 00 Ne z D<Cti� W 00 0 F__ DATEI REVISION 01-11-16 I PERMIT SET ENLARGED ENTRANCE PLAN ' SCALE: 1/4" =1'-0" a 0 ■ M LL d 0 (D 0 C LLL LD Ol C) N N -ii _q -i U_ 0 F_ 0 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION SECTION 01100 - GENERAL CONDITIONS PART I - GENERAL 1.1 THE CONTRACT A. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a written modification. The contract documents include, but are not limited to, the bidding documents, the drawings, the specifications, the schedule and the addenda. The contract shall be executed no less than in duplicate. 1.2 THE WORK A. The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. 1.3 INTENT A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. B. Owner reserves the right to withhold award of the contract for a period of 90 days from bid date, at their sole discretion. Contractor's price is to remain firm and unchanged for this 90 day period. C. Contractor is to submit a proposed subcontractor list within 10 days of bid award. No subcontractors will be allowed who are not approved by local mall management locations. If requested by the local mall that specific contractors for any portion of work be used, Contractor shall comply. PART 2 - OWNER 1.1 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER A. Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Landlord shall obtain and pay for other necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges. B. The term "Project Manager" means the employee or representative of the Owner designated by the Owner to provide management and supervisory services for the Project. All communications to the Contractor shall be through the PM. The PM is not responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, nor is the Project Manager responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences procedures or safety precautions at the site. The Project Manager shall render interpretations of the Contract Documents and shall, in the first instance, be the judge of the performance thereunder by the Contractor. No oral interpretation shall be binding on the Owner. At any stage in the construction of the Project the PM may conduct inspections in the work. C. Owner shall provide to the Contractor the Drawings free of charge. Said drawings are diagrammatic, and shall be followed as closely as actual construction and work of individual trades will permit. Where, because of a minor error or omission in the Drawings, something manifestly necessary to the completion of the Work is not shown on the Drawings, it is agreed that the intent of the Owner and the Contractor is such that such omitted material or Work shall be supplied by the Contractor as part of the Work and without additional compensations. D. Owner reserves the right to search all personnel, packages, toolboxes, material shipments, etc, on anyone entering or leaving the sitelstore at any time. Contractor shall coordinate its working hours with the store operation schedule and will cooperate with owner to meet security requirements (on a remodel project). The Contractor shall provide security service for work which reasonably must be performed during off store hours, provided contractor shall use all reasonable efforts to minimize the number of occasions requiring off hours work. E. Owner shall make available for contractors use of the existing loading dock within the store. F. Contractor is to contact Burlington PM for the release of all Tenant supplied items. All Burlington supplied construction material must be counted and checked for damage and/or shortages upon delivery. Any damage and/or shortage must be noted on the packing slip at the time of delivery and Burlington must be notified. Any damages or shortages not duly noted and reported will be replaced at the Contractors expense. In the event that property, materials, or articles of any type are furnished by the Owner to the Contractor, the Contractor assumes complete liability therefore, including responsibility for on site or off site storage. G. A Burlington rep will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the work. At the Owners sole option, it may accept defective or non conforming work. The Owner may do so instead of requiring the removal and correction of such work, in which case a change order will be issued to reflect an appropriate reduction in the contract sum. The Landlord has the authority to reject work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. If the contractors fail to correct defective or non conforming work, the Owner may correct it at the expense of the Contractor. H. Burlington will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractors responsibility. Burlington will not be responsible for the Contractors failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Observation or inspections, including reexamination, by Owner shall not be construed as a waiver of any portion of Owners rights under the Contract or as acceptance of any portion of the work, nor shall such observations or inspections diminish to any extent contractor's duty to perform the work in accordance with the contract documents and code. 1. Based on his observations and evaluations of the Contractor applications for payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor. J. Burlington is to receive copies of all test reports. Burlington will have authority to require special inspection or testing of the work. PART 3 - OWNER'S RIGHTS 1.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK A. Correction of work: The Contractor shall promptly correct work rejected by the Landlord or the Burlington Project Manager as failing to conform to the requirements of the contract Documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting such rejected work. B. If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, The Landlord may direct the Contractor in writing to stop the Work until the correction is made. In no event shall the Owners right to stop the Work obligate the Owner to do so for the benefit of the Contractor or any other entity or person and the Contractor shall have no claim for damage by reason thereof. 1.2 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK A. If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including the failure to man the job due to labor disputes of any type, or fail to perform any provision of the Contract Documents, including unauthorized Schedule Delay, and fails within a seven day period after receipt of written notice from Burlington to correct such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Landlord may, without prejudice to other remedies, correct such deficiencies. In such case, a Change Order shall be issued deducting the cost of correction from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor. 1.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. Burlington reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the project with Burlington's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the project. Any such performance by the Owner or a separate contractor contracted with the Owner shall not, in and of itself, be grounds for a claim for delay or additional cost by the Contractor. B. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with separate contractors employed by the Landlord or by Burlington., including the work of utility companies. The Owner, the Contractor, and each of the Owners Separate contractors shall cooperate with one another in the use of the site, storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work and shall connect and coordinate their work as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor, the Owner, and all separate contractors shall diligently endeavor not to damage the work of others. If any such damage takes place it shall be promptly corrected at the expense of the party causing the damage. C. Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the party responsible therefore. If the contractor damages the work of a separate contractor, then the Contractor shall promptly settle the matter directly with the other contractor and shall hold the Owner harmless from any and all effects of such damage. Contractor shall notify Owner immediately of lack of progress or defective workmanship on the part of other contractors performing separate work, including utility companies, where the same will interfere with Contractors Own operations. PART 4 - CONTRACTOR 1.1 EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT A. Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. Before submitting its proposal, contractor shall make all field surveys and examinations to determine existing conditions at the site and ascertain any conditions and problems that will affect the work. Contractor shall also investigate requirements of the community with respect to required licenses, operating conditions, trucking, disposal of refuse, available materials and employment, etc. All costs necessary to overcome existing conditions and to conform to such requirements shall be reflected in Contractors proposal. B. Quality Assurance: Contractor to provide quality control services, from an independent qualified inspection firm, for, at a minimum, the following vvoi K. Sail Compaction, Concrete strength, air entrainment, slump, Metoonry inspection, steel inspection, special inspections requiredbyAHJ. Burlington is to be on the distribution of these reports. The agency to be used must have the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspection required, as documented by ASTM e548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. Costs for testing and re -testing, if necessary, are to be done by the Contractor. Testing agency is to promptly notify Burlington if any irregularities or deficiencies are observed in the work. 1,2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Landlord. Before commencing activities, the Contractor shall: 1 . Take field measurements and verify field conditions; Contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of verification of all conditions and dimensions at the site. No extra charge or adjustment to the Contract Sum shall be made on account of differences or discrepancies between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the Drawings. 2. Carefully compare this and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents. 3. Promptly report errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered to the Architect prior to the performance of any portion of the work without having reviewed all of the contract documents, without reporting errors, inconsistencies, omissions, etc, or without having, where required, approved shop drawings, product data, or samples, shall be done at the Contractors sole risk. 4. The Contractor is to establish control lines on the floor, two feet from center of column, every column, each way. These lines must be protected by cuffing into the concrete and painting, snapping chalk lines, and spraying clear lacquer or another,means that will ensure control lines remain until project is completed or floor covering is in place. The contractor is to transfer the established control lines to each floor to maintain a uniform control line on each floor to ensure all ceiling grids correspond and escalators and elevators are square and true on each floor. 1.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractors best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work. The contractor is solely responsible to the Owner for the acts, omission s, and defaults of its employees, subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, material men and any other person or entity involved in or performing any of the Work. Inspection of the Work by the Project Manger or other representatives of the Owner, approval of the Work by the PM or other reps of the Owner, and payment for the Work by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of any of its obligations to perform the work strictly in accordance with the Contract Documents. The superintendent shall be available for the project and at the premises at all times during regular working hours and all other hours that work is being performed at the premises. B. The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Landlord the names of subcontractors or suppliers for each portion of the Work. If requested, contractor shall furnish information with respect to past performance and financial status of the subcontractors. The Landlord will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing if Landlord, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to the subcontractors or suppliers listed. Unskilled workers shall not be permitted on the site. All work shall be performed under the supervision of an experienced and competent Project Superintendent. The contractors Project Superintendent in charge of the Work shall represent the Contractor and all directions given to him, or its authorized representatives, by the Owner. C. Contractor shall incorporate in all of its contracts with subcontractors the following provisions: Each sub shall be bound to contractor by the terms of the contract documents between owner and contractor, and shall assume toward contractor all obligations and responsibilities which contractor by those documents assumes toward Owner, and shall have the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against contractor. D. Full performance: Contractor is liable to Owner for the full, complete and prompt performance of all contracts between contractor and any subcontractor and any contracts assigned to contractor, and nothing in the contract documents shall infer or cause in any way a waiver by owner of any right against contractor because of breach, default, delay, defect or other acts or omissions for which a subcontractor may also be liable. 1.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. The contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished will be new, and that all Work not done in accordance with this warranty shall be considered grounds for default. B. The Contractor shall deliver, handle, store and install materials in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Burlington Supplied Material is enumerated on the drawings. It is the responsibility of the contractor to: 1 . Contact the project manager by fax or email to arrange for release of the Burlington supplied materials at the appropriate time for the orderly sequence of the work. 2. Receive all Burlington supplied material. 3. Count and check for damage all received materials. Damages or shortages must be noted on the packing slip at the time of delivery and Burlington is to be notified by fax or email. Any damages or shortages will be the responsibility of the Contractor if Burlington is not notified immediately. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Before the work begins, standards of workmanship quality shall be established to the satisfaction of the Project Manager. All equipment, materials, and articles incorporated in the Work are to be new, unless specifically addressed otherwise, and of the best grade of their respective kind for the purpose. 1.6 WARRANTY A. The Contractor warrants to the Landlord that: (1) materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be new and of good quality unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents; (2) the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted; and (3) the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish to Owner a minimum of 3 copies of all warranty certificates and guarantees, and all related maintenance manuals, operating instructions, maintenance stocks/and or replacement parts list. Contractor shall promptly enforce at its expense and such warranty or guarantee for owners benefit, if Owner shall request contractor to do so, and reimburse Owner for any costs paid or incurred by Owner in replacing defective, unsound, or improper work, due to the failure of the maker of any such warranty or guarantee to fulfill its obligations thereunder. 1.7 TAXES A. The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes that are legally required when the Contract is executed. Except for the general building permit, Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, licenses, taxes, levies, fees, tests and inspections required or imposed by any governmental authority having jurisdiction for or in connection with the execution and completion of the work, and contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations of any governmental authority in performing the work. 1.8 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for the building permit and other permits and governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. B. The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without notice to Burlington, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. The Contractor shall promptly notify Burlington in writing of any known inconsistencies in the Contract Documents with such governmental laws, rules and regulations. It is contractor's responsibility to assure that the Work as drawn and specified complies with all applicable laws, codes, ordinances, rules and regulations. If Contractor observes or is informed by any governmental authority having jurisdictions, that the Drawings and specs are at variances therewith, contract shall promptly notify Owner in writing, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted. If contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, codes, ordinances, rules, or regulations, and without such notice to Owner, Contractor shall bear all responsibility and costs arising therefrom. 1.9 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall promptly review, approve in writing and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Contractor shall make all such submittals within reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the work. In no event shall Owners review and acceptance of submittals relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort, nor shall it in any way diminish Contractors obligation to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Burlington Requires that submittals be made on all major mechanical and electrical equipment; roofing system; escalator and elevator, fire sprinkler shop drawings, fire alarm shop drawings. As long as contractor is using specified suppliers/vendors for other divisions of work, no submittals will be necessary. B. Contractor shall maintain a submittal register, which lists all the submittal requirements for the project, with a tracking of dates of approval and reasons for disapproval or re -submittal. The register (attached in previous section of this) shall be updated weekly. C. Any deviations or substitutions made in the submittal process must be clearly and legibly addressed, and a comparison of the proposed product against the specified product must be presented. D. Contractor shall also submit a 2 week look ahead schedule, accompanied by job photographs, on a weekly basis. PART 5 - USE OF SITE A. The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, the Contract Documents and the Landlord. Open Store Construction: Contractor shall develop and present to Owner an appropriate written plan of action for those instances where construction is undertaken in an operating store. Such plan of action shall include, without limitation, the method of identifying superintendents who can manage open store projects, options for partial closure, complete closure, off peak construction and other steps designed to mitigate the impact of construction on the operating store and its customers. B. Temporary services and facilities: the contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain (including necessary repairs and replacements) temporary water facilities for its use and the use of all subcontractors and any other contractor performing separate work for the projects. Contractors facilities shall include a service line and all necessary fittings to bring the water to one or more convenient terminal points. C. The contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain (including necessary repairs and replacements) temporary electric service adequate for the lighting and power requirements of contractor, all subcontractors, and owners contractors. Stairs & other enclosed areas shall have adequate lighting. All such facilities shall conform to all requirements of the NEC, the local utility, & any AHJ. D. Contractor shall be responsible for methods of operation and the loads imposed by all users of the freight elevator. Contractor shall not permit any method of operation or load which would damage or endanger the equipment or create any safety hazard. E. The General Contractor shall be responsible for protecting ALL porcelain tile, ceramic tile and LVT during construction and maintaining the protection until Substantial Completion, as noted in Section 09310. F. The contractor (fixture installer) shall be responsible for maintaining the protection of ALL porcelain tile, ceramic file and LVT during the fixture delivery and installation. The contractor will be fined $1,000 for every tile area damaged due to the transportation of pallets and fixtures across the tile aisles and/or due to the installation of the fixtures. PART 6 - CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly, The Contractor shall endeavor not to damage or endanger any portion of the Work or the work of the Owner or any separate contractor or any existing structure by cutting, patching, fitting, or otherwise altering any work or by excavation. If the contractor shall damage any such work, the Contractor shall promptly and completely restore the same to its original condition. Special care and precaution shall be taken with respect to all exposed final finish surfaces, whether new or existing. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load carrying capacity or load deflection ratio. PART 7 - CLEANING UP A. The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of debris and trash related to the Work on a daily basis. Overall jobsite cleaning shall be conducted on a daily basis. Contractor shall maintain orderly housekeeping during the progress of construction, and upon completion shall thoroughly clean all areas, both indoors and outdoors. In addition to clean up operations, final clean up shall include the following operations wherever they can be adapted to the Project: 1 . All floors shall be dry swept, followed by another sweeping with damp sawdust. 2. Dust, dirt, mortar drops, paint drippings, oil, grease and other blemishes shall be removed from all surfaces, including pipe and equipment. 3. Windows, glass lights, and glass doors shall be washed on both sides. Paint overruns and putty smears shall be removed. 4. Hardware shall be rubbed clean with flannel cloths. 5. Exterior paving shall be swept and hosed down. 6. Contractor shall remove all construction rubbish, scaffolding, equipment, temp protection, temp field structures, and anything else that was required in connection with the construction of the work, but not a permanent part thereof. (Optional) 7. Contractor shall, at its expense, provide and maintain temporary heating and ventilating as required for maintaining the work schedule and proper placing, protection, and drying of work, including the Work and all work of other contractors performing separate work for the Projects. In all enclosed work areas, there shall be sufficient temporary heating facilities to maintain a minimum temperate of 65 degrees a. Heaters shall be located a safe distance from combustible materials, and they shall have guards to protect against accidental contact. Contractor shall provide, at its expense, all necessary accessories, including tarpaulins, or other temporary enclosures necessary to retain heat and provide protection from the effects of inclement weather. PART 8 - INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Burlington, the Architect, the Engineer, the Architect's consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to aftorneys'fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itseig including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. If any legal action is threatened or brought against owner or contractor or both of them because of any of the foregoing matters, contractor shall, at contractor's expense, settle or defend such action, paying all costs, expenses, and attorney's fees incurred by owners, and shall pay any amount agreed to in settlement and any judgment which may be rendered therein. B. Contractor agrees not to suffer any mechanic's, materialman's or other lien, charge or lien to be filed against Burlington, the project or premises or any portion thereof or any part of the shopping center by reason of any work, labor, services or materials performed at or furnished to the project or premises through or under the contractor. If any such mechanic's lien shall at any time be filed, contractor within twenty (20) days after contractor shall have received notice of the filing thereof shall cause the same to be canceled and discharged of record by payment, bond, or order of a court of competent jurisdiction. PART 9 -ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Project Meetings are to be held weekly at the jobsite, for the purpose of discussing schedule, deliveries, coordination, and RFI's. They shall be attended by the major subcontractors on the project. The Burlington manager will, if unable to attend, be tele-conferenced in to this meeting, and will receive meeting notes published by the GC. B. Contractor shall provide and maintain his own suitable office on the jobsite, for use by Owner, Architect and subcontractors, in which he will keep the latest editions of all drawings, specs, addenda, change orders, approved shop drawings, product data, and other construction documents. C. Contractor shall be responsible for developing implementing, maintaining and supervising all safety programs in connection with the work and the project site. The contractor is responsible for taking all safety precautions to prevent injury or death to persons or damage to property. D. Landlords rules and regulations: Contractor shall familiarize itself with, and shall at all times abide by, all rules and regulations of the Landlord governing the Work and the Project, including, but not limited to, Landlord's security and emergency procedures. E. Contractor aggress to pay wages and benefits in total for all work performed on this project, which will be sufficient to ensure that the Project will be free from business disruptions, labor disruptions or work stoppages, including, but not limited to, area standards picketing and/or hand billing of the general public. F. Contractor is responsible for complying with any local labor regulations covering the Work. Should any dispute arise, the Contractor will be required to settle same without claim or additional cost to the Owner. This applies to all subcontractors, material men, suppliers and all others employed by the Contractor. Shop labels shall be affixed to all components if required by local regulations. PART 10 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. After execution of the Contract, changes in the Work may be accomplished by Change Order or by order for a minor change in the Work. Burlington, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. Any and all claims for extra compensation or changed work/scope must be submitted within 30 days of their occurrence to the Landlord, or the will not be honored for review or compensation. Extra work that has been performed without authorization from the Landlord will not be considered for payment. B. Change Order shall be a written order to the Contractor signed by the Landlord to change the Work, Contract Sum or Contract Time. Change order pricing is to include quantities, unit costs, labor costs, taxes, equipment rent, and be in sufficient detail. Change orders must be accompanied by appropriate back up information: including, but not limited to: Labor costs, material breakdown, quantities, taxes, equipment rates, and any other information that may be requested bythe Landlord C. All changes must be submitted timely for consideration. Any and all claims for extra compensation must be submitted within 30 days of their occurrence, or they will not be honored for review or compensation. Extra work that has been performed without authorization from the Landlord will not be considered for payment. D. The Burlington Project Manager will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be written orders and shall be binding on the Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. E. If concealed or unknown physical conditions are encountered at the site that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or from those conditions ordinarily found to exist, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be subject to equitable adjustment. F. If the Owner and the contractor cannot resolve the cost of the change by a lump sum agreement or a cost plus mutually acceptable fixed fee; the contractor, upon receiving a written order signed by the owner, shall promptly proceed with the work involved (the "change" work). Thereafter, the PM shall determine the cost of the change work on the basis of the reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the change work and attributable to the change. The contractor shall keep an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data for inclusion in a change order. Cost of the change work is limited to: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery, cost of labor, workers comp insurance, bond premiums, rental value of equipment and machinery, and the additional cost of supervision directly attributable to the change. G. In the event a dispute between the Owner and the contractor arises, the matter shall be resolved by negotiation between the Owners Project Manager and the Project Superintendent. If these people are unable to resolve the matter, it shall be referred to negotiation between the Director of Construction of the Owner and the Chief Exec. Officer of the Contractor. THERE WILL BE NO ARBITRATION ALLOWED. PART 11 -TIME A. Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. B. If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Landlord may determine. The contractors claims, if any, for extension of time must be made in writing to the Project Manager not more than five working days after the Contractor has notice of the delay. C. In the event that the contractor has not completed the work timely, liquidated DAMAGES IN THE AMOUNT OF $500.00 per day will accrue. PART 12 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 1.1 CONTRACT SUM A. The Contract Sum stated in the Agreement, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by Burlington to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to Burlington an itemized Application for Payment, use attached form, for operations completed in accordance with the values stated in the Agreement. Such application shall be supported by such data substantiating the Contractors right to payment as Burlington may reasonably require and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Application and payment must be accompanied by lien waivers from all material men, supplier, and subcontractors for materials, supplies, and work performed on the project through the date of which all prior application for permit have been made. B. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to Burlington no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from Burlington shall, to the best of the Contractors knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or other encumbrances adverse to Burlington's interests. 1.3 PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payments shall not be made unless progress on project and percentage of completion is in accordance with the Landlord approved schedule. B. The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor and material supplier, upon receipt of payment from the Landlord, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such entities' portion of the Work. C. Neither the Landlord or Burlington shall not have responsibility for the payment of money to a Subcontractor or material supplier. D. A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the project by the Landlord shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. At any time the Landlord, may make payment directly to subcontractors, material men, and suppliers of contractor whenever in the Landlord's sole discretion, the Landlord determines there is any danger or likelihood that contractor is unable to pay such subcontractors, material men, and suppliers and such payment shall be credited against payment due under this agreement and/or the contract documents. 1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so Burlington can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. B. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish the responsibilities of the Landlord, Burlington and Contractor, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. C. If any governmental authority having jurisdiction requires a 'certificate of Occupancy" (including any temporary or partial certificate of occupancy required due to the project schedule) in connection with the Work, the same shall be secured by Contractor as agent for Owner. Contractor shall file all necessary applications, arrange any required inspections, and advance any required fee. It shall be the Contractors duty and obligation, at its sole cost and expense and without effect on the Contract Sum, to meet whatever conditions and prerequisites are required in order to secure the issuance of the Certificate of Occupancy (including any temporary or partial certificate of occupancy) except that, upon issuance of the final Certificate of Occupancy, Owner shall reimburse Contractor for the fee required by the governmental authority issuing the same. D. The following items are to be complete in order for Burlington direct contractors to start their work: I . Entire sprinkler system shall be complete, tested, and operational. 2. Walls, partitions, and gyp drywall work shall be completed 3. Ceiling shall be completed. 4. Lighting fixtures shall be installed, wired, lamped, and operating. 5. Electrical outlets shall be installed, wired, and energized, ready for store fixture electrical connections. E. The area shall be clean. 1.5 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT A. Upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, Burlington will inspect the Work. When Burlington finds the Work acceptable and the Contract fully performed, Burlington will promptly notify the Landlord who will process a final Application of Payment. B. Final payment shall not become due until the Contractor submits to the I-Andlord, all releases and waivers of liens, and data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract. C. Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. D. Before final payment: 1 . Submit Final, Unconditional lien waivers from yourself and each subcontractor and supplier.The contractor shall refund to the Owner all monies that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging a lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees. 2. Verify that all punch list items have been completed to Burlington's satisfaction. The failure to include any items on the Punch List does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors project superintendent shall remain at the job site until Punch List work is completed. 3. Provide a one-year warranty document from yourself and each subcontractor. 4. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies and equipment installed or incorporated in the work, free and clear of all liens, claims, security, interest, or encumbrances. 5. Provide warranty documentation on any new materials or equipment installed, i.e., HVAC units, roofing, etc. 6. Provide complete set of As -Built drawings (hardcopy and PDF set on CID). All indications on as -built drawing shall be executed in a legible manner by a competent draftsman. If variations and details cannot be shown clearly thereon, then contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings adequate to impart the information. 7. Project Close Out Manual, including, but not limited to, guarantees, warranty certificates, maintenance manuals, operating instructions, diagrams, maintenance stocks and/or replacement parts list (hardcopies and PDF's on CD). PART 13 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs, including all those required by law in connection with performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, or by anyone for whose acts the Contractor may be liable. Contractor shall be solely responsible for maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State OSHA requirements pertaining to the work. B. Workmen shall be confined to areas of construction, and shall be required to maintain normal good discipline. Contractor shall discharge or require the discharge of those who violate Owners discipline rules or otherwise disturb a peaceful environment. C. Contractor shall not load or permit any part of any building or other structure to be loaded with a weight which will endanger its safety. D. Contractor shall support and maintain in operation all pipes, conduits, lines, hydrants and other facilities of all utilities serving all or any portion of existing buildings of Owner or other property owners which may be encountered during the progress of the Work, and shall promptly repair and restore any such facilities damaged or disrupted by Contractor or any of its subcontractors. E. Contractor shall be responsible to guard against fire at all times prior to completion of the work. Contractor acknowledges that the local Fire Marshall's office may exercise its rights to impose and monitor the procedures used for the Project. F. Off hours work: If the contract includes work at or in an existing store building of Owner or adjacent to an existing mall building, portions of the Work which would be disruptive or normal business operations of Owners store or the mall, or which would be dangerous to the store or mall building occupants, shall be performed during hours when the Owners building and any attached buildings are closed for business and not occupied. Examples of such work include, without limitations, saw cutting of concrete, jack hammering, welding, metal cutting, and pouring concrete, erecting steel or hoisting equipment. The requirement for such work to be performed off hours shall not operate to cause a change in the Contract Sum. PART 14 - CORRECTION OF WORK A. The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Burlington Project Manager as failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting such rejected Work. B. In addition to the Contractor's other obligations including warranties under the Contract, the Contractor shall, for a period of one year after Substantial Completion, correct work not conforming to the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, Burlington may correct it and the Contractor shall reimburse Burlington for the cost of correction. PART 15 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 1.1 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT A. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. 1.2 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. B. If the Architect requires additional testing, the Contractor shall perform these tests. C. Landlord/ General Contractor shall pay for tests. 1.3 GOVERNING LAW A. The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the project is located, and to the latest published editions of all building codes and references. All local energy and seismic code necessitated by the area the project is in are to be included in the contractors proposal. PART 16 - TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT 1.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR A. If the Landlord fails to make payment when due or substantially breaches any other obligation of this Contract, following seven days' written notice to the Landlord, the Contractor may terminate the Contract and recover from the Landlord payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages. 1.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER A. The Landlord may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: 1 . Refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; 2. Fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; 3. Disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or is otherwise guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. B. When any of the above reasons exist, the Landlord, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Landlord and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days'written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may: 1. Take possession of the site and of all materials thereon owned by the Contractor; 2. Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Landlord may deem expedient. C. When the Landlord terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is competed in accordance with the contract. Landlord may deduct the costs of completion, any additional cost incurred due to Contractors, failure or omission and any damages resulting from Contractors, breach, from any amount owed to Contractor under this agreement and/or the Contract Documents and hold Contractor liable for any deficiency. D. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Landlord. This obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. END OF SECTION 01100 SECTION 01330 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals. 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1 . Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows.. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1 . Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2, Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Architecfs consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. 3. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 4. Allow 14 days for processing each resubmittal. 5. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1 . Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Unique identifier, including revision number. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Other necessary identification. F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. 1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned. H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal. 4. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents, 5. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. i. Remarks. j. Signature of transmitter. 1. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1 . Number of Copies: Submit one electronic copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return an electronic copy. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows, unless otherwise indicated: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one copy of each submittal where selection of options, color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics is required. Architect, will return submittal with options selected. b. Final Submittal: Submit a minimum of one electronic copy, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. 3. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 4. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 5. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturers written recommendations. b. Manufacturers product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturers catalog cuts. f. Printed performance curves. g. Operational range diagrams. h. Mill reports. i. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. j. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. k. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. 1. Application of testing agency labels and seals. m. Notation of coordination requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project -specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing -in and setting diagrams. e. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. f. Templates and patterns. g. Schedules. h. Design calculations. i. Compliance with specified standards. j. Notation of coordination requirements. k. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. 2. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 3. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 24 by 36 inches. 4. Number of Copies: Submit copies of each submittal, as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit two blue- or black -line prints, Architect will return one print. b. Final Submittal: Submit two blue- or black -line prints, unless prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit prints where prints are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two prints; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned print as a Project Record Drawing. 5. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 6. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Managers action. 7. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." 8. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 9. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 10. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form. 11. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 12. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 13. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1 . Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certificabon. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements." B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division I Section "Construction Progress Documentation." C. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. E. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. F. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. G. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. H. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. 1. Pre -construction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements. J. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. K. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements. L. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. M. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in.Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." N. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturers recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable: 1 . Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments, 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection. 0. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. P. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to Owner. If submitted to Architect, Architect will not review this information but will return it with no action taken. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1.7 ARCHITECTS ACTION A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1 . Approved (Without Comment). 2. Approved as Noted (Re -submission Not Required) 3. Not Approved, Re -submit with Corrections 4. Not Approved C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. D. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION 01330 SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated, These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1 . Specific quality -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. 1.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality -control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality -control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality -control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality -control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractors responsibility, 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. C. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality -control services, including retesting and reinspection, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. 1.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality -control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractors responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality -control services. END OF SECTION 01400 SECTION 01500 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Support facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Waste disposal facilities. 2. Field offices. 3. Storage and fabrication sheds. C. Security and protection facilities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Barricades, warning signs, and lights. 2. Temporary enclosures. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI Al 0.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. 1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions. 2. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Obtain required certifications and permits. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1.4 MATERIALS A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended. B. Water: Potable. C. Lumber and Plywood: 1. For barriers, sidewalk/track protection and similar uses provide minimum 3/4" thick exterior grade plywood. D. Portable Chain-link Fencing: Minimum 2 -inch, 9 gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2 3/8" OD line posts and 2 7/8" OD corner and pull posts, with 1518" OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized steel bases for supporting posts. 1.5 EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended. B. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of N FPA-recom mended classes for exposures. 1. Comply with NFPA 10 and NFPA 241 for classification, extinguishing agent, and size required by location and class of fire exposure. C. Self -Contained Units: Single -occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reiinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. 1.6 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required. B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 1.7 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Arrange storage sheds, sanitary facilities, and other temporary construction and support facilities for easy access. 1.8 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights. END OF SECTION 01500 SECTION 01731 - CUTTING AND PATCHING 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B. Related Sections include the following: 1 . Division 1 Section "Selective Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building for alterations. 2. Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. a. Requirements in this Section apply to electrical installations. Refer to Division 16 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching electrical installations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity or load -deflection ratio. 1. Stair Stringers 2. Structural Framing in areas related to the Work without approval of Architect. 3. Exterior Masonry Walls without approval of Architect. B. Operational Elements: Do not cut, patch, or disturb the following operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. I . Primary operational systems and equipment. 2. Fire -protection systems. 3. Control systems. 4. Communication systems. 5. Computer systems. 6. Electrical wiring systems. C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut, patch, or disturb the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load -carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2. Exterior wall construction. 3. Equipment supports. 4. Piping, ductwork, conduit, vessels, and equipment. D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cuffing and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. 1.5 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. B. Existing Materials: Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of existing materials. 1.6 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1.7 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D. Existing Services: Where existing services are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services before cutting to avoid interruption of services to occupied areas. 1.8 PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1 . In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond -core drill. 4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. END OF SECTION 01731 SECTION 01732 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes demolition and removal of the following: 1. Selected portions of a building or structure. 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Control Measures: Submit statement that indicates the measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include measures for the following: 1. Dust control. 2. Noise control. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor Qualifications: An experienced contractor that has specialized in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction. C. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selectively demolished. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb. Immediately notify Architect and Owner. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site will not be permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire -protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with matefials so as not to void exisbng warranties. 1.7 REPAIR MATERIALS A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. 1.8 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged. D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations. 1.9 UTILITY SERVICES A. Existing Utilities: Maintain services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or operating facilities unless authorized in writing by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to Owner and to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide at least 72 hours' notice to Owner if shutdown of service is required during changeover. 1.10 PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. B. Temporary Partitions: Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise. C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1.11 POLLUTION CONTROLS A. DustControl: Use water mist, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Complywith governing environmental -protection regulations. 1. Wet mop floors to eliminate trackable dirt and wipe down walls and doors of demolition enclosure. Vacuum carpeted areas. B. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. C. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations, Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. 1.12 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations. 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. B. Existing Facilities: Comply with building manager's requirements for using and protecting elevators, stairs, walkways, loading docks, building entries, and other building facilities during selective demolition operations. C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 1.13 PATCHING AND REPAIRS A. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by selective demolition operations. B. Patching: Comply with Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching." C. Repairs: Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. 1. Completely fill holes and depressions in existing masonry walls that are to remain with an approved masonry patching material applied according to manufacturers written recommendations. D. Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing. E. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. F. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or re -hang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even -plane surface of uniform appearance. 1.14 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01732 SECTION 01770 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES I nODE C WN E APPROVED 1.1 SUMMARY I A. Inspection procedures. MAR 0 8 2016 B. Warranties. C. Final cleaning. 1.2 PROCEDURES A. Substantial Completion: Before inspection by Architect/Burlington PM: CifAt of TuWla C '.Y I . List of incomplete items (punch list) prepared. LBUILDING DIVISION 2. Owner advised of insurance changeover. 3. Warranties submitted. 4. Releases, occupancy permits, and operating certificates obtained. 5. Project Record Documents submitted. 6. Spare parts and extra materials delivered. 7. Final changeover of locks performed. 8. Startup testing completed. 9. Test/adjust/balance records submitted. 10. Temporary facilities removed. 11. Owner advised of utility changeover. R E C E I WP- D 12. Final cleaning performed. CITY OF TRN,11LA 13. Touch-up performed. 14. Turnover assessment survey submitted. B. Final Completion: Before final inspection by Architect: JAN 13 20116 1 . Final Application for Payment submitted. 2. List of incomplete items (punch list) endorsed by Architect as completed. 3. Evidence of continuing insurance coverage submitted. PERMIT CENTER 4. Final pest -control inspection report and warranty submitted. 5. Owners personnel instructed in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of equipment and systems. C. Warranties: Submitted within 15 days for areas of partial occupancy. 1. Organized and bound in heavy-duty, three-dng, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, with paper dividers. Binder front and spine identified with title, Project name, and name of Contractor. D. Final Cleaning: Each surface or unit cleaned to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. 1. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils for units operated without filters during oamdo&, END OF SECTION 01770 04 - - _J Ir T_ c) W Ui E 00 0 2 0 -0 U) co 0 C 0 01- 10 Lo @ U) 0" C\l LO 0 0 Q) C'4 0.) . . M E 4- 0 !E CD C:' N (0 a) LL) 2= 't 64 -066 U) u) a) = C5 o C,4 M N C'4 M (0 Q) Lo U) c)- 4- a) - r - _J op� �e c) W ry ry 00 1*10 PZ_ 0 0� 01- T_ 0 UJ Z LL UJ LLI 00 LU L) 00 0- U) < 0 Z T1_ CC) C) W 0- Lij M Z Z) < ZD 0 U) LLJ 0 < P Z U) -J - r - _J op� �e c) 0 ry ry 00 1*10 PZ_ 100 01- T_ DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET I 15-29-00 Q� r 3 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL SITE CONSTRUCTION cont'd SECTION 01781- PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Record Drawings and Record Specifications. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: 1. 3 sets of marked -up Record Prints. B. Record Specifications: 3 copies. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Record Prints: Blue- or black -line white prints of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings, marked to show actual installation. END OF SECTION 01781 SECTION 01782 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.1 SUMMARY A. Emergency operation and maintenance manuals. 1.2 PRODUCTS . A. Manuals: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl -covered, loose-leaf binders, 3 copies. B. Emergency Manuals: Types of emergencies, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. C. Operation Manuals: System and equipment descriptions, operating procedures, wiring diagrams, control diagrams and sequence of operation, and piped system diagrams. D. Product Maintenance Manuals: Source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds. E. System and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds. END OF SECTION 01782 - SITE CONSTRUCTI 'SEC`�ION 02230 - SITE CLEARING / 1 SUMMARY A. Removing existing trees, shrubs, ground covers, plants and grass. B. Clearinng,and grubbing obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation including grinding stumps and debris. C. Stripping an tockpiling topsoil and disposing of excess topsoil. D. Removing existi above- and below -grade site improvements. E. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, abandoning site utilities in place and removing site utilities. F. Providing temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures. �% ND OF SECTION 02230 ECTION 02300 - EARTHWORK /� A. Preparing sub -grades for slabs -on -gr de. / B. De waterin to rotect excavated sub rales. 9 P C. Excavating and backfilling or filling for build gs and structures, including footings fan foundations. D. Excavating and backfilling for utility trenches. / E. Excavation: Unclassified. F. Grading. G. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. H. Sub -base course for concrete walks and avements. \� / / P I. Sub -base and base course for hot -mix asphalt pavement. J. Draina a course for cast -in lace concrete slabs -on rade i 9 P 9 1.2 MATERIALS A. Soil Materials: 1. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classifi��cdtion groups. 2. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil ossification groups. 3. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials. Course: Natur �r crushed ravel crushed stone and natu a 4. Sub base and Base e g , 5. Engineered Fill: Natural or crush gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed 6. Beddin Course: Natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed 9 , 7. Drainage Course: Crushgd/stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel. 8. Filter Material: Natural,o� crushed gravel, or crushed stone and natural sand. 9. Sand: Natural or rr��ufactured. 10. Impervious Fill:�Clayey gravel and sand mixture. B. Geotextiles: Subsurface drainage and separation geotextile. C. Controlled to -strength material. D. Warning jape: Polyethylene film. 1.3 EXCAVAT�N A. Explosives: Not permitted. B. Disposal of Surplus and Waste Materials: Off Owner's property. .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL /A. Geotechnical Testing Agency: Owner engaged. ND OF SECTION 02300 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK or crushed sand. roots and A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork, complete with required shoring, bracing, and anchorage. 2. Concrete reinforcing, complete with required supports, spacers and related accessories. 3. Cast -in-place concrete, including finishing and curing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): B. ASTM International: C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI): 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. General -Submit Product Data for proprietary materials and items, including - but not limited to - the following: a. Reinforcement and Forming Accessories. b. Admixtures. c. Aggregate Sizes and Usage (for each class of concrete). d. Curing Compounds. B. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Design Data: Submit concrete mix design for each type of concrete. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. Unless specified otherwise in this Section, furnish and install cast -in-place concrete per: a. ACI 301: Passages from ACI 301 cited in this Section are hereby incorporated into the requirements of this Section. Where differences occur between the requirements of ACI 301 and this Section, the latter shall govern. . 2. Evaluation and Acceptance Criteria: Evaluation and acceptance of the Work of this Section will be per the provisions of ACI 117 and ACI 301. 1.05 CEMENT (ACI 301: 4.2.1.1) A. Cement: Conform to ASTM C-150, Type I. 1. Use one brand and type of cement throughout the Project. B. Aggregates: 1. Fine: Sand aggregate conforming to ASTM C-33, consisting of clean, sharp uncoated grains of strong material. 2. Coarse: Gravel or crushed stone conforming to ASTM C-33, consisting of clean, sharp uncoated grains of strong material. In general, provide coarse aggregates with the following maximum sizes: a. No larger than one fifth of the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms in which concrete is to be placed, and b. No larger than three quarters of the minimum clear spacing between reinforcing bars. 3. Slightly larger aggregate may be used where it is apparent that placing can be accomplished without hazard to the finish. 4. Combined aggregate gradation for slabs and other designated concrete shall be between eight and 18 percent for large top size aggregates (1 1/2 inch) or between eight and 22 percent for smaller top size aggregates (1 inch or 314 inch) retained on each sieve below the top size and above the No. 100. D. Water: Potable and clean, free from oils, acids, organic materials, or other deleterious substances. 1.06 ADMIXTURES (ACI 301: 4.2.1.4) [(ACI 302.1 R: 5.6)] A. General: Use of concrete admixtures shall have prior approval of the Architect/Engineer and shall be used in strict conformance with the Admixture Manufacturer's Instructions and recommendations. B. Water Reducing Admixtures: All concrete shall contain a high -range water -reducing admixture / superplasticizer, a mid-range water reducing admixture, or water -reducing admixture. Water reducing admixtures shall contain no more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 1. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture 1 Superplasticizer: a. Conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type F or G: 1) EUCON 37 or 537 by EUCO. 2) Rheobuild 1000 by DeGussa Admixtures. 3) Sikament 300 by Sika. b. Use "flowing" concrete containing the specified high -range water -reducing admixture where: 1) Conditions make consolidation difficult. 2 Reinforcement is con ested. g 2. Other concrete with a water/cement ratio between 0.45 and 0.50, shall contain either a high -range water -reducing admixture/superplasticizer (specified above) - or a mid-range water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type A: a. EUCON MR by EUCO. b. Sikament HP by Sika. 3. Remaining concrete shall contain the specified water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type A: a. EUCON WR -75 or WR -91 by EUCO. b. Plastocrete 160 by Sika. C. Non -Corrosive, Non -Chloride Accelerator: Concrete slabs placed at air temperatures below 50 -degrees Fahrenheit shall contain a non -corrosive, non -chloride accelerator conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type C or E, and containing no more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. . 1. Accelguard 80 by EUCO. 2. Rapid -1 by Sika. D. Water Reducing, Retarding Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C-494 / C -494M, Type D and containing no more chloride ions than are present in municipal drinking water. 1. EUCON Retarder -75 by EUCO. 2. Plastiment b Sika. Y E. Air Entraining Admixture: Concrete required to be air entrained shall contain an air -entraining admixture approved by the ArchitectlEngineer and conforming to ASTM C-260. F. Prohibited Admixtures: When used at the Admixture Manufacturer's recommended dosage, thiocyanate ions contributed by the proposed admixture shall not exceed 0.30 percent by weight of cement. Proposed admixture shall not cause an increase in shrinkage when tested per ASTM C-494 / C -494M and ASTM C-157. 1.07 CONCRETE MIX A. Proportion concrete to be homogeneous, readily place -able, uniformly workable, conforming to required setting time, and designed to attain the specified properties of strength, slump, entrained air, and water/cement ratio. B. Establish, based on mix designs from independent testing laboratories, minimum standards of proportions for all types of concrete to be used on the Project prior to concreting operations. C. If, at any time, tests indicate failure to meet strength, slump, or water/cement ratio, change the standard proportions to meet the requirements. D. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods per ACI 301. Minimum requirements for each class of concrete are listed in the Concrete Schedule (below). E. Concrete may be mixed to a moderate slump to enable the proper placing and finishing of slab areas but added care shall be taken in the placing. F. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall arrange for an approved independent testing laboratory to prepare the mix designs for the classes of concrete scheduled to be used. 1. Design concrete mixes per ACI 211.1 to produce the strength for each class of concrete required on the Drawings or specified herein. 2. Design the concrete so that the concrete materials do not segregate. G. Laboratory Test Reports: For concrete materials and mix designs, test as follows: 1. Mix designs shall be accompanied by complete standard deviation analysis or trial mixture test reports. If trial batches are used, the mix designs shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve an average compressive strength that is 1200 PSI - higher than the strength specified. a. Increase this over -design to 1400 PSI when concrete strengths over 5000 PSI are used. 2. Prepare trial mixes and cylinders in sufficient time to demonstrate the reliability of the mix designs prior to the placing of any concrete. 1.08 STRENGTH (ACI 301: 4.2.2.8.C) A. Compressive strength at 28 days: 4000 PSI. 1.09 AIR -ENTRAINMENT (ACI 301: 4.2.2.4) (ACI 302.1 R: 5.6.1) A. Add five percent plus or minus 1.0 percent air -entrainment to concrete. 1.10 SLUMP (ACI 301: 4.2.2.2) A. Upon arrival at the Site, maximum slump for conventional concrete shall be 4 inches. B. In concrete containing the high -range water -reducing admixture (superplasticizer) conforming to ASTM C-10171 C -1017M - or when a Type F or G high -range water -reducing admixture conforming to ASTM C-4941 C -494M is permitted - provide concrete with: 1. A water slump of between 2 and 3 inches before the admixture is added. This initial slump is increased to between 3 and 4 inches for concrete receiving a dry -shake hardener or for lightweight concrete. 2. A maximum slump of 9 inches at the point of delivery after the admixture is added. C. Concrete containing the mid-range water -reducing admixture shall have a maximum slump of 5 to 6 inches. 1.11 REINFORCING STEEL (ACI 301:3) A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A-615 / 615M, 60 KSI yield grade, deformed billet steel bars. Provide the following finish: Plain. B. Include spacers, chairs, bolsters, ties, and other devices necessary for proper placing, spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place. Hooking of wire mesh will be grounds for rejection of the installation. 1.12 CURING COMPOUNDS A. Liquid Membrane -Forming Non -Wax Curing Compound: Dissipating resin type conforming to ASTM C-309, Types S-1 and D-1, Class B. Minimum coverage shall be 300 square feet per gallon per coat. Subject to compatibility with selected fluid -applied flooring material, provide products by one of the following: 1. KUREZ DR VOX by EUCO. 2. (Or approved equal). 1.13 BONDING AGENTS A. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type ll. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ChemCo Systems; CCS Bonder Liquid, LWL or SWL. b. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Euco #352 Epoxy System Euco #452 Epoxy System or Euco #620 Epoxy System. c. Sika Corporation; Sikadur 31, Hi -Mod Gel Sikadur 32, Hi Mod Sikadur 32, Hi Mod LPL Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod LV or Sikadur 35, Hi -Mod LV LPL. d. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Epogel or Epogrip. 2. Thin Film Open Time: Not less than two hours. 1.14 CONCRETE DYE A. PROSOCO, Inc., Consolideck Gemstone Stain . 1.15 GENERAL A. Excessive honeycombing or the presence of embedded debris will be grounds for rejection of the installation. Notify the Architect/Engineer upon discovery. B. During hot weather, conform to ACI 305R. C. During cold weather, conform to ACI 306.1 and ACI 306R. D. Adding water to the concrete mix, while at the Site, is prohibited. Only make field adjustments to the design mix using pre -approved admixture materials. 1.16 FORMWORK (ACI 301: 2) A. Obtain the Architect/Engineer's review for use of earth forms. When using earth forms, hand -trim sides and bottoms, and remove loose dirt prior to placing concrete. 1.17 REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT A. Handle and place reinforcing steel per the recommendations of ACI 318 unless otherwise indicated by the requirements of this Section. e t aterials that could destro or B. Before placing concrete, verify that reinforcing steel is free from rust and scale, or other detrim n al m y reduce the bond placement. 1.18 PLACING CONCRETE (ACI 301: 5.3.2.6) A. Deposit concrete into the final position at the specified slumps without segregation by re -handling or flowing. Deposit concrete at a rate that concrete remains plastic and flow -able into the spaces between the reinforcing bars. Do not deposit partially hardened concrete or concrete that has been contaminated by foreign materials. Do not re -temper concrete. B. Schedule concreting that once started, remains a continuous operation until the particular section or panel has been completed. Do not deposit fresh concrete on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section or panel. Provide construction joints as specified. C. Thoroughly compact concrete by means of mechanical vibrators supervised by experienced personnel. Provide sufficient vibration intensity to cause flow or settlement around reinforcement, embedded items, and comers of the forms; but not long enough to cause segregation of the mix. Follow ACI 309R for use of vibrators and type of vibrators. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into receding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. D. Cold -Weather Placement: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. Comply with provisions of ACI 306.1 and ACI 306R and as follows: 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 -degrees Fahrenheit (4 -degrees Celsius), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 -degrees Fahrenheit (10 -degrees Celsius) and not more than 80 -degrees Fahrenheit (27 -degrees Celsius) at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Use only the specified non -chloride, non -corrosive accelerator. Calcium chloride or thiocyanates are not permitted. E. Hot -Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality or strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 -degrees Fahrenheit (32 -degrees Celsius). Mixing water may be chilled - or chopped ice may be used to control temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to equal total amount of mixing water. 2. Use water -reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. 1.19 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power -driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power -driven floats, or by hand -floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, re -float surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. B. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view. 1. After floating, begin first trowel -finish operation using a trowel of the Contractor's choice. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand -troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system. C. Slip -Resistant Broom Finish: Apply a slip -resistant broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, slabs, walks, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber -bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with the Architect/Engineer before application. 1.20 CURING AND PROTECTION (ACI 301: 5.3.6) (ACI 302.1 R: 9) (ACI 308.1) A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures - and maintain with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature - for the period of time necessary for early hydration of the cement and the proper hardening of the concrete. B. Cure exposed surfaces of concrete directly after finishing operations. Accomplish curing by one of the following approved methods. 1. Water curing consisting of ponding, fogging, or absorptive mat. 2. Sheet materials consisting of placing an approved waterproof cover on the exposed surfaces. Provide sheet materials meeting the requirements of ASTM C-171. 3, Curing Compounds. C. Cure concrete continuously for a minimum duration of seven days when the ambient temperature exceeds 50 -degrees Fahrenheit. Do not permit concrete to dry out prematurely. Reapply water as required to maintain a wet mat or sheet. 1.21 CLEANING A. General: 1. Upon completion of the Work, remove: a, Debris resulting from the Work of this Section. b. Excess materials, tools, and equipment. 2. Leave the Site in a clean and neat condition acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 03300 SECTION 03351 - POLISHED CONCRETE WORK 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes Installation of polished concrete floor system for new concrete pour. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 Cast -in -Place Concrete. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 302.1 R Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. 2. ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 3. ASTM C779 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide polished flooring that has been selected, manufactured and installed to achieve the following: 1. Abrasion Resistance: ASTM C779, Method A, high resistance, no more than0.008 inch (0.20 mm) wear in 30 minutes. 2. Reflectivity: Increase of 35% as determined by standard gloss meter. 3. Waterproof Properties: Rilem Test Method 11.4, 70% or greater reduction in absorption. 4. High Traction Rating: NFSI 101-A, non -slip properties. B. Design Requirements: 1. Hardened Concrete Properties: a. Minimum Concrete Compressive Strength: 3500 psi (24 MPa). b. Normal Weight Concrete: No lightweight aggregate. c. Non -air entrained. 2. Placement Properties: a.' Natural concrete slump of 41/2 inches - 5 inches (114 -127 mm). Admixtures may be used as specified in Section 03300. b. Flatness Requirements: 1) Overall FF 40. 2) Local FF 20. c. It is highly recommended that a laser -screed be used when placing concrete scheduled to be polished. Floor flatness is an important project requirement for the Owner. 3. Hard -Steel Troweled (3 passes) Concrete: No burn marks. Finish to ACI 302.1 R, Class 5 floor. 4. Curing Options: tion s ider cracks or other unsi htl marks caused b the cutin a. Damp curing is the recommended curing method. Discolora I p g y y g method selected will not be acceptable. The floor finish is an important project requirement for the Owner and the Contractor must use extreme care when placing and finishing the polished concrete floors. b. Membrane forming curing compounds (ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B, all resin, dissipating cure). 1) Acrylic curing and sealing compounds not recommended. c. Damp Curing: Ponding, fogging or continuous sprinkling - Seven day cure. 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review the following: 1. Environmental requirements. 2. Scheduling and phasing of work.. 3. Coordinating with other work and personnel. 4. Protection of adjacent surfaces. 5. Surface preparation. 6. Repair of defects and defective work prior to installation. 7. Cleaning. 8. Installation of polished floor finishes. 9. Application of liquid hardener, densifier. n f fini hed surfaces after installation. 10. Protectio o s 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit listed action submittals in accordance with Contract Conditions and Submittal Procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate information on shop drawings as follows: 1, Typical layout including dimensions and floor grinding schedule. 2. Plan view of floor and joint pattern layout. 3. Areas to receive colored surface treatment, if any. 4. Hardener, sealer, densifier in notes. C. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer's SPEC -DATA® product sheet, for specified products. 1. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). 2. Preparation and concrete grinding procedures. 3. Colored Concrete Surface, Dye Selection Guides, if any. 1.6 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Quality Assurance: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties as in 1.03 Performance Re uirements. cited q 2. If requested by Owner, provide these Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. b. Letter of certification from the National Floor Safety Institute confirming the system has been tested and passed phase Two Level of certification when tested by Method 101-A. c. Current contractor's certificate signed by manufacturer declaring contractor as an approved installer of polishing system. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products. 1. Include: a. Manufacturer's instructions on maintenance renewal of applied treatments. b. Protocols and product specifications for joint filing, crack repair and/or surface repair. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. 2. Installer trained and holding current certification for FGS PermaShine installation. 3. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing field service representation during construction and approving application method. B. Regulatory Requirements. 1. NFSI Test Method 101-A Phase Two Level High Traction Material. - C. Mock -Ups: 1. Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01400 - Quality Control. 2. Mock -Up Size: 100 ft sample panel at jobsite at location as directed. Acceptable sample may be incorporated into the finish floor. 3. Mock-up will be used to judge workmanship, concrete substrate preparation, operation of equipment, material application, color selection if any and shine. 4. Allow 48 hours for inspection of mock-up before proceeding with work. 5. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work. 6. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Delivery: 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packaging with identification labels and seals intact. C. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. . 2. Protect concrete slab. a. Protect from petroleum stains during construction. b. Diaper hydraulic power equipment. c, Restrict vehicular parking. d. Restrict use of pipe cutting machinery. e. Restrict placement of reinforcing steel on slab. f. Restrict use of acids or acidic detergents on slab. D. Waste Management and Disposal: - 1. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities 1.10 PROJECT AMBIENT CONDITIONS A. Installation Location: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.11 SEQUENCING A. Sequence with other Work: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sequencing construction operations. If project is a remodeling and existing floors are to be polished, pre -polish floors to a 200 grit prior to erecting interior walls. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Project Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions for project warranty provisions. B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer's warranty is in addition to, and does not limit, other rights Owner may have under Contract Documents. C. Warranty: Commencing on date of acceptance by Owner's Advisor. 1.13 MAINTENANCE A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions to maintain installed product. 1.14 EXTRA MATERIALS A. General Contractor to provide maintenance materials as recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - EXECUTION 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ensure manufacturer has minimum 5 years experience in manufacturing components similar to or exceeding requirements of project. 2.2 SYSTEM MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER k L Gemtone Stain b Prosoco. n olidec S S stem: Co s Y �Y B. No substitutions allowed. 2.3 MATERIALS A. Penetrating Hardener/Densifier: Clear liquid reactive lithium -silicate based. 1. Consolideck LS, by Prosoco. 2. No Substitutions B. Joint Filler 1. RS 88 Polyurea in complementary darker color to match Dyed and Natural Polished Concrete, by Metzger McGuire 2. HT-PE85 Polyurea in complementary darker color to match Dyed and Natural Polished Concrete, by Hi -Tech Systems 3. No Substitutions C. Grout Coat 1. 3380 Grout Coating 2. No Substitutions D. Overlayment 1. Deco Pour 2. No substitutions E. Small Crack Repair and Small Hole Repair 1. 2341 Polyaspartic 2. No substitutions. F. Dye: Solvent -base 1 Water -base dye color 1. Gemtone by Prosoco a. Welsh Slate. b. No Substitutions 2.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect. B. Deposit concrete continuously between construction joints. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. C. Cold -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. D. Hot -Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. 14 days prior to commencing work, meet with Owner and General Contractor and verify that concrete substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections or contracts, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to installation of concrete finishing materials. B. Verify Concrete Slab Performance Requirements: 1. Verify concrete is cured to 28day 3500 psi (24 MPa) strength. 2. Verify concrete surfaces received a hard steel -trowel finish (3 passes) during placement. C. If specified FF and FL numbers are not met, aggregate exposure will be varied due to low and high spots in the concrete. This must be discussed and approved. D. Notify if conditions present would affect polishing process. E. Do not begin surface preparation or installation until conditions are corrected and approved. F. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure surfaces are clean and free of dirt and other foreign matter harmful to performance of concrete finishing materials. B. Examine surface to determine soundness of concrete for polishing. C. General Contractor to remove surface contamination. 3.3 QUALITY CONTROL (PRIOR TO POLISHING) A. Testing and Inspecting: If slabs are existing and no reports are available, engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports. B. Concrete Tests: 1. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 2. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect. 3. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. Polished Concrete 1. Initial Metal Grind a. Start the grinding process with 40 Grit Metal Diamonds. 2. Joint Sealant a. Install Polyurea Joint Sealant into the joints, color to match finish color of floor, and scrape flush. 3. Progressive Metal Grinds a. Continue grinding the floor with an 80 Grit Metal Bond Diamond. b. Finish the metal grinds with using the 150 Grit metal -bond diamonds. 4. Polishing Steps a. Start the honing polishing process using a 100/200 Grit resin -bonded diamond b. Continue the polishing process using 400 Grit resin -bond diamond c. Continue the polishing process using 800 Grit resin -bond diamond d. Continue the polishing process using 1500 Grit resin -bond diamond e. Finish the polishing process using a high-speed propane floor burnisher and a Diamond Impregnated Burnishing Pad 5. Floor Dye a. In between the 100/200 Grit Resin -bonded diamond and the 400 grit resin -bonded diamond and before the installation of Floor Densifier, install Gemtone Dye, Welsh Slate color, in the designated areas. 6. Floor Densification a. After each resin -bond diamond is ran, apply Consolideck LS Lithium based densifier to the point of rejection. B. Finish Schedule 1. FS -1 a. Natural Concrete Polishing, no dye 2. FS -2 a. Welsh Slate 3.5 QUALITY CONTROL A. Field Testing: Engage a qualified walkway auditor to perform field testing according to NFSI 101-A to determine if polished concrete floor finish complies with specified static coefficient of friction. B. Inspect completed polished concrete floor system with Burlington Coat Factory representative, General Contractor, and installer. 1. Insure that polish concrete is acceptable to Burlington Coat Factory. 2. Remove any sealer, wax, stain guard, or acrylic sealer applied to concrete. 3. Eliminate any bleeding, rough edges, discoloring or any other effects not acceptable to Owner. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect completed polished concrete floor system from damage until Substantial Completion. 1. Do not allow construction materials, equipment, and tools on unprotected floor. 2. Prohibit parking of vehicles on concrete slab. 3. If construction equipment must be used for application, diaper components that might drip oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquids. 4. No tire embedments (rocks, nails, screws, etc.) that will scratch or pit slab surface. 5. Prohibit pipe cutting using pipe cutting machinery on concrete slab. stee embers on concrete slab. 6. Proh ibit tem ora lacement and stora a of I m P ryP 9 7. Prohibit acids and acidic detergents from contacting concrete surfaces. 8. Cover concrete floors with drop cloths or use breathable drop cloths during painting. If paint is spilled on concrete floor, remove paint immediately. 9. Protect slab surface from standing moisture for 72 hours to prevent re -emulsification of surface treatment prior to cure. 10. Install'/4" Masonite or other hardboard material over entire polished surface to protect from unwanted stains. B. Immediately remove mortar splatter, spilled liquids, oil, grease, paint, coatings, and other surface contaminants which could adversely affect completed polished concrete floor system. C. Repair damaged areas of completed polished concrete floor system to satisfaction of Owner or Owner's agent. END OF SECTION 03351 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY SECTION 04810 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Masonry Construction: 1. Single-wythe masonry. 2. Composite masonry. 3. Cavity walls. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Net -Area Compressive Strengths (fm) of Structural Unit Masonry: As indicated. C. Determine net -area compressive strength (fm) of masonry by unit -strength method. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Concrete Masonry Units (CMOs): 1. Units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: Normal weight. 3. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: Normal -weight units with finish indicated on drawings. B. Brick: Face brick as indicated on drawings. C. Reinforcing Steel: Uncoated steel bars. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: 1. Interior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. E. Ties and Anchors: Galvanized steel. Mill galvanized in interior walls. 1. Corrugated metal ties. 2. Individual wire ties. 3. Adjustable anchors for connecting to structure. 4. Partition top anchors. 5. Rigid anchors. 6. Stone Anchors: Stainless steel. 7. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors: slip -in and seismic. F. Embedded Flashing: 1. All Flashing: Copper. 2. Partially Exposed Flashing: Copper. 3. Concealed (Flexible) Flashing: elastomeric thermoplastic or EPDM (used with copper). 4. Single -Wythe CMU Flashing System: High-density polyethylene cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers. G. WeepNent Holes: round plastic tubing. H. Cavity drainage material. I. Reinforcing bar positioners. J. Masonry -Cell Insulation: Loose -granular perlite or molded -polystyrene units. K. Cavity -Wall Insulation: Extruded -polystyrene board. L. Mortar: Natural color. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. D. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, doorjambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 118 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 112 inch maximum. 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 118 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 112 inch maximum. 3,2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Built-in: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. I fr m and mason solid) with mortar unless otherwise indicated. D. Fill space between stee a es ry y E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. t startin course on footin s where cells are not routed. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar a g g g B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. C. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct -applied finishes (other than paint), unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 112 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. 3.5 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.6 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 112 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge. C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use open head joints to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose -fill insulation. 3.7 CLEANING A. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 4. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8 -2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.8 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Remove all excess masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. 3.9 INSTALLATION A. Match existing masonry coursing, bonding, color, and texture. B. Bond Pattern: As indicated. C. Cavity face of backup wythe purged. D. Clean masonry waste recycled as fill material. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged, with payment by Owner. END OF SECTION 04810 DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Structural and architecturally exposed structural -steel framing. B. Prefabricated building columns. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fabricator to select or complete simple shear connections to withstand design loads. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: AISC-Certified Plant, Category Cbd. B. Quality Standard: AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings -Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design." C. Mockups for each form of architecturally exposed structural steel. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Structural -Steel Shapes: W -shapes, channels, angles, M -shapes, S -shapes, plate and bar, cold -formed hollow structural sections and steel pipe. B. Castings: High-strength steel. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: High strength. D. Anchor Rods: Headed rods, nuts, plate washers, and washers. E. Connectors: Shear connectors, threaded rods, eye bolts and nuts and sleeve nuts. F. Primer: Zinc oxide. G. Grout: Nonmetallic, shrinkage resistant. 1.5 FABRICATION A. Shop Connections: Slip -critical high-strength bolts and welded connections. B. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP 2. C. Galvanizing: Hot dip. 1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1.7 INSTALLATION A. Field Connections: Slip -critical high-strength bolts and welded connections. 1.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL . A. Testing Agency: Owner engaged. END OF SECTION 05120 ECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS / .1 A.\Open-web K -series steel joists for roof framing. j B. K`series steel joist substitutes for roof framing. j C. LH -series long -span steel joists for roof framing. / D. DLH-series deep long -span steel joists for roof framing. /1 E. Joist girders`fpr roof framing. F. Special joists folvoof framing, designed by manufacturer. j G. Joist accessories�rcluding permanent bridging. j 1.2 MATERIALS / A. Bolts: High-strength carbbn steel. / 1. Finish: Hot dip zinc coo . B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15. Joists: 1Ni to -chord extensions. C. Open -Web K -Series Steel i p D. Long -Span Steel Joists: 1. End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel. `\ E. Joist Girders: � j � 1. End Arrangement: Underslung. \ / 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel. 1.3 ERECTION A. Place and secure steel joists in accordance with SJI "SpecifJcatigns", final shop drawings, and as herein specified. B. Placing joists: do not start placement of steel joists untilsupportiniwork is in place and secured. Place joists on supporting work, adji and align in accurate locations and spacing before p anently fasten 'ii\rg. C. Provide temporary bridging, connections, and aric ors to ensure lateral s bility during construction. D. Bridging: install bridging simultaneously with Oist erection, before constructi n loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top bottom chords where terminating at beams, asonry walls, and/or concrete wal . Coordinate bridging with mechanical duct locations Where new framing interrupts existing bridgg�g, provide new bridging to maintains 6optinuity. E. Fastening Joists: 1. Field weld joists to supporting steel framework in accordance with SJI "Specifications'�and as indicated on the drawings, for type o joists used. Coordinate we ing sequence and procedure with placing of joists. 2. Field bolt joists to supp ng columns which are not framed in at least two directions with 4r, tural steel members and at other locations indicated o he drawings. 7 F. Touchup painting: er joist installation, paint field bolt heads and nuts, and welded areas, abraded'ol rusty surfaces on joists and st su ortin membe §Wire brush surfaces and clean with solvent before aintin . Use same a of airy as used for sho aintin . PP 9 � P 9 tyP P P P 9 G. Supplemental) enforcing: reinforcing of top and bottom chords of joists for loads which are not applied at jo panel points shall be as shown on the drawings and will be provided under specification section 05120 "Structural Steel". 1.4 QUALITY CO��OL A. Quall ation of field welding: qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with American Welding�Society "Structui W lding Code," AWS D1.1. 1.5 FIEL QUALITY CONTROL . Testing Agency: Owner will engage testing agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections. E�tID OF SECTION 05210 SECTION 05400 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Exterior and interior load-bearing wall framing. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Engineering design of cold -formed metal framing by Contractor. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Standard: AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1.4 MATERIALS A. Studs for exterior walls shall be 16 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top and bottom runners of the same gauge. B. Studs for interior walls shall be 18 gauge (unless otherwise noted), sized in accordance with the drawings. Provide top and bottom runners of the same gauge. . C. Channels for bridging of studs shall be 18 gauge. D. Furring channels on exterior walls, where shown on the Drawings, shall be 2" deep, "Z" shaped and at 2'-0" o.c. to allow for installation of rigid insulation. E. Screws for installation of the various systems shall be the type recommended by the manufacturer, sized as required. F. Materials and Finishes: 1. For 18 gauge and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 33,000 psi. For 16 gauge and heavier use 50,000 psi sheet steel. 2. Provide galvanized finish on metal framing components complying with ASTM A 653, G 60. a. Finish of installation accessories to match that of main framing components, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended by stud manufacturer. 4. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM A 780. H. Accessories: 1. Bracing, Furring Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 2. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered. 3. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC - Paint 20 Type 1 Inorganic zinc rich. I. Fasteners: 1. Self -drilling, self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A123, hot -dipped galvanized to 1.25 oz/sq.ft. 2. Anchorage devices: Powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts, screws and sleeves. 3. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.3. 1.5 INSTALLATION n tions. II m I f m i r f rets tin or written instructions and recomme da A. General: Insta eta taming syste s n acco dance with manu actu p ted B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved, except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power driven fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide fasteners at corners and ends of tracks. C, Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside flanges. D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure. F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's recommendations and industry standard. in ear..h case, considering weight or loading resulting from item supported. G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each jamb of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full height studs of wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated. H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs; do not bridge the joint with components of stud system. I. Install horizontal stiffeners in stud system, spaced (vertical distance) at not more than 48 inches o.c. Weld at each intersection. J. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and vertical junctures) to produce flush, even, true _ to _ line joints. 1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated assemblies should not exceed 1116 inch, K. Field Painting: Touch-up damaged shop applied protective coatings. Use compatible primer for prime coated surfaces; use galvanizing repair system for galvanized surfaces. All welds shall be cleaned and coated with galvanizing repair system. L. Construct corners using a minimum of three studs. Double studs at wall openings, i.e. door and window jambs. M. Erect load bearing studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs is not permitted. N. Erect load bearing studs, brace and reinforce to develop full strength, to achieve design requirements. 0. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non -load bearing framing. P. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. Q. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud rotation. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: By Owner -engaged agency. END OF SECTION 05400 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Miscellaneous metal framing and supports. B. Loose metal plates and shapes. C. Miscellaneous fabricated metal items. 1.2 PRODUCTS A. Materials: Steel plates, shapes, and bars, Steel tubing and Steel pipe. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors, mechanical and electrical equipment and applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 2. Steel framing and supports (outriggers) for window -washing equipment. 3. Galvanize where indicated. 4. Prime with zinc -rich primer where indicated. C. Loose steel lintels, primed with zinc -rich primer at exterior walls. D. Shelf angles, primed with zinc -rich primer. E. Loose bearing and leveling plates, primed with zinc -rich primer. F. Steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for casting into concrete. G. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Steel angle comer guards, steel edgings and loading -dock edge angles. 1. Prime exterior locations with zinc -rich primer. H. Metal Bollards: Schedule 40 steel pipe, Steel shapes, as indicated. END OF SECTION 05500 SECTION 05521 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Aluminum pipe and tube railings. B. Steel pipe and tube railings. L TY A RANCE 1.2 QUA I SSU A. Fabricator to engineer and fabricate railings to withstand design loads. 1.3 FABRICATION A. Changes in Direction of Members: By bending or by inserting prefabricated fittings. B. Connections: Welded. 1.4 FINISHES A. Aluminum: Mill. B. Steel and Iron: Ungalvanized, primed with universal shop primer. END OF SECTION 05521 �: 0 ' - �`°' .. MAR 0 8 2016 'City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY CF TUI�WILA JAN 13 2016 PERI',��IT CENTER U cV J r � J N o a) C U CU a: U -0 () 00 � C �, o - ~ �-1 ..�MdN-� CV M C U m�Q�. . f[3 E � LLJ L N d N Q Q co c0 _T 00 0 0 N N c6 .3 04 � Lo (n a ,i-= N Iz A 3 DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET A7.1 15-29-00 Q CO z o o/ ~ 0ryCr Q � LLJ <t U Udo- Z L.L LL LLI ry w I-UWo0o Q Z � 0- C/5 0 � Q U LLJ LLJ U O� Q � 0 U) P � c) (D<0<C � Z > co J - J > O C) OCry00Y � � Q � Q 00 � r I- DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET A7.1 15-29-00 DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.1 SUMMARY A. Wood blocking and nailers. B. Wood furring. " C. Plywood backing panels. 1.2 MATERIALS A. Fire -Retardant -Treated Materials: 1. Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Application: All rough carpentry. a. Framing for raised platforms. b. Concealed blocking. c. Framing for non -load-bearing partitions. d. Framing for non -load-bearing exterior walls. e. Roof construction. f. Plywood backing panels. B. Dimension Lumber Framing: 1. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. 2. Framing Other Than Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade , any species. 3. Structural Lumber: No. 2 or better grade Douglas fir or yellow -pine. C. Plywood backing panels for telephone and electrical equipment. D. Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel where exposed to weather, in ground contact, in contact w/ treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity. E. Metal Framing Anchors: 1. Metal: Hot -dip galvanized steel. 1.3 INSTALLATION A. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- size furring at 16 inches o.c. END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 06160 - SHEATHING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Wall sheathing. 1.2 MATERIALS A. Wall Sheathing: 1. Paper -Surfaced Gypsum: Regular, 5/8 inch thick. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum: Regular, 518 inch thick. 3. Cellulose Fiber -Reinforced Gypsum: Regular, 518 inch thick. 4. Extruded Polystyrene Foam: Thickness indicated. B. Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized steel where exposed to weather, in ground contact, in contact with treated wood, or in area of high relative humidity. 1.3 INSTALLATION A. Gypsum Sheathing: 1. Screw to cold -formed metal framing. END OF SECTION 06100 SECTION 06402 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.1 SUMMARY A. Interior standing and running trim. B. Flush wood paneling. > C. Wood and plastic -laminate cabinets. D. Plastic -laminate countertops. s E. Solid -surface countertops. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: AWI, including installation. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed -grain hardwood. B. Composite Wood Products: Made without urea formaldehyde. C. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom. D. Interior Standing and Running Trim for Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Custom. 2. Wood Species: Any closed -grain hardwood. E. Flush Wood Paneling: 1. Type: Plastic -laminate slat wall as indicated on drawings. F. Plastic -Laminate Countertops 1. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades indicated for construction, installation, and other requirements. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Edge Treatment: As indicated. 4. High -Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: b. Pionite c. Formica G. Solid -Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Countertops: Samsung Staron QB244 Quarry Bluff 2. Integral Sink Bowls: Samsung Staron A3181 Pearl 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Install woodwork plumb, level, true, and straight with no distortions. Install to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8'-0" for plumb and level and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces. B. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work and refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts. with nk r t r n s stri in and blockln countersu C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secu e o g ou d , pp g g concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation. Except where pre -finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated. D. Standing and Running Trim and Rails: Install with minimum number of joints possible, use full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber n mi ers. available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Cope at returns a d ter at corn ING 1.5 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEAN A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjustjoinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch up factory -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that woodwork is being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 06402 SECTION 06640 - THERMOPLASTIC PANELING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass -fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. f PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat -finished, glass -fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. s b the followin : B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product y g r 1. Koroguard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation 2. Koroseal "Korogard" Protective Wallcovering: Rigid high -impact Korogard substrate sheet. a. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.040 inch. b. Texture: As noted in Finish Schedule. c. Color. As noted in Finish Schedule. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, as needed to . ide com r nd ca s conceal ed es ' i rn rs outs e s a Ins de co e P 9 1. Color: Match panels. anelin manufact r r men lastic u e . B A h iv : As recom ded b des e YP P 9 C. Sealant: Single -component, mildew -resistant, neutral -curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 07920 "Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not less than 12 inches wide. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive or staples. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 06640 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE CONTROL SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION 1.1 SUMMARY A. Applications: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs -on -grade. 2. Concealed building insulation. 3. Exposed building insulation. 4. Loose -fill building insulation. 5. Vapor retarders. 6. Sound attenuation insulation. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plenum Rating: Glass -fiber insulation rated for resistance against erosion and mold growth per UL 181. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Insulation: 1. Extruded -Polystyrene Board: Type IV, 1.60 Ib/cu. ft.. 2. Molded -Polystyrene Board: Type I, 0.90 Ib/cu. ft.. 3. Foil -Faced Polyisocyanurate Board: Type I, Class 1 or 2. 4. Unfaced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board: 1.0 Ib/cu. ft.. 5. Foil -Faced, Flexible Glass -Fiber Board: 1.0 Ib/cu. ft.. ' , 6. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Board: 2.25 Ib/cu. ft.. 7. Unfaced Glass -Fiber Blanket: Type I. 8. Faced Glass -Fiber Blanket: Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on 1 face. ock-Wool-Fiber Blanket: T e I. 9. Unfaced Slag -Wool Fiber/R yp 10. Faced Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket: Type III, Class A; Category 1, faced with foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on 1 face. 11. Cellulosic -Fiber Loose Fill: Chemically treated for flame resistance. 12. Glass -Fiber Loose Fill: Type 2 for poured application. B. Vapor Retarders: Reinforced polyethylene. 1.4 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrates and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. Notify Owner's Representative of any existing conditions, which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that work of other trades, which will be covered by insulation in complete and approved. 1.5 BATT AND BLANKET INSTALLATION A. Install insulation either friction fit, using adhesive, or mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations after mechanical and electrical services have been installed. B. Fit insulation tight within stud spaces, above soffits, behind facias, and tight to and behind mechanical and electric services within plane of insulation, leaving no gaps or voids. Butt insulation tightly. Cut and fit tightly around items penetrating insulation. Stagger and butt joints, or cavity of a cavity wall system. C. Within metal stud or joist systems install full height and width in such manner that voids or openings do not occur. Insulation is required for full width between studs, including cavity of each stud. Do not allow insulation to obstruct vents. D. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces. Cut insulation oversize to ensure tight butt joints when installed. Cut insulation to fit around protrusions and irregularly shaped projections. Use batts free of ripped backs or edges. E. Batt Insulation with Vapor Barrier Membrane 1. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm in winter side of building spaces. 2. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane over framing members; fasten in place at maximum 6 inches on center or tape in place. 3. Tape seal butt ends; lap side flanges and ends; do not tear membrane. 1.6 PROTECTION A. Protect insulation from moisture until building is made watertight. END OF SECTION 07210 M U a U- 0 a I° 0 a N N N Ir 0 C EC- ION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM EIFS .1 SUMMAR� A. Exterior insUliation and finish system (EIFS) applied over exterior sheathing. 2 QUALITY ASSURAhTC� i t n h r ate 'sties: Tested er ASTM E 119. A. Fire Res s a ce C a a rL p B. Fire Test: Full-scale diversified -per modified ASTM E 108. C. Mockups for each form of construe o -a d finish. 3 MATERIALS h It. If h lin rub er' a as a hin : Cold a lied full self a herin se ea d A. Flexible Membrane Flas g pp y d� g, g, p B. Insulation Adhesive: Factory -blended portland cement, d I mer adm' tune, and fillers. C. Board Insulation: Molded, rigid cellular polystyrene. D. Reinforcing Mesh: Standard impact (High Impact from fini ed floor to 8'�0" �.F.F.). E. Base -Coat Materials: Job -combined polymer em>�o adhesive and portland ce nt dry mix. F. Finish -Coat Materials: Standard acrylic -bas oating. G. Trim Accessories: PVC. 1. Type: Casing bead, Expans' n joint and Parapet cap. H. Elastomeric Sealants: in a component, nonsag, neutral -curing silicone. 4 FABRICATION A. Prefabricat Panel Framing Connections: Welded. 5 SOURC UAALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Owner engaged. 1.6 INSTALLATION_ A. Insulation: Mecfianicalt attached to substrate. B. Expansion Joints: 1. Where required by EIFS manufacturer. C. Double -Layer Reinforcing Mesh Application: Where in I ed D. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated. E. Finish Coat: Applied over base coat. 1.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspectio n esting: By Owner -engaged agency. END-OFS CTION 07241 ECTION 07543 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN TPO ROOFING PA T1 -GENERAL 1.1 UMMARY �A. Section Includes: 1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system. 1.2 PER' ORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Amer Performance: Provide roofin s stem with initial Solar Reflectance Index not I ess than 78 when calculated accordin to ASTM 1980 9Y 9 Y 9 B. Eb� sed on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency. nergy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Products Qualified Product List" for ow -slope roofl roducts. C. Energ Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70 and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested accordl g to CRRC-1. / 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer ( alifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane roofing system manufacturer install manufactu� is product. B. Source Limi tions: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for membrane roofing system from same anufacturer as membrane ro fing or approved by membrane roofing manufacturer. .4 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer a ees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Perio : 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. ART2-PRODUCTS 1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFIN A. Fabric -Reinforced Ther oplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible, TPO she . 1. Manufacturers: Sub'ect to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Firestone Buildin Products Company, UltraPly TPO b. Approved equal 2. Thickness: 60 mils, no 'nal. 3. Color: White 2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING ATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary membrane ro fing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for int nded use, and compatible with membrane roofing. n ' ri diction. I II m I with VOC limits of authorities haul u s 1. Li uid-t a auxilia matena s s a co 91 q YP ry P Y ith f llowin limits forVOCcontentwhen 2. Adhesives and sealants that are�ot on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply w e o g calculated according to 40 CFR 5 Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g . b. Gypsum Board and Panel-Adhe Ives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesi es: 70 gIL. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 gIL. e. Contact Adhesive: <250 gIL. f. Other Adhesives: 250 gIL. g. Single -Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 0 g/L. h. Non -membrane Roof Sealants: 300 gIL. i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrate • 250 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 77 gIL. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforce thermoplastic polyolefin s eet flashing, 55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water bas d. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness require for application. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel r aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 118 inch thick; with anchors. F. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plas Ic plates com lying with corrosion -resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptab to membr ne roofing system manufacturer. G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preform d cone nd vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T -joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and o er a cessories. 3 ROOF INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class Grade 2, felt or glass fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. B. R -Value: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide insula ' with minimum R -Value of 30 °F•ft2•h / Btu. Insulation requirements may vary with local authorities and regulations. C. Tapered Insulation (If shown on drawings): Provide factory -tap red ins lation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, an other insula ion shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. 4 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal orp astic plates complyi with corrosion -resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation and cover board to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recomy ended cold -applied adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate or to another insulation la er. / Y 5 WALKWAYS Flexible Walkwa s: Facto formed non orous eau du sli resistin surfac e t tured walkwa ads or rolls a roximatel 3/16 inch thick A. Y ty, P 9, Y P PP Y Y P ry and acceptable to membrane roofing system m nufacturer. . ART 3 -EXECUTION 1 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing sy tem components so insulation is not exposed to recipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system yard insulation manufacturer's written instructions for in tailing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or r min' he in ch dire tion. more layers with joints of each suco eding layer staggered from joints of previous Jaye a Imu of 6 Inc s ea c k in m t o rs ecificall esi n n ized t dee us Behan I f s e e s d ed a d s • 1nstall each la er of insul ti cure o a a E. Mechanically Fastened Insulation. y a on and se 9 p y 9 for fastening specified board-type'roof insulation to deck type. � 1. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof. .2 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOF] NG��ISTALLATION \ A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane roofing system7anufacturer's written instructions. B. Accurately align membrane/(oofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer..Stagger end laps. C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply o substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by manufacturer\and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to splice area of membrane roofing. D. In addition to adhering,�iechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and pen7ter of roofing. E. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. F. Seams: Clean seam, arI , s, overlap membrane roofing, and hot air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing hand sheet flashings according to manufacturer's w Nen instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edge with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane. twice dail it se am sam le areas. ' I I t� f and re a 2. Venfy fie d s e gth of seams a minimum o y p p 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements. \ 3 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashing's and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing syste manufacturer's written instf6ctions. B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not applyo seam area of flashing. � / tside corners wit r uncured sheet flashin . C. Flash pknetrations and field formed inside and ou h cured o g � D. Clean�/seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashing's into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam inst9llation. �\ E. Teyminate and seal top of sheet flashing's and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars. \ 4 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. jexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate w''th 7ompatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 7 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A/. Final Roof Ins ection: Arran e for roofin s stem manufacturer's technical personnel to ins ect roofin installation on completion. P 9 9Y P 9 i ate t o not com I wi i m r n m where in ' ns Ind c hat the d th s ec fie\ Repair or remove and replace components of me b a e roofing syste spectlo y p y p � requirements. !ND OF SECTION 07543 \ SECTION 07600 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Coping. 1.2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Coping: Provide aluminum coping similar to AP Snap -tight coping system as manufactured by PAC Clad. The coping shall be .050", smooth 5005H-34 alloy aluminum. Complete with all accessories including a baked enamel finish. 1.3 SHEET METAL FINISH A. High -Performance Organic Coating Finish: Apply the following system by coil coating process on galvanized steel sheet as recommended by coating manufacturers and applicator. 1. Fluoropolymer 2 -Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 2 -coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color. Match adjacent material finish color. b.. Resin Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fluoropolymer coating systems containing resins produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1) Elf Atochem North America, Inc. (Kynar 500) 2. Sheet Metal Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Atas Aluminum Corporation; Rapid Lock Coping. b. Metal Era Roof Edge Systems; EconoMe Coping c. WP Hickman; Universal Coping System. 1.4 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA "RAC/Aural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. IN AND PROTECTION 1.5 CLEAN G A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 ECTION 07720 - ROOF ACCESSORIES //I A. T its Section includes the following: j' 1. ,Roof hatches 1.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: / 1. Bilco Cts Type S-20 / 1.3 MATERIALS, GENtRAL j A. Commercial-Quall Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 with G90 coating complying with ASTM A 525. B. Insulation: Manufa rer's standard rigid or semi-rigid glass -fiber board of thickness indicated. m I in wi h AWPA C2• � v -round �e co t C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water home preservatives for abo e g p y g , not less that 1-112 inch t�0k. �� D. Fasteners: Same metal as mtetals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non- rroslve metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of"eVosed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 7 d' rovide non- emovable fastener heads. e terior ex sed fasteners affords access to bull In 1. Where removal of x �Q g, p r tl I in I 1 ride or block desi n of s on a neo rene. E. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard t I�ular or fingered design of neoprene or po yv y Ch o g p g p F. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is comp Ible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G, ani, / G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non -asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement desig od for trowel application of other adhesive compatible with roofing system. �� 1.4 ROOF HATCHES / A. General: Fabricate units to withstand 40-Ibf per sq.ft. e�xternal loading,and 20-Ibf per sq.ft. internal loading pressure. Frame with 9 -inch -high, integral curb, double wall 14 gauge construotjon with 17/2 inch insulation, cant strips and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner)Qnts/ rovide double-wall 14 gauge cover (lid) construction with 1 -inch insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip corrosion-resistarlt or hot -dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold -open devices, interior padlock hasps, interior security bars and b int nor and exterior latch handles. B. Type: Single -leaf personnel access; Bilco Type S-20 1. For Ladder Access: T-0" x Z-6". C. Materials: Zinc -coated steel sheets with red oxide,primer. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instr5bl ns and recommendations. Coo inate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units, roo�msulation, roofing and flashing, as req iced, to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined a cements are waterproof and weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates ade uate to withstand I ral and thermal stresses, as well as inward and o and loading pressure. q 1. Except as otherwise indicate , Install roof accessory items according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual". m ible metal o rrosive substrates includin wood B. Isolation: Where metal surf�+res of units are to be installed in contact with inco pat ICO g , apply bituminous coating,on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Unlessotherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. e ca as i e uired as com onent of accesso install to rovide ade uate v� ter roof overla with roofin D. Cap Flashing: Whir p fl h ng Is r q p ry, p q p P 9 or roof flashing s counter -flashing). Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant, except where overlap is indicia#ed to be left open for ventilation. E. OperationaWnits: Test operate units with operable components. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Adj t for proper operatio . 1.6 CLEANIN ND PROTECTION A. CI n exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END O SECTION 07720 ON 07811- SPRAYED A. Compatibilit and adhesion testing. 1.2 WARRANTY i I `f i warranties. Veri len th of warran eriod with manufacturers. A. Retain this Art c e ort p al fy g ty p B. Materials and Workmanship: Two years. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Concealed SFRM: Cementitiou r sprayed -fiber type with dry density not less than 15 Ib/ u B. Exposed SFRM: 1. Cementitious Type: Dry density not e�s�than 22 Ib/cu. ft.. 2. Sprayed -Fiber Type: Dry density not lessih n 22 Ib/cu. ft.. 3. Water-based intumescent mastic. C. Auxiliary Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Substrate primers. 2. Bonding adhesive. 3. Expanded metal lath. 4. Reinforcing fabric. 5. Reinforcing mesh. 6. Sealer. 7. Topcoat. \ 4 INSTALLATION j/ A. Exposed SFRM Finishe x 1. Cementitious� rayed. 2. Sprayed F'b�r: Sprayed with sealer. 5 FIELD QUALI ONTROL A. Sped Inspections: Contractor engaged. B�eng Agency: Owner engaged. ND OF SECTION 07811 SECTION 07841- THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Through -penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire -resistance -rated fire walls, floors, floor/ceiling assemblies. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide through -penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F -Rated Systems: F -ratings equaling or exceeding fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. i fir -r i t n -r t shaft enclosures. - ti n I t utside wall cavities and outs de a es s a ce a ed 2. T Rated Systems: For penetra o s oca ed o 3. L -Rated Systems: Where through -penetration firestop systems are indicated in smoke barriers. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Tested per ASTM E 814 by UL. 1.4 MATERIALS A. Accessories: Permanent forming/damming/backing materials and steel sleeves as needed to comply with performance requirements. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Identification: Preprinted metal or plastic labels, permanently attached. 1.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection of Installed Firestop Systems: By Owner -engaged agency according to ASTM E 2174 requirements. 1.7 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. One -Part Fire -Stopping Sealant to be used for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and partitions. 1. Manufacturers: a. Biotherm Fire Stop Sealant± Bio Fireshield, Inc. b. Dow Corning Fire Stop Sealant± Dow Corning Corp. c. 3M Fire Barrier Caul CP -25± Electrical Products DIV/3M d. SpecSeal Sealant± STI, Inc. END OF SECTION 07841 SECTION 07920 - JOINT SEALANTS 1.1 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing. B. Preconstruction field -adhesion testing. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Installer Warranty: Two years. 1.3 MATERIALS A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 gIL. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g1L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 gIL. B. Stain Test: ASTM C 1248. 1.4 JOINT SEALANTS A. Single -Component Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant [ES -1]: 1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795. b. Dow Corning Corporation; CWS. c. GE Silicones; UltraGlaze SSG4000. li nes Itr 4000AC. d. GE SI co , U aGlaze SSG ri S stem In .• P I-631. e. Pol me c s c S Y Y f. Schnee -Morehead, Inc; SM5731 Poly -Glaze Plus. g. Tremco; Proglaze SG. h. Tremco; Spectrem 2. i. Tremco; Tremsil 600. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. B. Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES -2): 1. Available Products: j. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex -1 a. k. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Ultra. I. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 1. m. Tremco; Vulkcm 116. n. Sherwin Williams 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, 0. C. Joint -Sealant Backing: Cylindrical. 1.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -adhesion testing. 1.6 SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application ES -1: For exterior joints, unless noted otherwise. om onent Neutral-Curin Silicone S Int ES -1 1. Joint Sealant: Single C p g ea a ( ) 2. Joint -Sealant Color: From manufacturer's standards. 2: For all interior'oints unless not th rwise. B. Joint -Sealant Application ES 1 ed o e 1. Joint Sealant: Single -Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant (ES -2) 2. Joint -Sealant Color: From manufacturer's standards. END OF SECTION 07920 DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard Hollow Metal Quality Standard: ANSIISDI A250.8. B. Custom Hollow Metal Quality Standard: ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861. C. Fire -Rated Doors and Frames: Positive -pressure testing. 1.3 PRODUCTS A. Standard Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Thermal -Rated Doors: Exterior and interior where indicated. 3. Exterior Doors: Metallic -coated steel sheet faces. a. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty). 4. Interior Doors: Cold -rolled steel sheet faces. a. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty). B. Standard Hollow Metal Frames: 1. Exterior Frames: Metallic -coated steel sheet; full profile welded. a. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042 -inch- thick steel sheet. 2. Interior Frames: Cold -rolled steel sheet; full profile welded. a. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042 -inch- thick steel sheet. b. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.042 -inch- thick steel sheet. C. Accessories: 1. Louvers: Sightproof, steel. D. Finishes: Factory priming for field painting. E. Vision Glass: Safety Glass 1. Section 08800 "Glazing." 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Metal -Stud Partitions: Frames filled with insulation. B. Concrete and Masonry Walls: Frames filled with grout. END OF SECTION 08110 SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS 1.1 QU ALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: AWI. 1. AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for doors. B. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Positive pressure testing. TR TION GENERAL 1.2 DOOR CONS UC , A. Low -Emitting Materials: Made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 1.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH Int ri rSolid-Core Doors: A eo 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Select white birch. 3. Cut: Rotary cut. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Pleasing match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Core: Particleboard. 7. Construction: Five or seven plies, bonded. 8. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 1.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Int ri r Solid -Core Doors: eo 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Faces: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option. 3. Core: Particleboard. 4. Construction: Five or seven plies, bonded. 5. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 1.5 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES Louvers: Extruded aluminum with clear anodic finish. A B. Light -Opening Frames: 1. Wood beads. 1.6 PRIMING / FINISHING A. Shop Priming: 1. Doors for Opaque Finish: One coat of wood primer. 2. Doors for Transparent Finish: Stain and first coat of finish. B. Factory Finishing: Contractor's option. C. Transparent Factory Finishes: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: Catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Effect: Open -grain finish. D. Opaque Factory Finishes: 1. Grade: Premium. END OF SECTION 08211 SECTION 08380 - TRAFFIC DOORS PART1-GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Medium to heavy duty traffic doors. 2. Hardware and accessories. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Prepared opening in masonry. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Steel channel or angle opening frame. C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Rough wood framing for door opening. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Do not lay flat. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard two-year warranty that products are free of defects in material and workmanship and guaranteeing to replace (exclusive of freight and labor) parts proven defective within two years after date of shipment to purchaser. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS Acceptable Manufacturer: Eliason Corporation; P.O. Box 2128, Kalamazoo, MI 49003. ASD. Tel: Tel: (800) 828-3655. Fax: (800)828-3577. Email: doors@eliasoncorp.com Website: www.eliasoncorp.com. A. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 TRAFFIC DOORS Medium to Heavy Duty Traffic Doors: High strength polymer cell core, 0.125 inch (3 mm) thick thermoplastic facing on both sides; total door thickness 314 inch (19 mm); (Model P-11 PLUS) A. Window Size: 9 inches (356 mm) wide by 30 inches (406 mm) high. B. Window Molding: Black rubber molding. C. Glazing: Clear double glazed acrylic. D. Thermoplastic Facing Color: 1. Color: Gray (110) E. Provide jamb guards and base plates as specified in Accessories below. 2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES feta hin es. A. Hinges: Double Action Easy Swing(r) propr ry g 1. Finish: Zinc coated. B. Jamb Guards: Use in high impact traffic areas to protect the doorjamb and bottom pin. Installed at bottom edges of doors. 1. Finish: Zinc coated. 2. Size: 3 inches wide by 9 inches high. C. Spring Bumpers: Easy Spring bumpers, 0.25 inch thick high impact resistant thermoplastic. 1. Dimensions: 18 inches high. 2. Color: Black. D. Base Plates: Base plates to install on base of door surface; in pairs for front and back. 1. None. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify jambs plumb and square. C. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. C. Fit and align door assembly including hardware. D. Minimum jamb construction of double studded 2 by 4 wood construction or equivalent. E. Reinforce hollow metal jambs at hardware locations. F. Steel channel jambs are required for heavy duty traffic doors. G. Adjust door assembly to smooth operation and in full contact with weatherstripping. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean doors, frames [and glass]. B. Remove temporary labels and visible markings. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08380 SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONT PART1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish and install aluminum architectural storefront system complete with hardware and related components as shown on drawings and specified in this section. B. All storefront systems shall be EFCO@ System 402 Flush -Glazed Shear Block Storefront. Other manufacturers requesting approval to bid their product as an equal must submit the following information fifteen days prior to close of bidding. 1. A sample storefront system (size and configuration) as per requirements of architect. 2. Test reports documenting compliance with requirements of Section 1.05. C. Glass 1. %" tempered spanderl glass, Viraspan Ceramic Frit - Opaque Frit, color to be Warm Gray #V933, as manufactured by Viracon. Contact Information Phone Number: 1-800-533-2080 Website: viracon.com 1.05 LABORATORY TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test Units 1. Air, water, and structural test unit size shall be a minimum of two lites high and three lites wide: B. Test Procedures and Performance 1. Air Infiltration Test a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 283 at a static air pressure difference of 6.24 psf (299 Pa). b. Air infiltration shall not exceed .06 cfm/SF (.30 Ilsmz) of unit. 2. Water Resistance Test a. Test unit in accordance with ASTM E 331. to leaks a at a static test ressure of 12.0 sf b. There shall be no uncontrolled wa r 9 P P . (575 Pa). 3. Uniform Load Deflection Test a. Test in accordance with ASTM E 330. b. Deflection under design load shall not exceed U175 of the clear span. 4. Uniform Load Structural Test 5 t' es the desi n wind ressure in 1.05.B.3.b. a. Test In accordance with ASTM E 330 at a ressure 1. Im P 9 P b. At conclusion of the test, there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, storefront parts, or any other damage that would cause the storefront to be defective. C. Project Wind Loads Project specific Architect to specify design wind pressure, both positive and negative required by the governing building code, as calculated from ANSI A58.1, or as determined by boundary layer wind tunnel testing. Use 20.0 psf (958 Pa) as minimum. 1. The system shall be designed to withstand the following loads normal to the plane of the wall: a. Positive pressure of _ psf (_ Pa) at non -corner zones. b. Negative pressure of _ psf (_ Pa) at non -corner zones. c. Negative pressure of _ psf (_ Pa) at corner zones. 1.06 FIELD TESTING AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Test in accordance with AAMA 501.2 for spray test only or AAMA 503.92 for pressurized test. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide test reports from AAMA accredited laboratories certifying the performance as specified in 1.05. B. Test reports shall be accompanied by the storefront manufacturer's letter of certification stating that the tested storefront meets or exceeds the referenced criteria for the appropriate storefront type. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit shop drawings; finish samples, test reports, and warranties. 1. Samples of materials as may be requested without cost to owner, i.e., metal, glass, fasteners, anchors, frame sections, mullion section, corner section, etc. 1.10 WARRANTIES A. Total Storefront Installation 1. The responsible contractor shall assume full responsibility and warrant for one year the satisfactory performance of the total storefront installation. This includes the glass (including insulated units), glazing, anchorage and setting system, sealing, flashing, etc., as it relates to air, water, and structural adequacy as called for in the specifications and approved shop drawings. 2. Any deficiencies due to such elements not meeting the specifications shall be corrected by the responsible contractor at their expense during the warranty period. B. Window Material and Workmanship 1. Provide written guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for 1 year from the date of final shipment. C. Glass 1. Warranty period shall be for 10 (ten) years. D. Finish 1. Frame and accessories to have a clear anodized aluminum finish. 2. Warranty period shall be for 3 years from the date of final shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aluminum 1. Extruded aluminum shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper. B. Glass 1. Ship open for 114" tempered glass: a. Exterior lite -'/4" tempered spandrel glass, Viraspan Ceramic Frit - Opaque Frit, color to be Warm Gray #V933, as manufactured by Viracon. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General n v minim m wall thickness of .080 2 mm . 1. All aluminum frame extrusions shall ha e a u ( ) 2. All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design with all joints. System design shall be such that raw edges will not be visible at joints. 3. Subsill - Utilize 8433 subsill to facilitate water control. 4. Simulated Divided Light - 9940 perimeter and 8785 exterior grid are required as shown on plans. B. Frame 1. Depth of frame shall not be less than 41/2" (114 mm). 2. Face dimension shall not be less than 2" (50 mm). 3. Frame components shall be shear block construction. . C. Glazing 1. All units shall be "dry glazed" with gaskets on both exterior and interior of the glass. System will be outside glazed. D. Finish 1. Anodic a. Finish all exposed areas of aluminum windows and components with electrolytically deposited color in accordance with Aluminum Association Designation AA Description Description Arch. Class AAMA Guide Spec. AA -M10 -C22 -A41 Clear Anodized 1 611-98 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Job Conditions 1. Verify that openings are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, plumb, level, clean, provide a solid anchoring surface, and are in accordance with approved shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Use only skilled tradesmen with work done in accordance with approved shop drawings and specifications. B. Storefront system shall be erected plumb and true, in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades. in I r i h lumb and level condition without distortion. Weather st ri in . Entrance doo rs shall be secure) anchored ace to a st a t C Y P 9. P � � PP 9 contact and hardware movement shall be checked and final adjustments made for proper operation and performance of units. vi w r 'hin allation at all 'oin nd intersections and at o enin e rimeters. D. Furnish and apply sealing materials to pro de a Bathe tlg t st 1 is a p g p E. Sealing materials specified shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions, and shall be applied only by mechanics specially trained or experienced in their use. All surfaces must be clean and free of foreign matter before applying sealing materials. Sealing compounds shall be tooled to fill the joint and provide a smooth finished surface. 3.03 ANCHORAGE A, Adequately anchor to maintain positions permanently when subjected to normal thermal movement, specified building movement, and specified wind loads. 3.04 Protection and Cleanin 9 A. The general contractor shall protect the aluminum materials and finish against damage from construction activities and harmful substances. The general contractor shall remove any protective coatings as directed by the architect, and shall clean the aluminum surfaces as recommended for the type of finish applied. SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS menta n i i n and Division 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supple ry Co d t o s Specification Sections, apply to this Section. o 1.2 SUMMARY A. Thic section includes the following types of automatic entrance doors: 0 1. Exterior and interior, single and bi-parting, sliding automatic entrance doors with sidelites. B. Related Sections: � 1. Division 7 Sections for caulking to the extent not specified in this section. 2. Division 8 Section , Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts, for entrances furnished separately in Division 8 Section. 0�� 3. Division 8 Section . Door Hardware_ for hardware to the extent not specified in this Section. E 4. Division 8 Section . Glazing, for materials and installation requirements of glazing for automatic entrance doors. � 5. Division 26 and 28 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic entrance door � operators and access control devices. c0 1.3 REFERENCES ai A. References: Refer to the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code. Z 3. CUL - Approved for use in Canada. 4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. LL 5. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. � B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA). LU 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2. ANSI Z97.1 Standards for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. � C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL). Q 1. UL 325 Standard for Safety for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver and window Operators and Systems. Z D. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). J 1. CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 247 - Operators and Systems of Doors, Gates, Draperies, and Louvers. E. American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM). � � F. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and U Tubes. Q � 2. ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. G. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA). 1. AAMA 611 Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 0 H. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). i- 1. Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural Metal Products. ~ I. International Code Council (ICC). >- 1. IBC: International Building Code Building Code. - 2. CBC: California Building Code. (D<0< 1.4 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to activate the operation LU of the door. 1. Knowing act: Consciously initiating the opening of a power operated door using acceptable methods including J wall mounted switches such as push plates and controlled access devices such as keypads, card readers and key J switches. O B. Safety Device: A device that detects the presence of an object or person within a zone where contact could occur and provides a signal to stop the movement of the door. C. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide doors that have been designed and fabricated to comply with specified performance requirements, as � demonstrated by testing manufacturer's corresponding standard systems. Q B. Compliance: 0- 1. ANSI/BHMA A156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. F- 2. UL 325 listed. C. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic. D. Automatic Door equipment accommodates up to the following weights for active leaf doors: - er active breakout leaf. . 1. Bi part doors: 300 lbs (136 kg) p 2. Single doors: 300 lbs (136 kg) per active breakout leaf. E. Operating Temperature Range: -31 F to 122 F (-35 C to 50 C) . F. Entrapment Force Requirements: REVIEWED FOR 1. Power Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 Ibf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing. O®E C OMPLIANCE r k wa device shall re uire no more than 50 Ibf 222 a lied 1 inch 25 ; m 2. Slidin doors rovided with a b ea a ( M PP ( 9 P Y q tPPROED k n I to o en. from the leading edge of the lock stile for the brea out pa e p 1.6 SUBMITTALS �y�� 8 2�� A. Comply with Division 01 - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of . individual components and profiles, fabrication, operational descriptions and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's shop drawings, including elevations, sections and details, indicating iCO� of Tukwila dimensions, materials, and fabrication of doors, frames, sidelites, operator, motion /presence sensor control device, BUILDING DIVISION anchors, hardware, finish, options and accessories. D. Samples: Submit manufacturer's samples of aluminum finish. . E. Informational Submittals: Manufacturer's product information and applicable sustainability program credits that are available to contribute towards a LEED rated project certification. 1. Credit MR 4.1 and 4.2: Manufacturer's or fabricator's certificate indicating percentage of post -consumer recycled content by weight and pre -consumer recycled content by weight for each Product specified under this Section. F. Manufacturers Field Reports: Submit manufacturer's field reports from AAADM certified technician of inspection and approval of doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.10 after completion of installation. r vide manufacturers o eratin and ma intenance manuals for each item M int Hance Manuals: P o G. O eratin and a e P 9 P 9 comprising the complete door opening installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Submittals. The manual to include the name, address, and contact information of the manufacturers providing the hardware and their nearest service representatives. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test to include spare p, a RECEI 1E parts list. H. Warranties and Maintenance: Special warranties and maintenance agreements specified in this Section. CITY OF W I��`��ILA JAN 13 2016 PERMIT CENTER UN J � r J o a`) ) C co 0 L �U)o � L.L - � � � � 0�� O Q N 0) E U a� N � � Q Q � oo*-oo �N CCNN.� c0 to (n ai I Go DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET A7.2 2015-29-00 N t 1 O Q co >- z O L.L Se 0�� Q � a- 0 V Q Z LL W � LU I-U�o0 � 0- Q ry Z J � W � � � U Q � ZD=Q � 0 Cn i- � ~ � >- Z) - U (D<0< LU z U) J J O Q � Q 00 0- � F- DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET A7.2 2015-29-00 N t 1 O co 0 n_ 0 (D Cn "5: C. C�4 DIVISI )N 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS cont'd SECTION 08460 - AUTOMATIC SLIDING DOORS cont'd 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 10 years of documented experience in manufacturing of doors and equipment of similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. 1. A manufacturer with company certificate issued by AAADIVI. B. Installer Qualifications: Installers, trained by the primary product manufacturers, with a minimum 3 years documented experience installing and maintenance of units similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Certified Inspector Qualifications: Certified by AAADM. D. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain each type of door, frame, operator and sensor components specified in this Section from a single source, same manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. E. Power -Operated Pedestrian Door Standard: ANSI/BHMAA156.10 (current version) F. Emergency Exit door requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for automatic entrance doors serving as a required means of egress. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic entrances by field measurements before fabrication and indicate on shop drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of recesses in concrete floors for recessed tracks and thresholds if applicable. Concrete, reinforcement and formwork are specified in Division 03. B. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic entrances with connections to power supplies and access control system as applicable. 1.10 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Automatic Entrance Doors shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of One ( 1) year from the date of substantial completion. C. During the warranty period a factory -trained technician shall perform service and affect repairs. A safety inspection shall be performed after each adjustment or repair and a completed inspection form shall be submitted to the Owner. D. During the warranty period all warranty work, including but not limited to emergency service, shall be performed during normal business hours. E. Manufacturer shall have in place a dispatch procedure that shall be available 24 hours a Day, 7 Days a week for emergency call back service. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturer: ASSAABLOY Entrance Systems, 1900 Airport Road, Monroe, NC 28110. Toll Free (877) SPEC -123. Phone (704) 290-552OFax (704) 290-5555Websitewww.assaabloyentrance.com contact: speedesk.na.aaes@assaabloy.com B. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures outlined in Division 1, Section,. Substitution Procedures, . Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES A. Model: Besam SL500 sliding automatic doors. (Basis of Design) 1. Aluminum doors and frames with sidelites and active door leaves. 2. Overhead concealed, electro -mechanical, microprocessor controlled, sliding door operator. 3. Operator housing, guide system and door carriers. B. Sliding Automatic Entrance Doors Configuration: 1. Single slide, full breakout, door system. a. Configuration: Single slide, two equal panel door unit with one operable leaf and one pocket type sidelite unit. b. Traffic Pattern: Two-way. c. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Interior sliding leaf and sidelite unit. d. Mounting: Overhead header installed between jambs. 2. Dimensions: Confirm door package dimensions as indicated on Architectural drawings. 2.3 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES A. Doors and Frames: Extruded Aluminum, Alloy 6063-T5. I . Door panels shall have a minimum .125 inch (3.2 mm) structural wall thickness including adjoining horizontal members and perimeter frames where applicable. 2. Door Construction shall be by means of an integrated corner block with 3/8 inch all -thread through bolt from each stile. 3. Glass stops shall be.062 inch ( 15.8 mm) wall thickness and shall provide security function as a standard by means of a fixed non -removable exterior section with glazing to be performed from the interior only. Glazing stops that allow for glass removal from the exterior shall not be deemed as equivalent. 4. The sliding door system shall include two interlocks securing the leading stile of the sidelite and the buff stile of the sliding door panel together. 5. Vertical Stiles shall be narrow stile 2-1/8 inch (54 mm) . Bottom Rails shall be standard 7 inch ( 178 mm) Intermediate Muntin shall be 1-3/4 inch (45 mm) . 7. Weather-stripping shall be slide -in type, replaceable pile mohair seals retained by the aluminum extrusions. The following types of weather-stripping are required: complementing weather-stripping on the joining vertical stiles of the sidelite and sliding door panels, complementing weather-stripping on the lead edge of the lock stiles of bi-parting doors, single pile weather-stripping between the carrier and the header, single pile weather-stripping on the lead edge stile of single slide door panels, dual pile weather-stripping on the pivot stile of breakout sidelite panels, and dual pile weather-stripping on the butt stile of fixed sidelite panels. Bottom rails shall be provided with an adjustable nylon sweep. a. Glazing Active Door and Sidelite Panels: Insulating glass, thickness as indicated. b. Hydraulic closer (s) to return breakout door and sidelite panels to the closed position, and magnetic catch (s) to retain breakout door and sidelite panels in the closed position. B. Glass: Glazing shall comply with ANSI Z97.11, thickness as indicated. 1. Glazing Active Door Panels: 1. (25mm) 2. Glazing Sidelite Panels: 5/8. (16mm) 3. Glazing Installation: See Division 8 Section Glazing for requirements. a. All Glazing furnished. by others. . C. Door Carriers: Manufacturers standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment. 1. Carriage Assembly: Carriage bar with two wheel assemblies. Each assembly shall have tandem roller wheels. 2. Roller Wheels: Two heavy duty Delrin roller wheels per wheel assembly, for a total of four (4) roller wheels, 1-7/16 inch (36.51 mm) diameter, per active door leaf for operation over a replaceable aluminum track. Single journal with sealed oil impregnated bearings. 3. Two (2) heavy duty self -aligning anti -risers per leaf. D. Framing Members: Provide automatic entrances as complete assemblies. Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum framing reinforced as required to support loads. 1. Vertical jambs shall be 1-3/4 inches (44.5mm) by6inches (152.4mm) E. Header: Manufacturer's standard one-piece extruded aluminum header with a replaceable aluminum track extending full width of entrance unit. Header to conceal door operators, carrier assemblies, and roller track; complete with hinged access panel for service of door operator, and controls. 1 . Span: Maximum 16�-O. (4.9 m) without intermediate supports when using 1/4 -inch glass. a. Capacity: Capable of supporting active breakout leafs up to maximum of 300 lb ( 136 kg) per leaf when header is supported per manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Size: 6 inches ( 152.4 mm) wide by 7 inches ( 177.8 mm) high. a. Header height including the sensor plate cap which spans the clear door opening width is 8-1/2 inches (215.9 mm) high. 3. Hinge Point: Continuous hinge at top of header allows for complete access to operator and internal electronic and mechanical assemblies. 4. Design: Manufacturers standard closed header. F. Hardware: Provide manufacturers standard hardware as required for operation indicated. 1. Breakaway arms and bottom pivot assemblies shall be supplied by the manufacturer and shall be adjustable to comply with applicable codes. a. Wind resistant hydraulic damper to control movement of breakout panels. 2. Locking hardware shall be provided as indicated. a. Exit devices shall lock the breakout function while allowing emergency egress at all times. Exit devices in combination with the automatic slide locking hardware to be provided on secured doors. Automatic locking for the sliding door when the door control switch is in the closed position. 1) Exterior jamb mounted key switch to unlock sliding door operation. 3. Keyed cylinders shall be provided as indicated. a. Manufacturer's standard keyed cylinder. G. Guide Track/Th res hold: Manufacturer's threshold as indicated. 1. 1/2 inch ( 12.7 mm) high by 4-1/2 inch ( 114.3 mm) width continuous aluminum threshold with integral track shall span the entire width of the sliding door header and fit between the vertical framing members. Threshold design shall allow for optional extruded ramps to securely interlock to flat section to meet ADA requirements. a. Surface mounted threshold with interlocking ADA accessible ramps. 2.4 SLIDING DOOR OPERATOR A. Door Operator and Controller: 1. Electro -mechanical controlled unit utilizing a high -efficiency, energy efficient, DC motor requiring a maximum of 3 amp current draw, allowing 5 operators on one 20 amp circuit. The supplied system shall have the capability to operate at full performance well beyond a brown out and high line voltage conditions (85V - 265\0 sensing changes and adjusting automatically. The operator shall allow an adjustable hold open time delay of 0 to 60 seconds and have internal software to incorporate a self-diagnosbc system. B. Microprocessor Control Box: I . Modular control unit to allow for changing technology. Factory -adjusted configuration with opening and closing speeds set to comply with ANSI/BHMA All 56.10 requirements and electronic dampening to reduce wear on drive train. Should the drive train operations deviate from design criteria ranges, Watchdog Control Circuit Monitoring will assume command of the system and shut down the automatic function allowing a secondary supervisory circuit to perform as a backup. Control unit shall allow the following functions: a. Diagnostics with the ability to produce application data. 2. Mode Selector Control: a. Multi -position rotary knob mode selector switch to be interior jamb mounted and shall allow selection of the indicated functions to be engaged when switch is turned to the appropriate setting. b. Mode selector control to allow the following functions: 1) Off - 2) Exit Only, one way traffic with automatic operation from the interior. 3) Two Way Traffic, allowing automatic operation from exterior and interior. 4) Partial Opening- energy saving door position allows door to automatically adjust opening width based on amount of usage, that is, full open during high use and partial open during low use. The control for this setting is programmable allowing adjustment to both the usage setting and the opening width. 5) - Hold Open, doors activated and held in the full open position. 2.5 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY CONTROL DEVICES A. General: Provide the types of activation and safety devices specified in accordance with ANSI/BHMA standards, for the condition of exposure and for long-term, maintenance -free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. Coordinate activation and safety devices with door operation and door operator mechanisms. B. Combination Activation Motion Sensor/Safety Presence Sensor: I . Shall be a sliding door sensor utilizing K -band microwave technology to detect motion and focused active infrared technology to detect presence, combined in a single housing surface mounted on each side of the header. a. Presence sensor shall remain active at all times. b. The sensor shall communicate with the automatic door operator through a self-monitoring connection that allows the door to go into a fail safe mode preventing the door from closing in the event of a sensor failure. 2. Motion/presence detecting sensors to be field installed and adjusted. 2.6 ELECTRICAL A. High -Efficiency DC Motor: Maximum of 3 amp current draw, allowing 5 operators to run on one 20 Amp circuit. B. Power: Self -detecting line voltage capable control. 120 VAC through 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 3 amp minimum incoming power with solid earth ground connection for each door system. C. Key Impulse Input: Input for card readers or remote activation with independent adjustable hold open delay. D. Wiring: Separate internal channel raceway free from moving parts. E. Brown out / high voltage capability: System has capability to operate at full performance well beyond brown out and high voltage line conditions (85 V - 265 V) sensing changes and adjusting automatically. 2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Anodized Finish: 1. AAMA 611, Custom anodized to match architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical source power to verify actual locations of wiring connections. C. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure non -movement joints. B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place. 1. Install surface mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets and guides level and true to location with anchorage for permanent support. C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system as specified in Division 26 Sections. D. Glazing: Glaze sliding automatic entrance door panels in accordance with the Glass Association of North America (GANA) Glazing Manual, published recommendations of glass product manufacturer, and published instructions of automatic entrance system manufacturer. E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in division 7 Section - Joint Sealants- to provide weather tight installation. 1. Set thresholds, bottom guide and track systems and framing members in full bed of sealants. 2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant. F. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door and sidelite as required by ANSI/BHMA Al 56.10 and manufacturers installation instructions. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance and guidance for installation of doors. 2. Before placing doors into operation, AAADM certified technician shall inspect and approve doors for compliance with ANSI/BHMA Al 56.10. Certified technician shall be approved by manufacturer. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust door operators, controls and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for weather tight closure. Adjust doors in compliance with ANSI/BHMA All 56.10. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door installation. B. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess sealants, compounds, dirt and other substances. Repair damages finish to match original finish. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section Glazing for cleaning and maintaining glass. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory -authorized representative to train Owners maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain safe operation of the door. oil SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE 0.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing doors and frames. 1.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as shown on construction drawings. 1.3 SCHEDULED HARDWARE A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the "Hardware Group" on the drawings. 1.4 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Owner. 1.5 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. END OF SECTION 0871 SECTION 08716 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART[ -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Automatic swinging door package consisting of operator, aluminum door, motion sensor and presence sensing safety device. Perform installation by the local certified Besam Distributor. Besarn Program Module to be used by installer during installation. For the name and number of your local Besam distributor, please call tol-free (866) 237-2687. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS OF THE SPECIFICATION: A. Section 08410 - Aluminum entrances and storefronts B. Section 08710 -Door hardware C. Division 1600 - Electrical D. Section 08810 -Glass& glazing E. Section 07920 - Caulking & sealants 1.03 REFERENCES - (Codes & Approvals) A. Package described complies with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. Swingmaster MP operator is listed with ANSI/UL 325-1997 standard for Door, Drapery, Gate, Louver, and Window Operators and Systems. Swingmaster MP operator is also CUL approved (for use in Canada) . 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Automatic door equipment accommodates medium to heavy pedestrian traffic and up to 250 pound ( 114 kg) weight of doors. B. Motion and presence sensor capable of operating within temperature ranges of Operating temperature range of -30 degrees F (-34 degrees C) to 131 degrees F (55 degrees Q 1.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Spare parts list and owners manual are available from the manufacturer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Local certified Besam distributor to install operator in accordance with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors and local applicable codes 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section shall have minimum ten years experience and be a member of the American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (AAADM) . Prior to placing door (s) in operation, an AAADM technician should inspect the doors for compliance with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. B. Manufacturer to provide FACTORY owned central dispatch system for warranty service throughout North America. System to be available 24 hours a day, 365 days per year with a factory employee (not an answering service) to obtain malfunction information and dispatch appropriate service agency to the customer location. Toll free 1-877-BESAM-US to be prominently displayed on header of each operator. To insure quality service dispatching, outside contractors or answering services will not be accepted. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Besam's automatic door components are warranted to be free of defects in materials or workmanship under normal use for a period of one year from the date of shipment from Besam's factory when the components have been installed by an authorized Besam distributor. Abuse, misuse, modification or improper repair or service by unauthorized technicians negates this warranty. During the period of this warranty Besam, at its sole option, will repair or replace any Besam automatic door component or parts thereof found to be defective in material or workmanship if any necessary return charges are prepaid. Components repaired or replaced under this warranty are warranted only for the remainder of the period covered by this warranty. For expanded warranty terms see Besam's warranty certificate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Provide PassPort 900OMP automatic swinq door package as manufactured by Besam, Inc., Monroe, NC 28110. Perform installation by the local certified Besam Distributor. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. PassPort 900OMP package consists of Swingmaster MP overhead concealed operator unit (surface mounted operator is also acceptable) , PassPort swing door presence sensor, SentryScan motion detector, lock -out relay, PassPort beam kit, and center pivoted swing door. 2.03 AUTOMATIC SWING DOOR OPERATOR A. SWING DOOR OPERATOR UNIT: Swingmaster MP overhead concealed (or surface mounted) electro -mechanical, microprocessor controlled operator, powered by 24 volt, 1/4 hp motor. Completely assembled and sealed unit which includes helical gear drive transmission and interconnected rack and gear system for compression of exterior replaceable heavy duty spiral spring, all contained within a die cast aluminum housing and filled with special lubricant for extreme temperature conditions. Drive shaft is minimum 15/16" (24mm) thick containing 14 tooth splines to maximize bearing surface contact with drive arm assembly and eliminate slippage and door latch drifting. Interfaced with the transmission system is a DC shunt-wound permanent magnet motor with sealed ball bearings. System operates from 120 VAC -60 cycle -1 phase power supply. The operator is mounted in the header case housing using vibration isolators to maintain quiet operation. B. HEADER: Operator is housed in a 6" (152mm) wide X 6" (152mm) high side load, non -handed, extruded aluminum header. All aluminum sections are 6063-T5 alloy. The operator housing provides a seal against dust, dirt and moisture. C. ELECTRONIC CONTROLS: A self-contained, microprocessor controls the operations and switching of swing power operator. The electronic control provides low voltage power supply for all means of actuation. No external or auxiliary low voltage power source will be allowed. The control includes time delay 1 to 30 seconds) for normal cycle, as well as, the following built in features: 1. Torque limiting for controlled forces on opening. 2. Acceleration control for smooth starts and recycle. 3. Special circuitry for reducing power to the motor when door is in HOLD -OPEN mode, extending longevity and assuring reliability. 4. Besam PMD handheld programming device to eliminate electronic adjustment tampering. D. POWER OPEN: The automatic door operator powers the door open by forces transmitted mechanically to the drive shaft and maintains a constant engagement throughout the opening cycle. The operator is designed to counteract most exterior wind conditions and/or interior stack pressure without the need of additional power assist mechanisms. The automatic door system functions as a manual door closer in the event of a power failure. The automatic door system is electro -mechanical in design requiring no remote pumps or compressors. E. SPRING CLOSE: The automatic door operator is spring closed. Spring is designed to counteract most normal wind conditions and return the door to full close. Closing forces are regulated by utilizing the motor and gear assembly as a dynamic brake. The spring is compression type to ensure longevity. Clock type springs are not acceptable. F. EMERGENCY BREAKAWAY: All INswing doors which are required exits, are equipped with an emergency breakaway feature which internally cuts power to the operator. No external power switch will be allowed. The breakaway feature allows doors to swing in the direction of egress, with forces that comply with current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. Following emergency breakaway the doors return to the full closed position and electrically reset automatically. G. SWING DOOR: Narrow (or medium) stile swing door as manufactured by Besam, Inc., and is complete in all respects consisting of the following: 1 . Narrow (or medium) stile heavy-duty aluminum door fabricated of 6063-T5 alloy. 2. Besam end load, bottom pivot. 3. Top arm prep for Swingmaster MP swing door operator. 4. Quick disconnect wiring harness. 5. Mechanical 1 point lock (2 point lock for pairs of doors) 6. Jamb tubes (optionaD and finger guards as required by UL. 2.04 ACTIVATING DEVICE - SENTRYSCAN A. SentryScan motion detection device specified herein is based on K -band frequency technology, eliminating ghosting effect and band width jamming prevalent with X -bands, and providing motion detection twice as fast as X -band technology, with a higher quality detection pattern. Circuitry design eliminates Radio Frequency Interference (RFD and Electromagnetic Interference (EMD Detection patterns remain very stable in extreme weather conditions. B. The- SentryScan, motion detector is a unidirectionallbidirectional sensor which operates only on the FCC approved K-bandfrequency (24.125GHz) It shall utilize a planar, (flatantenna) and for aesthetic purposes the unit shall be no larger than 4- 3/4" W x 3 1/8" H. x 2" D. 1. Relay hold time from 0.5 seconds to 9.0 seconds. Adjustable for unidirectional or bi-directional sensing capabilities, wide or narrow patterns. All adjustments must be made by a universal coded infrared remote control. Mounting height, Tto 11' above finished floor. C. SELECT FINISH 1. Finish: (Black, ready for non-metallic field finish painting) 2.05 SWING DOOR SAFETY DEVICES - PASSPORT A. General: Safety devices specified herein operate on active infrared technology. B. The - PassPort_ : active infrared presence device shall utilize a combination of focused and diffused technology. The - PassPorL is powered by 24VAC/DC electronics supplied by the controller and shall recognize 2 different patterns: 1) when door is closed and 2) when door is open. When door is in open position it will provide l'of threshold protection with an adjustable self -adaptation time of 30 seconds to 25 minutes. The PassPort protection pattern will go through the threshold and overlap the motion pattern. All adjustments must be made by a universal coded infrared remote control. Mounting height Tto 9' above finished floor C. The . Lock out Relay, shall inhibit the PassPort output during the closing cycle. The LO -21B shall also communicate the position of the door to the PassPort in order for the PassPort to utilize 2 different programs. One program will be with the door open and the other program will be with the door closed. Coordinate with detection system package. D. . Safety Beams, (PassPort Beam KID Active infrared safety beams, located 5 inches past the lead edge of the door in the full open position, will provide additional safety in the closing cycle. In the event someone breaks the beams, the door will not recycle open. Beams are connected to LO -21 B lockout relay. Note: guide rails are provided and installed by installing distributor. 2.06 SWING DOOR SAFETY DEVICES - PASSPORT PLUS (OPTIONAQ A. PassPort Plus package includes an optional swing door safety device - Superscan sensor. B. The PassPort Plus includes Superscan sensors which shall be used in conjunction with the PassPort presence sensor and lock out relay in order to provide safety during the closing and opening cycles of the door or stand alone on the approach side of a low energy swing door for extra safety. The Superscan sensors shall detect the presence of anything entering from either side of the door. Superscan shall be mounted on each side at top of the door at the lead edge of the door. Sensor shall detect a person in the swing path of the door during opening or closing and shall cause the door to stop. C. Superscan door mounted detectors shall use active infrared technology with distance measurement. 12V - 24V AC or DC power requirements. D. Two sensors required for single doors. Four sensors required for pair of doors. 2.07 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: 120V, 60 Hz, 10 amp electrical power supply to the operator, 24VAC/DC +/- 10% to the sensors. 2.06 GUIDE RAILS A. To be provided and installed by local certified Besarn distributor per current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. 2.07 FINISHES A. Standard operator and door finish is dark bronze anodized (AAC23A44) or clear anodized (AAC22A31) . Custom finishes such as stainless steel clad are available, if specified. Powder coat painted finish is available with match to Kynar colors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify the openings are plumb and are dimensioned properly. Insure adequate support has been provided at the operator header. Proceed with the installation only after conditions are deemed satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION &ADJUSTMENT A. Install equipment in accordance with Besam installation instructions. Adjust equipment per instructions and current ANSI/BHMA 156.10 American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. B. Besam reserves the right to make product improvements and change specifications without notice. END OF SECTION 08716 SECTION 08800 - GLAZING i.ol SUMMARY A. Glazing for the Following Products: 1. Entrances and other doors. 1.02 WARRANTY A. Warranty Period: Manufacturers standard but not less than 10 years after date of Project completion. 1.03 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass (Type FG -A) : ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick. B. Safety Glass (Type FG -B) : ASTM C1 048, fully tempered, Condition A uncoated, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality q3 glazing select; conforming to ANSI Z97.1; 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick. C. Wired Glass (Type FG -H) : ASTM C1036, Type 11 patterned and wired flat, Class 1 translucent, Quality q8 glazing; 1/2, square mesh, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick. D. Mirrors: Clear tempered float glass; 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum thick, size as indicated; Coat second surface of glass with successive layers of chemically deposited silver and manufacturers standard protective organic coating; 10 year warranty against silver spoilage; Flat polished edge; Continuous channel bottom support designed to withstand mirror weight and top support to prevent mirror from coming away from wall along top edges; setting blocks at quarter points. Include clear anodized aluminum frames where shown on drawings. 1.04 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated, including those in Insulating Glass Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section. 1 . For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising lites of insulating glass units. 2. Provideheat treated, where recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance requirements specified an5-Kind FT (fullytempered) where safety glass is designated or required. 3. Performance characteristics designated for insulating glass are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23inch) thick and nominal 1/2 inch dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated. 4. U values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x F. B. Insulated Glass Units: ASTM E774 and E773; double pane with glass elastomer edge seal; outer pane of 1/4 inch clear glass, inner pane of 1/4 inch clear low -e glass, purge interpane space and fill with argon; total unit thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) . C. Edge Seal Material: Black color. 1.05 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: a. Provide selections made by Construction Representative from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturers standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants. C. Glazing Sealant for Fire Resistant Glazing Products: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire resistive rating. 1.06 GLAZING TAPES A. Back Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonit�ining and norimigrating in contact with nonporous -surfaces, with or without spacer rod as recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated, packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 804.1. 1.07 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A clurometer hardness of 85 plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A clurometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks.- Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking) 1.08 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded to substrates. 1.09 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as follows: 1 . Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label. 2. Remove damaged glass from Project Site and legally dispose of off site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant substrate testing. D. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide Spacers for Glass Sizes Larger than 50 United Inches (Length plus HeighD asFollows: 1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearancoc, oxcopt where gasketQ and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 1.10 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for build up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Project completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 08800 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09111 - NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non -load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits. 3. Recessed slotted wall standards. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTIVI E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. D. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. E. Furriing Channels (Furring Members) 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. F. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. a. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch, for the following locations, unless otherwise indicated. a. For 6 inch framing. B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1 . Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double -Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Steel Network Inc. (The) ; VertiClip SLID or VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SF1) 3) Or equal system by USG. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. D. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare -steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641 /A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1 . Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter -splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast -in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled -in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks ( runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1 . Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound -rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation') vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 24 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-aftach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 09111 SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM BOARD 1.1 SUMMARY A. Intedorgypsurn board. B. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. C. Tile backing panels. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups for the following: 1. Levels of gypsum board finish for use in exposed locations. 2. Texture finishes. 1.3 MATERIALS A. Interior Gypsum Board: I . Regular type. 2. Type X. 3. Special Type X Having improved fire resistance over standard Type X. 4. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii. 5. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. 6. Foil -backed type. 7. Abuse -resistant type. 8. Moisture- and mold -resistant type. B. Exterior Gypsum Board for Ceilings and Soffits: 1. Exterior gypsum soffit board. 2. Glass -mat gypsum sheathing board. C. Tile -Backing Panels: 1. Water-resistant gypsum backing board. 2. Glass -mat, water-resistant backing board. 3, Cemerititious backer units. D. Trim Accessories: 1. Interior. 2. Exterior. 3. Aluminum: Extruded profiles. E. Texture finishes. END OF SECTION 09250 SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE PART I - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Tile backing panels. 1.2 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 TILE PRODUCTS A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide Standard grade tile that complies with ANSI Al 37.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. B. Tile Type CT -1: Ceramic Tile 1 . Product: Mohawk Siderno. 2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .5 percent to less than 20 percent. 3. Size and Shape: 12 inches square, nominal. 4. Surface Finish: Plain. 5. Colors: GRIS or as indicated. 6. Trim Units: Matching bullnose, cove base corner, cove base outcomer, shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile. 7. Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus - Color: Sahara Beige #11 C. Tile Type CT -2: Ceramic Wall Tile, Bullnose Trim. 1 . Product: Mohawk Siderno. 2. Moisture Absorption: Less than .5 percent to less than 20 percent. 3. Size and Shape: YAT, nominal. 4. Surface Finish: Plain. 5. Colors: GRIS or as indicated. 6. Grout: Mapei Ultracolor Plus - Color: Sahara Beige #11 D. Tile Type PCT -1: Porcelain tile. I . Product: Mohawk - Colorbody Polished Porcelain Tile. 2. Water Absorption: < 0.5% 3. Size and Shape: 12"AT 4. Thickness: 10 mm 5. Colors: Crystal Beach 6. Grout: Mapei Ultra Color Plus - Gray #9 - 1/8" Grout Line 2.2 SETTING MATERIALS A. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, thinset bond type; use Type I in areas subject to prolonged moisture exposure. B. Dry -Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI Al 18.1. C. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI Al 18.6; color as noted above. D. Water -Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI Al 18.3 2.3 TRANSITION STRIPS (See Finish Schedule for Locations) A. See finish schedule on A4.0. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealant, moisture and mildew resistant type, white; use for restroom floors and walls. B. Cementitious Backer Board: ANSI Al 18.9; High density, cementitious, glass fiber reinforced with 2 inch (50 mm) wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and comers: 1. Thickness: 518 inch. C. Waterproofing Membrane: Mapei, Mapelastic-Mapeguard 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI Al 37.1, and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that sub -floor surfaces are dust -free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub -floor surfaces, and are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1. C. Verify that concrete sub -Poor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer. D. Verify that required floor -mounted utilities are in correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates. C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.1 1 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry -set mortar to a feather edge. F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI Al 08.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations. B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile orjoint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealantjoint space. Form comers and bases ready. Align floorjoints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install ceramic accessories rigidly in prepared openings. G. Install non -ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturers instructions. H. Install thresholds where indicated. 1. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. J. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. K. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.\ L. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. M. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes. 3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN -SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F1 13, dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F122, with latex-portland cement grout. 2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F131. B. Over wood substrates, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F142, with standard grout, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method F143. 3.5 INSTALLATION -WALL TILE A. Over cementitious backer units on studs, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244, using membrane at toilet rooms. B. Over cementitious backer units install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W223, organic adhesive. C. Over gypsum wallboard on wood or metal studs install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W243, thin -set with dry -set or latex-portland cement bond coat, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated other than at restroom walls, install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W222, one coat method. D. Over interior concrete and masonry install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W202, thin -set with dry -set or latex-pordand cement bond coat. E. Over wood studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W231, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. F. Over metal studs without backer install in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W241, mortar bed, with membrane where indicated. G. All wall tile (CT -2) shall be installed with the 6" dimension in the horizontal direction. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean file and grout surfaces. 3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation. B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades. C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type walkways. D. ALL porcelain floor file (new & existing) in the aisles, is to be protected immediately upon installation by the General Contractor w/ 1/4" masonite board and duct taped at all edges. The GC shall maintain the protection until Substantial Completion, at which time the GC will temporarily remove the masonite for the Owner to review and accept the floor. Upon acceptance, the GC shall reinstall the masonite. Upon completion of the fixture installation (by others) the GC shall remove and dispose of the masonite protection and clean the floor. END OF SECTION 09310 SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: 1 . Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Surface -Burning Characteristics: Acoustical panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84. a. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Comply with the following: I . Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA!s "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings -Seismic Zones 0-2." 3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies --Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings." 5. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.3 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panele: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264. B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc -coated carbon -steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class I zinc coating, soft temper. 1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung') will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.1 06 -inch- diameter wire. E. Seismic perimeter stabilizer bars, seismic struts, and seismic clips. F. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACT -1) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cortega #769 Non -Directional Fissured. B. Classification: Provide fire -resistance -rated panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type and form as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. C. Color: White. D. LR: Not less than 0.82. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55, Type E-400 mounting per ASTM E 795. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. H. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 1. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (ACT -2) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL 1-5" Heavy Duty system. 16 B. Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold -rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 -inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or buft-edge type. 3. Cap Material: Steel cold -rolled sheet. 4. Cap Finish: Painted white. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturers written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders. C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted with fire -resistance -rated ceilings, to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter -splaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs. 2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs or to steel roof deck. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. END OF SECTION 09511 SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid vinyl floor tile (LVT) 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE (LVT-1, LVT-2) A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Tajima Flooring, Inc. B. Tile Standard: Federal Specifications - SS - T -312B 1. Type IV 2. Composition C1 C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. 1. Wear Layer: 24 mils D. Size, colors and patterns: 1 . LVT-1 (Field) a. Material: TajimaLVT b. Size: 18- x 18- c. Color/Paftern: TAJ-2231SE-S GREY STONE d. Adhesive: Spraylock 6500 or Chapco 299 2. LVT-2 (3" Border) a. Material: Tajima LVT b. Size: 3- x 36- c. Color/Paffern: TAJ-2734SE-S GREY TIGER d. Adhesive: Spraylock 6500 or Chapco 299 MAR 0 8 2016 CitY of Tuk-mhla BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVE -0 CITY OF TUMILA 046 JAN 13 2 1 PERMIT CENTER U) :7 0 0 U_ 0 W a - Cf) _J 0 W F_ 0 C\I E a) U) 0 0 U) co C) "V- C,4 LO 00 U) Cr) 4- M LO 0 a) '3� co E 0 C:) C:) 0. 3: CN (0 LU 2= - C14 < < 2 (6 W U) co 5 C) N C\I CN CU cp a) Lo U) 6- , a) a Go ry 0 I-_ C) U- 0 C) Z 0 (D Z -1 ry D 100 X LIJ I— Z UJ C) It W CL Z) ry W Z Lii F_ D 0 W C) co D F_ DATE REVISION 01-11-16 PERMIT SET A7.3 2015-29-00 DIVISION 9 - FINISHES cont'd 11 _1 I - SECTION 09651 - RESILIENT FLOOR TILE cont'd 11 . 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS � I A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided f. or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: 1. LVT: Spraylock 6500 adhesive system or ChapGo 299 adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 LVT PREPARATION A. Job Conditions: 1 . The installation of flooring shall proceed only after the work of other trades has been completed especially overhead trades. 2. Areas to receive Resilient flooring shall be clean, adequately lighted, fully enclosed, weather tight, and heated to a minimum of 651 to 701 F. for 72 hours before, during, and after installation is completed. 3. Heat should be maintained in areas to receive flooring with the building's permanent heating system. Salamanders and other temporary heating devices should not be used. 4. Installed flooring shall not be exposed to heavy traffic or heavy rolling loads or any type of maintenance procedures until the adhesive has cured for a minimum of 72 hours. 5. If emergency conditions require the movement of equipment or furniture, the flooring should be protected with heavy planks or a minimum of 1/2" thick plywood to prevent damage. B. Suitable Substrates: 1 . Concrete Substrate: Concrete substrate shall conform to requirements of ASTMF-710-05-Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to . Receive Resilient Flooring). 2. Concrete subfloors shall be steel troweled finished smooth, fiat and level. Concrete shall be wet cured for a minimum of 30 days to 3,500 psi. 3. Flatness of concrete shall be ± 1/4" in a 10'-O" radius. 4. Do not apply any type of coatings, surface sealers, hardeners, or curing membranes to the surface of the concrete. These materials will prevent proper bond of the floor -covering adhesive. 5. Minor cracks, chips, and spalls shall be patched with cement based patching material, i.e. Ardex or Mapei. 6. Level high spots by grinding or sanding. Any required leveling shall be done with cement -based undedayment, minimum 3,500 psi, i.e., Ardex or Mapei. 7. Patching and underlayment material shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions. . 8. Concrete and underlayment must be dry; maximum 5.0 lbs. of moisture per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours as tested by Calcium Chloride Test Kits per R.M.A. test procedure or less than 75% Relative Humidity per ASTMF2170 test method. Test pH of concrete when using Chapco 299 adhesive - or 7.0]bs/square feet, or less than 85% RH when using the Spraylock 6500 adhesive system. 9. PH shall be <1 0 when using Chapco 299, or PH shall be <1 1 when using Spraylock 6500 10. If the concrete is contaminated with any type of sealer, hardener, curing membrane, paint, oil, grease, adhesives, and any other type of penetrating material it should be removed thoroughly by bead blasting. Sanding is not adequate and chemicals should not be used to accomplish removal. After concrete preparation has been completed, sweep and vacuum surface thoroughly to remove all miscellaneous dirt and contaminants. 11. Existing Resilient Flooring: IF TAJIMA TILES ARE TO BE INSTALLED OVER SUITABLE EXISTING RESILIENT FLOORING, A TWO-PART POLYURETHANE ADHESIVE MUST BE USED. C. Unsuitable substrates: 1 . Particleboard, chipboard, flake board, hard board, lightweight aggregate concrete or gypsum underlayment are not suitable substrates for installation of vinyl flooring. D. Layout: 1 . Establish chalk guidelines, which are at right angles to each other from which the tile are to be laid. Measure the area to find the best starting point for maximum size perimeter cuts. 3.2 LVT INSTALLATION A. Before beginning Installation Check actual boxes of all tiles to be sure that correct color of tile, pattern, and quality has been shipped for your specific installation. DO NOT MIX DYELOTS IN THE SAME AREA. 1 . Observe wearing surface and back of all tiles to be sure there is no damage or defects. Do not install or glue tile with visible defects. Tiles ,- that may have minor defects on one side of tile or at edges can be used for trimming and fitting at walls and columns. 2. Lay files starting at the center of the room working towards the walls. Lay following the directional arrows on back of tiles. 3. The perimeter tiles must be cut up to the wall from the field tile. The perimeter tiles should be accurately scribed against the wall and any , '; projections coming out from the walls. Cut tiles from the face side with a sharp knife. Do not jam tiles. Keep foot traffic off laid area while I installing to prevent shifting. � - 4. Install Tajima LVT tile with TAJ 585 Vinyl Tile & Plank Adhesive using a notched trowel with notches 1/16"wide by 1/16"deep, spaced 1/16"apart; for non -porous sub -floors use al/32"xl/32x 1/16" notched trowel. . 5. Immediately after spreading the adhesive, roll it with a short nap roller dampened with adhesive to flatten the adhesive ridges. This procedure will expedite the set up time and ensure the trowel notch pattern does not telegraph through to the finished floor. When using the"wet-set" method of installation test the adhesive to see if it has "strings" and is moist to the touch before installing the floor covering. Check periodically to make sure there is full transfer of adhesive to the back of the flooring covering. 6. Note complete instructions on adhesive containers. 7. All corners of tiles shall be butted, not staggered. Planks are to be staggered for uniform and natural look. Square tiles will have an arrow on the back of the tile or a line. The square ties should be installed with the arrow or lines at 90 degree angles to each other in order to accomplish uniformity of color and pattern. Layout tiles loosely a minimum of 15 to 20 tiles, to verify uniformity of color and pattern. 8. If the tiles cannot be installed with a uniform appearance, do not install the floor tiles. 9. Fit tiles carefully and neatly to all pipes, columns and other obstructions without voids, especially where there will be no base installed. 10. Within one hour after installation, roll the tiles thoroughly in both directions with a 1 00 -pound roller, to properly seat the tiles into adhesive. Check tiles two to three hours later and roll again. 11. Fit tiles properly at walls. Do not over -fit tiles as that will cause them to buckle. 12. During installation of tiles, remove any spilled adhesive or adhesive that may be squeezed through joints with a clean white rag dampened with soapy water. If adhesive has set prior to removal with a damp rag, it can be removed with mineral spirits solvent. 13. Foot traffic is allowed after installation of file is completed, but heavy traffic should be not allowed for 72 hours. 14. Floor surface should not be cleaned until 72 hours after installation is completed when using the Chapco 299 adhesive - or 24 hours if using Spraylock 6500 adhesive system. 3.3 LVT CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protection: 1 . The floor is designed to properly support a static load of 450 psi. Furniture, equipment, and rolling loads should not exceed these limits. If they do, legs of such equipment and furniture should be properly supported to prevent damage to tiles. Protect floor surface with wood or sheets of plywood whenever heavy equipment or furniture must be moved 2. Chair pads are recommended under chairs with roller casters. 3. Felt pads are recommended under chairs with sharp or unprotected edges to prevent scratching. 4. Tiles should be properly maintained in accordance with Tajima manufacturer's recommendations. 5. ALL LVT, is to be protected immediately upon installation by the General Contractor w/ 20 mil construction paper and duct taped at all edges. The GC shall maintain the protection until Fixture Installation begins, at which time the GC shall remove the paper. 6. The Fixture Installer is responsible for maintaining the new condition of the LVT, after GC removes the paper, until fixture installation is complete. Any damaged LVT & subsequent replacement is the responsibility of the Fixture Installer. END OF SECTION 09651 SECTION 09653 - RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories. . 3. Subfloor Leveler System 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Fire-Test-ResponseCharaGteristiGs: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1, not less than 0.45 Wlsq. cm. 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products. i. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer. Z C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. .., PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE (VB -1) A. Resilient Base: . 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Johnsonite. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Cut lengths 48 inches long or coils in manufacturers standard length. F. Outside Comers: Preformed. G. Inside Comers: Preformed. H. Finish: Mafte. 1. Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings. 2.3 SUBFLOOR LEVELER SYSTEM A. Resilient Molding Accessory: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Johnsonite - Strip & Leveler Strip Extensions B. Description: Uniform ramping support transition. C. Material: PVC D. Profile and Dimensions: #LS -40 1. Reduces from 1" to 0. 4 E. Colors and Patterns: Black 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for installing resilient accessories. ' B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 SUBFLOOR LEVELER INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing leveler strips. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. "I END OF SECTION 09653 1 ,� � SECTION 09680 - CARPET I 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes flooring and flooring installation. I 1. Walk -off mat in Vestibule PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS I - A. Carpet: 1. Flooring in the vestibule will be Enterprise Tile by Mats Inc. Tile size 19 11/16" x 19 11/16". Color: Anthracite I 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine subfloors and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of carpet. Do not proceed with installafion unfil unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that subfloors and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified in this Section and those of the . Carpet manufacturer. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with carpet manufacturers installation recommendations to prepare substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Level subfloor within % inch to 1 0 feet, non -cumulative, in all directions. Sand or grind protrusions, bumps, and ridges. Patch and repair cracks and rough areas. Fill depressions. 1. Use leveling and patching compounds to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in subflooras recommended by the Carpet manufacturer. C. Remove subfloor coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible With adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone. D. Broom or vacuum clean subfioors to be covered with carpet. Following cleaning, examine subfloors for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. E. Concrete-Subficor Preparation: Apply concrete -slab primer, according to manufacturer's directions, where recommended by the Carpet manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Types: Per manufacturer. B. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. . 3.4 CLEANING A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: 1. Remove visible adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove protruding yarns from carpet surface. 1 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. 3.5 PROTECTION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 15: "Protection of Indoor Installation". B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure carpet is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. . Cn END OF SECTION 09680 U C� LJ_ 0 0- 0 �_ U 3: n �' - f 0. I I r- ! I 61i I (N `r 'IV . C1 C14 - 'A -4 - -i SECTION 09911 - EXTERIOR PAINTING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: 'i Approved Products LisV and 'i Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: ByOwner-engagedagenGy. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2. Acceptable substitutions include: a. Frazee b. Benjamin Moore 1.5 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in wrifing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. B. Colors: Match colors as indicated on drawings. 1.6 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Bonding Primer (Water Based): MPI#17. B. Wood -Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint system indicated. 1.7 METAL PRIMERS A. Alkyd Ant -Corrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79 B. Rust Inhibitive Primer (water-based): MPI #107. C. WaterbomeGalvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#134. D. Quick -Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI#95. 1.8 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS A. Exterior Latex (Flat): SW A-1 00 Exterior Latex Flat, A-6 Series (see drawings for colors) 1.9 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Wood: 15 percent. 3. Plaster: 12 percent. � 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 1.10 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painfing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Masonry Unit Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. F. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. G. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation. H. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. 1. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application unfit plaster is fully cured and dry. J. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. 1.11 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 1.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1 . Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, idenbfied, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 1.13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. END OF SECTION 09911 SECTION 09912 - INTERIOR PAINTING 1.1 SUMMARY A. Surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standards: "MPI Approved Products List" and "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual." 1.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: By Landlord /General Contractor -engaged agency. 1.4 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Acceptable substitutions include: 1. Frazee 2. Benjamin Moore 1.5 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1 . Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. a. Chemical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with local requirements for VOC content. B. Colors: Match Colors as indicated on drawings. 1.6 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: 1.7 METAL PRIMERS (if not shop primed) A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: 1 1.8 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Latex -Based Wood Primer: 1.9 LATEX PAINTS A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1) - ProMar 200 1. Flat finish in vestibule & sales area. 2. See schedule for colors. B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): ProMar200 1. Eggshell finish in back of house (offices, hallway, stock) 2. See schedule for colors. 1.10 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. . B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1 . Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. I D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractors acceptance of substrates and conditions. 1.11 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. � E. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. G. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. I H. Wood Substrates: . 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. I 1. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. � 1.12 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturers written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 1 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. Paragraph and subparagraphs below are examples of painting requirements for mechanical and electrical work. Revise to suit Project. 1.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1 . Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, idenfified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 1 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 1.14 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. I I D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 1.15 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: >- 1 . Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 E. C/� :t� " = 2. Latex Over Sealer System: MPI INT 3.1A. 0 3. Latex Over Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 3.1 B. =3 a- 0 4. Alkyd System: MPIINT3.1D. 3: 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 3.1 M. cu M Z; N Lo 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: r 0 CD -t .:t N M . . MPI INT3.1C. B. Clay -Masonry Substrates: 0 -�= - --i N " < 2 (0 CD < 1. Latex System: MPIINT4.1A. co �: 2. Alkyd System: MPI INT 4.1 D. - �_ 3. Latex Aggregate System: MPI INT 4.1 B. LL 4. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 4.1 M. U-,4 5. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: �_ (.) MPI INT4.1L. C. CMU Substrates: < 0 1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A. V_ CC) 2. Alkyd System: MPI I NT 4.2C. W 3. Alkyd Over Latex Sealer System: MPI I NT 4.2N. _J 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI I NT 4.2E. (.) 5. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: Z Z) MPI INT4.2D. D. Steel Substrates: 0 1. Quick -Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. �: 2. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.1 C. >_ 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1 Q. b 4. Alkyd System: MPI I NT 5.1 E. 0 5. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.1 M. Z 6. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1S. _J 7. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: V c) MPI I NT 5.1 R. E. Galva nized-Metal Substrates: ry 1. Water -Based Dry -Fall System: MPI INT 5.3H. af 2. Latex System: MPI INT 53A. ,�, 3. Latex Over Waterborne Primer System: MPI INT 5.3J. 00 4. Alkyd System: MPI INT 53C. F 5. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5.3G. 6. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.3N. 7. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI I NT 53M. F. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.4H. 2. Alkyd Over Vinyl Wash Primer System: MPI INT 5.4A. 3. Alkyd Over Quick -Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J. END OF SECTION 09912 4. Aluminum Paint System: MPI INT 5AD. 5. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.4G. 6. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: , MPI INT 5.4F. G. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including architectural woodwork. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.3T. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.3U. 3. Alkyd System: MPI I NT 6.313. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.3V. 5. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.3A. H. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood. 1. Latex System: MPI INT 6AR. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.4A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.4B. 4. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.4T. 5. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6AS. 1. Dimension Lumber Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces: I . Latex System: MPI INT 6.2D. 2. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 6.2A. 3. Alkyd System: MPI INT 6.2C. 4. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 6.2L. 5. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 6.213. J. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A. 2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C. 3. 1 nstitutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M 4. High -Performance Architectural Latex System: MPI INT 9.2B. K. Spray -Textured Ceiling Substrates: 1 . Latex (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1A, spray applied. 2. Latex System: MPI INT 9.1 E, spray applied. 3. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 9.1 B. 4. Alkyd (Flat) System: MPI INT 9.1 C. 5. Alkyd System: MPI INT 9.1 D. SECTION 09985 - PREFINISHED PANELS (FRP) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester (FRP) resin panels as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, and as needed for a complete and proper installation. 2. All fasteners, adhesives, trim and moldings required for a complete installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Rough Carpentry: Section 06100 2. Gypsum Wallboard: Section 09250 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualification: Engage an experienced Installer who has previously installed wall surface protection systems similar in material, design, and extent to the systems indicated for this project. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, and fire hazard classification. B. Store wall surface protection materials in original undamaged packages and containers inside a well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1. Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) during the period plastic materials are stored. Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface distortion. 2. Store rigid plastic and rigid plastic wall guard in a horizontal position for a minimum of 72 hours, or until the plastic material attains the minimum room temperature of 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install wall surface protection system components until the space is enclosed and weather proof and until the ambient temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) for not less than 72 hours prior to beginning of the protection systems until that temperature has been attained and is stabilized. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Replacement Materials: After completion of work, deliver not less than two (2) percent of each type, color and pattern of wall surface protection materials and components. Include accessory components as required. Replacement materials shall be from the same production run as materials installed. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS I A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. StructoGlass 2.2 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Reinforced Panels: 1. Thickness: 0.090" 2. Size: 4 X 8', 9', 10', or 12 (refer to drawings) 3. Installation will be single piece by height required. All joints will be vertical. Horizontal joints will not be accepted. 4. Color. As noted in Finish Schedule. 5. Weight: .07 pounds per square foot 6. Performance a. Abrasion Resistance .038% b. Flame Spread: U.L. Class "A" and 'i 7. Moldings/Trim: All exposed panel edges shall be finished with appropriate one- piece or two-piece non -staining vinyl extruded moldings. 8. Caulks and Adhesives: Use only high quality construction grade adhesives and clear silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 9. Fasteners: Fully adhered with adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. Mechanical fasteners shall not be permitted. . 2.3 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate wall systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of components. B. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surface free of evidence of wrinkling, chipping, uneven coloration, dents, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Coordinate requirements specified in other Sections for subfloor construction and tolerances to ensure that they are appropriate for resilient products selected. . B. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Examine the drawings and Specifications to determine the nature and extent of the proposed construction. Perform work to conform to the construction called for in such a manner as not to interfere with or delay work of other trades. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. All work shall be properly aligned, be plumb and true, and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures and by approved installers. Spans shall not exceed limitations set by the manufacturer. B. All fastenings, mechanical or otherwise, shall conform to the manufacturers standards. C. Moldings, division bars, cap finish strips, bar angles, etc., shall be sealed with a silicone type sealant. 3.4 CLEANING AND DAMAGED MATERIALS A. Upon completion of installation, clean soiled or discolored surfaces and/or remove if unacceptable to the Architect. B. Remove and replace any and all units, which are damaged or improperly installed. C. Remove all packing materials and excess materials from the site. 1. END OF SECTION 09985 DIVISION I 0 -SPECIALTIES SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 . Stainless-steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 2.1 MATERIALS A. SteelSheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness. B. Zamac: ASTM B 86, commercial zinc -alloy die castings. C. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 with 45 -lb density. 2.2 STAINLESS-STEEL UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. General Partitions - Diamond Pattern B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Floor mounted. C. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung with integral flanges. D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped -and -formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections. 1 . Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound -deadening honeycomb of resin -impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of I inch for doors and panels and 1-114 inches for pilasters. 2. Grab -Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units. 3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units. E. Urinal -Screen Construction: 1. Integral -Flange, Wall -Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full -height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches thick. F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Stainless-steel sheet of nominal thicknesses standard with manufacturer: G. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. H. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel. 1. Stainless -Steel Finish: No. 4 satin with dimpled texture on exposed faces. Protect exposed surfaces from damage by application of strippable, temporary protective covering before shipment. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1 . Material: Chrome -plated zamac. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard paired, self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees. 13. Latch and Keeper. Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturers standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper: Manufacturers standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturers standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex -type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Floor -Anchored Units: Provide manufacturers standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. B. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch- wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch- wide, out -swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch- wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION . A. General: Comply with manufacturers written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. B. Clearances: Maximum 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels; 1 inch between panels and walls. 3.2 ADJUSTING C. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position. I END OF SECTION 10155 SECTION 10265 - IMPACT -RESISTANT WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall guards. 2. Corner guards. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of impact -resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures. b. Deteriorabon of plastic and other materials beyond normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Acrovyn Corner Guards: I . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: . a. Construction Specialties, Inc., Model Acrovyn VA -200. b. Construction Specialities, Inc., Model Acrovyn CO Series Stainless Steel. 7. Vinyl/Acrylic: Extruded material should be high impact Acrovyn with shadow grain texture. Chemical and stain resistance per ASTM D-1308 standards as established by the manufacturer. a. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Guards: 90* surface mounted corner guard with 1-Y2" legs self adhesive tape backing. 9. Fabricate wall protection systems to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, detail, finish and member sizes. B. Surface -Mounted, Stainless Steel Corner Guards: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. � 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surface preparation: Prior to installation, clean substrate to remove dirt, debris and loose particles. Perform additional preparation procedures as required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Protection: Take all necessary steps to prevent damage to material during installation as required in manufacturers installation instructions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, using only approved mounting hardware, and locating all components firmly into position, level and plumb. B. Temperature at the time of installation must be between 650-75oF and be maintained for at least 48 hours after the installation. C. Install impact -resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install impact -resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a complete installation. a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads. b. Adjust end caps as required to ensure tight seams. D. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard, ammonia -based, household cleaning agent. E. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING A. General: Immediately upon completion of installafion, clean vinyl covers and accessories in accordance with manufacturers recommended cleaning method. B. Remove surplus materials, rubbish and debris resulting from installation as work progresses and upon completion of work. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed materials to prevent damage by other trades. Use materials that maybe easily removed without leaving residue or permanent stains. END OF SECTION 10265 SECTION 10523 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1.1 SUMMARY A. Landlord/ General Contractor Furnished Material: Hand -carried fire extinguishers. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Fire Extinguishers: NFPA10. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Materials and Workmanship: Six years. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each mounfing bracket indicated. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Acfivar Construction Products Group. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde pic. I d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. e. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products. 2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix Band bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. B. Multipurpose Dry -Chemical Type: UL -rated nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate -based dry chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container. C. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or red baked -enamel finish. 1 . Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. b. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. D. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect. 1. Identify bracke I t -mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to mounting surface. a. Orientation: Vertical. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. B. Install fire extinguisher mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1 . Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher. 2. Provide fire extinguishers as indicated on drawings. C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. END OF SECTION 10523 SECTION 10801 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install all toilet accessories. 1.2 WARRANTY A. Silver Spoilage for Mirrors: 15years. . 1.3 MATERIALS A. Grab bars: 18 -gauge heavy-duty tested to withstand pressures of 500 pounds. Bars shall be Type 304 stainless steel, 1 1/2" diameter, .064" minimum wall thickness with 3/16" thick flanges. Bar shall pass through flanges and be brazed thereto. Bars shall be peened grips with polished ends. B. Waste Receptacle: See schedule on A2. 1. C. Toilet Paper Holder: See schedule on A2.1. D. Liquid Soap Dispenser. See schedule on A2.1. E. Napkin and Tampon Vendor: See schedule on A2.1. F. Surface Mounted Napkin Disposal: See schedule on A2.1.e G. H. Mirror Unit: 1. Frame: Stainless-steel angle, 0.05 inch thick. 2. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. . 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, using manufacturers standard method. 4. Size: As indicated on Drawings. ' H. Aerosol Dispenser 1 . Air Delights, Microburst 3000 Aerosol Dispenser #401255 a. Manufacturer: Air Delights, (1-800-440-5556), www.airdelights.com b. Proactive Display (LCD) c. Color: White d. Keyless Lock e. Provide 2 case packs (12 cans) of aerosol with each dispenser installed. 1.4 FABRICATION A. General: Materials shall be free from defects impairing strength, durability or appearance. B. Sections and shapes shall be rolled, formed, drawn or extruded as required for respective functions. C. Moulded work shall have sharply defined profile and shall be clean and straight. Plain work shall be leveled, straight and surfaces true and smooth. Edges, angles, and corners shall be square, clean and sharp, unless otherwise detailed. I D. Fastenings, exposed metal fastenings, and accessories, unless Underwriters' prohibit for safety, shall be of same materials, texture, color and finish as the base metal to which applied. E. Molds, trim, frames and other metalwork shall be proper dimensions to receive masonry block and tile, plaster, ceramic tile, etc. 1.5 INSTALLATION A. All items specified under this Section shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and details on Plan. B. Grab bars shall be screwed to solid blocking in stud partitions. C. Toilet Accessories: . I . See drawings for manufacturer, quantity and location. END OF SECTION 10801 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT - SECTION 11022 - LOCK BOXES . PART 1 - GENERAL � 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes fire -rated, high security industrial/govem mental key boxes. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard: UL Listed. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Knox Company, 1601 W. Deer Valley Road, Phoenix, AZ 85027, 800-552-5669 . a. Knox -Box 3200 Series, Hinged Door Model 2.2 MATERIALS A. Exterior Dimensions: 1. Recessed mount flange: Ti x TW . B. Lock: UL Listed. Double -action rotating tumblers and hardened steel pins accessed by a biased cut key. C. Finish: Knox -Coat@ proprietary finishing process D. Colors: Aluminum. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION . A. Install key box assemblies complete with doors, frames, and accessories and according to requirements of fire -rated vault door assemblies' UL listing. B. Set key box frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. C. Adjust door hardware and operating mechanism to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. . END OF SECTION 11022 SECTION 11161 - AIR POWERED DOCK LEVELER / :'A T I -GENERAL . 1.1 SUM MARY Section includes: .. ' 1. Dock levelers ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section: 11164: Seals and Shelters . 1.2 SYST M DESCRIPTION 7 A. ,Zgn Requirements: Provide fixed -in-place adjustable loading and unloading platform for difference in height and gap between truck ied and bu4ng loading dock. B Provi e loading dock equipment, which has been manufactured, fabricated, and installed to withstand loads specified and to main in perfor ance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects or failure. C. Compl with ANSI MH14.1-1987. I iL 1.3 SUBMITTAL . . A. General: ubmit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Pr-oductDa : Submit product data for dock equipment. � C. ShopDrawings: Submit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock equipment including plans, elevations and la escaledetails. 1. Showa 6horage, pit sizes, critical installation clearances, connections, and accessory items. 2 , - 2. Provide oii�tion template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. 3. Provide rougl�-in drawings for electrical service in advance of concrete work. D. Informational Sub ittals: Submit following: 1. Manufacturer�.i' t fi s ns ruc ons. E. Closeout Submittals: Subm�t following in accordance with Section 01780 � I 1. Maintenance da2t_ 2. Warranty: Specifi warranty. � 1.4 QUALITY ASSU � A. Single Source Responsibil ty: Each component of dock equipment is required to be from same manufacturer B. Manufacturer Qual �. Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section wit minimum ten years documented experience. � C. Regulatory Requirements: In ompliance with ANSI MH14.1-1987 and the safety and labeling requireme ts of ANSI MH30.1-2007. om I' D. Certifications: Submit manufac urer's certification that products furnished for Project meet or exceed s cified requirements. E. Manufacturer to hold current IS 9001 certification 1.5 WARRANTY i t A. Manufacturer's standard prorated t -year warranty for structural components upon approval of wn� en application. B. Manufacturers limited 5-yearparts labor warranty on lifting system (bag, motor, hoses, gaskets ittings, &seals). Limited 1 -year parts and labor warranty on remaining compone ts. . :'ART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. 4Front Engineered Solutions - Kelley, 1 2 Hutton Drive, Suite 140, Carrollton, Texac/ (972) 466-0707 voice, (972) 323-2661 facsimile .2 AIR POWERED DOCK LEVELERS "71 A. General: 1 . Capacity: 30,000 / 2. Platform Width: 6 feet. / 3. Platform Length: 8 feet 4. Platform Deck Thickness: 1/4 i'nch high tensile eel safety tread plate for 30- 5K. e _y Ie ab ts a 0 ,rw r a wa 'r r a ran n �' tU re r Nit minirr � ,/ s of AN ' CIfied rec t" 7 Kel ley, 1 1 2 Huttc rich high tensl le 5. Lip Length: 20 inch extension 5/8 inch high tensil steel safety tread plate '/30K -35K capacity. 6. Vertical Compensation: Floating travel up and dow, to compensate for loa ing and unloading of truck. 7. Service Range: 12 inches above and 12 inches belo dock level for 6'an, 8'long models. 18" above and 12" below for 1 O'long models. 8. Side to Side Cross -Tilt: 4 inches maximum over widt framp. 9. Pit Floor Slope: Minimum 1/2 inch, back to front. 10. Pit Frame: 3 inch x 3 inch x 1/4 inch steel angle, 1welde corners and nchors for casting into concrete. 11. Identification: Attach to dock leveler in conspicuous place stating: a. Capacity \K \kb' Name of Manufacturer. c. Model Number. . d. Serial Number. 12. Standard Features: a. Full operating range toe guard protection. b. High Efficiency 60,000 lbs structural dock level suppo legs. c. Integral Maintenance strut. d. Integral Lip Lock. e. Open frame design -open front structure to allow e y clean out. f. High volume, low pressure air bag lifting mechan' m. g. Direct connection of fan unit to air bag, no hose or clamps accepted. h. Shimless front and rear frame design. 13. Options: a. Master control panel with combination dev! controls.*See Master Co�trol Panel specs. Master control panel to be 100% UL and CS/ approved (not just components). b. Energy Guard Perimeter Weatherseal S tem c. Galvanized ramp, lip, and frame. Type: , ot dipped. d. Self -forming. a " ' ' " �' ' Ippo legs. y clean out. M. ' rr clamps accepted. ' e se Ty e. Insulated ramp. Type Foam spray B. Motor Operation: 1. 1 0 amp fan with two-stage, single spe , self-cleaning filter, UL -approved motor; \ipowe ed by 1 1 0 volt single-phase electrical power. 2. Remote Control Station: Constani ' sure push button station complying with NEMA 4. a. Constant Pressure on Control 136tton: Raise unit. C. Model and Manufacturer: Kelley m del aFX-C: 4Front Engineered Solutions, 1612� tt n Drive, Suite 140, Carrollton, TX 7500( (P)972-466-0707 / 7 2.3 FABRICATION A. Dock Equipment: 1. Welded base frame construoZ � \ 2. Unit supplied completely as��mblecl, ready for use . . \ 2.4 FINISHES \ A. Dock Equipment Finish: / \ 1. Preparation: Clean surf4ces free from slag and splatter, loose mill scale, oil, grease, or rust. \ 2. Dock Leveler: Factory apply manufacturers standard DTM (Direct to Metal) Water based Paint with built in rust inhibitors. ik 3. Color. Manufactu tandard color.\K \ :'ART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION \ A. Examine conditions nd proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01400. \ 3.2 PREPARATION �, \ A. Coordinate formirlg of pit to receive dock leveler. \ 1. Pit angle cuT,bing and embeds by others. \ 2. Ensure curb angles are square, level and flush with pit surfaces. \ / \ 3. Ensure t"t curb angles are in proper place and pit is of adequate size to receive leveler. \ a. Pit esign: 20" for 6', 8' long pit depth for new construction. \ 4. Ensur� P. \ .3 INSTALLATIO that power accessorip.,; hnvp. hp.p.n instnIlAd ind m2dp ready for install2tion. \\\ A. In .1 �Iat or sloped prepared pit in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. \ B. Adjust �dock leveler height by manufacturer's recommendations as required to provide flush alignment with leveler and dock flod Weldleveler frame//securely to embedded curb steel. � C. Adjust installed unit for operation as specified by manufacturer. 3.4 ADJUSYING AND CLEANING iL \ A. P,, just installed unit for smooth, safe, efficient and balanced operation. \ \ B. �emove temporary labels and coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. I \ C. /Repair or replace damaged products. D/ Remove construction debris from site and dispose. \ 3.5 INSTRUCTION OF OWNERS PERSONNEL \ \ A. instruct owners personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. Provide bound copy of manufacturer's operation and maintenan / manual at time of instruction. 7 \ END OF SECTION 11 161 \ \ SECTION 11162 - STATIONARY DOCK LIFT (SCISSORS LIFT) A -GENERAL .1 SUMMARY / A. \ R\ elated Documents: Provisions established within General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division I - Genel'al R�equirements and Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section. / . B. Related Sections: 1 . S�ction 03300 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Concrete pit. / 2. Sect�oon 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Dock slab and door protection edge angles. . 3. Sectio 05521 - Pipe & Tube Railings: Perimeter guard rails and inserts. // 4 . ...... u ��,, / n �6 - Electrical: Connections to dock equipment. / .2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. This Section describes the requirements for providing a dock scissors lift as shown on the Drawing and spe /ified, to include: " 7 1. Hydraulic Doc�Slcissor Lift / B. Concrete work for do\ck lift(s) as specified in Part 3. C. Comply with ANSI MH)' terial Handling Institute) 29.1. / .3 SUBMITTALS \� / A. General: Submit in accord6ce with Section 01330. 11 B. Product Data: Submit product�ata for dock equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock equipment inclu Ing plans, elevations and large-scale u details. \ \ I D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufaicturer s maintenance and service data, including, ad Zss and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative, / . / E. Operating Manuals: Furnish ope . ratirgnd maintenance manuals and advise Ovv�ne,/on use and maintenance of equipment. .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE \ , etv " A. Dock Lift Standard: Comply with applicable equirements of ANSI, MH29.1, ("S� ety Standard for Industrial Scissors Lifts ) for construction and operation of d t / B. Provide manufacturers standard 2 (two) year pa S, 1 (pine) year labor warra Y. � s co r C. Single Source Responsibility: Provide dock lift(s mplete unil j;e'dtby a single manufacturer, including necessary accessories and fittings .5 WARRANTY \ A. Special Warranty: Prepare and submit in accordance wit Section 0 7/8 36. 1. Manufacturers standard one-year parts and labor warranty. 7 ART 2- PRODUCTS .1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements rovide efollowing: 1. Dock Lifts (scissors Lifts): A. Vront Engineered Solutions - Kelley, 1612 Hutton Dri e, Suite 140, C rollton, Texas 75006 (972) 466-0707 voice, (972) 323-266 facsimile id ' , ,nts rov e . ,e fo 10 i ng - C rollton, Tex I � e. uite , 4 t\ " B. Model 9: KDL68-8 - 5 HP .2 DOCK LIFTS (SCISSORS LIFTS) A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard h raulic dock lift of capacity, size, nd construction indicated, consisting of a nonslip, in a . ty ' , steel platform with beveled toe guards on four sides, steel scissor legs, and h draulic operating system, complete with controls, safety devices, and accessories required. B. Type: Provide stationary single-scisso pe hydraulic dock lift designed for perman� t, recessed installation in a preformed conc pit at location indicated. C. Rated Capacity: Provide lifting ca city of not less than lb with .. lb axle loa t ends and lb axle loads at sidest �, " rec' r , Ing cap oa at, ximu v �f_l , p '/i( D. VerticalTravel: Providemaximu vertical travel of 60 inches from a lowered height of -I ches for a raised height of -inches. E. Travel Speed: Nominal raising peed of 15 fpm. F. Construction: Fabricate lift fr m structural steel shapes rigidly welded and reinforced for max�iym strength, safety, and stability. r Design assembly to withst d deformation during both operating and stored phases of service. vide mounting brackets and removable lifting eyes fo ase of installation. 1. Platform: Fabricat platform from heavy steel plate with beveled toe guards on all - ,; %too,c�"mply with requirements of , MH29.1. Provid atching, hinged, throw -over bridges where indicated and removable handrails-\ a. Platform S) ce: Nonskid, safety -tread deck plate.Plaffon Size; _ inches wide by - inche�ong b. Hingec Zge: Provide hinged, throw -over bridge, heavy-duty, piano -type hinge welded to toe\guard at end of platfo Provid�, bridge complete with heavy-duty lifting chains. Charnfer edge of bridge to minimi4 obstructing wheels mate ,Fib[ -handling vehicles. a.raridge Material: Nonskid, safety -tread steel plate. . .B a, .Bridge Size: 18 inches long by 72 inches wide. \ S�a.c. Ergonomic Spring assisted Bridge 2. issor Mechanism: Fabricate leg members from heavy, steel formed tube members to provide maximum strength nd rigidity. � ylinders: Equip lift with not less than two heavy-duty, high-pressure, hydraulic, ram -style cylinders. Rams shall be d lrect-displacement plunger type with positive internal stops as standard by manufacturer. Cylinder rods shall be chro plated X��and polished to prevent rusting. 71 i1 1i �11! g� 11111 . , I 0 . I , , k, I � i 0 I - I ! 11 1: �f W , MAR 0 8 2016 () C\I . T_ -1 ,_ >- -1 a) C/� :t� " = E a) U) C: 0 q Z CU 7- 0 1� =3 a- 0 0 L_ M -0 U) 00 3: C: >-I 0 . . cu M Z; N Lo @ Cn 3: M ,it M 4- N LO r 0 CD -t .:t N M . . co E t -f 0 >. C:) C) = CL ;> C,4 CD " a) 0 -�= - --i N " < 2 (0 CD < ch W co , 0 0 "�: 4- : C\1 CU 04 N co �: -) cD a) . . -) Lo U) o- a- . . . a) MI n , - Iq . - , - tus A n 1!21 I fi I -1 49 1 � � I . k I 4: 9 is Z !� Al� ,it : 11 City of Tukwila - ILDING DIV71SION DATE � REVISION J 1-11-16 1 PERMIT SET RECEIVED ( OF TUKWILA ' I i . Ail 1 3 20116 PERMT CENTER A7 A 1--A I . iiiiiiiiii'T 2015-29-00 . >- < U) >_ 3: 71 0 ry V 0 0� ry I- < Iiii- LLJ < C) (-) < �_ a - LL LL Z W U-,4 (-) LU �_ (.) W �_ CO 00 0- < 0 It Z V_ CC) W 0 W Lij M _J 0- (.) < Z Z) -F < W 0 co F- �: =) �_ �-- >_ Z) - b (D < 0 < LU Z 3: (/) _J �__ -r - J V c) - 3: C) ry ry ob Se af Z) < ,�, :D < 00 a_ V_ F City of Tukwila - ILDING DIV71SION DATE � REVISION J 1-11-16 1 PERMIT SET RECEIVED ( OF TUKWILA ' I i . Ail 1 3 20116 PERMT CENTER A7 A 1--A I . iiiiiiiiii'T 2015-29-00 I M 0 a- 0 F - f < v N (0 ,-1 a) 10 '-1 O N -i .�-i DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT cont'd SECTION 11162 - STATIONARY DOCK LIFT SCISSORS LIFT cont'd IX 4. Bearings: Provide pivot points with self-lubricating, lifetime self lubricating bushings for minimum maintenance. b. Operation: Provide manufacturer's standard, self-contained, electric, hydraulic power unit for raising and lowering lift, controlled from a remotely located push-button station. \ characteristics with building electrica I s stem. ents: Coordinate wiring requirements uirements and current h 5. Elect�e uirem 9 Y q 9 q 6. Power Unit rovide manufacturer's standard, self-contained, remotely located power unit of size, type,�d operation needed for capacity of lift in 'cated. Power unit shall consist of a TEFC motor, high-pressure gear pump, valyg manifold and oil reservoir. a. Manifold shall boeain a relief valve, check valve, pressure -compensated flow -control valve arfd solenoid valve. b. Speed control: Provide manufacturer's standard pressure compensated flow control to maintain rated speed when the lift is loaded or unloaded. " - Z c. Free -fall protection: Provide a hydraulic velocity fuse at each cylinder to prevent t Clift platform from free falling in the event of a severed hydraulic hose o roken hydraulic fitting. d. Oil sight gauge in the reservoir t etermine oil level. e. Manual lowering valve located on power pack in case of power loss 7. Remote located Control Station: Provide a'weatherproof, multi -button control station of the constant -pressure type with NEMA 4x rated up and down push buttons. Controller slial!�onsist of a magettc motor starter with three pole -adjustable overloads and 115 -VAC control transformer with a fused secondaryRrewired to terminal strips and enclosed in a NEMA , Type 12 box. a. Upper -Travel -Limit Switch: Equip unit with manufacturer' standard, adjustable, upper -travel -limit switch. 8. Safety Devices: Provide manufacturer's standard and o jgf al safety devices as follows: a. Removable Handrails: Provide removable handrails oncsides of platform with a single, removable chain across each end. b. Handrails shall be 42 inches high with a mid-p'rrand 4 inch -hi kick plate at bottom. Mount rail sockets flush with platform surface. c. Maintenance Leg: Provide manufacture�r s standard safety mainten nce leg, d. Toe Protection: Provide manufactyr�r's standard toe protection alongentire unprotected side(s) of lift. 9. Finish and Color: Manufacturer's sja6dard paint applied to factory-assembled'�nd tested dock lifts before shipping. Provide toe guards with yellow and black stripes to comply with ANSIZ535.1, and paint remainde�f surfaces in manufacturer's standard color. X ART 3 - EXECUTION j" \ 1 DOCK -LIFT INSTALLATIONS �• A. Coordinate formin ecessed pit for dock lifts to ensure that depth is adequate to accommodate lift in proper relation to loading platform. B. Attach doc securely, according to manufacturer's written instructions. .2 ADJUST AN9-CLEAN A. Make -necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock equipment. BF fres installation, restore marred abraded surfaces to the original condition. NaOF SECTION 11162 ECTIQN 11163 - EDGE -OF -DOCK LEVELERS AR 1 -GENERAL 1.1 �IUMMARY A Section includes: 1. Dock levelers B. elated Sections: 1. Section: 11164: Seals and Shelters .2 SYSTE DESCRIPTION A. Desigry Requirements: Provide fixed -in-place adjustable loading and unloading platform for difference in height and /betwend anbuildintj\loading dock.B. Provide loading dock equipment which has been manufactured, fabricated, and installed to withstand loadsintai performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects or failure. C. Comply with NSI MH14.1 1987. .3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Sub it in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit product data for dock leveler equipment. / C. Shop Drawings: S6bmit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock levelers including p/evao,n,n large-scale details. 1. Show anchorage critical installation clearances, connections, and accessory items. 2. Provide location t plate drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construct D. Informational Submittal Submit following: 1. Manufacturer's instru tions. E. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance data. 2. Warranty: Specified late pty. .4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Eac component of dock leveler is required to be from same manB. Manufacturer Qualifications: Com, any specializing in manufacturing Products specified in thminimum ten years documenteexperience.C. Installer Qualifications: Approved in ting by manufacturer with documented experience onects of similar nature in past fiv years. D. Regulatory Requirements: In compliance ith ANSI MH14.1-1987 and the safety and labelin � quirements of ANSI MH30.1-2007.\K 9 ry \kE. Certifications: Submit manufacturer s\certification that products furnished for Projecb eet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer to hold current ISO 9001 certifigation 1.5 WARRANTY 7 A. Manufacturer's standard limited one year warranty for structural components. DART -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: \ Z 1. 4Front Engineered Solutions - KELLEY, 1612 Hutto4 Drive, Suite 140, Carrollton, Texas, (972) 466-0707 voice, (972) 323-2661 facsimile 2.2 MECHANICAL EDGE OF DOCK LEVELER / A. General: j 1. Capacity: 30,000 lbs. (perANSI MH14.1-1987). 2. Platform Width: 72 inches. 3. Platform Length: 29-3/4 inch with 17" lip / 4. Platform Deck Thickness: 1/2 inch for 30,000 Ib units safety checker plate steel with abrasive non-skid finish. 5. Lip: 17 inch extension, 1/2 inch for 30,000 Ib units thick safety checker plate steel with abrasive non-skid finish. 6. Vertical Compensation: Floating travel up and down to compensate for loading and unloading of truck. 7. Service Range: 3 inches above and 3 inches below dock level. \ 8. Side to Side Cross -Tilt: 4 inches maximum over width of ramp. 9. Yieldable lip. 10. Bumper block out with 4 x 10 x 12" dock bumpers on curb embed channel installations. 11. Options: / 11, a. Galvanized construction B. Product & Manufacturer: 4Front Engineered Solutions - KELLEY Mechanical Ed�e-of-Dock Leveler Model: KM7230 .3 FABRICATION / A. Dock Levelers: \ 1. Weld base frame construction. \ 2. Unit supplied completely assembled, read for use. \ 2.4 FINISHES A. Dock Leveler Finish: 1. Preparation: Clean surfaces free fro slag and splatter, loose mill scale, oil, grease, or rust. 2. Dock Leveler: Factory -apply manuf cturer's standard rust -inhibitive primer. 3. Color: Manufacturer's standard c#or. ART 3 - EXECUTION / \\ 1 EXAMINATION / \ A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01400. 3.2 PREPARATION / \ A. Face Mount \ 1. Provide correct embed channel dimension in accordance with product specifications 2. Embed channel by others. \ 3. Ensure channel is prroperly installed and is flush with the building floor and wall. \ 4. On Air or Hydraulic powered levelers ensure conduits used to run power have been installed and made readyfor installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Dock eveler: Install in accordance with Section 01600. ` L \ 1. Install dock levelers or to embed channel provided.\K \ \k2. Level units as required to provide flush surface with dock surface; anchor securely flush to substrate. \ 3. Weld back of leveler frame to or embed channel. \\ 4. Touch -131p welds with primer and apply finish to match leveler finish. \� 5. Connect motor and electrical leads with control units on Air or Hydraulic powered levelers.11 6. Rer�• ote Control Station: Locate where indicated on Air or Hydraulic powered levelers. \ 3.4 ADJUSTINCS AND CLEANING A. Adjust installed unit for smooth, safe, efficient and balanced operation. •\ B. Renove temporary labels and coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. C. Repair or replace damaged products. D. Remove construction debris from site and dispose. \ 3.5 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL �. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of installed units. Provide bound copy of manufacturer's operation and maintenanc manual at time of instruction. ND OF SECTION 11163 / \ SECTION 11164 - DOCK SEALS & SHELTER DART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK`INCLUDED ' A. Factory`assembled unit with necessary mounting hardware. B. Installation apd Owners Manual. 1.02 RELATED WORK\• A. Section 11161 - Dock Levelers. \ .03 REFERENCES \1 / A. Government Test Metho4'Standard No. 191A for fabric. 1.04 DESCRIPTION A. Door Size - Unit shall accommodate�an opening size of 8'-0" wide x 9'-0" high. B. Dock Height - Loading Dock height shall be 12". .05 SUBMITTALS \\\ A. Manufacturers Installation Instructions. B. Submit dimensional drawing. \ \ \ I/ C. Submit specification sheet. \ ' ART 2 - PRODUCTS \ , 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND MODEL ,/X\ A. Model DSH as manufactured by Kelley Tufseal, Muskego; WI. 1.07 EQUIPMENT % A. COMPONENTS: Each unit shall consist of (2) two side pads and (1) one curtain. B. HEAD CURTAIN: Curtain drop shall be 6" lower than the lowest trailer/truck to be serviced and will include splits with hook and loop. The curtain length shall be equal to the overall unit width. \1\ C. PROJECTION: Overall unit projection sliiall be 4" to 6" beyond the face of the dock b ropers. D. UNIT CONSTRUCTION: The fran)irtg shall be roll -formed galvanized steel. The base fabric�shall enclose a polyurethane foam core, which is chemically bonded to the steel frame. The cover shall be double hemmed on all edges and fastened to the side leg of the steel framing with Tek screvs�inserted through load spreading washers. The unit shall also include full length yellow guide stripes. E. WARRANTY: Unit shall include the manufacturers standard (5) year frame warranty and a (1) one year warranty against defects in materials and workjanship on the remaining components. `\ \ ART 3 - EXECUTION \ 1.08 INSTALLATION \ A. Instalio-accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cfaulk between the building wall and unit. \ ND OF SECTION 11164 \ ON 11785 - TV ANTENNA PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section In)c'udes: 1. TV Antennas. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance,data. 1.3 WARRANTY A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's tand components that fail in materials or worrkrr 1. Warranty Period: One year from date form in which manufacturer agrees to hip within specified warranty peril ) bstantial Completion. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ANTENNAS A. Amplifed HD TV Antenna 1. Radio Shack, Model # 15-254, Catalog #: 15-254 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Freestanding Equipment: Place its in final locations after finishes have been B. Install per manufacturers recommendations. C. Utilities: Comply with eleetf*cal requirements. END OF SECTION 1 or replace residential appliances or each area. SARr3 - EAtU .01 INSPECTION r A. Prior to commencing elevator installation, inspect hoistways, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms as constructed. Verify that ho*stway, pit, machine room and openings are of correct size and within tolerance and are ready for work of this section. Notify General Contractor in writing of any dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of elevator work. B. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installe . 3.02 INSTALLATION Install the elevator in accordance with accepted manufacturer's instructions. Install machine room components with the proper clearances as required by Code. 3.03 T STING A. Obtain and pay for all necessary Municipal and State permits and at his expense make all tests as required by governing cod . B. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for inspection and testing. Have acceptance inspection, required y local uthority, performed by enforcing agency. 3.04 ADJ STAND CLEAN A. djustments: 1. Adjust controller, switches and safety features to operate to within accepted design tolerances. 2. Adjust leveling devices so car stops within 318" of finished floor. 3. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Cle n Up: 1. emove from hoistway surfaces all loose materials and filings resulting from this work 2. can machine room floor of dirt, oil and grease 3. R move crating and packing materials from premises. 3.05 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Instruct Owner's Personnel: Provide a competent instructor or instructors for a period of four hours, at a mutually agr ed upon time prior to store opening, to instruct the store management and/or appointed personnel in the proper operation and gerieral care of the elevator quipment. Review of manuals, documentation, warranties, safety, use of cleaning materials and service c#1 procedures with store per nnel will be included. Instruct store personnel in the operation of special security features, when app/*c ble. Provide to P P P P store man gement four sets of equipment keys. Performance of this training shall not be prerequisite of payment r the release of retainage a to the elevator contractor, B. Mechanic S ndby: Provide standby mechanic for two (2) Grand Opening days, 10 am to 10 pm Friday and Saty day. OF SECTION SECTION 14300 -\ESCALATORS / ART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Escalators. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 03300 - Ca t -in -Place Concrete: Escalatorpits. B. Section 05120 - Str ctural Steel (Structural Steel Framing): Intermediate support bearing structures, h ist beams, steel bracing members, truss beard g plates. C. Section 09250 - Gyps m Board: Truss cladding. D. Section 13850 - Detec ion and Alarm (Fire Detection and Alarm): Heat, smoke, and products of comb stion sensing devices. E. Section 15700 - Heatin , Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment (Heating, Ventilating, and Air -C nditioning (HVAC)): Heating, cooling, and ventilation f machine room and machinery space. F. Section 16100 -Wiring ethods (Common Work Results for Electrical): Light outlets, convenience utlets, light switches, and conduits. G. Section 16440 - Switchbo rds, Panelboards, and Control Centers (Switchboards and Panelboard : Disconnect switches. H. Section 16500 - Lighting: ight fixtures. I. Section 16720 - Telephone nd Intercommunication Equipment (Voice Communications): RJ11 -1 pair analog telephone line to phone jack brought to either top or bottom landing of escalator for Remote Monitoring interface. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASME A17.1 - Safety C de for Elevators and Escalators. B. ANSI/NEPA 70 -National Ele ical Code. C. ISO 9001:2000 Quality Mana ement Systems -Requirements. 4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Arrange escalator components i machine room, control room, or machinery space so equi , ment can be removed for repairs or replaced with minimal disturbanc to other equipment and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01330 (01 33 0) - Submittal Procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacture /installer's product data, including: 1. Descriptive brochures or detail awings of escalators, including product features, 2. Power Information: Separate da sheets for horsepower, starting current, running urrent, machine and control heat release, and electrical requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer installer's shop drawings, including plans, elev tions, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, toler aces, materials, components, fabrication, fast ners, hardware, finish, options, accessories, an other information to render totally functi nal escalators. D. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer' samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials. E. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Su mit manufacturer/installer's operation anc maintenance manual; including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning in tructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs; and electrical wiring diagrams. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturerfinstaller's tandard warranty. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/installer's Qualifications: Spe ialize in manufacturing and installin escalator equipment, with a minimum of 5 years successful experience. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Escalator design, clearances, construction workmanship, materials, and i stallation, unless specified otherwise, shall be in accordance with the following: a. ANSI/ASME A17.1. b. Handicap accessibility. c. Americans with Disabilities Act. d. Other codes having legal jurisdiction. 2. ANSIIASME A17.1 shall govern, except where codes having legal jut' diction include more rigid requirements or conflict with ANSI/ASME A17.1. 3. Escalator shall follow design and manufacturing rocedures certifie in accordance with ISO 9001:2000 to meet product and service requirements for quality assurance for ne products. C. Pre -installation Meeting: 1. Convene pre -installation meeting before start of installation of esc lators. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this secti h, including Contractor, Architect, and escalator manufacturerlinstaller. 3. Review examination, installation, field quality control, adjusting, leaning, protection, and coordination with other work. .7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer/installer's origin I, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer/installer. B. Storage: Store materials in clean, dry area indoors in acco �anc with man ufacturerlinstaller's instructions. C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation o p event damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Electrical Power! 1. Owner will arrange for temporary 220 -VAC, single-phase,/. 0 -Hz, GFCI-protected electricity to be available for installation of escalator components. Permanent power required fora lu ting and testing. 2. Comply with Section 01510 -Temporary Utilities. A. Temporary Use of Escalator: 1. Owner will negotiate with manufacturer/installer for to ora use of escalator, if required. 2. Temporary use of escalator shall be in accordance w* terms nd conditions of manufacturer/installer's temporary acceptance form. 1.9 SCHEDULING A, Coordinate escalator work with work of other trades, for roper time nd sequence to avoid construction delays. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer/installer shall guarantee materials and w rkmanship of equipment installed under these specifications and make good, defects not due to ordinary wear or to improper use,ich may develd within 1 year after completion of installation or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever is earlier. 11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE 7 A. Escalators shall receive regular maintenance on eaph h unit for period of 1 months after completion of work specified herein or acceptance thereof by beneficial use, whichever isbarlier. B. Trained employees shall make periodic examinations and perform work in luding necessary adjusting, greasing, oiling, and replacing parts to keep escalators in operation, except part that require replacemen because of accidents, vandalism, misuse, or negligence by parties other than manufacturerlinstaller. C. Man ufacturerlinstaller shall perform all Work, except emergency minor adius ment call-back service, during regular working hours. Man ufacturerlinstaller shall provide emergency *nor adjustment call-back s rvice, 24 hours 7 days a week. D. Should Owner request that examinations, clea ing, lubrication, adjustments, r pairs, replacements, or emergency minor adjustment call-back service, unless specified herein, be erformed on other than manufa turer/installer's regular working hours of regular working days, manufacturerlinstaller shall ab orb straight -time labor charges a d Owner will compensate manufacturerlinstaller for overtime premium, travel time, and expense at normal billing rates. ART 2 - PRODUCTS .1 MANUFACTURER/INSTALLER A., Schindler Elevator Corporation, PO Box 35, Morristown, New Jersey 07962. Ph ne (973) 397-6500. Website www.us.schindier.com <hUp://www.us.sclindler.com>. B. Escalators shall be installed by escalato manufacturer. 2.2 ESCALATOR SYSTEM AND COMPONENT A. Escalators: Model 9300 AE. B. Escalator Equipment Summary: 1. Quantity:2 2. Application: Indoor 3. Vertical Rise: 16 Feet 0 Inc es 4. Escalator Width: 48 in (I 200 m) 5. Step Width: 40 in (1000 m) 6. Step Run: Two flat ste s 7. Speed: 90 fpm 8. Floors Served: From: 1 T 2 9. Power Supply: 480 Volt , 3 Phase, 60 Hertz 10. Contract Maintenance: months with emergency callback service, 24 hours 7 days a eek C. Additional Features: Custom r Handrail Reset Switch, Endcap Deflector, Remote Monitoring apable D. Escalators: Cleat -step rever ible type, self-contained units, capable of operating under full-loa conditions in either direction, for ascending or descending passenger service on an incline of 30 degrees from horizontal, comp) a with all equipment. E. Exposed Metals: 1. Paint in accordance wit man ufacturedinstaller's standard methods. 2. Do not paint /te rro s metals; and finished, plated, and machined surfaces. F. Conduit, Duct, Wn Fittings Necessary for Proper Operation of Equipment: 1. Furnish and iin accordance with manufacturer/installer's standard methods. 2. Compliance:I/ FPA 70. G. Sound Level: Maof 58 dBA, measured 3 feet above comb plates. 2.3 TRUSS A. Structural Steel T 1. Designed antructed to safely carry entire load of escalator, including: a. All parts. b. Full capaad. c. Weight orior balustrade. d. Truss co.2. Weight of ExCovering Carried by Truss: Maximum of10 pounds per square foot. 3. Top End of Truss:Carry drive machine and controller. 4. Load -13 in Components of Structure: Composed of open steel shapes, as preventative against hidd corrosion damage. 5. Truss Fact r of Safety: ANSI/ASME A17.1 and other codes having jurisdiction. 6. Construct d to Withstand Maximum Deflection: 1/1000 per unit length. B. Coating: Co truss with anti -corrosive primer. C. Supports: 1. Trusses- Include supports for truss cladding. 2. Allow c dding to be easily attached to truss exterior. 3. Desian a. Mnufacturer/installer's standard. b. C table of carrying a maximum load of 10 pounds per square foot. A. Ceiling Intersection Guards, if applicable: ANSI/ASME A17.1, Rule 802.3g. B. Anti -Slide Devices, if applicable: ANSI/ASME A17.1, Rule 802.3h. C. Deck Barriers, if applicable: ANSI/ASME A17.1, Rule 802.3i. V.Primary Brake: 1. Provide approximately 2/3 greater braking horsepower in "down" direction. 2. Primary Brake Working in Conjunction with Motor Fly Wheel: Provide smooth stop in both directions of travel, regardless -f load. Stop escalator whenever power is interrupted from any cause or by any of the safety devices. Hold escalator stationary under full -load condition. E. S condary Brake: 1. rovided integral with main step -chain sprocket assembly. chains rocket assembly. 2. rranged to operate should drive unit become disconnected from main step- p y F. Emer ency Red Stop Button: 1. Vist ly located at top and bottom landings, on right side, facing escalator. 2. Ope @@tion of Either Button: Stop escalator. 3. Buttori : Covered with transparent cover that can be readily lifted or pushed aside. 4. Activat�audible warning signal when cover is moved. 5. Sound In ensity of Signal: 80 dBA minimum, at button location. 6. Size, Loc ion, Notices, and Installation: ANSI/ASME A17.1. G. Key -Operated witch: In right-hand inner deck to shut down escalator at close of business or other appropri to times. H. Speed Monitor: 1. Speed monito with anti -reversal device. 2. Electronic Date tor: Constantly monitors escalator speed. 3. If escalator spee, drops to 50 percent of nominal speed or exceeds nominal speed by 20 percent, a stop shall be initiated. I. Broken Step -Chain D vice: 1. Electric contacts. 7 2. Cause brake to be a plied, should either or both of step chains break or should tension on chai s drop below or exceed predetermined value. J. Broken Main -Drive -Chain fety Device: 1. Electric contacts. 2. Cause secondary brake t be applied, should main drive chain slacken or break. K. Stop Switches: Located in upp r and lower machine spaces for use by service personnel du ing maintenance. L. Skirt Panel Electric Switches: 1. Skirt Panels at Upper and Lo er Sections of Escalator: Equipped with electrical switc, es. 2. Switches sense object being wdged between skirt panel and adjacent step. 3. Resulting Deflection of Skirt Pei 1: Activate electrical switch and cause escalator t stop. 4. Located to ensure escalator stopping before wedged object reaches comb. M. Green Step Demarcation Lights: \ 1. Provided at lower and upper ends, r mediately outboard of comb plate. 2. Minimum of 2 fluorescent fixtures, located within step loop, to define periphery f step. 3. Mounted perpendicular to escalator tra el, providing strobe effect. N. Step -Upthrust Device: 1. Provided in lower transition radius. 2. Detect upward step displacement, should i occur as steps travel through ower transition radius. 3. Bring escalator to smooth stop, if activated. 0. Handrail Speed Monitor/Stopped Handrail Device. 1. Ensure synchronous speed with step speed. 2. Sound emergency alarm if deviation greater tha 20 percent or less han 50 percent. 3. Alarm: a. Controlled by adjustable timer. b. Continue to sound for a maximum of 15 second c. Cause escalator to come to smooth stop. \ . P. Handrail Entry Device: 1. Newel Base Where Handrail Enters Escalator: Equippe w h handrail entry device to free objects in danger of becoming wedged between handrail and entry point. 2. Safety Switch: Cause escalator to come to smooth stop, en activated. Q. Step -Level Devices: / 1. Located at top and bottom of escalator. 2. Detect downward displacement of 118 inch or greate�t riser e d of step. 3. Cause escalator to stop before detected step enter comb, whe downward displacement detected. 4. Type: Manual reset. . R. Comb Plate Impact Devices: 1. Detect obstructions that wedge and press sever ly against comb pla e. 2. Cause escalator to come to smooth stop, whe devices activated. S. Escalator Electrical Starting Circuits: Prevent sta ing circuit and safety cir it from being energized at same time. T. Two flat steps: Entrance and exit ends of escal tor. . U. Missing Step Device: 1, Detect missing step. 2. Bring escalator to stop before gap resul ' g from missing step emerges from comb. V. Electrical Contact: 1. Sense phase failure or phase reverse and bring escalator to smooth stop. 2. Prevent escalator from being started/under prevailing conditions. W. Counter Tracks (Catching Arms): \ 1. Located at lower end of escalator , 2. Retain step chain in case of bre age. X. Turnaround Guards and Sheet Me al Aprons: Located at each end of escalator to preve accidental contact by service technicians with rotating equipment. Y. Smoke Sensors: 1. Not required. ART 3 - EXECUTION \ .1 EXAMINATION \ A. Examine wellway openings, pits, and structural support points before starting escalator installation. B. Verify wellway openingss{ pits, and structural support points are of correct size, within tolerances, an are ready for work of this section C. Notify Architect in writip'g of dimensional discrepancies or other conditions detrimental to proper insta I�tion or performance of escalators. // ' D. Do not proceed with/escalator installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a mannr acceptable to Architect, n .2 INSTALLATION \\\ A. Install escalators jaccordance with manufacturedinstaller's instructions and ANSI/ASME A17.1. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY/'CONTROL A. Perform tests of escalators as required by ANSI/ASME A17.1 and governing codes. �\ 3.4 ADJUSTING / \ A. Adjust escalators for proper operation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. B. Repair minor damages to finish in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions and as approved by Architect. C. Remove ltd replace damaged components that cannot be successfully repaired as determined by Architect. � .5 CLEANING / \ A. Clean escalators promptly after installation in accordance with manufacturer/installer's instructions. B. Do not use harsh cleaning materials or methods that could damage finish. \ A. Pr feot installed escalators frum dainayC dwing construction. n. OWNEJTRAINING AND MECHANIC STANDBY A. wrier Training: Provide qualified personnel and relevant training materials to facilitate the training of store facility ma /personnel. Provide basic instructions on operational features including control functions, safety features, error code d / reset procedures and what to look for prior to calling for service. Mechanic Standby: Provide standby mechanic for two (2) Grand Opening days, 10 am to 10 pm Friday and Saturday. NI7 O/l3. F SECTION 14300 REQUIRED SUBMITTAL SUMMARY 03300 - Concrete: A. Product Data: 1. Reinforcement and Forming Accessories. 2. Admixtures. 3. Aggregate Sizes and Usage (for each class of concrete). 4. Curing Compounds. 5. Quality Control Submittals: B. Design Data: Submit concrete mix design for each type of concrete. 08952 - Fiberglass -Sandwich -Panel Assemblies A. Shop Drawings: For panel assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 10155 -Toilet Compartments A. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 11 161 - Air Powered Dock Leveler A. Product Data: Submit product data for dock leveler equipment. B. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating fab6cation and erection of dock levelers including plans, elevations and large-scale details. 1. Show anchorage, pit sizes, critical installation clearances, connections, and accessory items. 2. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored to permanent construction. C. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports showing compliance of dock leveler for indicated capacity. D. Manufacturer's instructions. E. Maintenance data. F. Warranty: Specified warranty. 11162 - Stationary Dock Lift (Scissors Lift) A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01330. B. Product Data: Submit product data for dock equipment. C. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings indicating fabrication and erection of dock equipment including plans, elevations and large-scale details. D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance and service data, including, address and telephone number of nearest authorized service representative. E. Operating Manuals: Furnish operating and maintenance manuals and advise Owner on use and maintenance of equipment. 11164 - Dock Seals & Shelter A. Manufacturers Installation Instructions. B. Dimensional drawing. C. Specification sheet. 14240 - Hydraulic Elevators A. Shop Drawings: After structural and architectural drawings are furnished, submit complete working drawings, showing the location of all elevator to the owner. equipment, loads, and all other information necessary to render a totally functional e I B. Samples: Provide finish color selection brochures. C. Schematics: Provide wiring diagrams at time of final acceptance. D. Maintenance Manuals: Provide Renewal Parts Catalogs and Maintenance Instructions as well as two sets of equipment keys at time of final acceptance. 14245 - Hydraulic ht Elevators Freight A. Shop Drawings: After structural and architectural drawings are furnished, submit complete working drawings, showing the location of all equipment, loads, and all other information necessary to render a totally functional elevator to the owner. B. Product Data: Provide cab, entrance and fixture drawings. C. Schematics: Provide wiring diagrams. D. Owner's Manuals: Provide renewal parts data. 14300 - Escalators A. Product Data: Submit manufacturerlinstaller's product data, including: 1. Descriptive brochures or detail drawings of escalators, including product features. 2. Power Information: Separate data sheets for horsepower, starting current, running current, machine and control heat release, and electrical requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturerfinstaller's shop drawings, including plans, elevations, sections, and details, indicating location of equipment, loads, dimensions, tolerances, materials, components, fabrication, fasteners, hardware, finish, options, accessories, and other information to render totally functional escalators. .C. Samples: Submit manufacturer/installer's samples of standard colors and finishes of finish materials. D. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Submit manufacturer/installer's operation and maintenance manual; including operation, maintenance, adjustment, and cleaning instructions; trouble shooting guide; renewal parts catalogs; and electrical wiring diagrams. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturerfinstaller's standard warranty. It -� 1.. �,11 i \r I ��r :,�` `' 0 i 2016 City o$` Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUK.'ILA JAN 13 2016 Irl - JN pp _2 5! _J J 0 L =) E � (n 0 9 U -0 (n co � ^. Q U)��'tM O O>Q>Nd7 ry tt N C0) U a) .Q> QQ T(4(fl U) >>co+ 00 >� �NN.� -) U-5 to 0_,-._ N NP 9 pp _2 5! 4n U t 9 $ _ k X ^. Q DATE REVISION 01-11-16 1 PERMIT SET A7.5 2015-29-00 Q C/) �3:O O fy ry `C U � Q Q Z 0 W 0� U �_UW000 0 L.t_ Z CO OWWrn 00 0 U Q Of � Q n O co �- � v OQO<C � Z 3 J J V = -1 0c0 � Q � Q m CL r DATE REVISION 01-11-16 1 PERMIT SET A7.5 2015-29-00 im DOOR LINTEL DETAIL - SK -01 SCALE: NONE 5116"'x4"' 81' Cyt ... d {E} Flu PE.1 PL ! �J�.rrrrr.rrrrrrrs DIAMETER (36KS1) THREADED x , ROD WT HILTI HY 200 X i t , a- TUBE STEEL COLUMN DETAILS - SK -02 SCALE: NONE TUBE STEEL COLUMN DETAIL - SK -03 SCALE: NONE DOOR LINTEL DETAIL - SK -04 SCALE: NONE 11 : iii1wM1 ! % 11 LOil ►►' TYP 3/16 3/16„ L4x4x1/4 (A36) CENTERED TYP EACH SIDE TYP 3/16" TY 0 (E) GLB Beam (E) Beam Splice 3/16"X8" X 7'-0"SIDE PLATE (A36) WITH 1" DIA. BOLTS (36KSI) (USE EXSTING HOLES) 3/4"x7.625x5'-O" Seat Plate d 1 �1 HSS PER PLAN RESESSED 1 /2"x1 OX10 PLATE (A36) W/ (4) 1/2" KWIK BOLT TZ W1 3-1/4" EMBED, 1.5" EDGE DIST DOTING TUBE STEEL COLUMN - BEAM CONNECTION DETAIL SK -05 SCALE: NONE SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION (PER IBC 1705.3 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION (PER IBC 1705.4 Frequency J � Verification and Inspection J N Reference - rn �= L E (D Continuous Periodic U 1. INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL, INCLUDING PRESTRESSING X X IBC 1910.4 TENDONS, AND PLACEMENT M ACI 318: GROUT. U NQ N 3.5, 7.1-7.7 2. INSPECTION OF REINFORCING STEEL WELDING IN ACCORDANCE CU X AWS D1.4 WITH TABLE 1705.2.2, ITEM 2b CU .� ") Lo Cp Q v-- ACI 318: 3.5.2 3. INSPECTION OF ANCHORS CAST IN CONCRETE X ACI 318: D.9.2 4. INSPECTION OF ANCHORS POST -INSTALLED IN HARDENED 1.5 CONCRETE MEMBERS: a. ADHESIVE ANCHORS INSTALLED IN HORIZONTALLY OR X ACI 318: D9.2.4 UPWARDLY INCLINED ORIENTATIONS TO RESIST SUSTAIN X TMS 602: TENSION LOADS 2.4, 3.4 2.1, 2.6A b. MECHANICAL ANCHORS AND ADHESIVE ANCHORS NOT X ACI 318: D9.2 DEFINED IN 4a 3.313 5. VERIFYING USE OF REQUIRED DESIGN MIX X IBC 1904.2, ANCHORAGES PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES 1910.2, 1910.3 d. LOCATION OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS, AND X ACI 318: PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES Ch.4, 5.2-5.4 6. AT THE TIME FRESH CONCRETE IS SAMPLED TO FABRICATE X X IBC 1910.10 SPECIMENS FOR STRENGTH TESTS, PERFORM SLUMP AND AIR ACI 318: 5.6, 5.8 CONTENTTESTS, AND DETERMINE THE TEMPERATURE OF THE ASTM C172, C31 CONCRETE X 3.2E, 3.4, 3.6A SEATTLE DPD AFTER THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET X DR 20-2006 7. INSPECTION OF CONCRETE AND SHOTCRETE PLACEMENT FOR X IBC 1910.6-8 PROPER APPLICATION TECHNIQUES ACI 318: GROUT FOR BONDED TENDONS 5.9, 5.10 8. INSPECTION FOR MAINTENANCE OF SPECIFIED CURING X IBC 1910.9 TEMPERATURE AND TECHNIQUES ACI 318: e. CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS 5.11-5.13 9. INSPECTION OF PRESTRESSED CONCRETE a. APPLICATION OF PRESTRESSING FORCES X ACI 318:18.20 b. GROUTING OF BONDED PRESTRESSING TENDONS IN THE X 3.36 ACI 318:18.18.4 SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM UNBONDED PRESTRESSING TENDON FINISHING X ACE 301: 9.3.3 10. ERECTION OF PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS X ACI 318: Ch.16 11 VERIFICATION OF IN-SITU CONCRETE STRENGTH, PRIOR TO X ACI 318: 6.2 STRESSING OF TENDONS IN POST -TENSIONED CONCRETE AND PRIOR TO REMOVAL OF SHORES AND FORMS FROM BEAMS AND 3.3F STRUCTURAL SLABS 12. INSPECT FORMWORK FOR SHAPE, LOCATION AND DIMENSIONS OF X ACI 318:6.1.1 THE CONCRETE BEING FORMED INSPECTION OF MECHANICAL SPLICING OF REINFORCING BARS X DETAILS OF ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL ICC REPORT 1.16.4.3, 1.17.1 FOR SPECIFIED PRODUCT INSPECTION OF ADHESIVE ANCHOR INSTALLATIONS AND X ICC REPORT POST -INSTALLED MECHANICAL ANCHOR INSTALLATIONS FOR SPECIFIED c. WELDING OF REINFORCEMENT PRODUCT SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF STRUCTURAL STEEL CONSTRUCTION Frequency Verification and Inspection Reference Continuous Periodic 2.1.7.7.2, INSPECTION OF FABRICATOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PROCEDURES IBC 1704.2.5 MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL X AISC 630-N.5.2 INSPECTION OF WELDING STRUCTURAL STEEL: 3.3.3.4(c) COMPLETE AND PARTIAL -PENETRATION GROOVE WELDS X MULTI -PASS FILLET WELDS X 8.3.3.4(b) SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS > 5/16" X AISC 360-N.5.4 AISC 360-N.5.5 SINGLE -PASS FILLET WELDS:5 5/16" d. PREPARATION, CONSTRUCTION, AND PROTECTION OF X AWS D1.1 WELDED STUDS WHEN USED FOR TMS 602: X STRUCTURAL DIAPHRAGMS MASONRY DURING COLD WEATHER (TEMPERATURE BELOW STAIR AND RAILING SYSTEM WELDS X 1.8C, 1.81) INSPECTION OF HIGH-STRENGTH BOLTING AISC 360-N.5.6 INSPECTION OF STEEL FRAME DETAILS FOR COMPLIANCE WITH 40°F) OR HOT WEATHER (TEMPERATURE ABOVE 90°F) X AISC 360-N.5.7 APPROVED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, INCLUDING MEMBER LOCATIONS, BRACING AND STIFFENING, AND APPLICATION OF e. APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING FORCE APPROVED JOINT DETAILS X TMS 602: INSPECTION OF COMPOSITE CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING 0 AISC 360-N.6 PLACEMENT OF STEEL DECK AND STEEL HEADED STUD ANCHORS AWS D1.3 SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION OTHER THAN STRUCTURAL STEEL (PER IBC 1705.2) Frequency Verification and Inspection Reference X Continuous Periodic I' 1. MATERIAL VERIFICATION OF COLD -FORMED STEEL DECK: Q a. IDENTIFICATION OF MARKINGS TO CONFORM TO X APPLICABLE ASTM STANDARDS SPECIFIED IN THE APPROVED �, ASTM MATERIAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS BONDED TENDONS IS IN COMPLIANCE STANDARDS b. MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFIED TEST REPORTS 3.5, 3.6C X 2. INSPECTION OF WELDING -a. COLD -FORMED STEEL DECK: 1) FLOOR AND ROOF DECK WELDS X AWS D1.3 b. REINFORCING STEEL: g. PLACEMENT OF AAC MASONRY UNITS AND CONSTRUCTION 1) VERIFICATION OF WELDABILITY OF REINFORCING STEEL X LL OTHER THAN ASTM A706 OF THIN -BED MORTAR JOINTS: 2) REINFORCING STEEL RESISTING FLEXURALAND AXIAL X FORCES IN INTERMEDIATE AND SPECIAL MOMENT W AWS D1.4 FRAMES, AND BOUNDARY ELEMENTS OF SPECIAL FOR THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET ACI 318: 3.5.2 STRUCTURAL WALLS OF CONCRETE AND SHEAR TMS 602: J REINFORCEMENT. ap AFTER THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET 3) SHEAR REINFORCEMENT X X 3.3138 4) OTHER REINFORCING STEEL O X Z SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF MASONRY CONSTRUCTION (PER IBC 1705.4 3. PRIOR TO GROUTING, VERIFY THAT THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE: UN Frequency J � Verification and Inspection J N Reference - rn �= L E (D Continuous Periodic U VERIFICATION OF SLUMP FLOW AND VISUAL STABILITY INDEX (VSI) X C TMS 602: AS DELIVERED TO THE PROJECT SITE FOR SELF -CONSOLIDATING M TB4, 1.5B.1.b.3 GROUT. U NQ N Cis VERIFICATION OF fm AND Paw PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION, EXCEPT CU X TMS 602: WHERE SPECIFICALLY EXEMPTED BY THE CODE. CU .� ") Lo Cp Q v-- TB4, 1.413 1. VERIFY COMPLIANCE WITH THE APPROVED SUBMITTALS X TMS 602: 1.5 2. AS MASONRY CONSTRUCTION BEGINS, VERIFY THAT THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE: a. PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED MORTAR X TMS 602: 2.4, 3.4 2.1, 2.6A b. CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS X TMS 602: c. PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS, AND 3.313 c. GRADE AND SIZE OF PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND X TMS 602: ANCHORAGES PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES 2.413, 2.4H d. LOCATION OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS, AND X TMS 602: PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES 3.4, 3.6A e. PRESTRESSING TECHNIQUE X TMS 602: TMS 602: 3.66 f. PROPERTIES OF THIN -BED MORTAR FOR AAC MASONRY: FOR THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET X 3.2E, 3.4, 3.6A TMS 602: AFTER THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET X 2.1C 3. PRIOR TO GROUTING, VERIFY THAT THE FOLLOWING ARE IN COMPLIANCE: UN J � X J N - rn �= L E (D o U D- O CU C O M u�i�codN- CV LO U NQ N Cis U EL N ( CU C'4 <t`t �cOco Ch U, CO C:) CD N M CSI CSICO CU .� ") Lo Cp Q v-- CO a. GROUT SPACE X TMS 602: 3.2D, 3.2F b. GRADE, TYPE, AND SIZE OF REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHOR X TMS 402: BOLTS, AND PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES 1.16 TMS 602: 2.4, 3.4 c. PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT, CONNECTORS, AND X TMS 402: PRESTRESSING TENDONS AND ANCHORAGES 1.16 TMS 602: 3.2E, 3.4, 3.6A d. PROPORTIONS OF SITE -PREPARED GROUT AND PRESTRESSING X TMS 602: GROUT FOR BONDED TENDONS 2.613, 2.4G.1.b e. CONSTRUCTION OF MORTAR JOINTS X TMS 602: 3.36 4. VERIFY DURING CONSTRUCTION: a. SIZE AND LOCATION OF STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS X TMS 602: 3.3F b. TYPE, SIZE AND LOCATION OF ANCHORS, INCLUDING OTHER X TMS 402: DETAILS OF ANCHORAGE OF MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL 1.16.4.3, 1.17.1 MEMBERS, FRAMES, OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION c. WELDING OF REINFORCEMENT X TMS 402: 2.1.7.7.2, 3.3.3.4(c) 8.3.3.4(b) d. PREPARATION, CONSTRUCTION, AND PROTECTION OF X TMS 602: MASONRY DURING COLD WEATHER (TEMPERATURE BELOW 1.8C, 1.81) 40°F) OR HOT WEATHER (TEMPERATURE ABOVE 90°F) e. APPLICATION AND MEASUREMENT OF PRESTRESSING FORCE X TMS 602: 0 A3.613 f. PLACEMENT OF GROUT AND PRESTRESSING GROUT FOR X TMS 602: I' W Q �, BONDED TENDONS IS IN COMPLIANCE 3.5, 3.6C Z g. PLACEMENT OF AAC MASONRY UNITS AND CONSTRUCTION LL OF THIN -BED MORTAR JOINTS: C) W W 00 FOR THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET X TMS 602: J U ap AFTER THE FIRST 5,000 SQUARE FEET X 3.3138 O 0L Z 00 5 OBSERVE PREPARATION OF GROUT SPECIMENS, MORTAR X TMS 602: LU U tC) �✓ SPECIMENS, AND/OR PRISMS 1.4B.2.a.3, 0 1.4B.2.b3, Z Z 1.46.2.c3, -� 0 ��^ v) F- 1.46.3, 1.46.4 (D 0 z J SPECIAL INSPECTIONS OF WOOD CONSTRUCTION U J � Frequency � 0 Verification and Inspection Reference �y u - Continuous Periodic U) Co 0- r (- MOISTURE CONTENT OF WOOD -FRAMED CONSTRUCTION AT TIME X REFER TO OF COVER GENERAL NOTES DATE REVISION 02-05-16 BID SET NAILING, BOLTING, ANCHORING AND OTHER FASTENING OF 03-01-16 REVISION Qi COMPONENTS (SPACED 4" OC OR CLOSER) WITHIN THE SEISMIC FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM, INCLUDING DRAG STRUTS, BRACES, X 1705.11.2 HOLDOWNS, SHEAR WALLS, FLOOR AND ROOF BLOCKING, AND DIAPHRAGMS FIELD GLUING OPERATIONS OF ELEMENTS WITHIN THE SEISMIC, X 1705.11.2 FORCE RESISTING SYSTEM REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED MAR 0 8 2016 City of 1 ulvvila BUILDING DIVISION